MoriSeikiSLSeriesProgrammingManual2008PMNLTMSC518I1ENL12002H02 PDF

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Applicable Model
SL-150, 150MC, 150Y
SL-150S, 150SMC, 150SY
SL-200, 200MC
SL-200S, 200SMC
SL-250, 250MC
SL-250S, 250SMC
SL-303, 303MC, 303Y
SL-400, 400MC
SL-600, 600MC
SL-25E
SL-65, 65MC
SL-75, 75MC
TL-40, 40MC, 40Y
VL-25
VL-55, 55MC
LL-7, 8
CL1500, 1500T
CL2000, 2000T
Applicable NC Unit
MSC-500 MSD-501
MSC-501 MSD-518
MSC-518 MSD-501II
MSG-501 MSD-518II
Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the

manuals supplied by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer, and equipment
manufacturers so that you fully understand the information they contain.
Keep the manuals carefully so that they will not be lost.
PM-NLTMSC518-I1EN
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice due to
improvements to the machine or in order to improve the manual.
Consequently, please bear in mind that there may be slight discrepancies
between the contents of the manual and the actual machine. Changes to
the instruction manual are made in revised editions which are
distinguished from each other by updating the instruction manual number.
• Should you discover any discrepancies between the contents of the
manual and the actual machine, or if any part of the manual is unclear,
please contact Mori Seiki and clarify these points before using the
machine. Mori Seiki will not be liable for any damages occurring as a
direct or indirect consequence of using the machine without clarifying
these points.
• All rights reserved: reproduction of this instruction manual in any form, in
whole or in part, is not permitted without the written consent of Mori Seiki.
The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

equipment) has been manufactured in accordance with the laws
and standards that prevail in the relevant country or region.
Consequently it cannot be exported, sold, or relocated, to a
destination in a country with different laws or standards.
The export of this product is subject to an authorization from the
government of the exporting country.
Check with the government agency for authorization.
Copyright  2008 MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

990730
CONTENTS
SIGNAL WORD DEFINITION
FOR SAFE OPERATION
FOREWORD
BEFORE READING THIS PROGRAMMING
MANUAL
A: BEFORE PROGRAMMING
B: G FUNCTIONS
C: M FUNCTIONS
D: T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
E: AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS
OFFSET
F: MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
G : CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
H: MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
I: HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
J: TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B
FUNCTION (OPTION)
K: EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
APPENDIX
INDEX
SIGNAL WORD DEFINITION
A variety of symbols are used to indicate different types of warning information and advice.
Learn the meanings of these symbols and carefully read the explanation to ensure safe
operation while using this manual.
<Symbols related with warning>
The warning information is classified into three categories, DANGER, WARNING, and
CAUTION.
The following symbols are used to indicate the level of danger.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.
The information described in the DANGER frame must be strictly
observed.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.
The information described in the WARNING frame must be strictly
observed.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

minor or moderate injury damages to the machine.
The information described following the caution symbol must be strictly
observed.
<Other symbols>
COMMAND
The format identified by this symbol gives information for programming.
Indicates the items that must be taken into consideration.
Indicates useful guidance relating to operations.
Indicates the page number or manual to be referred to.

The number in ( ) indicates the section number.
Indicates the procedure used for displaying the required screen.
Indicates the example of operations.

FOR SAFE OPERATION -1-
FOR SAFE OPERATION
This machine is intended for use by persons who have a basic knowledge of machine tools,
including cutting theory, tooling and fixtures. Mori Seiki cannot accept responsibility for accidents
that occur as a result of operation or maintenance of the machine by personnel who lack this basic
knowledge or sufficient training.
Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users. Mori Seiki cannot predict the
chucking pressure, spindle speed, feedrate, depth of cut, etc., that will be required in each case
and it is therefore the user's responsibility to determine the appropriate settings.
Each machine is shipped with a variety of built-in safety devices. However, careless handling of
the machine can cause serious accidents. To prevent the occurrence of such accidents, all
programmers and other personnel that deal with the machine must carefully read the manuals
supplied by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer, and equipment manufacturers, before
attempting to operate, maintain, or program the machine.
Because there are so many "things that cannot be done" and "things that must not be done" when
using the machine, it is impossible to cover all of them in the Instruction Manual. Assume that
something is impossible unless the manual specifically states that it can be done.
The following manuals are supplied with your NC lathe:
I. Safety Guidelines prepared by Mori Seiki
II. Instruction Manual prepared by Mori Seiki
• MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• OPERATION MANUAL
• PROGRAMMING MANUAL
III. NC unit Operation and Maintenance Manuals prepared by the NC unit manufacturer
IV. Instruction Manuals prepared by equipment manufacturers
In addition to these manuals, ladder diagrams, parameter tables and electrical circuit diagrams are
also supplied with the machine to help with electrical maintenance. The ladder diagrams are
provided in the document box, parameter tables and electrical circuit diagrams are stored in the
document compartment inside the electrical cabinet. Please make use of these materials when
carrying out maintenance work.
Fundamental safety information is presented in the following pages.
All cautions on operation must be strictly observed when operating the machine, carrying out
maintenance work, or writing programs. Failure to observe fundamental safety information can
cause accidents in which the operator or other personnel working near the machine are seriously
injured, or the machine is damaged. All personnel that deal with the machine must carefully read
and thoroughly understand the information in the following pages before attempting programming
or operating the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
-2- FOR SAFE OPERATION
The vocabulary and terms used for machine parts and operations in the warnings, cautions and
notes are defined or explained in the manual texts and illustrations.
If you are unsure of the meaning of any word or expression, please refer to the corresponding
textual explanation or illustration. If you still cannot understand or are unsure of the meaning,
contact Mori Seiki for clarification.
"Operator", as used in these cautions, means not only the operator who operates or supervises a
machine tool to perform machining, but also any person, including maintenance personnel who
maintain and inspect a machine tool or safety device or safety measures provided with it, and the
programmers who create programs used for machining, who are engaged in operations which
deal with a machine tool.
Therefore, all persons engaged in these operations must carefully read these cautions and related
materials, and thoroughly understand the contents before attempting to operate the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
1 CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE
The cautions that must constantly be born in mind when operating the machine are listed
below.
Listed below are important cautions that apply to all machine-related work (machine
operation, maintenance, inspection, programming, etc.).
DANGER 1. Never touch a switch, button, or key with wet hands.

If it is not properly grounded or is leaking current, you could receive
an electric shock.
2. Before starting machine operation, check that there is nobody inside
the protective cover or close to rotating or moving parts of the
machine. Never touch or stand near the rotating or moving parts of
the machine while it is operating; you could be seriously injured by
being entangled in the rotating parts or crushed by the moving parts.
3. Never operate the machine with the protective cover removed or
while interlocks or other safety devices are ineffective, since the
machine could operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents
involving serious injuries.
Contact Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer or relevant equipment
manufacturers immediately if the protective cover or safety devices
are damaged.
4. Always lock out the power to the machine before carrying out work
inside the machine – such as setup work or cleaning the inside of the
machine – and before carrying out inspections, repairs, or
maintenance work. In addition, set the main switch to the OFF
position and lock it, and place "PERSONNEL INSIDE MACHINE" or
"UNDER MAINTENANCE" signs around the machine to stop anyone
from switching on the power or operating the machine while the
work is in progress. If work inside the machine or inspection or
maintenance work is carried out with the power switched on,
machine elements could be moved, and the personnel carrying out
the work could be seriously injured by being entangled in the
rotating parts or crushed by the moving parts of the machine.
5. Always switch off the power before carrying out inspection or
maintenance work in the electrical cabinet or on motors and
transformers. If work has to be done while the power is switched on,
it must be carried out by a qualified electrical engineer, taking the
proper precautions; there is a danger of electric shock.
6. Cover power supply cables that are run along the floor with rigid
insulated plates to prevent them from being damaged. Damage to
the insulation of the power supply cable could cause electric shocks.
SO-NL-B16E/P
DANGER 7. Even after the power is turned off, some devices will remain charged
and the temperature of motors, lights inside the machine, etc., will
remain high. Make sure that the charge has been discharged or the
temperature has fallen before carrying out maintenance work or
inspections on these devices. If you touch these devices/units
carelessly while they are still charged or while the temperature is still
high you could receive an electric shock or be burned.
8. Check that all cables are properly insulated before using the
machine. There is considerable danger of electric shock if damaged
cables are used.
WARNING 1. Keep the floor area around the machine tidy and clean; do not leave
things lying on it, and clean up spilled water or oil immediately. If
you fail to do this, plant personnel may injure themselves by tripping
over or slipping on the floor.
2. Before operating the machine, check the area where you will have to
stand and walk to make sure you can operate the machine safely. If
you do not check your footing beforehand, you could loose your
balance while working and injure yourself by putting your hands in a
dangerous place while trying to find support, or by falling over.
3. Before using a switch, button, or key, check visually that it is the one
you intend to use, and then press or set it decisively. Pressing the
wrong switch, button, or key by mistake can cause accidents
involving serious injuries or damage to the machine.
4. Keep the doors closed during machine operation. Leaving the
machine running or operating it with doors open could cause
accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the machine; plant
personnel could be seriously injured by being entangled in the
rotating parts of the machine, crushed by its moving parts, struck by
broken tools, workpieces or jaws flying out of the machine, hit by
flying chips, or splashed with coolant.
5. The parameters are set on shipment in accordance with the machine
specifications; do not change them without first consulting Mori
Seiki. If the parameters are changed without consultation, the
machine may operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 6. The machine specifications are set before shipping so that the
machine can deliver its full performance. If the specifications and/or
settings have to be changed or the machine has to be modified to
meet new machining requirements or due to changes in the
operating conditions, consult Mori Seiki. Changing the settings
without consultation may lead to accidents involving serious
injuries, impaired machine performance, and considerable
shortening of the machine service life.
7. Before operating or programming the machine, or performing
maintenance work, carefully read the instruction manuals provided
by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer and the equipment
manufacturers so that you fully understand the information they
contain. Keep these instruction manuals safely so that you do not
lose them. If you do lose an instruction manual, contact Mori Seiki,
the NC unit manufacturer, or the relevant equipment manufacturer. If
you attempt to operate the machine without having carefully read the
instruction manuals first, you will perform dangerous and erroneous
operations which may cause accidents involving serious injuries or
damage to the machine.
8. Always observe the instructions in the caution labels stuck to the
machine. Carefully read the Safety Guidelines supplied with the
machine so that you fully understand them. If the writing on the
labels becomes illegible, or if the labels are damaged or peel off,
contact Mori Seiki. Also contact Mori Seiki if you cannot understand
any of the labels. If you operate the machine without observing the
instructions on the labels, or without understanding them properly,
you will perform dangerous and erroneous operations which may
cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
9. Never operate, maintain, or program the machine while under the
influence of alcohol or drugs. Your concentration will be impaired,
you may loose your balance and fall against dangerous parts of the
machine, and you may operate the machine incorrectly, causing
accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the machine.
10. Machine operators and authorized personnel working inside the
plant and in the vicinity of the machine must put their clothing and
hair in order so that there is no danger they will be entangled in the
machine. If you have uncontrolled long hair or loose clothing and it
gets caught in the machine, you will be seriously injured by being
entangled in the rotating parts of the machine or crushed by its
moving parts. Always wear safety shoes, eye protectors and a
helmet.
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 11. The machine is equipped with interlock functions such as the door
interlock, chuck interlock, tailstock spindle interlock (applies only to
machines equipped with a tailstock) and electrical cabinet door
interlock to ensure the operator's safety. All the interlock functions
must be ON when operating the machine. If you have to operate the
machine with the interlocks released, you must recognize that there
are many hazards involved and pay particular attention to safety
while operating the machine in this condition. After finishing the
necessary work, you must switch the interlocks back ON.
If the machine is operated with the interlocks released, it may
operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents involving
serious injuries or damage to the machine.
12. The door interlock function serves only to protect the machine
operator from accidents that can be prevented by inhibiting manual
and automatic operation of the spindle, axis movement, and all other
operations in automatic operation when the door is opened and
while it is open; it will not afford protection against other hazards.
For example, each machine user will machine a variety of workpiece
types and use a variety of workpiece holding fixtures, cutting tools,
and cutting conditions; you are still responsible for ensuring safety
with regard to the hazards that can arise from these user-specific
conditions.
13. If the door interlock function is released, the machine is able to
operate with some limitations while the door is open, exposing you
to danger. In daily production operation, the door interlock function
must be set "valid" and the key operating the switch must be
removed from the switch and kept safely.
When shaping soft jaws, measuring the tool offset data, program
check, test cutting or carrying out other setup work, it may be
necessary to release the door interlock function. If you have to carry
out work while the interlock function is released, you must recognize
that there are many hazards involved and pay particular attention to
safety. While the door interlock function is released, the warning
lamp blinks in red and the warning buzzer beeps intermittently. You
must recognize that the door interlock function is in the released
state when the warning lamp is blinking in red and the warning
buzzer is beeping intermittently. After finishing the necessary work,
you must switch the interlock function back valid.
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 14. Before operating the machine, memorize the locations of the
emergency stop buttons so that you can press one immediately from
any location and at any time while operating the machine. The
emergency stop buttons are used to stop all operations in the event
of an emergency. If there is an obstacle in front of an emergency
stop button it will not be possible to press it immediately when an
emergency occurs and this could cause accidents involving serious
injuries or damage to the machine.
15. Always switch the tailstock spindle interlock function ON before
carrying out center-work operations. If this function is OFF, it will be
possible to start automatic operation when the tailstock spindle is
extended, even though it may not support the workpiece correctly. If
automatic operation is started in this condition, the workpiece will fly
out, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine. (Applies
only to machines equipped with a tailstock.)
16. Adjust the position of the tailstock body so that the workpiece is
securely held by the tailstock spindle center when the tailstock
spindle is extended.
After making this adjustment, clamp the tailstock body to the bed. If
the tailstock body is not clamped to the bed, or if the position of the
tailstock body is incorrectly adjusted, it will be possible to start
automatic operation when the tailstock spindle is extended, even if
the workpiece is not supported by the tailstock spindle center. If
machining is carried out while the workpiece is not supported by the
tailstock spindle center, the workpiece will fly out, causing serious
injuries or damage to the machine. (Applies only to machines
equipped with a tailstock.)
17. To prevent hazardous situations, the plant or equipment supervisor
must bar entry to the plant or the vicinity of the machine to anyone
with insufficient safety training. Allowing persons without sufficient
safety training unhindered into the plant and the vicinity of the
machine could cause accidents involving serious injuries.
18. Because of the inertia of the moving parts of the machine, they may
not be stopped immediately when the emergency stop button is
pressed. Always confirm that all operations have stopped before
going near these parts. If you approach the moving parts of the
machine without due care you may be entangled in them and
seriously injured.
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 19. Do not leave articles such as tools and rags inside the machine. If
the machine is operated with such articles inside it they may become
entangled with a tool and thrown out of the machine, and this could
cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
20. When the machine is running, operating noise may possibly be
produced, depending on the cutting conditions and other factors.
When an operator works near the machine, either change cutting
conditions to limit generation of noises or the operator must wear
protective gear, meeting the level of generated noise, which will not
cause inconvenience for performing intended work. Working under
noises might impair operator's health, such as hearing.
21. This is not the explosion-proof specification machine. Dangers such
as the ejection of a large workpiece or harmful dust or an explosion
caused by the machining of metals such as magnesium are not
preventable even if the door is closed. Do not rely on door and
protective devices alone. Recognition of the dangers involved in
machining procedures is required at all times.
22. This machine is equipped with a read-ahead function for the running
program, and retains the read-ahead program commands stored in
the NC memory during a temporary stop of automatic operation in
order to eliminate latency time when restarting. Therefore, check the
program commands or present positions of the axes when stopping
the machine temporarily. In cases such as when discontinuing the
machining, press the RESET
(RESET) key to clear the program
commands stored in the NC if necessary. Changing the program
start position after a temporary stop in particular may cause
accidents after the machining is restarted since the program
commands stored in the NC are activated. Pay extra attention to the
difference in the specifications in relation to other manufacturers'
machines because the read-ahead program data may be cleared at
temporary stops on these machines.
CAUTION 1. User programs stored in the memory, parameters set before shipping, and the
offset data input by the user, can be destroyed or lost due to incorrect operation
or other causes. To protect data against destruction and loss, back it up using an
external I/O device (option), or other device.
If you fail to make backup files, Mori Seiki cannot accept responsibility for any
problem resulting from destroyed programs or lost parameter data and/or offset
data.
Keep the parameter table supplied with the machine in a safe place. Note that if
the data is destroyed it will take some time to set the parameters again.
2. Never touch chips or the cutting edges of tools with your bare hands since you
may be injured.
SO-NL-B16E/P
CAUTION 3. Take care not to stumble over the footswitch since you may be injured.
4. If it becomes necessary to perform a memory clear operation, contact Mori Seiki
first. If a memory clear operation is performed without due care, the entire
memory contents may be deleted, making the machine inoperable.
5. The machine operator must have normal sensory perception. If a person who
has an abnormality affecting any sense operates the machine, he/she will not be
able to accurately confirm the machine status and surrounding conditions by eye/
ear/touch. Sensory confirmation is extremely important when operating the
machine and an inability to make such confirmations properly could cause
accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the machine.
6. Ensure that the workplace is adequately lit. If there is insufficient light, the
operator may trip over something or be unable to perform or check work
accurately, and this could cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to
the machine.
7. Remove any obstacles around the machine.
Secure adequate space around the machine for working and adequate
passageway, considering both ease of operation and safety. If there are any
obstacles or if there is insufficient space or passageway, the operator may trip
and fall or be unable to work properly, and this could cause accidents involving
8. Stack products (workpieces) stably. If they are not stacked stably they may fall
and injure the machine operator. Unstable stacking may also damage the
products (workpieces), causing defects.
9. Keep the area around the machine clean; remove chips and foreign matter near
the machine. If left, chips and foreign matter may cause plant personnel to fall
and injure themselves.
10. Use a working bench strong and stable enough to support the weight of the
workpieces and tools. If an unstable working bench is used the workpieces and
tools could fall off and injure the machine operator.
If a machine alarm or NC alarm occurs, check its meaning by referring to the alarm list in
NOTE
the instruction manual or ladder diagram, and take the appropriate action. If this is
ineffective, consult Mori Seiki or the NC unit manufacturer and take action only when you
understand clearly what to do.
SO-NL-B16E/P
2 SAFETY PRACTICES DURING PROGRAMMING
The safety practices that the programmer must observe while programming are presented below.
Read them before attempting programming.
Workpiece shapes and materials vary widely among machine users and, since the workpiece
holding fixtures, cutting tools, cutting methods, and machining conditions will also vary
accordingly, Mori Seiki cannot predict what factors will apply in individual cases. It is the machine
user's responsibility to take these factors into account when creating a program. It is also the
machine user's responsibility to ensure safety with respect to the hazards that may arise due to
these user-dependent factors.
WARNING 1. Specify a spindle speed limit that is lower than the lowest of the
individual allowable speed limits for the chuck, fixture, and cylinder.
If you do not follow this instruction, the workpiece could fly out of
the machine, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
2. Clamp workpieces and cutting tools securely. Determine the depth
of cut and cutting feedrate for test cutting with safe operation as the
first priority; do not give priority to productivity when making these
determinations. If you fail to observe this warning, the tool or
workpiece could fly out of the machine, causing serious injuries or
3. Always select the most appropriate cutting tool and holder for the
material and shape of the workpiece to be machined and cutting
method, and check that the workpiece can be machined without any
problems.
If an inappropriate cutting tool or holder is selected, the workpiece
could fly out of the chuck during machining, causing serious injuries
or damage to the machine. Machining accuracy will also be
adversely affected.
4. Before starting spindle rotation, check that the workpiece is securely
clamped. Or, if performing center-work, check that the tailstock
spindle center securely supports the workpiece. (Applies only to
machines equipped with a tailstock.)
If the workpiece is not securely clamped or supported, it will fly out
when the spindle is rotated, causing serious injuries or damage to
the machine.
5. Do not insert bar stock into the spindle while the spindle is rotating
or you will be entangled in the machine. The length of the bar stock
must be shorter than the spindle length unless a bar feeder is used.
If the bar stock protrudes from the spindle it will increase spindle
runout, and could bend, causing accidents involving serious injuries
or damage to the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 6. For the machine with the flat type operation panel, always place the
operation selection key-switch in the "operation enable" or
"operation disable" position after completing program entry. Be
aware that the program will be updated if program editing operations
are carried out with the operation selection key-switch at the
"operation and edit enable" position. If the program is executed after
being accidentally updated in this way the machine could operate
unexpectedly, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
7. For the machine with the discrete type operation panel, always place
the edit enable key-switch in the "edit disable" position after
completing program entry. Be aware that the program will be
updated if program editing operations are carried out with the edit
enable key-switch at the "edit enable" position. If the program is
executed after being accidentally updated in this way the machine
could operate unexpectedly, causing serious injuries or damage to
the machine.
8. For the machine with the touch panel, always return the WRITE
PROTECT switch (PROGRAM) back to ON after completing program
entry. Be aware that the program will be updated if program editing
operations are carried out with the WRITE PROTECT switch
(PROGRAM) set OFF. If the program is executed after being
accidentally updated in this way, the machine could operate
unexpectedly, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
9. Select the appropriate chucking pressure and tailstock spindle
thrust force (applies only to machines equipped with a tailstock) for
the workpiece shape and material, and the cutting conditions. If you
cannot determine the appropriate chucking pressure, contact the
chuck manufacturer or cylinder manufacturer. If you cannot
determine the appropriate spindle thrust force (applies only to
machines equipped with a tailstock), contact Mori Seiki. If the
chucking pressure or spindle thrust force (applies only to machines
equipped with a tailstock) is not set appropriately in accordance with
the shape and material of the workpiece being machined and the
cutting conditions, the workpiece could fly out during machining,
causing serious injuries or damage to the machine. Incorrect setting
could also distort the workpiece.
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 10. Give full consideration to the type of chuck and cylinder used when
setting the chucking pressure. Even if the same hydraulic pressure
is applied to the chuck, the chuck gripping force will vary according
to the manufacturer and type of chuck and cylinder.
For details on the chuck gripping force, consult the chuck and
cylinder manufacturers.
If the chuck gripping force is different from that intended, the
workpiece could fly out when the spindle is started, causing serious
11. Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users.
Mori Seiki cannot predict the workpiece clamping method, spindle
speed, feedrate, depth of cut, and width of cut, etc., that will be
required in each case and it is therefore the user's responsibility to
determine the appropriate settings.
Note also that the machining conditions determined in automatic
programming are the standard conditions, which are not necessarily
the most suitable for the user's purposes and may have to be
changed in accordance with the workpiece, chuck, etc. The
conditions determined in automatic programming are for reference
only and the final responsibility for determining the conditions rests
with the user. (Conversational NC specification)
If you have difficulty determining these conditions, consult the
chuck and cylinder manufacturers and tool manufacturer. Machining
under inappropriate machining conditions can cause the workpiece
to fly out of the chuck during machining, causing serious injuries or
damage to the machine. It will also adversely affect machining
accuracy.
12. While the machine is temporarily stopped during machining –for
example when checking a program, performing test cutting, or
cleaning chips out of the machine – do not feed the axes or index the
turret head in manual operation. Or, if it is absolutely necessary to
do so, be sure to return the axes and turret to their original positions
before restarting the program. If machining is restarted without
returning them to their original positions, the turret will move in
unexpected directions, causing collisions between the cutting tools,
holders, or turret head and the workpiece, chuck, or tailstock (if
featured), which could cause serious operator injuries or damage the
machine. The workpiece could also be machined with the wrong
tool, and the cutting tool could be damaged.
SO-NL-B16E/P
WARNING 13. If the program is input to the NC memory not by the programmer but
by a machine operator, the operator may misread the numerical
values and input incorrect values. This could cause accidents
involving serious injuries or damage to the machine: the workpiece
could fly out of the chuck during machining, and the cutting tool,
holder, or turret head, could interfere with the workpiece, chuck,
fixture, or tailstock (if featured). It could also cause the workpiece
being machined with the wrong tool, or cause damage to the cutting
tool.
14. If you forget to enter a decimal point in a program entry that requires
one and start the machine without noticing the error, the turret may
move to an unexpected position, causing, causing accidents
involving serious injuries or damage to the machine. Check that you
have entered decimal points where necessary.
15. Do not change the spindle gear range while a cutting load is applied.
The workpiece could fly out of the chuck, causing serious injuries or
damage to the machine and the cutting tool. In addition, excessive
loads will be applied to the machine motors and machine elements,
shortening their service lives. (Applies only to machines equipped
with a transmission.)
16. Before starting the spindle, carefully check the workpiece gripping
conditions and the machining conditions, including the chucking
pressure, spindle speed, cutting feedrate, and depth of cut. If you
start the spindle without adequate checking, the workpiece could fly
out of the chuck, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
17. The chuck gripping force may be reduced due to a malfunction of the
chuck or cylinder or a centrifugal force during high-speed spindle
rotation. If machining is performed without securing a sufficient
gripping force, the workpiece may fly out, causing serious injuries or
If the chuck gripping force is reduced due to deterioration over time
or damage from an accident or inadequate maintenance, contact
Mori Seiki Service Department.
To prevent the chuck gripping force from lowering, clean and grease
the chuck at regular intervals.
If the gripping force is reduced due to the centrifugal force applied to
the jaws during high-speed spindle rotation, readjust the cutting
conditions such as chucking pressure, cutting feedrate or cutting
amount. Refer to the manuals prepared by the chuck manufacturer
and the cylinder manufacturer.
SO-NL-B16E/P
CAUTION 1. Contact Mori Seiki when cutting cast iron, ceramics, or other materials which
generate powder-type chips in dry cutting. If chips are not dealt with in an
appropriate manner for the workpiece material, they can cause machine faults.
2. Before starting mass production, always check the program and perform test
cutting in the single block mode. If you fail to do this the workpiece could collide
with the cutting tool during machining, causing damage to the machine.
Machining defects could also be caused.
3. When shifting the coordinate system in order to check a center-work program, set
the shift direction and shift amount carefully to avoid interference between the
turret and tailstock, which could cause damage to the machine. (Applies only to
4. You will probably use a variety of workpiece shapes and materials, and the
chucking method will differ according to the workpiece type. Therefore, when
checking a program with the workpiece clamped in the chuck, check for
interference carefully, taking the workpiece shape and material, and the chuck
gripping force, into account. Depending on these factors, the cutting tool, holder,
or turret head might interfere with the workpiece, chuck, fixture, or tailstock (if
featured), causing damage to the machine.
5. When the emergency stop button or reset key has been pressed to stop the
machine during a threading operation or a hole machining operation, especially a
tapping operation, carefully feed the axes after checking the workpiece and
cutting tool carefully for damage. If you feed the axes without due care, the
workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each other, and this could
cause damage to the machine.
6. Do not discharge coolant while the spindle is not rotating.
In addition, take measures to ensure that coolant does not enter the spindle
bearings when it is discharged while the spindle is rotating. If coolant enters the
spindle bearings, the spindle will be damaged.
7. Support the workpiece securely before stepping on the chuck clamp/unclamp
footswitch to remove it. If you step on the footswitch without taking this
precaution the workpiece will fall and this could cause damage to the machine.
8. If abnormal vibration or chattering is generated during machining due to improper
combination among jig, cutting tool, workpiece material, etc., change the
machining conditions to proper values. If machining is continued forcibly under
the machining conditions with improper values, it will bring critical problems for
the machine and accuracy such that the bearings is damaged quickly and cutting
tool is worn excessively will take place.
9. If data is set for "COMMON" ("EXT" for MSC-**) on the WORK OFFSET screen
by specifying G10 or system variable commands, the workpiece zero point is
shifted in the same direction in all of the work coordinate systems, G54 - G59.
Careless data setting for COMMON of the WORK OFFSET screen causes the
tool or the turret to interfere with the chuck resulting in damage to the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
3 TO ENSURE HIGH ACCURACY
The accuracy of the finished product cannot be maintained unless the following points are
observed when operating the machine. Failure to observe these points can also cause serious
injuries and damage to the machine. Study these points carefully before operating the machine.
WARNING 1. Provide a chucking allowance that is large enough to ensure that the
workpiece will not come out of the chuck due to cutting forces or the
centrifugal force generated by spindle rotation. Depending on the
shape of the workpiece, it may need to be supported by the tailstock
(applies only to machines equipped with a tailstock). If the
workpiece flies out of the chuck during machining it could cause
2. Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users,
and Mori Seiki cannot predict the requirements for individual cases.
Give full consideration to the workpiece material and shape in order
to set the appropriate machining conditions. If inappropriate
settings are used, the workpiece and cutting tool could fly out during
machining, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
Inappropriate settings will also adversely affect machining accuracy.
3. When forged or cast workpieces are used, the cutting allowance with
respect to the finished dimensions varies greatly. Either write a
program which takes the variation into consideration or perform pre-
machining so that a uniform cutting allowance is left on the
workpiece. If this caution is not observed, the workpiece could fly
out during machining, causing serious injuries or damage to the
machine. In addition, an excessive load could be applied to the
cutting tool, breaking it.
CAUTION 1. When machining bar stock on a machine equipped with a bar feeder or spindle
through-hole, use straight workpieces only. When machining bar stock with a
diameter smaller than that of the spindle (or draw bar), always use guide bushes
in order to prevent vibration. If you use a bent workpiece or fail to use guide
bushes, the machine will vibrate and the workpiece will shake; this could cause
damage to the machine. It will also seriously affect machining accuracy.
2. When setting the tooling, refer to the turret interference diagram and axis travel
diagram in the maintenance manual (DRAWINGS or PARTS LIST l published
separately) so as to avoid interference. In the case of machines with two
spindles, also make sure there will be no interference during workpiece transfer.
Careless tooling will lead to interference between the tools and the workpiece,
chuck, chuck jaws, covers, tailstock (if featured) or headstock 2 (if featured),
which could cause damage to the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
1. When chucking or supporting a workpiece, take the rigidity of the workpiece into
NOTE
account when determining the chucking or supporting method and chucking
pressure or tailstock thrust force (if a tailstock is featured), so as not to distort the
workpiece. If the workpiece is distorted the machining accuracy will be adversely
affected.
2. If any chips become entangled with the workpiece or cutting tool, machining
accuracy will be adversely affected. Select a cutting tool and machining conditions
which do not cause entangling of chips.
SO-NL-B16E/P
4 CAUTIONS RELATING TO SPINDLE SPEED
The cautions that relate to spindle speed are given below. Observe these cautions during
programming.
WARNING 1. The spindle speed limit set using G50 must be no higher than the
lowest of the individual allowable speed limits for the chuck, fixture,
and cylinder. If you set a higher speed the workpiece will fly out of
the machine, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
2. In the G96 (constant surface speed control) mode, the spindle speed
increases as the cutting tool approaches the center of the spindle.
Near the center of the spindle, the spindle speed will reach the
allowable maximum speed of the machine. At this speed, the chuck
gripping force, cutting force, and centrifugal force cannot be
balanced to hold the workpiece securely in the chuck. As a result,
the workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing serious injuries or
The spindle speed limit must always be specified in a part program
by using the G50 command in a block preceding the G96 block, in
order to clamp the spindle speed at the specified speed.
3. When a G97 speed command is used in a program, specification of
the maximum speed with a G50 command will be ignored. Therefore,
when specifying the spindle speed with a G97 command, specify a
speed no higher than the lowest speed among the allowable speed
limits for the chuck, fixture, and cylinder. If you set a higher speed
damage to the machine. (FANUC)
4. The setting of the spindle speed override switch (if there is one) is
valid even when a spindle speed limit is set using G50.
If the switch is set to 110% or 120%, for example, the programmed
spindle speed will be overridden in accordance with this setting. If
this causes the actual spindle speed to exceed the allowable speed
of the chuck, fixture, or cylinder, the workpiece will fly out of the
chuck during machining, causing serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
Therefore, the spindle speed override switch must be set at 100% or
lower.
SO-NL-B16E/P
When the spindle speed control mode is switched from the G96 mode to the G97 mode, if
NOTE
no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the spindle speed obtained in the block
immediately preceding the G97 block is used as the spindle speed for the G97 mode
operation.
Therefore, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the spindle speed for the G97
mode will depend on the position of the cutting tool in the block preceding the G97 block,
and this could adversely affect machining accuracy and shorten the life of the tool.
When switching the spindle speed control mode to the G97 mode, always specify a
spindle speed.
5 CAUTIONS RELATING TO THE RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
The cautions that relate to the rapid traverse rate are given below. Observe these cautions during
programming.
WARNING When setting the G00 mode approach to the workpiece, determine the
approach paths carefully, taking the workpiece shape and cutting
allowance into consideration. The approach point in the Z-axis direction
should be more than "chucking allowance + 10 mm" away from the
workpiece end face.
When the spindle is rotating, centrifugal force acts on the chuck jaws,
reducing the chuck gripping force. This can cause the workpiece to come
out of the chuck.
Unless the approach point is at least "chucking allowance + 10 mm" away
from the workpiece end face, the cutting tool could strike the workpiece
while moving at the rapid traverse rate if the workpiece does come out of
the chuck, or if there is a large amount of material to be removed. This
could cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
CAUTION If X- and Z-axis movements are specified in the same block in the G00 mode, the tool
path is not always a straight line from the present position to the programmed end
point. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the tool path, remembering that X- and
Z-axis movement is at the rapid traverse rate. If the workpiece, fixture or tailstock (if
featured) lies in the tool path, it could interfere with the tool, tool holder, or turret head.
Depending on the workpiece holding method, there could also be interference with the
chuck and chuck jaws. This interference will cause damage to the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
6 CAUTIONS RELATING TO CENTER-WORK
The cautions that apply when carrying out center-work or both-center-work are given below.
Observe these cautions during programming. (Applies only to machines equipped with a
tailstock.)
WARNING In machining programs for both-center-work, specify the M11 command to

unclamp the chuck before the M30 command to reset and rewind the
program. If the M11 command is not executed and the (START) switch
is pressed by mistake, automatic operation will start and the operator may
be injured.
However, if the M11 command is executed when the center at the spindle
side is held by the chuck during programming, the center will fall or shift,
which in turn will cause the workpiece to fall, causing damage to the
machine. If the center at the spindle side is held by the chuck, do not
execute the M11 command. (Applies only to machines equipped with a
tailstock.)
CAUTION In a center-work program, if you program approach movement by specifying the X-axis
and Z-axis commands in the same block in the G00 mode, the cutting tool could strike
the tailstock.
For center-work, move the Z-axis first and then the X-axis to position the cutting tool at
the approach point.
In the cutting tool retraction operation, retract the cutting tool in the X-axis direction first
to a point where continuing cutting tool movement does not result in interference with
the tailstock. After that, move the Z-axis to the required retraction position. (Applies
SO-NL-B16E/P
7 CAUTIONS RELATING TO COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING
The cautions that apply when setting the coordinate system are given below.
Observe these cautions during programming.
WARNING When the coordinate system is set using G50, the start and end points of
the part program must be the same point.
At the end of a part program, the tool wear offset data of the cutting tool
used to set the coordinate system must be canceled.
If you do not cancel the tool wear offset data, the X and Y coordinate
values will be shifted by the tool wear offset data each time the program is
executed. This will shift the start (end) point of the program, which could
cause interference between the cutting tool, holder or turret head and the
workpiece, chuck, fixture, or tailstock (if featured), causing accidents
CAUTION 1. When setting the coordinate system using the machine coordinate system setting
function, any mistake in specifying the X and Z values in the G50 block will cause
interference between the cutting tool, tool holder, or turret head, and the
workpiece, chuck, fixture, or tailstock (if featured), damage to the machine, or will
cause the cutting tool failing to reach the cutting position.
2. When the coordinate system is set using G50, do not input the tool geometry
offset data. If you input this data, the workpiece zero point will be shifted by the
amount of the tool geometry offset data, which could cause interference between
the cutting tool, holder or turret head and the workpiece, chuck, fixture, or
tailstock (if featured), causing damage to the machine.
SO-NL-B16E/P
8 CAUTIONS RELATING TO G CODES
The cautions that relate to G codes (also called "preparatory codes") are given below.
Observe these cautions during programming.
CAUTION 1. Never specify "G28 X0 Z0;" to return the axes to the machine zero point, since
the axes will first be positioned at the workpiece zero point (X0, Z0) and then
moved to the machine zero point, and this may cause the cutting tool to strike the
workpiece.
Instead, specify "G28 U0 W0;" to return the axes directly from the present
position to the machine zero point.
2. In the G98 mode, the turret moves at the feedrate specified by the F code even
when the spindle is not rotating. Make sure that the cutting tool will not strike the
workpiece, etc., since this could cause damage to the machine.
3. When using the stored stroke check function, always execute a machine zero
return operation after switching the power ON, otherwise the function will not be
valid. If the machine is operated in this condition it will not stop even if the cutting
tool enters the prohibited area, and this could cause damage to the machine.
(stored stroke check specification)
1. When specifying G codes in a block, they must be placed before the addresses
NOTE
(other than G and M) which are executed under the mode they establish. If a G code
is specified after addresses for which it establishes the mode of processing, the
mode established by it is not valid to these addresses.
2. When executing a dwell using the G04 command, if the cutting tool is kept in contact
with the workpiece at a position such as the bottom of a groove for a long time it will
shorten the life of the tool nose as well as adversely affecting machining accuracy.
The dwell period should be the time it takes for the spindle to rotate approximately
one turn.
SO-NL-B16E/P
9 CAUTIONS RELATING TO M CODES
The cautions that relate to M codes (also called "miscellaneous codes") are given below. Observe
these cautions during programming.
CAUTION 1. Do not stop the spindle or rotary tool (milling specification) by specifying the M05
command while the cutting tool is in contact with the workpiece. If the spindle or
rotary tool (milling specification) is stopped while the cutting tool is in contact with
the workpiece, the cutting tool could be damaged.
2. Rotate the spindle or rotary tool by executing either M03 or M04 (M13 or M14 for
the milling specification) command before the cutting tool comes into contact with
the workpiece. If the cutting tool is brought into contact with the workpiece while
it is not rotating, the cutting tool could be damaged.
3. Always specify an M05 command to stop spindle rotation before using a pull-out
finger or workpiece pusher, etc. If spindle rotation is not stopped the machine
could be damaged.
4. Specify the M10 or M11 command in a block without other commands, and
specify the G04 command in the next block to allow the chuck to complete the
clamp or unclamp operation correctly. Since the time required for the chuck to
carry out the clamp or unclamp operation varies depending on the chuck type
and chucking pressure, the dwell time should be a little longer than the actual
clamp/unclamp time.
If G04 is not specified in the block following the M10 or M11 block, the next block
will be executed while the chuck is still opening or closing, and this could cause
5. When the M73 command is specified, make sure that the turret head or
headstock 2 spindle (Applies only to machines equipped with two spindles) is
retracted to a position where it will not interfere with the parts catcher when it
swings out to the chuck side position. Interference could cause damage to the
machine.
6. When the automatic door is closed by specifying the M86 command, make sure
that your fingers, etc., do not get caught in the door and that there are no
obstacles that will prevent the door from closing. If your fingers are caught in the
door you could be injured.
SO-NL-B16E/P
CAUTION 7. Specify the M25 command (to extend the tailstock spindle) or M26 command (to
retract the tailstock spindle) in a block without other commands, and specify the
G04 command in the next block to suspend program operation for a period long
enough to allow the tailstock spindle to extend and the center to hold the
workpiece correctly, or long enough to allow the tailstock spindle to retract into
the tailstock correctly.
will be executed before the workpiece is held by the center properly, or before the
tailstock spindle has retracted properly; the tool, holder, or turret head will then
interfere with the tailstock spindle or tailstock spindle center, causing damage to
the machine.
The period of time specified for suspension of program execution should be
longer than the time required to extend or retract the tailstock spindle. (Applies
8. Specify the M73 command (to swing the parts catcher out) or M74 command (to
swing the parts catcher in) in a block without other commands, and specify the
G04 command in the next block to suspend program operation for a period long
enough to allow the parts catcher to complete the swing in/out operation.
will be executed before the parts catcher has reached the swing in/out end
position; the tool, holder, or turret head will then interfere with the parts catcher,
causing damage to the machine.
longer than the time required for the parts catcher to complete the swing IN or
swing OUT operation. (Applies only to machines equipped with a parts catcher.)
SO-NL-B16E/P
FOREWORD
Machining workpieces in a CNC lathe requires programs.

This manual describes the items that are required to create programs.
An overview of each chapter is given below.
A: BEFORE PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the basics for creating a program. It is written for beginners
who might be creating a program for the first time.
B: G FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the G functions. The G codes are also called the preparatory
functions. The NC determines the machining method and axis control mode for each
block according to the specified G code.
C: M FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the M functions. The M codes are also called the
miscellaneous functions. In addition to serving in auxiliary roles when used with G
codes, M codes are used to suspend program execution, discharge or stop coolant,
etc.
D: T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the T, S, and F functions. The T function rotates the turret to
index the required tool and calls the tool offset number. The S function specifies the
spindle speed, rotary tool spindle speed or cutting speed. The F function specifies the
feedrate of the cutting tool.
E: AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET

This chapter describes how the automatic tool nose radius offset function works.
Because the cutting edge of the tool does not come to a sharp point, but is slightly
rounded, the position of the tool nose actually engaged in cutting differs slightly from
the point assumed for program writing. The error caused by this difference is
automatically offset by specifying the appropriate G codes (G41, G42).
F: MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET

This chapter describes how the value for tool nose offset is determined. Because the
tool edge does not come to a sharp point, but is slightly rounded, the position of the
tool nose actually engaged in cutting differs slightly from the point assumed for
program writing. By manually calculating the offset data and slightly shifting the tool
nose, the programmed tool point (imaginary tool nose) can be offset to coincide with
the cutting point.
G: CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET

This chapter describes the cutter radius offset function used by the Y-axis
specification machines of the SL, SL-S, and TL series. Cutter radius offset means the
shift of the tool path by the radius amount to the right or left from the programmed
path. This function is mainly used for pocket cutting or contouring with the end mill.
–1–
H: MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
This chapter describes the multiple canned cycles. Using a multiple canned cycle,
roughing processes that would otherwise require several blocks of commands can be
defined by a single block of commands, preceded by a G code that calls a multiple
canned cycle. This is followed by blocks that define the finished shape. The tool
paths from rough cutting cycles to finishing cycles are generated automatically.
I: HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE

This chapter describes hole machining canned cycle function. It specifies hole
machining cycle using commands in one block including a G function, which usually
requires several blocks.
J: TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION)

This chapter describes the tool life management B function. The tool life management
B function automatically selects an available tool in a registered tool group if the tool
called in the same group has been used to the preset life.
K: EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
This chapter describes the programming procedure using several examples.
APPENDIX
The appendix shows a program for center work with consideration given to safety.
Please read this Programming Manual carefully. The manual is written to help you
operate your CNC lathe more effectively.
–2–
BEFORE READING THIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL
To machine a workpiece in a CNC lathe, a program must be created. This manual

describes the basic information to be understood before starting programming and several
example programs. When reading this manual, always remember the following points.
Also please note that the programs and portions of programs given in this manual are only
examples that help readers understand the explanation easier. Therefore, the programs in
this manual are not always applicable to actual production. Programming method and
numeric values in a program such as machining conditions must be determined meeting
actual machine operating environment including the workpiece material and shape.
1 The programmer is requested to read this manual carefully and

observe the cautions it contains when creating programs, so as
to ensure the safety of the operator during operation. If the
cautions in this manual are ignored when creating a program,
the machine may operate in an unexpected manner when the
program is run, causing accidents involving serious injuries or
2 Explanation for programs will include the discussion on
parameters. The parameters are set on shipment in accordance
with the machine specifications; do not change them without
first consulting Mori Seiki. If the parameters are changed
without consultation, the machine may operate in an
unexpected manner, causing accidents involving serious
1 There are two methods for specifying the coordinate values; an absolute
command and an incremental command. In this manual, the absolute
command is usually being described. Unless otherwise stated, the
program can also be created using incremental commands. When a
specified method using incremental commands is different from one using
absolute commands, or if either an absolute or an incremental command
cannot be used, some cautionary notes will be described at that point.
Absolute commands and incremental commands are discussed in detail in
Chapter A.
For absolute commands and incremental commands, refer to

page A–20 (8.).
2 The illustrations used in this manual may vary depending on the machine
model.
3 The contents of this manual apply to machine tools which conform to JIS
standards.
For CNC lathes that have a reversed JIS specification for the
X-axis, refer to page A–33 (12.).
–1–
4 The illustrations of cutting tools in this manual may not indicate the correct
setting orientation, since this will differ according to the machine model.
Make sure the correct relationship between the cutting tool mounting
position and the workpiece (spindle) rotation direction when writing a
program.
5 With G and M codes, standard format and F15 format are available. The
command format differs between standard format and F15 format for some
of the G and M codes and such differences are explained in the related
items in this manual. Pay attention to the difference when creating a
program.
6 Please note that all of the functions and optional devices/equipment
explained in this manual are not always available with the delivered
machine.
Retrofitting of such functions and optional devices/equipment is not always
possible. For details, contact Mori Seiki.
In this manual, the various models are classified under the generic names
indicated in the table below.
Generic Name Models NC Unit

SL series SL-150, SL-150MC, SL-150Y MSC-500
SL-200, SL-200MC MSC-501
SL-250, SL-250MC MSG-501
SL-303, SL-303MC, SL-303Y MSD-501
SL-400, SL-400MC MSD-501II
SL-600, SL-600MC
SL-25E, SL-65, SL-65MC, SL-75, SL-75MC
SL-S series SL-150S, SL-150SMC, SL-150SY MSC-501
SL-200S, SL-200SMC MSD-501II
SL-250S, SL-250SMC
VL series VL-25 MSC-500
VL-55, VL-55MC
TL series TL-40, TL-40MC, TL-40Y MSC-518
MSD-518
MSD-518II
LL series LL-7, LL-8 MSC-501
MSD-501II
CL series CL1500, CL1500T MSC-500
CL2000, CL2000T
–2–
CHAPTER A
BEFORE PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the basic considerations for creating a program.

CONTENTS
A : BEFORE PROGRAMMING
1. What is a Program? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
2. What is Required of Programmers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
3. What is “Creating a Program”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2
4. Inputting the Program to the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2
5. Flow until the Product is Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3

5.1 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3
5.2 Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–4
6. Terms for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8

6.1 Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8
6.2 Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9
6.3 Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9
6.4 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10
6.5 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10
6.6 Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11
6.7 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11
6.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11
7. Axis Control and Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12

7.1 Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12
7.1.1 SL, TL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12
7.1.2 SL-S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–13
7.1.3 VL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–14
7.1.4 LL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–15
7.1.5 CL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–16
7.2 Expressing Axis Movement in Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–17
8. Specifying the Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20
8.1 Absolute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20
8.2 Incremental Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–22
8.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–24
9. Specifying the Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–25
10. Basic Pattern of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27

10.1 Chuck-Work Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27
10.2 Center-Work Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–28
10.3 Both-Center-Work Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–29
11. Cautions for Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30

11.1 Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
11.2 Space between the Words in the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
11.3 Signs and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
11.4 Inputting a Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–31
11.5 Role of Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–32
12. JIS Specification and Reverse JIS Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–33

BEFORE PROGRAMMING A–1
1. What is a Program?
The “program” here is an instruction for machine operation consisting of letters of the
alphabet and numerals in combination.
All operations of the machine, including “spindle rotation”, “tool movement”, or “coolant
discharge” can be controlled by a program.
When creating such programs, the information discussed in this manual will be necessary.
Please carefully read this manual and thoroughly understand the information before
creating a program.
Creating a program is called “programming”.
2. What is Required of Programmers?
Programmers must have a thorough of knowledge about machining operation. They

should write programs and observe the points listed below to ensure accurate, efficient
operation with safety. Programmers must:
1 Develop a knowledge of the theory of cutting.
2 Acquire a good knowledge of workpiece holding tools (chuck, fixtures, tailstock).
3 To prevent accidents which might occur during machining, select appropriate tools
taking into consideration the shape and material of workpiece as well as machining
conditions, such as spindle speed, feedrate or depth of cut.
4 Understand the machining performance of the machine to be used.
5 Understand the safety devices and interlock functions featured by the machine to be
used.
6 Become familiar with the functions related to programming.

A–2 BEFORE PROGRAMMING
3. What is “Creating a Program”?
When creating a program:
1) Check the part print to determine the machining required.

2) Examine the section to be machined, the fixtures and the tools that need to be used.
Creating a program as soon as you see a part print could lead to unproductive and
dangerous operation of the machine.
3) Determine the machining processes based on these requirements and the dimensions
given on the part print.
4) According to the machining processes required, create a program using letters of the
alphabet and numerals.
5) When you have created a program, carefully check its contents.
4. Inputting the Program to the Machine
When the program is created, input the program into the NC memory using the keyboard
on the NC operation panel. Check the contents of the program that has been input on the
screen. A decimal point may be likely to be omitted. To avoid such a careless mistake,
write the numerical data in the manner as indicated below.
<Example>
1 Z.5 → Z0.5
2 X200. → X200.0
After inputting the program, check the input program carefully on input error and
omission of the data in the program.
Write the program clearly and accurately so that anyone can read it.
If the operator misreads the program and inputs incorrect data, the
workpiece could fly out of the chuck during machining, and the
cutting tools, holders or turret head, could collide with the
workpiece, chuck, fixture or tailstock (tailstock specification),
resulting in serious injuries or damage to the machine.
5. Flow until the Product is Completed
5.1 Flow of Operation

This section describes the flow of operation, including programming. Follow and
understand the flow so that the operation can be performed smoothly.
1) Examine the drawing to determine the machining required
2) Determine the tools to be used “TOOLING SYSTEM”

Production
in the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
planning and
programming
3) Examine the chucking method and the fixtures
4) Create the program
“TURNING ON THE POWER” in the MAINTENANCE

5) Turn on the power supply INFORMATION
“TURNING ON THE POWER” in the OPERATION
MANUAL
“PROGRAM EDITING” in the OPERATION
6) Store the program into memory MANUAL
Instruction manual supplied by the NC unit
manufacturer
“Adjusting the pressure” and
7) Check or adjust the chucking pressure “ADJUSTING THE CHUCKING
PRESSURE” in the OPERATION
MANUAL
Instruction manual supplied by the NC
unit manufacturer
8) Shape soft jaws “SHAPING SOFT JAWS FOR FINISHING” in the OPERATION
MANUAL
“MANUAL OPERATION” in the
9) Mount the tools and workpiece to the machine
OPERATION MANUAL
“TOOLING SYSTEM” in the
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Setup operation 10) For the center-work, set the tailstock “TAILSTOCK OPERATION”
“CAUTIONS ON CHUCKING A
Check or adjust the tailstock spindle thrust WORKPIECE”
(Tailstock specification) “ADJUSTING THE TAILSTOCK
SPINDLE THRUST” in the
OPERATION MANUAL
11) Measure and input the tool geometry offset value “SETTING OF
COORDINATE SYSTEM” in
the OPERATION MANUAL
12) Set the workpiece zero point “SETTING OF COORDINATE SYSTEM” in the
OPERATION MANUAL
“PREPARATION
13) Check the program by carrying out dry run operation
BEFORE STARTING
(Correct the program if necessary) MASS PRODUCTION”
in the OPERATION
MANUAL
14) Check the machining condition by carrying out test cutting “PREPARATION
BEFORE
(Correct the program if necessary) STARTING MASS
(Input the tool wear offset value if necessary) PRODUCTION” in
the OPERATION
MANUAL
15) Machine the workpiece in automatic operation
Mass
production
16) Product is completed
5.2 Check Items

The items to be checked in the course of programming and before starting machine
operation are summarized in the following tables. Check these items to ensure smooth
operation.
Check
Check Items
Column
1. Are tolerances readable on the drawing?
2. Are the symbols used to indicate accuracy understandable?
3. Are the shape and material of the workpiece blank made clear?
Reading the
Drawing Are the processes before and after the processes to be carried out on the
4.
NC lathe made clear?
Can the workpiece be machined to the specified accuracies on the NC
5.
lathe?
6. Are the keys for machining understandable?
7. Is the use of the workpiece made clear?
8. Have you read all the dimensions and notes on the drawing?
9. Is the drawing kept clean, with no unnecessary information entered on it?
Check
Check Items
Column
Are the order of machining and machining conditions determined in
1.
accordance with the shape and material of the workpiece blank?
Are the chucking method and chucking pressure setting determined
Order and 2.
correctly?
Conditions
3. Are the cutting tools and replaceable tips selected correctly?
of Machining
Are the machining processes appropriate for the shape and material of the
4.
workpiece blank?
5. Is machining free of interference?
Check
Check Items
1 2 3 Column
4 5 6 When inputting the program for a particular process, is the program for the
1.
7 9 next process taken into consideration?
Is the program being written to suit the shape and material of the workpiece
Inputting the 2.
blank?
Program
3. Is a decimal point entered in all numerical values?
4. Is the sign (+, –) preceding numerical values correct?
5. Are feed modes (rapid traverse and cutting feed) used correctly?
6. Are approach paths and cutting feed identified?
7. Is all input data checked for correctness?
8. Is the program free of errors caused by lack of concentration?
(To the next page)
Check
Check Items
Column
1. Are tool holders and cutting tools cleaned before mounting?
2. Are the replaceable tool tips new?
Mountingg 3. Are the material and shape of replaceable tool tips appropriate?
the Tools 4. Are replaceable tool tips mounted securely and correctly?
5. Is the tool overhang appropriate?
6. Is the replaceable tool tip mounting angle correct?
7. Are mounting bolts tightened securely and evenly?
8. Is the tool nose center height correct?
Check
Check Items
Column
1. Are the soft jaws and master jaws cleaned before mounting?
2. Are the soft jaw mounting positions correct?
3. Are the soft jaw mounting bolts tightened securely and evenly?
Shaping
Sh i and d
4. Is the mounting bolt length appropriate?
Mounting the
Soft Jaws 5. Is the plug (ring) used for shaping the soft jaws to the correct size?
6. Is the chucking pressure checked and adjusted?
7. Is the DOOR INTERLOCK key-switch placed in the NORMAL position?
8. Is the front door closed?
Are the cutting tools, replaceable tool tip, spindle speed, and feedrate all
9.
correct for shaping soft jaws?
10. Is the workpiece contact face area appropriate?
11. Is relief provided at the soft jaw corners?
12. Are run-out on I.D. and end face waviness measured?
Check
Check Items
Column
Is due consideration given to possible interference during measurement of
1.
tool offset data?
Are the spindle speed, feedrate, and depth of cut used for the measuring
Tool Offset 2.
tool offset data appropriate?
5. Is the standard tool selection appropriate?
6. Is the measured dimension correct?
7. Is the calculation for offset data correct?
8. Is the offset direction correct?
9. Is the tool offset number correct?
Are the tool geometry offset data, tool wear offset data, and coordinate
10.
system used for offset identified correctly?
(To the next page)
Check
Check Items
Column
1. Is the chucking pressure been checked and adjusted?
If performing center work, is the tailstock spindle thrust checked and
2.
adjusted?
Dry Run
Operation
5. Is the single block function turned on?
6. Are the feedrate and spindle speed appropriate for operation?
7. Are the feed modes (rapid traverse and cutting feed) used correctly?
8. Is the tool retraction direction after cutting correct?
9. Is tool movement smooth in the calculated area?
10. Are the tools free of interference with the workpiece, soft jaws, and chuck?
Is the turret head indexed at a position where there is no interference with
11.
the workpiece?
12. Can the machine be stopped immediately when necessary?
Check
TEST Check Items
Column
1. Is the chucking pressure been checked and adjusted?
If performing center work, is the tailstock spindle thrust checked and
2.
adjusted?
Test Cutting
5. Is the single block function turned on?
6. Are the feedrate and spindle speed appropriate for operation?
Are the order of machining and machining conditions determined in
7.
accordance with the shape and material of the workpiece blank?
8. Are cutting tools and replaceable tool tips selected properly?
9. Is the workpiece chucking method correct?
10. Is the progress of cutting been observed?
11. Are coolant supply volume and direction correct?
Are the cutting tools free of interference with the workpiece, soft jaws and
12.
chuck?
13. Are the dimensions measured after the rough cutting process?
14. Are the settings for feed override and rapid traverse override correct?
15. Can the machine be stopped immediately when necessary?
(To the next page)

Check
Check Items
Column
1. Is the measuring instrument functioning correctly?
2. Is the choice of measuring instrument correct?
3. Is the measuring order correct?
Measuring
4. Is the measuring method appropriate?
5. Is the area to be measured indicated clearly?
6. Is the area to be measured free of chips and coolant?
8. Is the workpiece cool when the dimensions are measured?
Check
Check Items
Column
Are all NC functions such as single block functions used to check the
Mass 3.
program turned off?
Production
4. Is dimensional variation checked?
5. Are run-out on I.D. and O.D., and end face waviness measured?
Is a target work time established on the basis of the machining time for one
6.
workpiece?
7. Is tool nose wear observed?
6. Terms for Programming
This section describes the basic terms that must be understood for creating a program.
6.1 Program Number

Several programs can be stored in the NC memory.
Program numbers are used to keep multiple programs arranged in numerical order.
Program numbers appear at the beginning of a program stored in the memory.
A program number is set by inputting numbers four digits or less after the alphabet “O”.
Numbers from 1 to 9999 can be used.
O0001; Program number

N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
...
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;

M01;
N2;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
...
M30;
If a program number to be input is already in the memory, that number, and

therefore that program cannot be input. Change its number to input the program.
The program number can have less than four significant digits. It can be input
using less than four digits.
For example, even if a program number is input as O1, the screen will automatically
display “O0001”.
6.2 Sequence Number

The sequence number is used to search for or call the position that is being executed, or
to facilitate finding the position you want to edit in the program easily.
The sequence number is expressed as a number of five digits or less (1 to 99999),

following the letter “N”.
Generally, the sequence numbers are assigned to the part programs for individual cutting
tools in the ascending order in the order the machining processes are executed.
O0001;
N1; Sequence number
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
...
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;

M01;
N2; Sequence number
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
...
M30;
1 If a sequence number consists of more than five digits, the five digits from the
least significant position are recognized as the sequence number.
2 The sequence number is not necessarily specified. Also, it is not necessary to
input numbers with five significant digits.
If a program is too long and exceeds the memory capacity, put the sequence
numbers at the beginning of the program for each process, or do not specify
these numbers. This will help save memory capacity.
6.3 Part Program

The part program refers to the program which contains all the information necessary for
executing the cutting process to be carried out by a single cutting tool.
Each process (1st process, 2nd process...) for machining a component contains the part
programs for as many tools as are necessary to complete each process.
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; Part program for the tool No. 1
...
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;

M01;
N2;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202; Part program for the tool No. 2
...
M30;
6.4 Address
An address is expressed using letters of the alphabet.
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;
Address
6.5 Data
The numbers (including the sign and decimal point) that follow the address are called the
“data”.
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;
Data
In addition, the information (program and other) to be input to the NC for machining
the workpiece is also called the data. Determine the type of data from the
explanation of the statement.
6.6 Word
A word is the minimum unit for specifying functions. A word consists of an address and
the data.
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;
Word
6.7 Block
A block is the minimum command unit necessary to operate a machine (including the NC
unit). It is also the minimum unit used to create a part program. A block consists of
words.
On the program sheet, each one line corresponds to one block.

O0001; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First block
N1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second block
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third block
Specify the end of a block with [ ; ].
6.8 Summary
A program consists of words, a combination of address and data, and of blocks, a
combination of words, as shown below.
O0001; Program number

N1; Sequence number
G50 S2000; 1 block
G00 T0101;
...
Address + Data
Part
Word program
Program
G00 X150.0 Z100.0;

M01;
N2; Sequence number
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202; Part
program
...
M30; 1 block
7. Axis Control and Direction
This section describes movement along the controlled axes and its relationship with the
program.
Knowing the direction of the controlled axes is essential when creating a program.
7.1 Movement along the Controlled Axes

This section deals with the axis definition and how the axis movement is defined in
programming.
7.1.1 SL, TL Series
In the SL, TL series, the controlled axes and their directions are determined as follows:
Axis Unit + and – Direction

+ direction: The direction in which the machining
diameter increases.
X Turret
(the direction in which a cutting tool moves
away from the spindle center line.)
+ direction: The direction in which a cutting tool moves
away from the spindle.
Z Turret
(the direction in which the cutting tool is
viewed from the spindle.)
C – direction: The rotation direction in which the
(MC type, Y-axis Spindle right-hand thread advances when viewing a
specification) cutting tool from the spindle.
Y + direction: The direction in which a cutting tool moves
(Y-axis Turret up when viewing the machine from the
specification) front.
For the X-axis reversed JIS specification machine, positive and negative directions
of the X-axis are reversed from those applied to conventional specification
machines.
Turret
Headstock Tailstock
(chuck)
7.1.2 SL-S Series
In the SL-S series, the controlled axes and their directions are determined as follows:

diameter increases.
X Turret (the direction in which a cutting tool moves
away from the spindle (spindle 1 or spindle
2) center line.)
away from spindle 1.
Z Turret
viewed from spindle 1.)
– direction: The rotation direction in which the
Spindle 1 right-hand thread advances when viewing a
C cutting tool from spindle 1.
(MC type
type, Y axis
Y-axis
specification) + direction: The rotation direction in which the
Spindle 2 right-hand thread advances when viewing a
cutting tool from spindle 2.
Y + direction: The direction in which a cutting tool moves
(Y-axis Turret up when viewing the machine from the
specification) front.
+ direction: The direction in which spindle 2 moves
away from spindle 1.
B Spindle 2
(the direction in which spindle 2 is viewed
from spindle 1.)
machines.
Turret
Spindle 2
Spindle 1
7.1.3 VL Series
In the VL series, the controlled axes and their directions are determined as follows:

diameter increases.
X Turret
Z Turret
machines.
+Z
–X
+X
ÎÎ
–Z
Turret
Chuck
7.1.4 LL Series
In the LL series, the controlled axes and their directions are determined as follows:

diameter increases.
Front-side turret (the direction in which a cutting tool
moves away from the center of
X rotation)
diameter decreases.
Rear-side turret
(the direction in which a cutting tool
moves toward the center of rotation)
Front-side turret + direction: The direction in which a cutting tool

moves away from the workpiece.
Z (the direction in which the cutting tool
Rear-side turret is viewed from the spindle.)
7.1.5 CL Series
In the CL series, the controlled axes and their directions are determined as follows:

diameter increases.
X Turret
Z Turret
machines.
Turret
Spindle
7.2 Expressing Axis Movement in Programming

When writing a program, the numerical values used for specifying axis position and
positive/negative sign used for determining axis movement direction vary depending on the
position taken as the reference for programming.
The reference position (workpiece zero point) and axis movement direction are determined
as follows:
Workpiece zero point To write a program, the origin for the program, e.g. the
workpiece zero point must be determined.
The workpiece zero point (X0, Z0) is taken as the reference for
programming and also for machining.
X-axis The diametral dimensions of a product are expressed using
address X. X0 is taken on the center line of the product.
Z-axis The longitudinal dimensions of a product are expressed using
address Z. Z0 is taken on the end face of the finished product.
C-axis Spindle index angle for executing milling is expressed using
(MC type, Y-axis address C. C0 is taken at the zero point of the C-axis.
specification)
Y-axis The dimensions measured in right angle direction to X-axis and
(Y-axis specification) Z-axis are expressed using address Y. Y0 is taken on the
spindle center line.
<SL, TL series>
<Chuck work> <Center work>
+X direction Turret +X direction Turret
+X +X
area area
–Z +Z
+X +X
Workpiece area area Tailstock
–Z +Z
Headstock Headstock
+Z direction
–Z –Z +Z direction
Workpiece zero direction
direction Workpiece zero
point (X0, Z0) Workpiece point (X0, Z0)
–X –X
–X –X area area
area area –Z +Z
–Z +Z
–X direction –X direction
<X-axis and Y-axis>

Used in Y-axis specification machine.
+Y direction
–X +X
area area
+Y +Y
Workpiece zero point (X0, Y0)
–X direction +X direction
–X +X
area area
–Y –Y
–Y direction
<SL-S series>
<Headstock 1 side> <Headstock 2 side>

+X direction Turret Turret +X direction
+X +X +X +X
area area area area
–Z +Z –Z +Z
Workpiece Workpiece
Headstock 1 Headstock 2
+Z direction –Z direction
–Z +Z direction
Workpiece zero Workpiece zero
direction
point (X0, Z0) point (X0, B0)
–X –X –X –X
area area area area
–Z +Z –Z +Z
In cutting off operation, spindle 2 moves in the Z-axis direction when it receives a
workpiece from spindle 1.
With the SL-S series, this movement is made along the B-axis.
<VL series>
<Chuck work>
+Z direction
Turret
–X +X
area area
+Z +Z
Workpiede zero point (X0, Z0)
–X direction +X direction
Workpiece
–X +X
area area
–Z –Z
Headstock
–Z direction
<LL series>
<Chuck work>
–X direction Rear-side turret
–X –X
area area
–Z +Z
Workpiece
Headstock
+Z direction
–Z direction
Workpiece zero
point (X0, Z0)
+X +X
area area
–Z +Z
+X direction
Front-side turret
<CL series>
<Chuck work> <Center work>

+X direction Turret +X direction Turret
+X +X
area area
–Z +Z
+X +X
Workpiece area area Tailstock
–Z +Z
Headstock Headstock
+Z direction
–Z –Z +Z direction
Workpiece zero direction
direction Workpiece zero
point (X0, Z0) Workpiece point (X0, Z0)
–X –X
–X –X area area
area area –Z +Z
–Z +Z
8. Specifying the Dimensions
To specify tool movement from the presently located point to the next point (target point),
the following two types of commands can be used.
1) Absolute commands
2) Incremental commands
When writing a program, it is necessary to understand the nature of these two types of
dimension specifying commands.
This section deals with the basic and the command specifying method for using the
absolute and incremental commands in a program.
8.1 Absolute Commands

Absolute commands define a specific point by the distance from the workpiece zero point
(X0, Z0) with a (+) or – sign.
1 In a program using absolute commands, the axes are expressed using the
following address characters:
X-axis³X_ ; Z-axis³Z_ ;
2 With the SL-S series, absolute commands of the B-axis is expressed as “B_ ;”.
3 With the Y-axis specification machine, absolute commands of the Y-axis is
expressed as “Y_ ;”.
4 With the MC type and the Y-axis specification machine, absolute commands of
the C-axis is expressed as “C_ ;”.
Specifying the absolute commands (1)
To express tool movement from point 1 to point 2 using absolute commands.
X20.0 Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
+X direction 1
X10.0 Z–5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
10
(20.0, 10.0)
2
+X +X
area area
–Z +Z
5
(10.0, –5.0)
Workpiece zero point (X0, Z0)
–Z direction
+Z direction
–5 10
–X –X area
area
–Z –X direction +Z
For the X-axis, since dimensions are all expressed in diametral values, actual
X-axis movement distance is a half of the specified value.
1 The positive (+) sign may be omitted.

X+10.0³X10.0 Z+10.0³Z10.0
2 The values specified as (f, f) in the illustration above indicate the coordinate
values (X, Z).
Specifying the absolute commands (2)
To express tool movement (point 1 ³ point 2 ³ point 3 ³ point 4 ³ point 5 ) using

absolute commands.
50
X40.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
5
X50.0 Z–5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4
3 2
C10 (X50.0) Z–50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
C5 X80.0 (Z–50.0); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
∅ 100
∅ 50
(X0, Z0) X100.0 Z–60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Since the commands in ( ) are the same as

in the previous block, they can be omitted.
1 X40.0
2 To determine X coordinate of point 1 , subtract C5
chamfer size (5 mm) from the workpiece diameter
5
50 mm.
C5 1
Chamfer size 5 mm should be converted
into diametral value.
∅ 40
∅ 50
5 mm 2 = 10 mm
∅50 – (5 2) = 40
Therefore, X coordinate of point 1 is X40.0.
5
4 X80.0 and 5 Z–60.0

5 C10 To determine X coordinate of point 4 , subtract
50 C10 chamfer size (10 mm) from the workpiece
10
diameter 100 mm.

4
10 into diametral value.
10 mm 2 = 20 mm
∅100 – (10 2) = 80
∅ 100
∅ 50
Therefore, X coordinate of point 4 is X80.0.

To determine Z coordinate of point 5 , add
chamfer size 10 mm to 50 mm. Since the Z
dimensions are all measured in the negative
direction from the workpiece zero point, the
calculation should be,
(–50) + (–10) = –60
Therefore, Z coordinate of point 5 is Z–60.0.
8.2 Incremental Commands

Incremental commands define relative position on a given coordinate system by specifying
the motion distance from the present position. The positive sign indicates that the position
to be defined is in the positive direction from the present position.
For the B-axis, an incremental command cannot be used.
1 In a program using incremental commands, the axes are expressed using the
following address characters:
X-axis³U_ ; Z-axis³W_ ;
2 With the Y-axis specification machine, incremental commands of the Y-axis is
expressed as “V_ ;”.
3 With the MC type and the Y-axis specification machine, incremental commands
of the C-axis is expressed as “H_ ;”.
Specifying the incremental commands (1)
To express tool movement from point 1 to point 2 using incremental commands.
X20.0 Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
+X direction 1
U–10.0 W–15.0 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
10
(20.0, 10.0)
2
+X +X
area area
–Z +Z
5
(10.0, –5.0)
–Z direction
+Z direction
–5 10
–X –X area
area
–Z –X direction +Z
For the X-axis (U command), since dimensions are all expressed in diametral
values, actual X-axis movement distance is a half the specified value.
1 The positive (+) sign may be omitted.
U+10.0³U10.0 W+15.0³W15.0
2 The values specified as (f, f) in the illustration above indicate the coordinate
values (X, Z).
Specifying the incremental commands (2)
To express tool movement (point 1 ³ point 2 ³ point 3 ³ point 4 ³ point 5 ) using

incremental commands.
50
X40.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
5
4
U10.0 W–5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 2
C10 (U0) W–45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
C5 U30.0 (W0); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
∅ 100
∅ 50
(X0, Z0) U20.0 W–10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Since the commands in ( ) are the same as

in the previous block, they can be omitted.
2 U10.0 W–5.0
2 X coordinate value of point 2 is X50.0; chamfering
of C5 (5 mm) is executed from point 1 (X40.0) to
5
point 2 .
C5 1
∅ 40
∅ 50
5 mm 2 = 10 mm
Therefore, coordinate value of U is U10.0.
Z coordinate value of point 2 is Z–5.0; Z-axis
moves 5 mm in the negative direction from point
5
1 (Z0).
Therefore, coordinate value of W is W–5.0.
4 U30.0 (W0) and 5 U20.0 W–10.0

5 C10 X coordinate value of point 4 is X80.0; X-axis
50
moves 30 mm in the positive direction from point
10
4 3 (X50.0).
3 Therefore, coordinate value of U is U30.0.

10
Tool movement from point 3 to point 4 is
made only in the X-axis direction. In such a
∅ 100
case, Z-axis movement command (W0) may

∅ 50
be omitted.
X coordinate value of point 5 is X100.0;
chamfering of C10 (10 mm) is executed from point
4 (X80.0) to point 5 .

10 mm 2 = 20 mm
Therefore, coordinate value of U is U20.0.
Z coordinate value of point 5 is Z–60.0; Z-axis

moves 10 mm in the negative direction from point
4 (Z–50.0).
Therefore, coordinate value of W is W–10.0.
8.3 Summary
Differences between absolute programming and incremental programming are
summarized below.
Absolute Programming Incremental Programming

Address Characters X_ Z_ Y_ C_ ; B_ ; U_ W_ V_ H_ ;
Meaning of the Sign The area where the specified The direction in which the
(+/–) point exists. cutting tool advances.
Meaning of the Coordinate values Distance of tool movement,
Numerical Values (distance from the workpiece angle of spindle index
zero point, angle of index from
the zero point)
Reference Point of Workpiece zero point Actual positions of tool and
Commands (X0, Z0, Y0) spindle
Zero point (C0) (B0)
1 Generally, a program is written using absolute commands.

Incremental commands are usually used for tool retraction or chamfering
operation.
2 Absolute commands and incremental commands may be specified in the same
block such as “X_ W_ ;”, “U_ Z_ ;”, and “X_ V_ ;”.
3 If absolute and incremental commands representing the same axis (X and U, Z
and W, Y and V, or C and H) are specified in the same block, the address
character specified later becomes valid.
Example: X10.0 U–20.0; ³ U–20.0 is valid.
9. Specifying the Cutting Conditions
Cutting feedrate The cutting conditions that are set when

programming have a great influence on the
machining efficiency and accuracy. These
Depth conditions must be checked carefully.
of cut
The following four cutting conditions are necessary
for machining the workpiece.
Spindle speed
1) Spindle speed (min–1), cutting speed (surface speed) (m/min)

The spindle speed or cutting speed is specified directly following address S
(S function).
COMMAND
G97 S400; . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed 400 min–1
G96 S200; . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting speed 200 m/min
2) Cutting feedrate (mm/rev) (mm/min)

Feedrate is specified directly following address F (F function).
COMMAND
G99 F0.1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate per spindle revolution, 0.1 mm/rev
G98 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate per minute, 100 mm/min
3) Depth of cut
There is no special function used to specify the depth of cut. Depth of cut is specified
using tool movement along the X- or Z-axis.
For multiple repetitive cycles, depth of cut may be specified using an address.
For details of multiple repetitive cycles, refer to Chapter H “MULTIPLE

REPETITIVE CYCLES”.
4) Chuck gripping force
The chuck gripping force is reduced when the spindle is rotated

since the rotation applies centrifugal force to the chuck jaws. This
reduction of the chuck gripping force could cause the workpiece to
fly out of the chuck during machining, causing serious injuries or
damage to the machine. Therefore, when checking a program,
measure the chuck gripping force that will actually be applied when
the spindle is rotated at the speed used for machining by using a
gripping force meter. If the measured chuck gripping force value is
lower than that required to hold the workpiece safely, change
machining conditions such as the chucking pressure, spindle
speed, feedrate, and depth of cut.
Periodically measure the chuck gripping force with a gripping force
meter to make sure that the required gripping force is maintained. If
it is not, consult the chuck manufacturer and cylinder manufacturer.
For details on the relationship between the spindle rotation speed
and chuck gripping force, refer to the instruction manuals prepared
by the chuck manufacturer and cylinder manufacturer.
For details of chuck gripping force, refer to the instruction manuals prepared by
the chuck and cylinder manufacturers.
10. Basic Pattern of Program
10.1 Chuck-Work Programming

When creating a part program for each tool (O.D. cutting tool, thread cutting tool etc.), the
following basic patterns are used.
O0001; Program number (This is specified only once at the beginning of all programs.)
N1; Sequence number (This is specified at the beginning of a part program.)
G50 S_ ; Specifies the maximum spindle speed for clamping. In the G96
(constant surface speed control) mode, spindle speed is clamped at
this speed if a command requiring a higher speed is specified.
G00 T0101 M41(M42, M43, M44);
Specifies the tool number, the tool offset number, and the spindle
speed range.
G96 S150 M03(M04); G96 specifies the cutting speed (150 m/min).
or,
G97 S150 M03(M04); G97 specifies the spindle or spindle 1 speed (150 min–1) and the
direction of rotation.
M03: Normal
M04: Reverse
(G00) X_ Z20.0 M08; Approach to the workpiece at a rapid traverse
Start of coolant supply
*
When specifying rapid approach to the workpiece, study
the workpiece shape carefully. For the approach in the
Z-axis direction, positioning must be made at a point
“chucking amount + 10 mm” away from the end face of
the workpiece.
G01 X_ Z_ F_ ; Approach to the workpiece at a cutting feedrate to ensure safety.
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; Escape from the machining area, stop of coolant supply
For I.D. cutting, determine the escape stroke depending
on the diameter having been machined. Note that the
escape U command must be specified as U–_.
X_ Z_ ; Move to a position where the turret head can be rotated.
M01; Optional stop
The part program same as *

Part programs are written for each tool.
M01; Optional stop

The spindle stop command (M05) is entered in the last part program.
M30; End of program
M41 to M44 commands can be specified only for the machine equipped with a
transmission.
10.2 Center-Work Programming
G00 T0101 M41(M42, M43, M44);
Specifies the tool number, the tool offset number, and spindle speed
range.
or,
G97 S150 M03(M04); G97 specifies the spindle speed (150 min–1) and the direction of
rotation.
M03: Normal
* M04: Reverse
Z_ M08; Approach to the workpiece (Z-axis direction)
X_ ; Approach to the workpiece (X-axis direction)
If the cutting tool might interfere with the center, stop the
... ... ... ... ... ...
rapid traverse at a safe point and continue the approach

at a cutting feedrate (G01). The feedrate for approach
should be a little faster than a cutting feedrate.
Machining program
G00 X_ M09; Escape along the +X-axis, stop of coolant supply

Z_ ; Move to a position where the turret head can be rotated.
M01; Optional stop

M01; Optional stop

The spindle stop command (M05) is entered in the last part program.
M30; End of program
transmission.
10.3 Both-Center-Work Programming
G00 T0101 M41(M42, M43, M44);
Specifies the tool number, the tool offset number, and spindle speed
range.
or,
G97 S150 M03(M04); G97 specifies the spindle speed (150 min–1) and the direction of
rotation.
M03: Normal
* M04: Reverse
Z_ M08; Approach to the workpiece (Z-axis direction)
X_ ; Approach to the workpiece (X-axis direction)
If the cutting tool might interfere with the center, stop the
... ... ... ... ... ...
rapid traverse at a safe point and continue the approach

at a cutting feedrate (G01). The feedrate for approach
should be a little faster than a cutting feedrate.
Machining program
G00 X_ M09; Escape along the +X-axis, stop of coolant supply

Z_ ; Move to a position where the turret head can be rotated.
M01; Optional stop

M01; Optional stop

The spindle stop command (M05) is used in the last part program.
M11; Chuck unclamp command; the STATUS indicator [ CHCL ] goes
off.
Before specifying the M30 command, execute
the M11 command. If the M11 command is not
executed and the ST (ST) switch is pressed
by mistake, automatic operation will start and
the operator may be injured. However, if the
workpiece is supported with the center at the
spindle side held by the chuck, do not use the
M11 command. If the M11 is specified in a
program when the center at the spindle side
is held by the chuck, the center will fall or
shift, which in turn will cause the workpiece
to fall, damaging the machine.
M30; End of program
transmission.
11. Cautions for Creating a Program
11.1 Program Number

This manual describes all program numbers in a four digit number. However, it is not
necessary to write or enter a program number in a four digit number. A program number
specified in less than four digit number is recognized and displayed in a four digit number
after it is input to the NC. If “O1” is entered, for example, it is recognized and displayed as
“O0001”.
An entry of a program number of five or more digits is not permitted.
11.2 Space between the Words in the Program

In this manual, a program is described in the manner as indicated below.
In line 1 , for example, a space is placed between

O0001; “G50” and “S2000”. When entering a program to
N1; the NC, the word-to-word space may not be
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 inserted.
G00 T0101;
When a program is input to the NC memory,
a space is automatically inserted.
Space
11.3 Signs and Symbols

A program is expressed in a combination of alphabetic letters, positive/negative (+/–)
signs, and numbers containing a decimal point. In addition to these, the end of block
symbol “;” and the block delete symbol “/” are used.
Block delete function:

If the block delete function is on, the commands beginning with the slash “/” are
ignored up to the end of block code “;” in the same block. The program is
continuously executed from the block not containing the slash.
If the block delete function is off, all blocks (even those preceded by a slash) are
executed.
The following signs and symbols are also used.
“,” “∗” “[ ]” “( )” “#” “@”
11.4 Inputting a Decimal Point

For an NC, it is possible to use a decimal point to enter numerical values. A decimal point
can be used to express the numerical values that have the unit of “distance”, “angle”,
“time”, or “speed”.
The addresses which allow the use of a decimal point are indicated below.
Distance or angle: X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, H, I, J, K, R, B
Time: U, X
Feedrate: F
If you forget to enter a decimal point in a program entry that

requires one and start the machine without noticing the error, the
turret may move to an unexpected position, damaging the machine.
Check that you have entered decimal points where necessary.
“mm” setting (specified by G21)
X1.0 . . . . . . X1 mm
X1 . . . . . . . X0.001 mm
(if a decimal point is not entered, it is assumed
that the value is specified in the unit of least input
increment.)
“inch” setting (specified by G20)
X1.0 . . . . . . X1 inch
X1 . . . . . . . X0.0001 inch
(if a decimal point is not entered, it is assumed
that the value is specified in the unit of least input
increment.)
1 There are limits in the usable units depending on addresses. Setting units are
“mm”, “inch”, “degree” and “second”.
X15.0 X15 mm or X15 inches

G04 U1.0 Dwell for 1 second
F10.0 10 mm/rev, 10 mm/min, 10 inch/rev, or 10 inch/min
2 In the case of a dwell command, a decimal point can be used when address X
is used. However, it is not allowed to use a decimal point if address P is used
since address P is also used to specify a sequence number.
1 To call for dwell for 1 hour, specify as
G04 U3600.0 (X3600.0);
(1 hour = 3600 seconds)
2 In a program, or in a block, it is allowed to specify the commands with and
without a decimal point.
X1000 Z23.7;
X10.0 Z22359;
11.5 Role of Decimal Point

The following shows how the tool paths are generated if a decimal point is omitted
mistakenly.
Use a decimal point carefully
The program to machine the workpiece shape as illustrated below

7 (G99) G00 X78.0 Z20.0 M08;
5 6 G01 Z1.0 F2.0;
4 3 X90.0 Z–5.0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . 3
2 1 Z–60.0;
C5
C5
60 X102.0 Z–66.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
∅ 100
X200.0 Z150.0;
∅ 90
...
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
If “X90” is entered for “X90.0” in block 3 , the resultant tool paths are generated as in the
illustration below.
7
5 C5 6
2 1
C5
60
∅ 100
∅ 90
4 3 Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Since the numerical value specified without a decimal point is regarded to have been set in
least input increment, “X90” is executed as “X0.09 mm”.
X1.0 = X1 mm
X1 = X0.001 mm
Therefore, use a decimal point when entering numerical values.
If you forget to enter a decimal point in a program entry that

requires one and start the machine without noticing the error, the
turret may move to an unexpected position, damaging the machine.
Check that you have entered decimal points where necessary.
12. JIS Specification and Reverse JIS Specification
This section explains items to be kept in mind when creating a program in the JIS
specification and in the reverse JIS specification.
The following summarizes the items which differ from the programming in the JIS
specification when a program is written in the reverse JIS specification.
1) For the X-axis commands, the positive/negative (+/–) sign is reversed.

Addresses for which the sign of the data is reversed: X, U, I
JIS Specification Reverse JIS Specification

X100.0 X–100.0
U10.0 U–10.0
I80.0 I–80.0
2) In the circular interpolation, G02 calls for rotation in the counterclockwise (CCW)
direction and G03 calls for rotation in the clockwise (CW) direction.

G02 CW CCW
G03 CCW CW
3) In the automatic tool nose R offset function (G41, G42), the offset direction is
reversed and command position of the imaginary tool nose differs.
<Offset direction>

Tool position is offset to the left side Tool position is offset to the right
of the tool paths in reference to the side of the tool paths in reference to
programmed tool moving direction. the programmed tool moving
Workpiece
direction.
G41 Tool moving
direction
Tool moving
direction Workpiece
Tool position is offset to the right Tool position is offset to the left side
side of the tool paths in reference to of the tool paths in reference to the
the programmed tool moving programmed tool moving direction.
direction. Workpiece
G42 Tool moving
direction
Tool moving
direction
Workpiece
<Imaginary tool nose position>

X+ X–
2 6 1 3 8 4
Actual Actual
0 tool 0 tool
7 5 nose 7 5 nose
R 9 R 9
3 8 4 2 6 1
Z+ Z+
7 8
6
1
R5 5
4 3 2
C5
30
∅ 100
∅ 90
∅ 60
∅ 50
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed

O0001; O0001;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
G42 X50.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 G41 X–50.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 Z2.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 G01 Z2.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Z–30.0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Z–30.0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

X60.0 Z–35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 X–60.0 Z–35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
X90.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 X–90.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
G03 X100.0 Z–40.0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 6 G02 X–100.0 Z–40.0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . 6
G40 G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 G40 G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
X150.0 Z100.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 X–150.0 Z100.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
M01; M01;
CHAPTER B
G FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the G functions.
The following G functions are only outlined in this chapter and they are explained in details
in Chapters E, G, H, and I, respectively.
– Section 10. “G40, G41, G42 Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset”: Chapter E
– Section 11. “G40, G41, G42 Cutter Radius Offset”: Chapter G
– Section 15. “G70 - G76 Multiple Repetitive Cycle”: Chapter H
– Section 16. “G80, G83 - G85, G87 - G89 Hole Machining Canned Cycles”: Chapter I
The examples of program given in this chapter all assume tool nose R0.
For the G codes not explained in this chapter, refer to the instruction manual
supplied by the NC unit manufacturer.
CONTENTS
B : G FUNCTIONS
1. G Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1
2. G00 Positioning the Cutting Tool at a Rapid Traverse Rate . . . . . . . . . . B–5
3. G01 Moving the Cutting Tool Along a Straight Path

at a Cutting Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–10
4. G02, G03 Moving the Cutting Tool Along Arcs

at a Cutting Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–12
5. G50 Setting the Spindle Speed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–14
6. G96 Controlling Spindle Speed

to Maintain Surface Speed Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–17
7. G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–19
8. G04 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–22
9. G98, G99 Setting Feedrate Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–24
10. G40, G41, G42 Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–28
11. G40, G41, G42 Cutter Radius Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–30
12. G32, G92 Thread Cutting

(Continuous Thread Cutting and Thread Cutting Cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–33
13. G32 Tapping (On the Center of Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–49

13.1 Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–50
13.1.1 Dwell Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–50
13.1.2 Precautions on Using the Tapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–50
13.1.3 To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole . . . B–51
14. G90, G94 O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle and Face Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . B–53
15. G70 - G76 Multiple Repetitive Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–56
16. G80, G83 - G85, G87 - G89 Hole Machining Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . B–58
17. G22, G23 Setting Barrier to Define the Tool Entry Inhibited Zone . . . . . B–63
18. G28 Returning the Axes to Machine Zero Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–66
19. G53 Selecting the Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–68
20. G54 - G59 Setting a Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–70
21. G38 Workpiece Pushing Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–73
22. G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–76
23. G12.1 (G112), G13.1 (G113)

Notching (Polar Coordinate Interpolation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–82
24. G479 Tailstock Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–85
APPENDIX 1 Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B–1

1.1 Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B–2
APPENDIX 2 G65 P9020/G65 P9021 Workpiece Transfer

Macro Program (MSD-501II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B–4
APPENDIX 3 G65 P9022 Workpiece Ejection

Macro Program (MSD-501II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B–12
G FUNCTIONS B–1
1. G Code List
G codes are also called preparatory functions. The G codes consisting of the address G
and a numerical value that follows address G define the machining method and the axis
movement mode in a specified block. The NC establishes the control mode in response to
the specified G code.
The numerical value following address G defines the commands written in that block.
Depending on how the G codes remain valid, they are classified into the following two
types:
Type Meaning
One-shot G code
(G codes in group 00, The G code is valid only in the specified block.
excluding G10 and G11)
Modal G code
The G code remains valid until another G code in the
(G codes in groups other
same group is specified.
than group 00)
For example, G00 and G01 are both modal codes, that is, they are G codes in the group
other than group 00.
G01 X_ Z_ ;
X_ ; G01 is valid in this range.
Z_ ;
G00 X_ Z_ ;
1 When specifying G codes in a block, they must be placed before the addresses
(other than G and M) which are executed under the mode they establish. If a
G code is specified after addresses for which it establishes the mode of
processing, the mode established by it is not valid to these addresses.
2 More than one G code, each belonging to a different G code group, may be
specified in the same block.
3 If more than one G code, belonging to the same group, are specified in a block,
the one specified later is valid.
4 If a G code not listed in the G code table or a G code for which the
corresponding option is not selected is specified, an alarm message (No. 010)
is displayed on the screen.
5 The NC establishes the G code modes, identified by the symbol, when the
power is turned on or when the RESET
(RESET) key is pressed.
Concerning G54, however, pressing the (RESET) key does not establish
RESET
the G code mode of them but the G code selected for each group remains
valid.
B–2 G FUNCTIONS
6 *1: Optional for the Y-axis specification.

*2: Standard for the MC type and the Y-axis specification.
*3: Standard for MSD-518 and MSD-501.
*4: Standard for MSC-518, MSD-518, and MSD-518II.
*5: Standard for the SL-S series.
*6: Optional for the MC type and the Y-axis specification.
*7: Standard for the SL and the SL-S series equipped with MC type and
Y-axis specification (excludes the SL-400, SL-600, SL-65, and SL-75).
*8: Standard for the Y-axis specification of the SL-S series. Note that the 3rd
zero point is used for the retract position of the X- and Y-axes when
moving spindle 2 (B-axis) and cannot be used for other purposes.
*9: Not available for the MSC-500.
*10: Standard for the SL-600 series.
*11: Standard for the MSD-501II of SL-S series.
*12: Optional for the SL-25E.
*13: Not available for the VL-25, the LL series and the MSC-500.
*14: Standard for the Y-axis specification.
*15: Optional for MSC-500 and MSC-501.
f : Standard : Option : Not available
Code Group Function Division
G00 Positioning f
G01 Linear interpolation f
G02 01 Circular interpolation/helical interpolation, CW (clockwise) f/ *1
Circular interpolation/helical interpolation, CCW f/ *1
G03
(counterclockwise)
G04 Dwell f
G07.1 *2
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) 00
G10 Data setting *3
G11 Data setting mode cancel *3
G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode *2
(G112)
21
G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel *2
(G113)
G17 XpYp plane Xp: X-axis or its parallel axis f
G18 16 ZpXp plane Yp: Y-axis or its parallel axis f
G19 YpZp plane Zp: Z-axis or its parallel axis f
G20 Data input in inch system f
06
G21 Data input in metric system f
G22 Stored stroke check function ON *3
09
G23 Stored stroke check function OFF *3
G FUNCTIONS B–3

G25 Spindle speed variation detection OFF *4
08
G26 Spindle speed variation detection ON *4
G27 Reference point return check f
G28 Reference point return f
G30 00 Second/third, fourth reference point return f/ *8
G30.1 Floating reference point return *9

G31 Skip function/Multi-step skip function f/
G32 Thread cutting f
G34 Variable lead thread cutting
01
G35 Circular thread cutting, CW (clockwise) *13
G36 Circular thread cutting, CCW (counterclockwise) *13
G38 00 Workpiece pushing check *5
G40 Tool nose radius offset cancel/Cutter radius offset cancel f/ *14
G41 07 Tool nose radius offset, left/Cutter radius offset, left f/ *14
G42 Tool nose radius offset, right/Cutter radius offset, right f/ *14
G50 00 Coordinate system setting/Spindle speed limit setting f
G50.2
Polygon cutting cancel *6
(G250)
20
G51.2
Polygon cutting *6
(G251)
G52 Local coordinate system setting f*12
00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection f*12
G54 Work coordinate system 1 selection f*12
14
G65 00 Macro call *11
G66 Macro modal call *11
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel *11
G70 Finishing cycle f
G71 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle/Pocket cutting f/f*12
G72 Rough facing cycle/Pocket cutting f/f*12
G73 00 Closed-loop cutting cycle f
G74 Face cut-off cycle, deep hole drilling cycle f
G75 O.D./I.D. grooving cycle, cut-off cycle f
G76 Multiple thread cutting cycle/Zigzag infeed mode f/f*9
B–4 G FUNCTIONS

G80 Hole machining canned cycle cancel *2
G83 Face hole machining cycle *2
G84 Hole Face tapping cycle *2
G85 10 machining Face boring cycle *2
G87 canned
d cycle
l Side hole machining cycle *2
G88 Side tapping cycle *2
G89 Side boring cycle *2
G90 O.D./I.D. cutting cycle f
G92 01 Simple thread cutting cycle f
G94 Face cutting cycle f
G96 Constant surface speed control f
02
G97 Constant spindle speed command f
G98 Feed per minute mode f
05
G99 Feed per revolution mode f
Turning on the tool life data registration mode
G334
(Tool life management B function) *15
Turning off the tool life data registration mode
G335
(Tool life management B function) *15
G336 Group command (Tool life management B function) *15

G337 Skip command (Tool life management B function) *15
State flag clear command *15
G338
(Tool life management B function)
Tool life management information reading command *15
G339
PMC address information reading command
G340 *15
G380 Synchronized tapping cycle cancel *7
G384 Synchronized tapping cycle *7
G479 Tailstock connect (only for the SL, TL and CL series) *10
G FUNCTIONS B–5
2. G00 Positioning the Cutting Tool at a Rapid Traverse Rate
By specifying the G00 command, all axis

movement commands are executed at the rapid
traverse rate. In other words, the cutting tool is
positioned at the programmed target point at a
rapid traverse rate.
The G00 mode is usually used for the following operations:
1) At the start of machining:

To move the cutting tool close to the workpiece.
2) During machining:
To move the cutting tool, retracted from the workpiece, to the next programmed target
point.
When moving the cutting tool at a rapid traverse rate during machining, make
sure that there are no obstacles in the tool paths.
3) At the end of machining:

To move the cutting tool away from the workpiece.
When setting the G00 mode approach to the workpiece, determine

the approach paths carefully, taking the workpiece shape and
cutting allowance into consideration. The approach point in the
Z-axis direction should be more than “chucking allowance +
10 mm” away from the workpiece end face.
When the spindle is rotating, centrifugal force acts on the chuck
jaws, reducing the chuck gripping force. This can cause the
workpiece to come out of the chuck.
Unless the approach point is at least “chucking allowance + 10 mm”
away from the workpiece end face, the cutting tool could strike the
workpiece while moving at the rapid traverse rate if the workpiece
does come out of the chuck, or if there is a large amount of material
to be removed. This could cause accidents involving serious
B–6 G FUNCTIONS
COMMAND
G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;

D G00 . . . . . . . . . Calls positioning at a rapid traverse rate.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the positioning target point at a rapid traverse
rate.
The coordinates are specified in absolute values.
D U, W . . . . . . . . . Specifies the positioning target point.
The coordinates are specified in incremental values in
reference to the present position.
1 If X- and Z-axis movements are specified in the same block in the G00
mode, the tool path is not always a straight line from the present position to
the programmed end point. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the
tool path, remembering that X- and Z-axis movement is at the rapid
traverse rate. If the workpiece, fixture or tailstock (if featured) lies in the
tool path, it could interfere with the tool, tool holder, or turret head.
Depending on the workpiece holding method, there could also be
interference with the chuck and chuck jaws. This interference will damage
the machine.
Page B–9
2 For center-work, move the Z-axis first and then the X-axis to position the
cutting tool at the approach point.
In the cutting tool retraction operation, retract the cutting tool in the X-axis
direction first to a point where continuing cutting tool movement does not
result in interference with the tailstock. After that, move the Z-axis to the
required retraction position. (Applies only to machines equipped with a
tailstock.)
Page B–9
G FUNCTIONS B–7
1 Once the G00 command is specified, it remains valid until another G code in
the same group is specified. G01, G02, and G03 are examples of G codes
which belong to the same group.
G codes which remain valid until another G code in the same group is specified
are called modal G codes.
For the G code groups, refer to page B–1 (1.).
2 The maximum rapid traverse rate varies among the machine models.
Page D–25 (3.4)
3 The rapid traverse rate is adjustable by using the rapid traverse rate override
switch on the machine operation panel.
4 If the rapid traverse rate override switch is set to “0” during automatic
operation, the programmed rapid traverse is not executed and the operation
enters the feed hold mode.
5 In a block where a T code is specified, G00 should be specified.
This G00 command is necessary to determine the cutting tool movement
feedrate to execute offset motion.
6 With the SL-400 and SL-600 series machines, if a T code is specified with G00
in the same block, the direction of the axis movement is automatically judged
whether it is away from or toward the workpiece from the remaining axis
movement distance. If the axis is going to move toward the workpiece, the
machine stops with an alarm message (No. 1320) displayed on the screen.
B–8 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G00
25
6
M60 P=2 5
5
2
C1.5 1
4
C1
3
∅ 54
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 at a rapid traverse rate to move
the cutting tool close to the workpiece
G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a cutting feedrate, the start
point of facing
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X50.0 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning from 3 to 4 at a rapid traverse rate to
execute O.D. cutting
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
Z–5.0;
X56.8;
X59.8 Z–6.5;
Z–23.0 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 5 to move the cutting tool away
from the workpiece at a rapid traverse rate
X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 6 where the turret head can be
rotated
M01;
The G00 mode is used to move the cutting tool close to and away from the
workpiece.
G FUNCTIONS B–9
If X- and Z-axis movements are specified in the same block in the G00 mode,
the tool path is not always a straight line from the present position to the
programmed end point. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the tool path,
remembering that X- and Z-axis movement is at the rapid traverse rate. If the
workpiece, fixture or tailstock (if featured) lies in the tool path, it could interfere
with the tool, tool holder, or turret head. Depending on the workpiece holding
method, there could also be interference with the chuck and chuck jaws. This
interference will damage the machine.
G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;
If the rapid traverse rates of X-axis and Z-axis are:

X-axis 18000 mm/min
Z-axis 24000 mm/min
The tool path generated by the simultaneous movement
X
of the two axes in the G00 mode is shown in the illustration. (18000)
Z (24000)
Therefore, the tool paths are generated as illustrated below depending on the positional
relationship between the start and target points.
Start point
Start point
Programmed Programmed
target point target point
For center-work, move the Z-axis first and then the X-axis to position the cutting
tool at the approach point.
In the cutting tool retraction operation, retract the cutting tool in the X-axis
direction first to a point where continuing cutting tool movement does not result
in interference with the tailstock. After that, move the Z-axis to the required
retraction position. (Applies only to machines equipped with a tailstock.)
2
B–10 G FUNCTIONS
3. G01 Moving the Cutting Tool Along a Straight Path at a Cutting

Feedrate
By specifying the G01 command, the cutting tool is

moved along a straight line to cut a workpiece.
The feedrate is specified with an F code by the

distance the cutting tool should be moved while the
spindle rotates one turn, or the distance to be
moved in a minute.
COMMAND
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;

D G01 . . . . . . . . . Calls the linear interpolation mode.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting target point.
D U, W . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting target point (distance and direction).
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate in ordinary control
D In the G99 mode, the feedrate is specified in “mm/rev”.
F0.2 . . . . . . 0.2 mm/rev
D In the G98 mode, the feedrate is specified in
“mm/min”.
F200 . . . . . 200 mm/min
1 Once the G01 command is specified, it remains valid until another G code in
the same group is specified. G00, G02, and G03 are examples of G codes
which belong to the same group.
G codes which remain valid until another G code in the same group is specified
are called modal G codes.
For the G code groups, refer to page B–1 (1.).
2 The cutting feedrate is adjustable by using the feedrate override switch on the
machine operation panel in the range of 0 to 150%.
3 The feedrate data is “0” until an F code is specified.
If an axis movement command is read before an F code is specified, the
machine does not operate. In this case, an alarm message (No. 011) is
displayed on the screen.
4 When the power is turned on, the NC is in the G99 (feed per revolution) mode.
G FUNCTIONS B–11
To move the cutting tool at a cutting feedrate along the paths 2 ³ 3 , and 4 ³
5 ³ 6 ³ 7 ³ 8 ³ 9 .
25
11
M60 P=2 5
10
9 8
7 2
5
C1.5 1
6
4
C1
∅ 54 3
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
point of facing
X30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facing at a feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
G00 X50.0 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning from 3 to 4 at a rapid traverse
rate, the start point of O.D. machining at a rapid
traverse rate
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 4 ³ 5 at a feedrate of
0.15 mm/rev
Z–5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 5 ³ 6 at a feedrate of
0.15 mm/rev
X56.8; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 6 ³ 7 at a feedrate of
0.15 mm/rev
X59.8 Z–6.5; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 7 ³ 8 at a feedrate of
0.15 mm/rev
Z–23.0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 8 ³ 9 at a feedrate of
0.2 mm/rev
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 10 at a rapid traverse rate to move
the cutting tool away from the workpiece
rotated
M01;
B–12 G FUNCTIONS
4. G02, G03 Moving the Cutting Tool Along Arcs at a Cutting

Feedrate
By specifying the G02, G03 command, the cutting

tool is moved along an arc to cut a workpiece.
COMMAND
G02(G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
G02
G02(G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ ;
D G02 . . . . . . . . . Calls the circular interpolation
mode in the clockwise direction.
D G03 . . . . . . . . . Calls the circular interpolation
G03
mode in the counterclockwise direction.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the end point of the arc.
D U, W . . . . . . . . . Specifies the end point of the arc (distance and direction).
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of the arc.
D I . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and the direction from the start point
of the arc to the center of the circle in the X-axis direction.
The value should be specified as a radius.
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and the direction from the start point
of the arc to the center of the circle in the Z-axis direction.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate in ordinary control
D In the G99 mode, the feedrate is specified in “mm/rev”.
F0.2 . . . . . . 0.2 mm/rev
D In the G98 mode, the feedrate is specified in
“mm/min”.
F200 . . . . . 200 mm/min
1 If an R command and a pair of I and K commands are specified in the same
block, the R command is given priority and the I and K commands are ignored.
2 For the arc whose central angle is larger than 180_, an R command cannot be
used.
In this case, use I and K commands to define the arc.
3 When I and K commands are used to specify the distance and direction to the
center of an arc while X and Z commands are omitted or the start and end
points lie at the same position, a full circle (360_) is defined. If an R command
is used instead of I and K commands, no axis movement results.
G FUNCTIONS B–13
4 To cut a half-circle accurately or to accurately define the center of an arc of

which the center angle is close to 180_, use I and K commands instead of an R
command.
If an R command is used, there are cases that the center of a half-circle or an
arc of which the center angle is close to 180_ cannot be set accurately due to
calculation error.
Programming using G02 or G03
To move the cutting tool at a cutting feedrate along the arc 2 ³ 3 .
R2 2 1
3
4 15°
5
6
Rapid traverse
∅ 32
∅ 44
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X47.069 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 to move the cutting tool close to
the workpiece
Z0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a feedrate of 0.2 mm/rev
G02 X43.205 Z–1.482 R2.0 F0.07; . . . Cutting an arc of 2 mm radius in the clockwise
direction at a feedrate of 0.07 mm/rev
G01 X32.0 Z–22.392; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 3 ³ 4 at a feedrate of
0.07 mm/rev
0.1 mm/rev
G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 6 at a rapid traverse rate to move
rotated
M01;
B–14 G FUNCTIONS
5. G50 Setting the Spindle Speed Limit
The spindle speed limit for an automatic operation

is set with the G50 command.
If the programmed spindle speed is faster than the

limit value set in the G50 block, actual spindle
speed is clamped at the set limit speed.
1 The spindle speed limit set using G50 must be no higher than
the lowest of the individual allowable speed limits for the
chuck, fixture, and cylinder. If you set a higher speed the
workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing serious injuries
2 In the G96 (constant surface speed control) mode, the spindle
speed increases as the cutting tool approaches the center of
the spindle.
allowable maximum speed of the machine. At this speed, the
chuck gripping force, cutting force, and centrifugal force cannot
be balanced to hold the workpiece securely in the chuck. As a
result, the workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing
The spindle speed limit must always be specified in a part
program by using the G50 command in a block preceding the
G96 block, in order to clamp the spindle speed at the specified
speed.
G FUNCTIONS B–15
COMMAND
G50 S_ ;
D G50 . . . . . . . . . Calls the mode to specify the spindle speed limit for
automatic operation.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed limit (min–1).
1 The setting of the spindle speed override switch (if there is one)
is valid even when a spindle speed limit is set using G50.
If the switch is set to 110% or 120%, for example, the
programmed spindle speed will be overridden in accordance
with this setting. If this causes the actual spindle speed to
exceed the allowable speed of the chuck, fixture, or cylinder,
the workpiece will fly out of the chuck during machining,
causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
Therefore, the spindle speed override switch must be set at
100% or lower.
2 When a G97 speed command is used in a program,
specification of the maximum speed with a G50 command will
be ignored. Therefore, when specifying the spindle speed with
a G97 command, specify a speed no higher than the lowest
speed among the allowable speed limits for the chuck, fixture,
and cylinder. If you set a higher speed the workpiece will fly
out of the machine, causing serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
An alarm message (No. 245) is displayed on the screen if a T command is

specified in the G50 block.
B–16 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G50 (Setting the spindle speed limit)
To move the cutting tool at a cutting feedrate along the path 2 ³ 3 to execute facing.
25
6
M60 P=2 5
5
2
C1.5 1
4
C1
3
∅ 54
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the spindle speed limit for automatic
operation at 2000 min–1
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the normal
direction; surface speed is 200 m/min
The spindle speed is controlled to maintain the
surface speed constant at 200 m/min.
point of facing
In order to maintain the surface speed constant,
the spindle speed increases as the cutting tool
moves closer to the workpiece center to reach the
allowable maximum speed of the machine.
However, since spindle speed limit is set at
2000 min–1 in the “G50 S2000”, the spindle speed
does not exceed this limit value.
G00 X50.0 W1.0;
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;

X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
G FUNCTIONS B–17
6. G96 Controlling Spindle Speed to Maintain Surface Speed

Constant
The G96 command is used to maintain surface

speed constant at the specified value.
The surface speed is also called the cutting speed.
It indicates the distance the cutting tool moves
along the workpiece surface (periphery) per
minute.
When the surface speed is specified with the G96
command, the spindle speed is automatically
controlled to maintain the surface speed constant
as the cutting diameter varies. This mode is used
to maintain the cutting conditions constant.
For example, if the cutting speed (V) is specified at 100 m/min to cut a 30 mm diameter
(D) workpiece, the spindle speed (N) is calculated as indicated below.
1000V
N =
π@D
1000 100
N =
3.14 30
1061 min–1
Therefore, the spindle rotates at 1061 min–1.
Generally, the standard cutting speed is determined according to the material of the
workpiece and the cutting tool, the workpiece shape, and the chucking method.
COMMAND
G96 S_ M03(M04);
D G96 . . . . . . . . . Calls the constant surface speed control mode.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting speed (m/min).
D M03(M04) . . . . Specifies spindle or spindle 1 rotation in the normal
(reverse) direction.
In the G96 (constant surface speed control) mode, the spindle

speed increases as the cutting tool approaches the center of the
spindle.
allowable maximum speed of the machine. At this speed, the chuck
gripping force, cutting force, and centrifugal force cannot be
balanced to hold the workpiece securely in the chuck. As a result,
The spindle speed limit must always be specified in a part program
by using the G50 command in a block preceding the G96 block, in
order to clamp the spindle speed at the specified speed.
B–18 G FUNCTIONS

To move the cutting tool at a cutting feedrate along the path 2 ³ 3 to execute facing.
25
6
M60 P=2 5
5
2
C1.5 1
4
C1
3
∅ 54
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
direction; surface speed is 200 m/min
The spindle speed is controlled to maintain the
surface speed constant at 200 m/min.
1000V 1000 200
N= = 1137 (min–1)
π@D 3.14 56
At this position, the spindle or spindle 1 rotates at
1137 min–1 in the normal direction.
G01 Z0 F1.0;
1000V 1000 200
N= = 2123 (min–1)
π@D 3.14 30
At this position, the spindle or spindle 1 should
rotate at 2123 min–1 to provide the surface speed
of 200 m/min. However, since the spindle speed
limit of 2000 min–1 is set in the “G50 S2000”, the
spindle speed does not exceed this limit value.
G00 X50.0 W1.0;
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
...
Machining program
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
G FUNCTIONS B–19
7. G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed
The G97 command is used to call the mode in

which a constant spindle speed is maintained.
During automatic operation, the spindle rotates at

the programmed speed.
1000V
N=
π@D
N: Spindle speed (min–1)
V: Cutting speed (m/min)
D: Cutting diameter (mm)
π: Circumference constant
The G97 command must be specified for thread cutting operation and turning drilling
operation at the center of workpiece end face.
During thread cutting operation, the thread is cut gradually by changing the cutting
diameter for each thread cutting path while maintaining the start point of the thread.
Therefore, if the spindle speed is not kept constant, the start point shifts in each
thread cutting cycle making thread cutting impossible or tipping the tool nose.
The G97 mode is also specified for carrying out copy turning on straight bar
workpiece.
COMMAND
G97 S_ M03(M04);
D G97 . . . . . . . . . Calls the constant spindle speed command mode.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the spindle speed (min–1).
When a G97 speed command is used in a program, specification of

the maximum speed with a G50 command will be ignored.
Therefore, when specifying the spindle speed with a G97 command,
specify a speed no higher than the lowest speed among the
allowable speed limits for the chuck, fixture, and cylinder. If you set
a higher speed the workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing
B–20 G FUNCTIONS
When the spindle speed control mode is switched from the G96 mode to the G97
mode, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the spindle speed obtained
in the block immediately preceding the G97 block is used as the spindle speed for
the G97 mode operation.
Therefore, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the spindle speed for
the G97 mode will depend on the position of the cutting tool in the block preceding
the G97 block, and this could adversely affect machining accuracy and shorten the
life of the tool.
When switching the spindle speed control mode to the G97 mode, always specify a
spindle speed.
G FUNCTIONS B–21
To execute O.D. thread cutting
4
M60 P=2 1
3
2
24
Rapid traverse
∅ 57.4
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S640 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 at 640 min–1 in the
normal direction
X70.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z5.0 F1.0 M24; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the G92 thread
cutting cycle.
G92 X59.4 Z–24.0 F2.0;
X58.9;
X58.5;
X58.1; . . . . . Execution of the G92 thread cutting cycle
X57.8; ( 1 ³ 2 ³ 3 ³ 4 ³ 1 )
X57.56;
X57.36;
X57.26;
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 5 where the turret head can be
rotated
M05;
M30;
B–22 G FUNCTIONS
8. G04 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell)
The G04 command is used to suspend program

execution during automatic operation for the period
specified in the program.
This function is called the dwell function, and is
used in operation such as the grooving operation.
If dwell is specified at the bottom of the groove, the
tool stops moving. The spindle keeps rotating
while the tool stays at the bottom of the groove.
By rotating the spindle one turn while locating the tool at the bottom of the groove, the
groove profile accuracy is improved and uncut portion is eliminated. The dwell function is
also used for opening and closing the chuck when the machine is equipped with the air
blow, the bar feeder or the loader.
When executing a dwell using the G04 command, if the cutting tool is kept in
contact with the workpiece at a position such as the bottom of a groove for a long
time it will shorten the life of the tool nose as well as adversely affecting machining
accuracy.
COMMAND
G04 X_ ;
G04 U_ ;
G04 P_ ;
D G04 . . . . . . . . . Calls the dwell function.
D X, U . . . . . . . . . Specifies the period in which the program execution is
suspended. The dwell period should be specified in units
of seconds with a decimal point.
X1.0 (U1.0) . . . 1 sec
X1 (U1) . . . . . . 0.001 sec
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the period in which the program execution is
suspended. The dwell period should be specified in units
of 0.001 second without a decimal point.
P1000 . . . . . . . 1 sec
1 A decimal point cannot be used when address P is used.
Dwell for 1.5 seconds . . . . . . . . G04 P1500;
Dwell for 2.3 seconds . . . . . . . . G04 P2300;
2 Programmable dwell period is 0.001 to 99999.999 seconds.
3 The dwell function is valid only in the specified block.
4 Dwell period per revolution of the spindle is calculated as follows:
60 (sec)
t (sec) =
Spindle speed (min–1)
5 An alarm message (No. 245) is displayed on the screen if a T command is
specified in the G04 block.
G FUNCTIONS B–23
To cut a 3 mm wide groove.
2
3 1
C0.5 6 M60 P=2
5
4 7
C1
22
25
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
∅ 69
∅ 56
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the spindle speed limit at 1500 min–1 for
automatic operation to ensure safety
G00 T0101;
direction at cutting speed of 100 m/min
X70.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 to move the cutting tool close to
the workpiece at a rapid traverse rate
G01 Z–26.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 , the start point of grooving at a
cutting feedrate
X68.0 Z–25.0 F0.07; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 2 ³ 3 at a feedrate of
0.07 mm/rev
X56.0 F0.1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 3 ³ 4 at a feedrate of
0.1 mm/rev
G04 U0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspending program execution for 0.2 seconds at
the bottom of the groove to allow spindle to rotate
one turn
Spindle speed at 4
1000V 1000 100
N= = 569 (min–1)
π@D 3.14 56
Period required for the 60
= 0.11 (sec)
spindle to rotate one turn 569
To suspend program execution at the groove
bottom for more than one turn of the spindle, dwell
period is determined to 0.2 seconds.
The following program may be used instead
of “G04 U0.2;”
G04 X0.2; or G04 P200;
G00 X60.8
...
Machining program
M01;
B–24 G FUNCTIONS
9. G98, G99 Setting Feedrate Units
Axis feedrate units are determined by specifying

the following two G codes:
G98
The G98 command calls the mode in which

axis feedrates specified by F codes are
interpreted in units of mm per minute. This
mode is used when the bar feeder, the pull-out
finger, or the rotary tool is used.
G99
The G99 command calls the mode in which

the axis feedrates specified by F codes are
interpreted in units of mm per revolution.
This mode is used for general turning

operations such as O.D. cutting, I.D. cutting,
and thread cutting.
In the G98 mode, the turret moves at the feedrate specified by the F code even
when the spindle is not rotating. Make sure that the cutting tool will not strike
the workpiece, etc., since this could damage the machine.
G98;
G01 Z_ F100.0; . . . . The cutting tool moves at a rate of 100 mm/min even
when the spindle is not rotating.
COMMAND
G98; . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate per minute (mm/min)
G99; . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate per revolution (mm/rev)
1 The G98 and G99 commands are modal.

Therefore, once the G98 command is specified, it remains valid until the G99
command is specified, or vice versa.
2 When the power is turned on, the G99 mode (feedrate per revolution) is set.
G FUNCTIONS B–25
To execute O.D. cutting in the G99 mode
25
6
M60 P=2 5
5
2
C1.5 1
4
C1
3
∅ 54
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
(G99;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Since the G99 command is specified, the F codes
are interpreted in units of “mm/rev”.
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X50.0 W1.0;
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
Z–5.0;
X56.8;
X59.8 Z–6.5;
Z–23.0 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
B–26 G FUNCTIONS
To use the pull-out finger for bar machining operation in the G98 mode
Always specify an M05 command to stop spindle rotation before using a

pull-out finger or workpiece pusher, etc. If spindle rotation is not stopped the
machine could be damaged.
The workpiece is pulled out of the chuck with the pull-out finger mounted in the turret head
while the spindle rotation is stopped.
G00 (rapid traverse)

3 2
4
G98 (feedrate per minute) Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101 M05;
X0 Z20.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a rapid traverse rate to grip the
workpiece
G98; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing the “mm/min” mode
In the following blocks, the F codes are all
interpreted in the unit of “mm/min”.
G01 Z–60.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 3 at 500 mm/min to grip the
workpiece (bar stock)
M11; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unclamping of the chuck
G04 U2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell for 2 seconds to ensure unclamping of the
chuck
The dwell period should be a little longer
than the time required for the chuck to
operate (open, close) to ensure safe
operation.
Z–10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 4 at 500 mm/min to pull out the bar
stock from the chuck
M10; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamping of the chuck
G04 U2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell for 2 seconds to ensure clamping of the
chuck
The dwell period should be a little longer
than the time required for the chuck to
operate (open, close) to ensure safe
operation.
G FUNCTIONS B–27
G00 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a rapid traverse rate to release

the bar stock from the pull-out finger
X200.0 Z50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 where the turret head can be
rotated
G99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the G99 (mm/rev) mode
In the following blocks, the F codes are all
interpreted in the unit of “mm/rev”.
M01
N2;
(G99;)
G00 T0202;
G96 S120 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
B–28 G FUNCTIONS
10. G40, G41, G42 Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset
The tool nose does not have a sharp edge but is

rounded as illustrated on the left. Therefore, the
point of the tool nose used for programming is
offset from the actual cutting point. The tool nose
radius offset function is used to eliminate
R dimensional errors caused by this difference.
If taper or arc cutting is programmed without taking

Programmed point Actual cutting point into consideration the tool nose radius, overcut or
undercut will occur.
R: Tool nose radius
The G41 and G42 commands are specified in a
program to automatically eliminate this overcut or
undercut by offsetting for the tool nose radius.
For details on the automatic tool nose radius offset (G40, G41 and G42), refer
to Chapter E, “AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET”.
COMMAND
G01(G00) G41 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G42 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G40 X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
D G01(G00) . . . . Calls the interpolation mode in which the tool nose radius
offset function is specified.
G00 . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . Cutting feed
D G41 . . . . . . . . . Calls the tool nose radius offset (left) function.
The tool position is offset to the left in reference to the tool
advancing direction.
D G42 . . . . . . . . . Calls the tool nose radius offset (right) function.
The tool position is offset to the right in reference to the
tool advancing direction.
D G40 . . . . . . . . . Cancels the tool nose radius offset function.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
D I, K . . . . . . . . . . The direction of the workpiece shape defined in the
following block. The I and K commands are specified in
incremental values (I: in radius).
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate
G42
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Tool advancing direction
Workpiece
Tool advancing direction ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

G41
G FUNCTIONS B–29
Programming using G40, G41, and G42

The program is rewritten below using the automatic tool nose R offset function.
25
11
M60 P=2 5
10
9 8
7 2
5
C1.5 1
6
4
C1
∅ 54
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
G42 X56.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 at a rapid traverse rate to move
Since the automatic tool nose radius offset (right)
function is called by the G42 command, the NC
enters the automatic tool nose radius offset mode
from this block.
G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a cutting feedrate while the tool
position is offset to the right
G41 X30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facing at a feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
Since the tool position must be offset to the left for
this facing operation, the G41 command is
specified.
G42 G00 X50.0 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning along path 3 ³ 4 at a rapid traverse
rate to execute the O.D. cutting
Since the tool position must be offset to the right
for the following O.D. cutting operation, the G42
command is specified.
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving along path 4 ³ 5 at a cutting feedrate
while the tool position is offset to the right
Z–5.0;
X56.8;
X59.8 Z–6.5;
Z–23.0 F0.2;
G40 G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 10 to move the cutting tool away
from the workpiece
The G40 command cancels the automatic tool
nose radius offset mode.
X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
B–30 G FUNCTIONS
11. G40, G41, G42 Cutter Radius Offset
The cutter radius offset means shifting of the tool paths to the right or left by the radius
from the programmed paths.
For details of the G40 - G42 commands (cutter radius offset), refer to Chapter
G, “CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET”.
The cutter radius offset function can be used only for models with the Y-axis
specification. This function cannot be used for other machine models.
Generally, when cutting a pocket or carrying out contouring operation using an end mill,
the cutter radius offset function is used to finish the workpiece in the shape specified in the
drawing.
How the shape in Fig. 1 is finished using the cutter radius offset function is briefly
explained below.
3 4 Specify the required shape to be finished in the

program:
1 ³ 2 ³ 3 ³ 4
Workpiece
1
Fig. 1
3 4 Since the center of a cutting tool moves along the

defined paths, the cutting tool moves along the
paths shown in Fig. 2 if the program is created
without using the cutter radius offset function.
2
The workpiece is finished to the shape indicated by
Workpiece broken line in Fig. 2, which is smaller than the
required shape indicated in Fig. 1 by the radius of
the cutting tool.
1
Fig. 2
Tool
G FUNCTIONS B–31
To shift the tool path from the programmed path,

input the radius of the cutter tool for “R” at the tool
3 4
geometry offset data setting screen.
If the cutter radius offset function is used, the tool

2 paths are shifted outside from the programmed
Workpiece paths by the input offset amount as shown in Fig. 3
to finish the required shape.
In this manner, by shifting the tool paths from the

1 programmed paths by using the cutter radius offset
Fig. 3
function, it is not necessary to obtain the
coordinate values using complicated calculation to
generate the tool paths to finish the workpiece to
the required shape.
B–32 G FUNCTIONS
COMMAND
1. Cutter radius offset in the XY plane
G17 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Y_ F_ ;

G40 G01(G00) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
2. Cutter radius offset in the YZ plane
G19 G01(G00) G41(G42) Y_ Z_ F_ ;

G40 G01(G00) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
D G17, G19 . . . . . . Selects the plane where cutter radius offset is executed.
D G01(G00) . . . . . . Selects the interpolation mode in which the cutter radius
offset function is executed.
G00 . . . . . . . . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . . . . . . . . Cutting feed
D G41 . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset mode <G41>
(offset to the left). Workpiece
The tool paths are

generated by shifting the
programmed paths to the
left in reference to the tool
advancing direction by the
specified offset amount.
D G42 . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius
offset mode (offset to the
right). Tool advancing direction
The tool paths are

Workpiece
generated by shifting the
<G42>
right in reference to the tool
D G40 . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels the cutter radius offset mode.
D X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
D I, J, K . . . . . . . . . . The direction of the workpiece shape defined in the
following block. The I, J, and K commands are
specified in incremental values.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate.
G FUNCTIONS B–33
12. G32, G92 Thread Cutting (Continuous Thread Cutting and Thread
Cutting Cycle)
The G32 command is used to execute the thread

4 cutting from point 2 to point 3 .
1
In thread cutting operation, threads are not cut in a

single path of thread cutting. They are formed by
3 2
repeating the thread cutting path several times
while changing the cutting position.
<O.D. thread cutting cycle>
If the G32 command is used, tool path 1 ³ 2 ,
2 ³ 3 , 3 ³ 4 , and 4 ³ 1 , must be specified
repeatedly for each operation.
4 1
The G92 command generates one cycle of thread
cutting paths 1 ³ 2 ³ 3 ³ 4 . Therefore, in
the G92 mode, the thread cutting cycle is repeated
3 2
by simply specifying the diameter where the cycle
is to be executed.
Rapid traverse
Generally, thread cutting is executed in the G92
Cutting feed
mode.
COMMAND
1. Standard format (setting made before shipping the machine)
<Straight thread cutting>
G32 Z(W)_ F_ Q_ ;
G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ Q_ ;
<Tapered thread cutting>
G32 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ Q_ ;

G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
<Scrolled thread cutting on face>
G32 X(U)_ F_ Q_ ;
2. F15 format
<Straight thread cutting>
G32 Z(W)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ Q_ ;
<Tapered thread cutting>
G32 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;

G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ F_ ;
<Scrolled thread cutting on face>
G32 X(U)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;

B–34 G FUNCTIONS
D G32 . . . . . . . . . Calls the thread cutting operation.

D G92 . . . . . . . . . Calls the thread cutting cycle.
D X . . . . . . . . . . . . (G32) Specifies the X coordinate of the thread cutting end
point.
(G92) Specifies the diameter at which the first thread
cutting cycle is executed.
D Z . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the Z coordinate of the thread cutting end point.
D U, W . . . . . . . . . (G32) Specifies the distance and direction from the start
point to end point of thread cutting.
(G92) Specifies the distance and direction from the start
point to end point of thread cutting cycle.
D R, I . . . . . . . . . . Specifies tapered size in the X-axis direction. It is specified
using a signed value in radius.
D F, E . . . . . . . . . . Specifies thread lead.
D Q . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle of shift of the thread cutting start angle.
The angle should be specified in the units of 0.001 degrees
without a decimal point.
Q1000 . . . . . . . . . . . 1_
1 Specify address Q when cutting multi-start threads.
2 Specify address Q for all blocks where multi-start thread is cut. If address Q is
omitted, shift angle of thread cutting start angles is 0_.
3 A decimal point is not accepted with address Q.
Shift angle 90_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q90000
Shift angle 180_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q180000
4 Programmable range of address Q value is from 0 to 360000.
<Straight thread> <Tapered thread> <Scroll thread>
+X +X
W W
F U/2
U/2
U/2 X/2
Z R
X/2
X/2
+Z Z
+Z
G FUNCTIONS B–35
1) Incomplete thread portion

At the start and end of an axis feed, an axis drive servo motor is automatically
accelerated or decelerated. Consequently, inaccurate thread leads are generated
where thread cutting starts and ends. These areas are referred to as incomplete
thread portions.
To explain incomplete thread portions more

completely, thread cutting from point A to
B A
point B is used as an example.
When thread cutting starts from point A, axis
feed is accelerated causing incomplete
thread portion for L1. Similarly, incomplete
thread portion is generated for L2 because
axis feed is decelerated at point B.
Therefore, to obtain the thread length of L, it L2 L L1
is necessary to carry out thread cutting in
the range of (L1 + L + L2).
End of thread cutting Complete thread portion Start of thread cutting
L2 L L1
B–36 G FUNCTIONS
2) Calculating the incomplete thread portion

The incomplete thread portions are calculated using the following formula.
Approximation Formula Description

L1: Incomplete thread portion
(at the start of thread cutting) (mm)
N @ P@ A
L1 L1 > L2: Incomplete thread portion
1800
(at the end of thread cutting) (mm)
P: Lead (mm)
N@P 1
L2 L2 > A = ln –1
1800 Thread accuracy
(ln: Natural logarithm)
Thread accuracy
∆LT (error in lead) 1/50 1/100 1/200 1/300
=
L
A 2.91 3.61 4.29 4.70
In actual programming, the incomplete thread portions should be taken a little larger
than the calculated lengths to avoid interference between the cutting tool and the
workpiece and to allow for margin for safety.
If the tailstock is used for machining a workpiece, pay sufficient care to avoid
interference between the cutting tools or tool holders and the tailstock body, the
tailstock spindle or the tailstock spindle center. (Applies only to machines
equipped with a tailstock)
3) Precautions on thread cutting operation
When the emergency stop button or (RESET) key has been pressed to
RESET
stop the machine during a threading operation, carefully feed the axes after
checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you feed the
axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere
with each other, and this could damage the machine.
1 The feedrate (lead) during thread cutting is limited by the value calculated in
the following formula.
R N: Spindle speed (min–1)
Pv
N R: Maximum cutting feedrate (mm/min)
(Note that maximum cutting feedrate
varies among machine models.)
P: Lead (mm)
The lead calculated above is the theoretical value. Depending on the

machining conditions, load will become excessive causing a servo alarm or the
thread lead cannot be machined accurately. Therefore, it is necessary to
determine the machining conditions to meet actual machining status.
G FUNCTIONS B–37
2 During the thread cutting operation, the feedrate override* setting is ignored.
* Override: The feedrate override function is used to change the feedrate
with the switch on the operation panel.
3 Thread cutting must be executed while the spindle rotates at a fixed speed.
Therefore, specify the G97 command to make spindle speed constant.
4 To execute chamfering of the thread in the G32 mode, specify thread
chamfering using U and W incremental commands in the 45_ direction
following the thread cutting block. Chamfer distance must be sufficient to clear
the thread height.
5 During continuous thread cutting operation, do not change the thread lead.
If the thread lead is changed, incorrect thread is generated at the portion
between the blocks.
6 If the SP
(SP) switch is pressed Stop point
(the cutting tool stops at this position
while in the G92 thread cutting if the feed hold switch is pressed)
cycle, the cutting tool immediately
retracts from the workpiece along
the chamfering path and returns
to the start point in the order of
the X-axis and the Z-axis. End point Start point
This function is called the retract The feed hold switch is pressed
when the tool is at this position
function.
Normal tool path
7 If the SP
(SP) switch is pressed
while in the G32 thread cutting Tool retraction paths
(after the pressing of the feed hold switch)
cycle, execution of the program is
suspended in the feed hold mode
after the execution of the
non-thread cutting block
appearing first following the
present thread cutting mode
blocks.
...
X29.4;
G32 Z–52.0 F2.0; . . . The SP
(SP) switch is pressed during the execution of
this block.
G00 X60.0; . . . . . . . . Feed hold after the completion of this block
Z10.0;
...
8 The cutting feedrate specified in a program is ignored and the thread cutting is
carried out at the feedrate set with the OVERRIDE dial (0 to 1260 mm/min in
15 steps) if the dry run function is made valid.
B–38 G FUNCTIONS
4) Depth of Cut and Number of Passes for Thread Cutting

The total depth of cut includes the
Radius for
Ordinary tip finishing allowance of 0.1 to 0.2 mm,
minimum pitch
which is shown in the illustration in the
Thread
left, so that the data can be used for
thread cutting operation using the tip with
Crest of threads flat drag.
Ordinary tip (face finished in the
preceding process) Since the tip size of a tip with flat drag is
Radius which
Tip with flat drag corresponds smaller than that of an ordinary tip, it is
to pitch
recommended to select smaller depth of
Thread
H0 H cut while increasing the number of passes
to avoid elastic deformation of the tip
nose as well as chipping of the tip.
Finishing Tip with flat drag Crest of threads
Face finished in the allowance (to be finished by the
preceding process 0.1 – 0.2 thread cutting tip)
Depth of Cut and Number of Passes for Cutting ISO O.D. Thread (Reference)
Pitch 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
H 0.38 0.56 0.76 0.95 1.14 1.33 1.52 1.89 2.28 2.65 3.03 3.41 3.79
H0 0.32 0.47 0.63 0.79 0.95 1.11 1.27 1.58 1.90 2.21 2.53 2.85 3.16
R 0.06 0.09 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.22 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.44 0.50 0.56 0.63
1 0.15 0.18 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.35 0.35 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.45
2 0.12 0.12 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
3 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
4 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
5 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25
6 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
7 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20
8 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20
9 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20
10 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15
11 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15
12 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.15
13 0.10 0.10 0.10
14 0.05 0.10 0.10
15 0.10 0.10
16 0.05 0.10
17 0.10
18 0.05
19
20
G FUNCTIONS B–39
5) Basic profile and dimensions and dimensional deviations of taper pipe threads
(Extract from JIS B 0203-1982)
Basic Profile Applied for Taper External Basic Profile Applied for Parallel Internal
and Taper Internal Threads Threads
H’
6
r r’
h
2
h
2
H
2
h
H’
27.5_ 27.5_ 27.5_ 27.5_
h
r r’
h
2
H
55_ 55_
h
2
H’
6
H
2
D1
D2
P
D
90_ 90_
Axis of thread Axis of thread

1
16
Thick continuous line shows basic profile. Thick continuous line shows basic profile.
25.4 25.4
P= P=
n n
H = 0.960237 P H’ = 0.960491 P
h = 0.640327 P h = 0.640327 P
r = 0.137278 P r’ = 0.137329 P
Fit between Taper External Thread and Taper Internal or Parallel Internal Thread
Parallel internal thread
l’
D
D2
D1
Position of gauge plane
Taper internal thread

D
D2
D1
Taper internal thread

D
D2
t
D1
a f
Taper external thread

d2
d1
d
B–40 G FUNCTIONS
Unit: mm
Designation Thread Gauge dia. Position of gauge plane Tolerance Length of useful thread (min.) Size of carbon
of thread D D2
on D, steel pipe for
Number Pitch Height Radius External thread External thread Internaland D1 of External Internal thread ordinary piping
of P of r thread parallel thread (Given for
threads (Given for thread or internal reference)
(in 25.4 reference) h r’ Major dia. Pitch dia. Minor dia. From pipe end A+ pipe thread From When there is When
mm) d d2 d1 end " position incomplete there is no
n of thread part incomplete
gauge thread part
plane
Internal thread Gauge Axial tol- Axial tol- toward Taper Parallel Taper
length erance erance larger internal internal internal
a "b "c dia. end thread thread thread,
f parallel
internal
thread
Major dia. Pitch dia. Minor dia. From From end From Outside Thick-
D D2 D1 position of pipe or gauge dia. ness
of gauge coupler plane or
plane l’ end of
toward (Given pipe or
smaller for refer- coupler
dia. end ence) t
l
R 1/16 28 0.9071 0.581 0.12 7.723 7.142 6.561 3.97 0.91 1.13 0.071 2.5 6.2 7.4 4.4 –– ––
R (PT) 1/8 28 0.9071 0.581 0.12 9.728 9.147 8.566 3.97 0.91 1.13 0.071 2.5 6.2 7.4 4.4 10.5 2.0
R (PT) 1/4 19 1.3368 0.856 0.18 13.157 12.301 11.445 6.01 1.34 1.67 0.104 3.7 9.4 11.0 6.7 13.8 2.3
R (PT) 3/8 19 1.3368 0.856 0.18 16.662 15.806 14.950 6.35 1.34 1.67 0.104 3.7 9.7 11.4 7.0 17.3 2.3
R (PT) 1/2 14 1.8143 1.162 0.25 20.955 19.793 18.631 8.16 1.81 2.27 0.142 5.0 12.7 15.0 9.1 21.7 2.8
R (PT) 3/4 14 1.8143 1.162 0.25 26.441 25.279 24.117 9.53 1.81 2.27 0.142 5.0 14.1 16.3 10.2 27.2 2.8
R (PT) 1 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 33.249 31.770 30.291 10.39 2.31 2.89 0.181 6.4 16.2 19.1 11.6 34 3.2
R (PT) 1 1/4 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 41.910 40.431 38.952 12.70 2.31 2.89 0.181 6.4 18.5 21.4 13.4 42.7 3.5
R (PT) 1 1/2 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 47.803 46.324 44.845 12.70 2.31 2.89 0.181 6.4 18.5 21.4 13.4 48.6 3.5
R (PT) 2 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 59.614 58.135 56.656 15.88 2.31 2.89 0.181 7.5 22.8 25.7 16.9 60.5 3.8
R (PT) 2 1/ 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 75.184 73.705 72.226 17.46 3.46 3.46 0.216 9.2 26.7 30.1 18.6 76.3 4.2
2
R (PT) 3 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 87.884 86.405 84.926 20.64 3.46 3.46 0.216 9.2 29.8 33.3 21.1 89.1 4.2
R (PT) 4 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 113.030 111.551 110.072 25.40 3.46 3.46 0.216 10.4 35.8 39.3 25.9 114.3 4.5
R (PT) 5 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 138.430 136.951 135.472 28.58 3.46 3.46 0.216 11.5 40.1 43.5 29.3 139.8 4.5
R (PT) 6 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 163.830 162.351 160.872 28.58 3.46 3.46 0.216 11.5 40.1 43.5 29.3 165.2 5.0
1 In the Designation of thread column, the symbol given in parentheses is not the
one stipulated by the main part of the Standard, but the one stipulated by
Annex. This symbol will be repealed in the future.
2 Concerning PT3 1/2 and PT7 to PT12, they are not given in the table above
since they are not stipulated by ISO 7/1.
3 Concerning values of “a”, “f”, and/or “t”, if the values specified in the table
greatly differ from those stipulated in the standard specific to the part to be
machined or those specified in the drawing, use the values stipulated in the
standard specific to the part to be machined or those specified in the drawing.
G FUNCTIONS B–41
Programming using G32 or G92 (Straight thread cutting)
Thread size M30
Lead 2 mm
Material AISI 1045

(Carbon steel)
4 1
3
2
∅ 30
∅ 60
L1 Rapid traverse
L2 50
Cutting feed
<Determining the spindle speed>
Limits due to the workpiece and cutting tool
1000V 1000 120 V: Cutting speed (m/min)

– N= =
π⋅D 3.14 30 π: Circumference constant
= 1274 (min–1) P: Thread diameter (mm)
Thread cutting is carried out at 1200 min–1.
The above numerical values are only for reference. Depending on the selected
cutting conditions, the cutting load may become excessive. If a servo alarm
occurs, change the cutting conditions.
<Calculating the incomplete thread portions>
N@P@A 1200 2.0 3.61

– L1 > = = 4.8 mm
1800 1800
N@P 1200 2.0

– L2 > = = 1.3 mm
1800 1800
If “thread accuracy = 1/100”
Page B–36
When writing a program, L1 and L2 should be longer than the calculated theoretical
values. Therefore, L1 and L2 should be set to 10 mm and 2 mm, respectively.
B–42 G FUNCTIONS
The thread cutting programs in the G32 mode and in the G92 mode are compared below.
<Program in the G32 mode> <Program in the G92 mode>
O0001; O0001;
N1; N1;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G97 S1200 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . G97 S1200 M03; . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1
in the normal direction at
1200 min–1
X60.0 Z20.0 M08; X60.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z10.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . G01 Z10.0 F1.0 M24; . . . . Positioning at point 1 , the
thread cutting start point
G00 X29.4; . . . . . . . . . 2 G92 X29.4 Z–52.0 F2.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the thread cutting
operation
G32 Z–52.0 F2.0; . . . 3 • X29.4 . . . . . Diameter where
the first thread
cutting cycle is
executed
G00 X60.0; . . . . . . . . . 4 • Z–52.0 . . . . Z coordinate of
the thread
cutting end point
Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 • F2.0 . . . . . . Lead
X28.9; X28.9;
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X28.5; X28.5;
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X28.1; X28.1;
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.8; X27.8;
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.56; X27.56;
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
G FUNCTIONS B–43
X27.36; X27.36;
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.26; X27.26; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter where the final thread
cutting cycle is executed
G32 Z–52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09; G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at a point at a rapid
traverse rate where the turret
head can be rotated
M01; M01;
1 The program written in four lines, in the G32 mode, is expressed by the
commands in one line in the G92 mode.
2 In the G92 thread cutting cycle, whether the chamfering is executed or not can
be selected using the M23 and M24 commands.
For details of the M23 and M24 commands, refer to page C–30 (7.).
Generally, the start point (X coordinate) for thread cutting is taken at a point
more than one pitch away from the thread cutting diameter.
For I.D. thread cutting, the cutting tool may interfere with the workpiece when
the I.D. is small if the start point is taken in the manner as indicated above. In
this case, determine the start point where interference does not occur.
For details of depth of cut and number of passes, refer to page B–38. Note that the
values given in this table are only for reference.
For programming, these values should be determined according to actual
machining status. The finished thread should be checked using the thread gage.
B–44 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G32 or G92 (Tapered thread cutting (R2 1/2))
R
2
∅ 75.76
∅ 75.88
∅ 74.09
∅ 73.59
∅ 80
∅d
a Rapid traverse
L2=2 26.66 L1=8 Cutting feed
<Determining the spindle speed>

a 17.46
1000V 1000 100
– N= = f 9.2
π⋅D 3.14 75
= 424 (min–1) d dia. 75.184
Thread cutting is executed at spindle speed of P (lead) 2.3091

420 min–1. h (thread height) 1.479
t (taper size) 1/16
(Material: AISI 1045 (Carbon steel),
Cutting feedrate: 100 m/min)
For the numerical values given above, refer to page B–39.
When machining the taper pipe threads not described in the above example,
refer to page B–39 to find the reference dimension and create the program.
The above numerical values given above are only for reference. Depending on the
selected cutting conditions, the cutting load may become excessive. If a servo
alarm occurs, or if the thread lead cannot be machined correctly, change the cutting
conditions.
<Calculating incomplete thread portions>
N@P@A 420 2.3091 3.61
– L1 > = = 1.95 mm
1800 1800
N@P 420 2.3091

– L2 > = = 0.54 mm
1800 1800
Page B–36
For L1, it is recommended to select a multiple of “8”, because the taper size is
“1/16”.
G FUNCTIONS B–45
<Program in the G32 mode> <Program in the G92 mode>

O0001; O0001;
N1; N1;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G97 S420 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G97 S420 M03;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle
1 in the normal direction at
420 min–1
X80.0 Z20.0 M08; X80.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z8.0 F1.0; G01 Z8.0 F1.0 M23;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 , the
thread cutting start point
G00 X73.59; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 G92 X75.88 Z–28.66 R–1.15 F2.3091;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the thread cutting
operation
G32 X75.88 Z–28.66 F2.3091; 3 • X75.88 . . . . . Diameter where
G00 X80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 the first thread
Z8.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 cutting cycle is
X72.59; X74.88; executed
G32 X74.88 Z–28.66; • Z–28.66 . . . . Z coordinate of
G00 X80.0; the thread
Z8.0; cutting end
X71.59; X73.88; point
G32 X73.88 Z–28.66; • R–1.15 . . . . . Taper size
G00 X80.0; (distance in the
Z8.0; X-axis
X70.7; X72.99; direction)
G32 X72.99 Z–28.66;
8.0 + 26.66 + 2.0
G00 X80.0; R=– = –1.15
32
Z8.0;
X70.64; X72.93; . . . . . . . . Diameter where the final thread
G32 X72.93 Z–28.66; cutting cycle is executed
G00 X80.0;
Z8.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at a point at a rapid
traverse rate where the turret
head can be rotated
M01; M01;
1 In the example program above, the diameter where the first thread cutting
cycle is executed is specified in the outside diameter of the workpiece. In
actual programming, the diameter of the first thread cutting path including the
depth of cut must be specified.
2 The depth of cut and the number of passes adopted to the example program
above are only for reference. For programming, these values should be
determined according to actual machining status. The finished thread should
be checked using the thread gage.
For the sign (+, –) to be used for the R command, refer to the table given in
page B–54.
B–46 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G32 (Scrolled thread cutting)
1 For the scrolled thread cutting operation on face, the G92 (constant surface
speed control) mode cannot be used. Therefore, cutting resistance is applied
to the cutting tool.
Determine the spindle speed assuming thread cutting at the middle of the
varying diameters.
2 In the G92 mode, scrolled thread cutting is not executed.
Lead : 3 mm
Material : AISI 1045 (Carbon steel)
L1 2 1
4
L2 3 20
∅ 106
∅ 100
∅ 70
80 Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
<Determining the spindle speed (Cutting feedrate: 100 m/min)>

– N = 1000V = 1000 100
= 374 (min–1)
π⋅D 3.14 85
Thread cutting is executed at spindle speed of 370 min–1.
The above numerical values given above are only for reference. Depending on the
selected cutting conditions, the cutting load may become excessive. If a servo
alarm occurs, or if the thread lead cannot be machined correctly, change the cutting
conditions.
G FUNCTIONS B–47
<Calculating incomplete thread portions>
N @ P@ A 370 3.0 3.61

– L1 > = = 2.23 mm
1800 1800
N@P 370 3.0

– L2 > = = 0.62 mm
1800 1800
Page B–36
The thread is cut eleven times as depth of cut per thread cutting is 0.1 mm.
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
direction at 370 min–1
X106.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point for thread cutting,
at a rapid traverse rate
Z–0.35; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Starting the thread cutting operation
G32 X68.0 F3.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 D Z–0.35 . . . . . Z-axis position of the first thread
cutting path
G00 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 D X68.0 . . . . . . The end point of thread cutting
X106.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 D F3.0 . . . . . . . . Thread lead
Z–0.65; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the second thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–0.9; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the third thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–1.1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the fourth thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
B–48 G FUNCTIONS
Z–1.3; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the fifth thread cutting path

G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–1.45; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the sixth thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–1.6; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the seventh thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–1.75; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the eighth thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–1.85; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the ninth thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–1.95; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the tenth thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z–2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis position of the eleventh thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0 M09;
G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at a point where the turret head can be
rotated, at a rapid traverse rate
M30;
G FUNCTIONS B–49
13. G32 Tapping (On the Center of Spindle)
The G32 command is used to execute a tapping cycle at the center of the spindle
(workpiece).
A tapper should be used when executing tapping by specifying the G32 command.
COMMAND
G32 Z(W) _ F_ ;
D G32 . . . . . . . . . Calls the tapping operation.
D Z . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the Z-coordinate of the tapping end point.
D W . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the start point to
the end point of tapping.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the lead of thread to be cut (mm).
For the tapping cycle called by G32, a tapper is used. In this case, the return
movement of the Z-axis from the bottom of the machined hole is made with the
tapper extended. Therefore, the position where the Z-axis reaches in the return
movement must be determined taking into consideration the extending length of
the tapper. If the return point is determined without taking this length into
consideration, the tapping tool and the workpiece may collide or interfere with
each other when the tapping tool moves to the next machining position, and the
collision or interference could cause damage to the machine.
1 The spindle speed must be kept constant during the execution of a tapping
cycle. Therefore, specify the G97 command to keep spindle speed constant.
2 During the execution of a tapping cycle called by G32, feedrate override and
spindle speed override values are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread
cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed is changed during the tapping cycle.
3 The cycle does not stop until the Z-axis returns to the specified return point
even if the SP
(SP) switch is pressed during the execution of a tapping cycle.
4 In a tapping cycle called by G32, the spindle must be stopped at the bottom of
the machined hole. To extract the tapping tool from the machine hole, specify
M04 when cutting a right-hand thread or M03 when cutting a left-hand thread.
5 Specify the pitch of the tap to be used for address F.
B–50 G FUNCTIONS
13.1 Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32
13.1.1 Dwell Command
The following explains in what situation the dwell command should be used in the G32
tapping cycle.
Dwell To Be Specified Not Required

Blind hole Through hole
Tap hole shape
Tapper Built-in depth sizing device No special restriction

Tapper is pulled into the hole Tapper is extended from the feed
from the feed stop point of Z-axis stop point of Z-axis.
by the amount of tapper Tapper has allowance to extend
extension. When the tapper is 20 to 30 mm. But, actual
Tapper extension extended by the set amount, the extension amount cannot be
amount depth sizing device built in the judged.
tapper functions and rotation is
not transmitted to the tap, then
tapping of specified depth is
carried out.
13.1.2 Precautions on Using the Tapper
When carrying out tapping in a through hole, extension of tapper tip at the hole bottom can
be ignored. However, in the case of a blind hole, if the tapper should extend beyond the
depth of the prepared hole, it will cause the tap to be damaged.
To avoid such a problem, use the tapper with built-in depth sizing device for tapping a blind
hole.
G FUNCTIONS B–51
The following distances of F1, F2, and F3 are specified in the catalog of the tapper with
built-in depth sizing device.
F3 F2 F1
Necessary if the tap fails to be engaged with the workpiece

F1 Contraction
positively at the start of tapping.
Extension amount at the hole bottom. This is an extension
F2 Extension amount amount of a tapper in normal spindle rotation (for right-hand
thread) or reverse rotation (for left-hand thread).
For right-hand thread: This is an extension amount of
a tapper when the tapping tool
leaves the workpiece while
the spindle is rotating in the reverse
Extension amount
direction.
F3 when the tap is
For left-hand thread: This is an extension amount of
pulled out
a tapper when the tapping tool
leaves the workpiece while the
spindle is rotating in the normal
direction.
13.1.3 To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole
When machining a threaded hole with the tapper equipped with depth sizing device, obtain
the Z-axis return point and the point of the hole bottom to be specified in a program in the
manner indicated below.
The explanation given below shows the theoretical value. The depth of tapped hole
will vary depending on workpiece material and prepared hole diameter in actual
operation.
– Z-axis return point
Z > F2 + F3
– Hole bottom position
Z = – (Depth of tapping specified in the drawing – F2 + length of tap engaging length)
F2: Extension amount in normal rotation (right-hand thread),

extension amount in reverse rotation (left-hand thread)
F3: Extension amount in reverse rotation (right-hand thread),

extension amount in normal rotation (left-hand thread)
B–52 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G32 (Tapping)
To carry out tapping of M8, P = 1.25, and 20 mm deep at the center of the spindle
(workpiece) in the G32 mode.
Prepared hole: 6.8 mm dia., depth 30 mm
Tapper to be used: F2 (extension amount in normal rotation) = 5 mm,
F3 (extension amount in reverse rotation) = 7 mm
Length of engaging length: 5 mm
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S300 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle in the normal direction at 300 min–1
X0 Z15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at (X0, Z15.0) at a rapid traverse rate
G32 Z–20.0 F1.25; . . . . . . . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G32)
D Z–20.0 . . . . . . . Z = – (“Depth of tap” – F2 +
“Tap engaging length”)
= – (20 – 5 + 5)
= – 20 (mm)
D F1.25 . . . . . . . Pitch 1.25 mm
G04 U0.8; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell at the bottom of the hole to allow the tapper
to extend F2 (extension amount in normal
rotation) set by the depth sizing device
60 (sec) F2
D U0.8 . . . . . . . . . Dwell =
F S
60 5
=
1.25 300
= 0.8 (sec)
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle
Z15.0 M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle in the reverse direction and
returning the tool to Z15.0
D Z15.0 . . . . . . . . Z > F2 + F3
F2 + F3
= 5 + 7 = 12 (mm)
Since a value greater than
“12” must be set for Z,
“Z15.0” is specified in the
program.
Tapping cycle is executed in this block too since G32
is modal.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; . . . . Moving to the position where the turret head can
be rotated at a rapid traverse rate
...
G FUNCTIONS B–53
14. G90, G94 O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle and Face Cutting Cycle
The G90 and G94 commands are used to call the cycles which simplify programming for
straight and tapered cutting on O.D., I.D. and end face.
G90 O.D./I.D. cutting cycle

G94 Face cutting cycle
Usually, these cycle are not used.
For details of the functions called by the G90 and G94 commands, refer to the
instruction manual supplied by the NC manufacturer.
COMMAND
<Straight cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;

G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
<Tapered cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;

G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
<Straight cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
<Tapered cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ F_ ;

G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ K_ F_ ;
D G90, G94 . . . . Calls the O.D./I.D. cutting cycle or the face cutting cycle.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specify the coordinate values of the end point of cutting
cycle.
D U, W . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the cutting cycle
start point to the cutting cycle end point.
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . (G90) Specifies the distance of taper in the X-axis
direction (signed, in radius).
(G94) Specifies the distance of taper in the Z-axis
direction (signed).
D I . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance of taper in the X-axis direction
(signed, in radius).
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance of taper in the Z-axis direction
(signed).
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate.
B–54 G FUNCTIONS
W W
U/2 U/2
Z Z
X R
+Z +Z
X Rapid traverse
–X
Cutting feed
–X
<Straight cutting> <Taper cutting>
U/2
U/2
Z R W
+Z +Z
X Z X
Rapid traverse
–X
–X Cutting feed
<Straight facing> <Taper facing>
1) Signs for U, W, and R (for O.D./I.D. cutting cycle)

In incremental programming, the relative position of the tool paths defined in relation
to the workpiece is determined by the plus or minus sign preceding the U, W and R
commands. The relationship is summarized below:
(1) U < 0, W < 0, R < 0 (2) U > 0, W < 0, R > 0
+X +X
W
+Z +Z
R
U/2
U/2
R
W
(3) U < 0, W < 0, R > 0 (RvU/2) (4) U > 0, W < 0, R < 0 (RvU/2)
+X +X
W
+Z +Z
R
U/2 U/2
R
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
G FUNCTIONS B–55
2) Signs for U, W, and R (for face cutting cycle)

In incremental programming, the relative position of the tool paths defined in relation
to the workpiece is determined by the plus or minus sign preceding the U, W and R
commands. The relationship is summarized below:
(1) U < 0, W < 0, R < 0 (2) U > 0, W < 0, R < 0
+X +X
R W
+Z +Z +Z
U/2 U/2
R W
(3) U < 0, W < 0, R > 0 (RvW) (4) U > 0, W < 0, R > 0 (RvW)
+X R +X W
+Z +Z
U/2 U/2
R
W
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
B–56 G FUNCTIONS
15. G70 - G76 Multiple Repetitive Cycle
The multiple repetitive cycles simplify the programs for rough and finish cutting processes
on O.D. and I.D.
For example, by defining only the workpiece finish shape, the tool paths for executing
rough cutting operation are automatically generated.
The table below shows the list of the multiple repetitive cycles. For details on
the G codes used to call the multiple repetitive cycles, refer to the Chapter H
“MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES”.
G70 Finishing cycle for G71 to G73

G71 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle/Pocket cutting
G72 Rough facing cycle/Pocket cutting
G73 Closed-loop cutting cycle
G74 Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle, deep hole drilling cycle
G75 O.D./I.D. grooving cycle, cut-off cycle
G76 Multiple thread cutting cycle/Zigzag infeed mode
1 Pocket cutting is optional for the SL-25E.

2 Zigzag infeed mode for thread cutting cannot be used if the NC model is
MSC-500.
COMMAND
(Example: G71 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle)
G71 U(1) R_ ;
G71 P_ Q_ U(2) W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
D G71 . . . . . . . . . Calls the O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle.
D U(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies depth of cut (in radius).
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the retract amount.
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the sequence number of the first block of the
blocks that define the finish shape of the workpiece.
D Q . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the sequence number of the last block of the
D U(2) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the finishing allowance in the X-axis direction (in
diameter).
D W . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed.
In the G96 mode: The value specifies cutting speed
(m/min)
In the G97 mode: The value specifies spindle speed
(min–1).
D T . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a tool number and an offset number in a four digit
number.
G FUNCTIONS B–57
If F, S or T is not specified, the command which has been specified preceding the
G71 block is valid.
7
6 2 1
3
4
30
40
∅ 100
∅ 70
∅ 50
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X102.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 Z2.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G71 U2.0 R0.5;

1)
G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.2;
2) N100 G00 X50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G01 Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
X70.0 Z–40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3) N200 X102.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G00 X150.0 Z100.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
M01;
1) The G71 rough cutting cycle is executed.
D U2.0 . . . . . . . . . Depth of cut: 2 mm (in radius)
D R0.5 . . . . . . . . . Retract amount: 0.5 mm
D P100 . . . . . . . . Sequence number of the first block of the finish shape defining
blocks: N100
D Q200 . . . . . . . . Sequence number of the last block of the finish shape defining
blocks: N200
D U0.3 . . . . . . . . . X-axis finishing allowance: 0.3 mm (in diameter)
D W0.1 . . . . . . . . Z-axis finishing allowance: 0.1 mm
D F0.2 . . . . . . . . . Feedrate: 0.2 mm/rev
2) to 3)
The blocks from sequence number N100 to N200 define the finish shape. These
blocks are executed at S100 (100 m/min) and F0.2 (0.2 mm/rev).
B–58 G FUNCTIONS
16. G80, G83 - G85, G87 - G89 Hole Machining Canned Cycles
Hole machining operation is programmed using several blocks of commands.

A hole machining canned cycle allows hole machining operation which requires several
blocks of commands to be programmed using one block of commands including an
appropriate G code.
For details of the hole machining canned cycles, refer to Chapter I “HOLE
MACHINING CANNED CYCLE”.
1 Hole machining canned cycles can be used only with the MC type or Y-axis
specification machines. With the models other than MC type and Y-axis
specification, these cycles cannot be used.
2 With the SL and SL-S series (excludes the SL-25E, the SL-400 and the
SL-600), the synchronized face tapping cycle (M329 G84) can be optionally
used for models other than MC type and Y-axis specification. Note that this
cycle can be used only at the center of the spindle.
3 With the CL series, the synchronized face tapping cycle (M329 G84) can be
optionally used. Note that this cycle can be used only at the center of the
spindle.
G FUNCTIONS B–59
Basic Pattern of Hole Machining Canned Cycle

Basic command format and movement of the hole machining canned cycle are explained
below:
<Movement>
– Face hole machining canned cycle A hole machining canned cycle consists of
(G83 - G85) movements 1 to 6 shown in the diagram.
Z0
–Z +Z In the cycle called by G83 to G85, the Z-axis is

used as the hole machining axis while the X-axis is
Point R Movement 1 used as the hole machining axis in the cycle called
Movement 3 Movement 2
by G87 to G89. With the exception of the
Movement 4
difference in the hole machining axis, movements
Movement 5 Movement 6 Initial point 1, 2 and 6 are common to all types of hole
X0
machining canned cycles.
Movements 3 to 5 vary according to respective

Rapid traverse
canned cycles.
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse or For a hole machining canned cycle, “initial
cutting feed
point” and “point R” indicate the following
positions:
– Side hole machining canned cycle
(G87 - G89) – Initial point . . . The position where a
Rapid traverse
hole machining canned
Cutting feed
cycle starts
Rapid traverse or
Movement 1 Initial point cutting feed – Point R . . . . . . The position where hole
machining (axis feed at
cutting feedrate) cycle
Point R Z0 starts
+X
Movement 4
X0
–X
Movement 1: Positioning at the hole machining start position
Movement 2: Moving to point R at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 3: Hole machining (Hole machining is carried out.)
Movement 4: Movement at hole bottom
Specify dwell if necessary.

B–60 G FUNCTIONS
Movement 5: Returning to point R level
Whether the Z-axis return movement is executed at a rapid

traverse rate or cutting feedrate is determined by the G code
specified for calling the hole machining canned cycle.
Movement 6: Positioning at initial point at rapid traverse rate
COMMAND
1. Face hole machining canned cycle
G83 - G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_

R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G83 - G85 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_
R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G80;
D G83 - G85 . . . . Calls a face hole machining canned cycle.
Operation mode from movement 3 to movement 5 is
determined according the specified G code.
D G80 . . . . . . . . . Cancels a hole machining canned cycle.
D X, C, Y . . . . . . . Absolute command
Specifies the hole machining positions. (Movement 1)
D U, H, V . . . . . . . Incremental command
Specifies the distance and direction of the hole machining
position in reference to the previous block. (Movement 1)
D Z . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute command
Specifies the hole bottom.
D W . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental command
Specifies the distance and direction of the hole bottom in
reference to the point R.
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental command
Specifies the distance and direction of the point R in
reference to the initial point.
D Q . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies depth of cut per one infeed motion (G83).
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the period of dwell function executed at the hole
bottom.
P1500 ³ 1.5 sec
G FUNCTIONS B–61
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of repetitions.

K1 . . . . . . . . . . . . At the position specified in the
block containing K1, hole
machining cycle is executed once.
(Omissible)
K2 to K9999 . . . At the position specified in the
block containing a K command,
hole machining cycle is repeated by
the specified number of times.
D (M68) . . . . . . . . Spindle or spindle 1 brake clamp (C-axis clamp or C-axis
clamp of spindle 1)
Specify M68 to carry out heavy-duty cutting.
COMMAND
2. Side hole machining canned cycle
G87 - G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_

R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G87 - G89 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_
R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G80;
D G87 - G89 . . . . Calls a side hole machining canned cycle.
D Z, C, Y . . . . . . . Absolute command
D W, H, V . . . . . . Incremental command
D X . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute command
D U . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental command
B–62 G FUNCTIONS

bottom.
P1500 ³ 1.5 sec
(Omissible)
clamp of spindle 1)
1 In the F15 format, use address L to specify the number of repetitions.

2 When the M68 command (spindle or spindle 1 brake clamp (C-axis clamp or
C-axis clamp of spindle 1)) is specified, M68 is output before the start of
operation 2 and M69 (spindle or spindle 1 brake unclamp (C-axis unclamp or
C-axis unclamp of spindle 1)) is output at the completion of operation 5.
Dwell is executed for the time set for parameter No. 5111 after that.
G FUNCTIONS B–63
17. G22, G23 Setting Barrier to Define the Tool Entry Inhibited Zone
The function called by executing the G22 and G23

command is called the stored stroke check
function.
When G22 command is executed, if a cutting tool

enters to the pre-defined zone, the alarm message
is displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
The G22 mode can be canceled by executing the

G23 command.
To eliminate interference between the cutting tool

and the chuck or a workpiece, set the tool entry
inhibited zone using the G22 command.
The G22 and G23 commands are optional

for MSC-500, MSC-501, MSC-518,
MSG-501, MSD-501II, and MSD-518II.
COMMAND
G22 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ;
G23_ ;
D G22 . . . . . . . . . Turns on the stored stroke check function.
D G23 . . . . . . . . . Turns off the stored stroke check function.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the point where the tool
entry inhibited zone begins.
To define the zone, use the distance from the machine zero
point. That is, specify the coordinate values in the machine
coordinate system which are displayed on the screen.
D I, K ......... Specifies the coordinate values of the point where the tool
entry inhibited zone ends.
To define the zone, use the distance from the machine zero
point. That is, specify the coordinate values in the machine
coordinate system which are displayed on the screen.
(X,Z)
(I, K)
<Tool entry inhibited zone>
B–64 G FUNCTIONS
When using the stored stroke limit function, always execute a machine zero
return operation after switching the power ON, otherwise the function will not be
valid. If the machine is operated in this condition it will not stop even if the
cutting tool enters the inhibited zone, and this could damage the machine.
1 When specifying the values for X, Z, I, and K to define the tool entry inhibited
zone, the following rule must be followed.
D X > I, Z > K
D X – I > 2 mm, Z – K > 2 mm
To set the zone as illustrated below, for example:
(X100.0, Z–40.0)
+X
+Z
(I80.0, K–80.0)
D X100.0 > I80.0 D 100.0 – (80.0) = 20.0 > 2 mm

D Z–40.0 > K–80.0 D –40.0 – (–80.0) = 40.0 > 2 mm
The above indicated conditions are satisfied and the required zone may be set.
2 The tool entry inhibited zone is established “outside” or “inside” the specified
zone. Where the tool entry inhibited zone is set “outside” or “inside” is
determined by the setting for parameter No. 1300.0.
3 The G22 and G23 commands must be specified in a block without other
commands.
4 If the same values are set for “X_ Z_” and “I_ K_” following the G22 command,
the tool entry inhibited zone is not set.
5 Tool entry inhibited zone specified with G22 is set in parameters.
The value set in parameters are not lost even if the power is turned off.
Accordingly, unless canceled by G23, the G22 function is valid when the power
is turned on.
If a cutting tool enters the tool entry inhibited zone specified with G22, an alarm is
displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
In this case, the cutting tool can be moved only in the opposite direction in which
the cutting tool has been moved.
The alarm state can be cleared by pressing the (RESET) key on the
RESET
operation panel after moving the cutting tool outside the tool entry inhibited zone
manually.
G FUNCTIONS B–65
Programming using G22 and G23
To set the zone as illustrated below.
(X100.0, Z–40.0)
+X
(I80.0, K–80.0)
+Z
O0001;
N1;
G00 G28 U0 W0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of the X- and Z-axes
G22 X100.0 Z–40.0 I80.0 K–80.0; . . . . Setting the tool entry inhibited zone as illustrated
above
G50 S2000;
T0101;
... ... ...
Machining program
G23; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the tool entry inhibited zone

...
B–66 G FUNCTIONS
18. G28 Returning the Axes to Machine Zero Automatically
The G28 command is used to automatically return

the axes specified in the G28 block to the machine
zero point after positioning it at the specified
intermediate point at a rapid traverse rate.
This command is used if the tool and/or tool holder

interferes with the workpiece, chuck, or fixture
while the turret is rotating, for mounting/removing a
workpiece, or for removing chips.
COMMAND
G28 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;

D G28 . . . Calls the machine zero return mode. G28 X100.0 Z50.0;
D X, Z . . . Specifies the axes which should Machine zero point

be returned to the machine
zero point. (absolute command)
Numerical values specified
following the address X and Z
indicate the coordinate values Intermediate point
(X100.0 Z50.0)
of the intermediate point.
D U, W . . . Specifies the axes which
should be returned Present position
to the machine
zero point. (incremental command)
Numerical values specified following the address U and W
indicate the distance and direction to the intermediate
point.
Specify “G28 U0 W0;” to return the axes from the present position to the
machine zero point by using the G28 command. If “G28 X0 Z0;” is specified,
the axes first move to the workpiece zero point before returning to the machine
zero point causing interference between the tool and the workpiece, which
could cause damage to the machine.
Machine zero point
G28 X0 Z0;
G28 U0 W0;
When the G28 command is specified, the tool offset and the automatic tool nose R
offset functions are canceled.
G FUNCTIONS B–67
45.2
25
2 Machine zero point
∅ 102
∅ 140
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
... ... ...
Machining program
(G01) X102.0 Z–45.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting up to 1
G28 X140.0 Z–25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning of the X- and Z-axes to the machine

zero point after positioning to the intermediate 2
(X140.0, Z–25.0) at a rapid traverse rate
M01;
B–68 G FUNCTIONS
19. G53 Selecting the Machine Coordinate System
The machine coordinate system means the coordinate system having its origin at the
machine zero point of X- and Z-axes.
It is possible to move a cutting tool to a fixed position at rapid traverse by specifying the
G53 command. Also specify the G53 command to retract the turret to the turret rotation
position before finishing the machining.
The G53 command is optional for the SL-25E.
The machine coordinate values of the axes can be confirmed by the present
position (machine coordinate) displayed on the screen.
COMMAND
G53 X_ Z_ ;
D G53 . . . . . . . . . Selects the machine coordinate system.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values in the machine coordinate
system.
1 The G53 command is a “00” group command.
The G53 command is one-shot code. It is valid only in the specified block.
2 The G53 command is valid in the absolute programming mode. If it is specified
in the incremental programming mode, it is ignored.
3 Before specifying the G53 command, cancel the automatic tool nose radius
offset mode.
G FUNCTIONS B–69
To write a program assuming that the turret head rotation position is (X–50.0, Z–60.0) in
the machine coordinate system.
Machine zero point

Turret head rotation position
50 mm (in diameter)
60 mm
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 U1.0 Z10.0 M09;

G53 X–50.0 Z–60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tool at the position, –50 mm in the
X-axis direction and –60 mm in the Z-axis direction
M01;
B–70 G FUNCTIONS
20. G54 - G59 Setting a Work Coordinate System
The work coordinate system has its origin at the workpiece zero point (X0, Z0).
The G codes (G54 to G59) are used to continuously carry out the first process and the
second process operation.
The G54, G55, G56, G57, G58 and G59 commands are optional for the SL-25E.
For actual operation procedure, refer to the OPERATION MANUAL separately

provided.
COMMAND
G54(G55, G56, G57, G58, G59) X_ Z_ ;

D G54 - G59 . . . . Select a work coordinate system.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the point where
positioning should be made in the selected work coordinate
system (workpiece zero point).
When the power is turned on or when the (RESET) key is pressed, the G54
RESET
work coordinate system is selected automatically.
Programming positioning using a work coordinate system (G54 to G59)
To carry out continuous operation of the first and second processes using the same chuck
jaws and the same O.D. cutting tool.
1st process 2nd process
Workpiece zero point for G54 Workpiece zero point for G55
∅ 100
∅ 100
∅ 70
2
10 2
G FUNCTIONS B–71
<Preparation>
Temporary zero point 1 Set the temporary zero point for the first
process on the workpiece end face using the
tool geometry offset function and the tool wear
offset function.
Workpiece zero point for G54 2 Input the distance (2.0 mm) from the
workpiece zero point in the G54 work
coordinate system to the temporary zero
point, measured along the Z-axis, to “Z” of 00
(EXT) displayed on the WORK
2
COORDINATES screen.
The data input for “00 (EXT)” displayed on

the WORK COORDINATES screen is
applied to all the work coordinate systems
called by the G54 to G59 commands.
In this example, the offset data for “00
(EXT)” is used without using the offset data
for the G54 work coordinate system.
This is to make the “2.0 mm” offset data
valid for the G55 work coordinate system as
well.
3 Second process
Workpiece zero point for G55 Input the sum of the Z-axis distance from the
workpiece zero point of G55 to the workpiece
end face (2.0 mm) and the chuck jaw shift
amount (10.0 mm) to “Z” of “02 (G55)” in the
WORK COORDINATES screen.
10 2
B–72 G FUNCTIONS
O0001;
N1;
G54; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the G54 work coordinate system
Although the offset data for the G54 work
coordinate system is “0”, this call has the
following effect:
– To use the offset data set for “00 (EXT)”
in the WORK COORDINATES screen
– If the N1 block is called while the blocks
following the N2 block are executed, the
N1 program is executed in the G55
work coordinate system if the G54
command is not specified in the N01
block.
Therefore, specifying the G54 command in
this block is necessary to ensure a safe
operation.
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the turret to index No. 1 tool
The workpiece zero point for the G54 work
coordinate system is set by adding all the following
offset data: tool offset data for No. 1 tool, tool
offset data for the G54, and the offset data set for
“00 (EXT)” in the WORK COORDINATES screen.
... ... ...
Machining program
M00; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the operation

Change or turn the workpiece.
N2;
G50 S2000;
The workpiece zero point for the G55 work
coordinate system is set by adding all the following
offset data: tool offset data for No. 1 tool, offset
data for the G55, and the offset data set for data
set for “00 (EXT)” in the WORK COORDINATES
screen.
... ... ...
Machining program
M30;
G FUNCTIONS B–73
21. G38 Workpiece Pushing Check
The G38 command is specified when transferring

the workpiece clamped in chuck 1 to chuck 2.
In the workpiece transfer operation, when the

position error of the B-axis servo motor of spindle
2 reaches the parameter set value, the workpiece
is judged to have been brought into contact with
the reference face of chuck 2. Then, chuck 2 is
clamped and the program advances to the next
block.
1 The G38 command can be specified only with the SL-S series.
2 With the SL-S series machine equipped with the Y-axis, return the Y-axis and
then the X-axis to the respective 3rd zero point when moving spindle 2 (B-axis)
for transferring a workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2. If spindle 2 (B-axis) is
moved although both the Y- and X-axes not returned to the 3rd zero point, the
machine stops with the corresponding alarm message displayed on the screen.
After returning spindle 2 (B-axis) to the machine zero point on completion of
workpiece transfer, return the X- and Y-axes to the respective machine zero
point in this order.
COMMAND
G38 B(J, V)_ K_ F_ Q_ ;

D G38 . . . . . . . . . Workpiece pushing check command
D B . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute command
Specify the B-coordinate of workpiece transfer position on
the work coordinate system.
D J . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental command
Specify the distance and direction of the workpiece transfer
position in reference to the preset position.
D V . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate value on the machine coordinate system
Specify the coordinate value of the workpiece transfer
position on the machine coordinate system.
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . B-axis retraction stroke (unsigned value)
Specify the stroke through which the B-axis should retract
from the position where pushing of a workpiece is
detected.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate (mm/min)
Specify the feedrate for skip feed operation (pushing the
workpiece to chuck 2).
D Q . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance for workpiece transfer position
If the actual workpiece pushing position known from the
detection of workpiece pushing and retraction after
detection of workpiece pushing is within the range of
B (J, V)"Q, the program advances to the next block.
B–74 G FUNCTIONS
This detection operation may cause low-strength workpieces such an aluminum

workpieces to be deformed or damaged.
Feedrate for skip feed operation should be changed meeting the workpiece
material and dimensions.
1 When address B is used to express the coordinate value of the workpiece
transfer position, if no value is set for “B” of “00 (EXT)” in the WORK
COORDINATES screen, it has the same meaning as “(B = 0), V”.
2 If a K command is omitted, the B-axis is automatically retracted by the servo
error amount in the uni-direction positioning mode.
3 If a K command is specified, servo error is not calculated and the B-axis is
retracted by the specified amount.
In this case, retraction is not made in the uni-direction positioning mode.
4 Change the value for a K command according to the strength of the workpiece.
5 If an F command is omitted in a program, default value of 30 mm/min is used.
6 If the actual B-axis position after retraction from the workpiece pushing
detected position is outside the specified tolerance “B (J, V) " Q”, the pushing
detection cycle is repeated again. If the B-axis is not positioned within the
tolerance, an alarm is generated and the machine stops.
7 If a Q command is omitted, the tolerance for workpiece transfer position is 1
mm.
8 The approach point to be specified preceding the G38 command should be
taken at a point where the chuck 2 takes more than 1 second to come into
contact with the workpiece.
9 For specifying the workpiece transfer position, use any one of the addresses B,
J, and V.
10 The chuck to workpiece contact position cannot be judged if the feed override
setting is changed after executing the G38 block with 0% set for feed override.
It is necessary to set a value other than 0% for feed override when executing
the G38 block. It must also be remembered it is not allowed to change the
feed override setting during the execution of the G38 block.
To transfer a workpiece machined in spindle 1 from spindle 1 to spindle 2
In the workpiece transfer operation, pushing of the workpiece against the chuck is
checked.
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
Machining program
(machining of a workpiece in spindle 1)

G FUNCTIONS B–75
N5;
(for workpiece transfer)
G97 S1000 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting spindle 1 in the normal direction at 1000
min–1
M35; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the speed synchronized operation
mode
M211; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unclamping chuck 2
(G30 P3 V0;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the Y-axis to the 3rd zero point
(G30 P3 U0;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X-axis to the 3rd zero point
G00 B_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving headstock 2 to the approach position B_
(work coordinate system)
(First approach)
G98 G01 B_ F1000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approaching of headstock 2 to workpiece at the
feedrate of 1000 mm/min
(Second approach)
G38 J_ K_ F_ Q_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detecting the pushing of workpiece
Chuck 2 clamp operation is included.
G99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the feed per revolution mode

... ... ...
Machining program
(Cutting off of workpiece)
M36; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the speed synchronized operation mode

G28 B0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the B-axis (spindle 2) to the machine
zero point
(G28 U0;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X-axis to the machine zero point
(G28 V0;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the Y-axis to the machine zero point
M01;
...
Commands in ( ) can be specified only for the Y-axis specification SL-S series.
B–76 G FUNCTIONS
22. G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical Interpolation
Using the cylindrical interpolation function, programming for grooving on cylinder

circumference can be made assuming a plane by developing the cylinder circumference
into the plane.
In other words, the cylindrical interpolation function permits a profile on the cylinder
circumference to be programmed in the profile on a plane.
The G07.1 (G107) command can be used only with the MC type or Y-axis
specification, these G codes cannot be used.
COMMAND
G07.1(G107) C_ ;
D G07.1(G107) . . . Calls the cylindrical interpolation mode.
D C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of the workpiece (groove bottom)
1 In the cylindrical interpolation mode, I, J and K cannot be used to define an arc.
Circular arc radius must be specified using R. The unit of R command is “mm”.
...
G02 Z_ C_ R4.0; (radius 4 mm)

2 In the cylindrical interpolation mode, hole machining canned cycle (G83 - G85,
G87 - G89) cannot be specified.
3 When “G07.1(G107) C0;” is specified, the cylindrical interpolation mode is
canceled.
4 If circular interpolation, cutter radius offset, or automatic tool nose radius offset
is specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode, it is necessary to specify the
plane for machining.
5 If the cylindrical interpolation is specified in the cutter radius offset mode or the
automatic tool nose radius offset mode, the offset is not executed correctly.
6 To execute the cutter radius offset function or the automatic tool nose radius
offset function in the cylindrical interpolation mode, cancel the cutter radius
offset function or the automatic tool nose radius offset function before calling
the cylindrical interpolation mode and specify the cutter radius offset function or
the automatic tool nose radius offset function after calling the cylindrical
interpolation mode.
7 It is not possible to execute positioning in the cylindrical interpolation mode. To
execute positioning, the cylindrical interpolation mode must be canceled.
8 It is not possible to specify a work coordinate system (G50, G54 - G59), a local
coordinate system (G52), and a machine coordinate system (G53) in the
cylindrical interpolation mode.
9 It is not possible to specify the G07.1 (G107) command in the positioning mode
(G00).
G FUNCTIONS B–77
10 With the SL-S series, the cylindrical interpolation function can be used for
spindle 2 in addition to spindle 1. If the cylindrical interpolation function is used
in the operation at spindle 2, pay attention to the “+/–” direction of the Z- and
C-axes.
Concerning the “+/–” direction of the Z- and C-axis, refer to page

A–13 (7.1.2).
B–78 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G07.1 (G107)
8
C
∅110
100° R4
A
200°
R4
Fig. 1 360°
R4
Groove depth 5 mm
A B
R4
100° 100° C
30 10
C
B 160°
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
1 Fig. 2 is a development of Fig. 1. The angle in Fig. 2 indicates the angle made
to the center of the cylinder as shown in Fig. 3.
2 Command point for cylindrical interpolation is obtained from the development of
the circumference of the cylindrical shape (Fig. 2).
3 The development of the cylinder circumference (Fig. 2) is given in the ZC
plane.
4 Command points of the shape in Fig. 2 are expressed by D in Fig. 4.
After selecting the cylindrical interpolation mode with the G07.1 (G107) command, specify
the command points D in order.
–40 –10 0
Z-axis (mm)
R4
C1
100 (A)
C2
R4
D: Command point
R4 : Path of the tool center
C3
200 (B)
C4
R4
360
C-axis (°)
Fig. 4
G FUNCTIONS B–79
–40 –10 0 Command values of points 1 to 10 in Fig. 5 are

1 Z-axis
(mm) indicated below.
2 Command
4 3 C1 Z (mm) C (_)
100 (A) Point
5 C2
1 –10 0
2 –10 C1
6 C3 3 –14 100
200 (B)
7 8 9 C4 4 –36 100
5 –40 C2
Each corner: R4 6 –40 C3
360
10 7 –36 200
8 –14 200
C-axis (°)
9 –10 C4
Fig. 5
10 –10 360
It is possible to create a program if values C1 - C4 are known.
The radius of corners in the tool path is 4.0 mm.
First obtain the values C1 - C4 in “mm” before obtaining them in angles (_).
For this calculation, A (100_) and B (200_) should be converted into “mm”.
Circumference of the workpiece: –40 –10 0

Z-axis
∅100 π = 314.1593 (mm) (mm)
This means 314.1593 (mm) corresponds to 360_. C1

87.266
100 C2
A (100_): 314.1593 = 87.266 (mm)
360
200 C3
B (200_): 314.1593 = 174.533 (mm)
360 174.533
C4
314.1593
C-axis (mm)
Fig. 6
B–80 G FUNCTIONS
Next, calculate values C1 - C4 in “mm”.
C1: 87.266 – 4 = 83.266 (mm)
C2: 87.266 + 4 = 91.266 (mm)
C3: 174.533 – 4 = 170.533 (mm)
C4: 174.533 + 4 = 178.533 (mm)
For cylindrical interpolation, it is necessary to specify the C-axis value in angles.
Convert C1 - C4 into the unit of “_” (angle).
C1: 360_: 314.1593 (mm) = C1_: 83.266 (mm)
C1_ = 95.416_
C2: 360_: 314.1593 (mm) = C2_: 91.266 (mm)
C2_ = 104.583_
C3: 360_: 314.1593 (mm) = C3_: 170.533 (mm)
C3_ = 195.416_
C4: 360_: 314.1593 (mm) = C4_: 178.533 (mm)
C4_ = 204.584_
–40 –10 0
Z-axis
(mm)
95.416
100 (A)
104.583
195.416
200 (B)
204.584
360
C-axis (°)
Fig. 7
G FUNCTIONS B–81
O0001;
N1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S100 M13;
X115.0 Z–10.0 S500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G98 G01 X100.0 F50; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G19 W0 H0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G07.1(G107) C50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C95.416; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
G02 Z–14.0 C100.0 R4.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G01 Z–36.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
G03 Z–40.0 C104.583 R4.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G01 C195.416; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
G03 Z–36.0 C200.0 R4.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
G01 Z–14.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
G02 Z–10.0 C204.584 R4.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G01 C360.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
G07.1(G107) C0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
X115.0;
G00 G99 X200.0 Z100.0 M05;
G18 M46;
M01;
1 Positioning to the point where grooving is started
2 Starting of the grooving
Feedrate is 50 mm/min, specified in the G98 (feed per minute) mode.
3 Selecting the machining plane (ZC plane)

When specifying circular command (G02 or G03) between the rotary axis (C-axis) and
linear axis (Z-axis) in the cylindrical interpolation mode, it is necessary to select a
plane.
If the Z- and C-axis movements are not required, specify as “G19 W0 H0;”. This is
necessary because Z- and C-axis commands must be specified after the G19
command.
4 Calling the cylindrical interpolation mode

As the diameter of the workpiece (groove bottom) is 100 mm, the cylinder radius is 50
mm.
5 - 13 Machining is carried out by synchronizing spindle rotation (C-axis indexing) and Z-axis
movement.
14 Canceling the cylindrical interpolation mode
B–82 G FUNCTIONS
23. G12.1 (G112), G13.1 (G113) Notching

(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
The notching means a cutting of the workpiece

face in contour shape.
X-axis
After starting the rotary tool, specify the G12.1
(G112) command to select polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
It is possible to synchronize the spindle revolution

(slow speed) with X-axis feedrate of the rotary tool
in the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
The G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113)

commands can be used only with the MC
type or Y-axis specification machines. With
the models other than MC type and Y-axis
specification, these G codes cannot be
used.
COMMAND
G12.1(G112); . . . . . . . Calls the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
G13.1(G113); . . . . . . . Cancels the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
1 In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, X-axis value should be specified in
diameter and C-axis value should be specified in “mm” in radius, not in “_”
(angle).
2 The G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113) commands must be specified in a block
without other commands.
3 Set the linear axis and the rotary axis to be used for polar coordinate
interpolation for parameters. This setting has been made at the shipping of the
machine.
Linear axis: Generally, X-axis is set.
Parameter No. 5460 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Rotary axis: Generally, C-axis is set.
Parameter No. 5461 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G FUNCTIONS B–83
4 When an arc cutting is executed in the polar coordinate interpolation mode,

addresses to indicate the arc radius are determined according to the axis name
of the linear axis.
If the X-axis is taken as the linear axis:
. . . . . . . . . . . Since circular interpolation is assumed to be executed in the XY
plane, addresses I and J are used to specify the arc radius.
(Initial setting)
If the Y-axis is taken as the linear axis:
. . . . . . . . . . . Since circular interpolation is assumed to be executed in the YZ
plane, addresses J and K are used to specify the arc radius.
If the Z-axis is taken as the linear axis:
. . . . . . . . . . . Since circular interpolation is assumed to be executed in the ZX
plane, addresses I and K are used to specify the arc radius.
Note an arc radius may be specified using address R.
5 In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, never change the coordinate
system (G50, G52, G53, G54 - G59, etc.).
6 In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the G00 command cannot be
specified. Only the following G codes can be specified.
G01, G02, G03, G04, G40, G41, G42, G65, G66, G67, G98, and G99
7 In the cutter radius offset mode or the automatic tool nose radius offset mode,
the G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113) commands cannot be specified.
Before specifying the G12.1 (G112) or G13.1 (G113) command, cancel the
cutter radius offset mode or the automatic tool nose radius offset mode.
8 For “X” of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen, set the distance from the center
of spindle to the center of a rotary tool with the turret returned to the zero point.
For “R” of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen, set the radius of the rotary tool.
9 With the SL-S series, the polar coordinate interpolation function can be used
for spindle 2 in addition to spindle 1. If the polar coordinate interpolation
function is used in the operation at spindle 2, pay attention to the “+/–” direction
of the Z- and C-axis.
Concerning the “+/–” direction of the Z- and C-axis, refer to page

A–13 (7.1.2).
B–84 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113)
Notching to machine 50 mm 50 mm square (A ³ B ³ C ³ D ³ E ³ A) using the

20 mm dia. end mill
X C
C B
A
∅ 80
50
Z X
D E
20
O0001;
N1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S100 M13; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X80.0 Z30.0 S100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G98 G01 Z–20.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G12.1(G112); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G42 X50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 A
C25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 B
X–50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 C
C–25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 D
X50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 E
C0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 A
G40 X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
G13.1(G113); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
...
2 Positioning to the point where notching is started

7
3 Cutting into Z–20.0
4 Calling the polar coordinate interpolation mode 6
5
The spindle rotates synchronized with the 8
feedrate of the cutting tool. 11
10
5 - 10 Cutting in the order of A ³ B ³ C ³ D ³ E ³ A
In approach to point A , the automatic tool nose 9
radius offset function is turned on.
11 Canceling the automatic tool nose radius offset function; the cutting tool is retracted to
X100.0.
12 Canceling the polar coordinate interpolation mode
G FUNCTIONS B–85
24. G479 Tailstock Connect
If G479 V_ is specified in center-work operation, the Z-axis (saddle) automatically moves

to the tailstock connection position, and after the tailstock is connected to the saddle, the
saddle moves to the specified positioning point (V_).
The G479 command can be used only with the programmable tailstock
specification machine.
COMMAND
G479 V_ ;
D G479 . . . . . . . . Calls the tailstock connect mode.
D V . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the tailstock positioning point (coordinate value in
the machine coordinate system)
1 Specify the G479 command independently in a block without other commands.
2 Specify the coordinate value of the tailstock positioning point (V) in the
machine coordinate system.
3 For address V, specify a numeric value with a decimal point.
4 If address V is omitted, the Z-axis only travels to the tailstock/saddle
connection position. Therefore, the commands for unclamping the tailstock
body, positioning it at the required position, and clamping the tailstock body
must be given.
...
G479; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Z-axis to the tailstock/saddle

connection position
M79; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unclamping the tailstock body
G00 Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the tailstock body at the required
position
M78; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamping the tailstock body
...
To execute the G479 command, the following conditions must be satisfied:

– The main spindle or the rotary tool spindle is stopped.
– The turret head index has completed.
– The tailstock spindle is in the IN position.
During setup operation, it is recommended to record the position(s) where the
tailstock should be positioned and the position where the tailstock should be
returned after the completion of machining. The coordinate values must be
specified in the machine coordinate system.
B–86 G FUNCTIONS
<Operation flow chart for G479>
By specifying a V command that indicates the required tailstock positioning point, following
G479, a series of tailstock positioning operation is executed as indicated below by the
macro program.
<Macro program>
Positioning of the saddle to the tailstock connection position
... ... ... ...
Execution of M79 (tailstock body unclamp; joint pin extends

from the tailstock body to connect with the saddle)
G479 V_ ;
V_ (positioning of the tailstock at the position
... ... ... ...
specified by V_ )
Execution of M78 (tailstock body clamp; joint pin extracts

from the saddle to release the tailstock body from the
saddle)
O0001;
N1;
G479 V_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tailstock to the position specified by V_
(machine coordinate value)
M25; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The tailstock spindle moves OUT to hold the
workpiece by the tailstock spindle center.
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling for dwell to allow positive support of the
workpiece by the tailstock spindle center
G50 S1000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
...
Machining program
G28 U0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X-axis to avoid interference

with the tailstock
M05;
M26; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The tailstock spindle moves IN.
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling for dwell to allow tailstock spindle to
correctly extract into the tailstock body
G479 V_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tailstock to the previously located
position, specified by V_ (machine coordinate
value)
...
APPENDIX B–1
APPENDIX 1 Workpiece Transfer
To continuously carry out the first process and

second process in a single set up, the workpiece
for which the first process has been finished must
be passed to chuck 2 where the second process is
carried out.
The operation is called “workpiece transfer”.
To transfer a workpiece from chuck 1 to chuck 2, it

is necessary to move spindle 2 (B-axis) to the
workpiece transfer position.
When moving spindle 2 (B-axis) to the workpiece

transfer position, it is possible to use a work
coordinate system.
The following explains the program to be used for

the positioning of spindle 2 (B-axis) using the work
coordinate system.
When moving spindle 2 (B-axis), move the turret to the position where
interference will not occur between spindle 2 and tools, tool holders, and/or
turret. If spindle 2 is moved carelessly, interference will occur with tools, tool
holders, and/or turret, which could cause damage to the machine.
1 Workpiece transfer is possible only by the SL-S series.
For the procedure used to set a work coordinate system, refer to the
OPERATION MANUAL separately provided.
B–2 APPENDIX
1.1 Work Coordinate System

Spindle 1 Spindle 2 To carry out positioning of spindle 2 (B-axis) in the
work coordinate system, set the coordinate value
of the workpiece approach point to “B” of NO.00
(EXT) on the WORK COORDINATES screen.
Write a program taking this point as “B0”.
Workpiece zero point (B0)
Do not set the workpiece transfer position to “B” of NO. 00 (EXT) work
coordinate system, on the WORK COORDINATES screen.
If the workpiece transfer position is set to “B” of NO. 00 (EXT) work coordinate
system, a work coordinate system called up in a program is shifted by the set
value to cause interference between a tool, tool holder and the turret, and a
workpiece, chuck and the fixture, which could cause damage to the machine.
When setting the workpiece transfer position on the WORK COORDINATES
screen, select the work coordinate system that is used only for workpiece transfer
operation.
COMMAND
G00 B_ ;
D B . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the approach position for workpiece transfer
operation (on work coordinate system). (absolute
command)
For the B-axis, an incremental command cannot be used.
APPENDIX B–3
Workpiece transfer commands (work coordinate system)
In this workpiece transfer operation, B-axis is moved to the workpiece transfer position by
using the work coordinate system (G59).
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
Machining program

N5;
G97 S1000 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting spindle 1 in the normal direction at
1000 min–1
mode
(First approach)
(Second approach)

... ... ...
Machining program
(Cutting off of workpiece)

zero point
M01;
...
B–4 APPENDIX
APPENDIX 2 G65 P9020/G65 P9021 Workpiece Transfer Macro

Program (MSD-501II)
A workpiece is transferred from spindle 1 to spindle 2 when G65 P9020 or G65 P9021 is
executed. It is also possible to pull out or cut off a bar material together with the transfer
from spindle 1 to spindle 2 if the machine is equipped with a bar feeder.
Differences between G65 P9020 and G65 P9021 are shown below.
G65 P9020 . . . . . M70 is not output when pulling out a workpiece by spindle 2.
G65 P9021 . . . . . M70 is output at the same time a workpiece is pulled out by
spindle 2.
Usually, “G65 P9020” is used. “G65 P9021” is used only when the output of M70 is
required.
1 “G65 P9020/G65 P9021” can be specified only for the SL-S series equipped
with the CAPII automatic conversational programming function. The CAPII
automatic conversational programming function is available only for the
MSD-501II and the MSD-518II, and also the MSG-501 for which CAPII is
specified as the automatic conversational programming function.
2 The tool at station No. 1 is called when “G65 P9020/G65 P9021” is executed.
Therefore, move the turret to a position where it will not interfere with spindle 2
before executing “G65 P9020/G65 P9021”. The cut-off tool must be mounted
at station No. 1.
3 Although “G65 P9020/G65 P9021” transfers a workpiece from spindle 1 to
spindle 2, it is not possible to return a workpiece from spindle 2 to spindle 1 by
executing these commands.
4 After the completion of “G65 P9020/G65 P9021”, the X-axis moves to the
machine zero point and the Z-axis returns to the position where the Z-axis
existed before the execution of “G65 P9020/G65 P9021”.
5 “G65 P9021” may be used only for the machine equipped with a bar feeder.
APPENDIX B–5
COMMAND
G65 P9020 A_ B_ C_ J_ K_ Q_ E_ M_ D_ S_
Y_ Z_ X_ H_ F_ R_ U_ I_ V_ W_ ;
G65 P9021 A_ B_ C_ J_ K_ Q_ E_ M_ D_ S_
Y_ Z_ X_ H_ F_ R_ U_ I_ V_ W_ ;
D G65 P9020 . . . Workpiece transfer command
D G65 P9021 . . . Workpiece transfer command (with M70 output)
D A . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle synchronization mode
A0. . . . . Speed synchronization (spindle stop, normal
rotation for cut-off)
A1. . . . . Phase synchronization (spindle stop, normal
A2. . . . . Speed synchronization (spindle normal rotation,
normal rotation for cut-off)
A3. . . . . Phase synchronization (spindle normal rotation,
A4. . . . . Speed synchronization (spindle stop, reverse
A5. . . . . Phase synchronization (spindle stop, reverse
A6. . . . . Speed synchronization (spindle reverse rotation,
reverse rotation for cut-off)
A7. . . . . Phase synchronization (spindle reverse rotation,
reverse rotation for cut-off)
If designation of address A is omitted, “A0.”

synchronization mode (speed synchronization;
spindle stop, normal rotation for cut-off) is assumed.
D B . . . . . . . . . . . . Approach position “b” of spindle 2 for workpiece transfer
(“b”: Specified by the coordinate value in the machine
coordinate system)
b
B–6 APPENDIX
D C . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece transfer position “c” of spindle 2

(“c”: Specified by the coordinate value in the machine
coordinate system)
Spindle 2 moves from the approach position to the
transfer position at the feedrate of 1500 mm/min
(60 in./min).
D J . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushing stroke “j”

In the movement of spindle 2 from the approach position to
the transfer position, the mode of movement is changed at
the position “j” (distance specified by “J”) away from the
transfer position to M81 (motor torque reduced mode).
Within this range, movement of spindle 2 is controlled with
the motor deviation monitored to execute G38 (detecting
pushing of a workpiece).
1 If address J is omitted or “J0.” is specified,
workpiece pushing detection is not executed.
2 Within the pushing stroke “j”, spindle 2 moves at
the feedrate that would be valid if an F
command is not specified in the G38 block.
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-return stroke
To eliminate distortion of a workpiece caused by pushing
with spindle 2, spindle 2 returns by the amount specified
here from the position where workpiece pushing is
detected.
If a negative value is specified for address K, G38 is
not executed but spindle 2 moves at the feedrate of
300 mm/min (12 in./min) by the pushing stroke
specified by address J.
APPENDIX B–7
D Q . . . . . . . . . . . . Allowable maximum error for workpiece transfer position

Specify the allowable maximum error between the actual
workpiece contact position detected by the workpiece
pushing operation and the workpiece transfer position
specified in the program.
If the workpiece contact detected position does not
fall within the range defined by the set value,
workpiece pushing operation is executed again. If
the workpiece contact detected position is still
outside the specified range, an alarm occurs and the
machine stops.
D E . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell time for air blow executed at the approach position
If address E is omitted or “E0.” is specified, dwell is
not executed during air blow.
D M . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed applied for workpiece transfer (min–1)
If address M is omitted, the spindle rotates at
300 min–1 during workpiece transfer.
D D . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece pulling-out length “d” for cutting-off
Specify the length of the workpiece to be pulled out after it
is clamped in the chuck on spindle 2.
The workpiece is pulled out at the feedrate of
1500 mm/min (60 in./min) after it is clamped in chuck
2.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting speed (surface speed) for cutting-off operation

(m/min)
If address S is omitted, spindle speed is controlled in
the constant spindle speed mode; cutting off is
executed at the spindle speed specified with address
Y.
D Y . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum spindle speed (min–1) and coolant discharge for
cutting-off operation
If a negative value is specified, coolant is not
discharged during cutting off.
B–8 APPENDIX
D Z . . . . . . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the cutting-off start position

D X . . . . . . . . . . . . X coordinate value of the cutting-off start position
1 For address X, specify a value including the
clearance amount for approach to the
workpiece.
2 A cutting-off tool approaches to the cut-off start
position in the order of Z- and X-axes.
D H . . . . . . . . . . . . X coordinate value of the point where cutting at the lowered
feedrate ends, if intermittent cutting occurs at the
engagement of a cutting-off tool with the workpiece.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Lowered feedrate (mm/rev) to be applied if intermittent
cutting occurs at the engagement of a cutting-off tool with
the workpiece.
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . X coordinate value of the point where cutting-off feedrate is
lowered before the workpiece is cut off.
D U . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate (mm/rev) to be applied for cutting-off operation up
to the position where the feedrate is lowered.
D I . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depth of cut per pecking operation
If address I is specified, cutting-off is performed in
peck-feed operation in the range from the position specified
by address H to the position specified by address R.
1 If address I is omitted or “I0.” is specified,
peck-feed is not used in cutting off operation.
2 If addresses R and U are omitted, address I is
invalid.
3 If address H is omitted, cutting from the position
specified by address X to the position specified
by address R is performed in peck-feed.
D V . . . . . . . . . . . . X coordinate value of the cutting-off end position
For address V, specify a value including the
clearance amount beyond the cutting-off complete
position.
D W . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate (mm/rev) to be applied for axis feed up to the
position where cutting-off operation is completed.
1 After the execution of cutting-off, cutting-off check cycle is always executed.
2 For addresses used in the G65 P9020/G65 P9021 macro program, all values
must have a decimal point.
APPENDIX B–9
Programming using “G65 P9020”
1 Move the turret to a position where the turret will not interfere with spindle 2
before executing “G65 P9020”.
2 “Workpiece pushing check” and “cutting off” are not executed by the program
shown below.
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
Machining program (machining of a workpiece in spindle 1)
N5;
G65 P9020 A2. B–_ C–_ E2.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the workpiece transfer command
D A2. . . . . . . Spindle synchronization mode
(spindle normal rotation)
D B–_ . . . . . . Approach position for workpiece
transfer (coordinate value in the
machine coordinate system)
D C–_ . . . . . . Workpiece transfer position
(coordinate value in the machine
coordinate system)
D E2.0 . . . . . Dwell time of 2 seconds for air
blow executed at the approach
position
M01;
...
B–10 APPENDIX
To transfer a workpiece machined in spindle 1 from spindle 1 to spindle 2 and feed the
workpiece by bar feeder
1 Move the turret to a position where the turret will not interfere with spindle 2
before executing “G65 P9021”.
2 “Workpiece pushing check” is not executed by the program shown below.
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
N5;
G65 P9021 A2. B–_ C–_ E2.0 D85.0 Y1000. Z1.0 X55.0 R22.0 U0.5 V18.0 W0.1;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the workpiece transfer command (with
M70 output)
D A2. . . . . . . Spindle synchronization mode
(spindle normal rotation,
D B–_ . . . . . . Approach position for workpiece
transfer (coordinate value in the
machine coordinate system)
D C–_ . . . . . . Workpiece transfer position
coordinate system)
D E2.0 . . . . . Dwell time of 2 seconds for air
blow executed at the approach
position
D D85.0 . . . . Workpiece pulling-out distance for
executing cutting-off operation;
85 mm
D Y1000. . . . Spindle speed of 1000 min–1 for
executing cutting-off operation
Coolant discharge ON
Since address S is not specified, the spindle
is controlled in the constant spindle speed
mode during cutting off.
D Z1.0 . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the position
where cutting-off starts.
D X55.0 . . . . X coordinate value of the position
where cutting-off starts.
APPENDIX B–11
D R22.0 . . . . X coordinate value of the point

where cutting-off feedrate is
lowered before the workpiece is
cut off.
D U0.5 . . . . . Feedrate (0.5 mm/rev) to be
applied for cutting-off operation up
to the position where the feedrate
is lowered.
D V18.0 . . . . X coordinate value of the
cutting-off end position
D W0.1 . . . . . Feedrate (0.1 mm/rev) to be
applied for axis feed up to the
position where cutting-off
operation is completed.
M01;
...
B–12 APPENDIX
APPENDIX 3 G65 P9022 Workpiece Ejection Macro Program

(MSD-501II)
The workpiece finished in spindle 2 is ejected out to the parts catcher and the work
counter increases “1” when “G65 P9022” is specified.
1 “G65 P9022” can be specified only for the SL-S series equipped with the CAPII
automatic conversational programming function. The CAPII automatic
conversational programming function is available only for the MSD-501II and
the MSD-518II, and also the MSG-501 for which CAPII is specified as the
automatic conversational programming function.
2 “G65 P9022” cannot be used for the machine which is not equipped with a
parts catcher, a workpiece ejector, and a work counter.
3 Although “G65 P9022” can be used for ejecting out a finished workpiece from
spindle 2, it cannot be used for ejecting out a workpiece from spindle 1.
COMMAND
G65 P9022 A_ B_ ;
D G65 P9022 . . . Workpiece ejection command
D A . . . . . . . . . . . . The position where a workpiece is ejected out to a parts
catcher (coordinate value in the machine coordinate
system)
D B . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell time for through-spindle air blow after workpiece
ejection and spindle air blow after parts catcher retraction
If address B is omitted or “B0.” is specified, dwell is
not executed for through-spindle air blow and spindle
air blow.
For addresses used in the G65 P9022 macro program, all values must have a
decimal point.
APPENDIX B–13
O0001;
... ... ...
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping coolant supply

M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping spindle 2
G65 P9022 A–_ B1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the workpiece ejection command
D A–_ . . . . . . The position where a workpiece is
ejected out to a parts catcher
coordinate system)
D B1.0 . . . . . Dwell time of 1 second for
through-spindle air blow and
spindle air blow
...
CHAPTER C
M FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the M functions.
CONTENTS
C : M FUNCTIONS
1. M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1

1.1 SL, VL, TL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1
1.2 SL-S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–7
1.3 LL-7, 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–12
1.4 CL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–15
2. M00, M01 Program Stop and Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–18
3. M02, M30 Program End, Program End and Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–21
4. M03, M203, M04, M204, M05 Spindle Start and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–23
5. M13, M14, M05 Start and Stop of Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation . . . . . . C–26
6. M08, M09 Coolant Discharge ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–28
7. M23, M24 Chamfering ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–30
8. M10, M210, M11, M211 Chuck Clamp/Unclamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–33
9. M25, M26 Tailstock Spindle IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–37
10. M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–41
11. M45, M245, M46 C-axis Connection and Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–46
12. M47 Workpiece Ejector OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–48
13. M48, M49 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–50
14. M68, M268, M69 Spindle Brake Clamp and Unclamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–52
15. M70, M483, M482 Bar Feeder Operation, Bar Feed OFF,
Bar Stock Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–54
16. M73, M74 Parts Catcher IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–57

17. M432 Parts Catcher Cycle Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–59
18. M80 Workpiece Cut-off Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–61
19. M85, M86 Automatic Door Open/Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–63
20. M89 Work Counter, Total Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–65
21. M98, M99 Sub-program Call and Sub-program End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–68
22. M90, M290, M91, M291 Simultaneous Spindle/

Rotary Tool Spindle Operation Mode ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–72
23. M320, M321 Y-axis Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–74
24. M40 - M44 Selecting Spindle Speed Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–76
25. M28, M29 In-position Check Valid and In-position Check Invalid . . . . . C–78
26. M39 Rotary Tool Joint Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–80
27. Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–81
APPENDIX 1 Multiple M Code Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX C–1

M FUNCTIONS C–1
1. M Code List
M codes are also called the miscellaneous functions. They control program flow, coolant
discharge on/off, etc. in addition to realize the functions supplementary to those called by
the G codes.
1 The M codes described in this section are generic ones and all of them are not
usable by all machine models or with some models those not specified below
may be used. There are also cases that the function of the M code stated
below has different function on specific models. For details, refer to the ladder
diagram supplied with your machine or contact Mori Seiki.
2 With the following models of NC, up to three M codes may be specified in a
block. MSC-500, MSC-501, MSG-501, MSD-501, and MSD-501ll
For details, refer to page APPENDIX C–1 (APPENDIX 1).
1.1 SL, VL, TL Series

*1: Only for SL series and TL series
*2: Only for VL series
*3: Only for TL series
*4: Only for SL series. However, SL-65 and SL-75 series are excluded.
*5: Optional for MC type
*6: Only for SL series. However, SL-400, SL-600, SL-65, and SL-75 series are
excluded.
*7: Only for SL-400, SL-600, SL-65, SL-75, and VL-55 series.
*8: Only for TL, SL-400, and SL-600 series.
*9: Only for SL series. However, SL-600, SL-65, and SL-75 series are excluded.
*10: Only for SL-600, SL-65, SL-75, and VL-55 series.
*11: Only for SL, VL, and TL series.
*12: Standard for the machine equipped with the loader and the SL-303B, SL-400B,
SL-600, and VL-55 equipped with MC type.
*13: Only for SL series and TL series. However, SL-400 and SL-600 series are
excluded.
*14: Only for TL series and SL-600 series.
*15: Only for SL series. However, SL-25E, SL-400 and SL-600 series, and NC unit
of MSC-500 are excluded.
*16: Only for SL series and TL series. However, SL-65 and SL-75 series are
excluded.
*17: Only for SL-65 and SL-75 series.
*18: Only for SL-600 and VL-55 series.
*19: Only for SL-400, SL-600 and VL-55 series.
*20: Only for SL series and TL series. However, SL-400, SL-600, SL-65 and SL-75
series are excluded.
C–2 M FUNCTIONS
Code Function Description

M00 Program stop Suspends program execution temporarily.
M01 Optional stop Suspends program execution temporarily.
Whether the function is valid or not is selectable by
a switch on the operation panel.
M02 Program end Ends program execution and resets the NC.
M03 Spindle start (normal) Starts the spindle in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the
rear of the spindle.
M04 Spindle start (reverse) Starts the spindle in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece
from the rear of the spindle.
M05 Spindle (rotary tool spindle) stop Stops the spindle or the rotary tool spindle
rotation.
M08 Coolant ON Starts coolant discharge.
M09 Coolant OFF Stops coolant discharge.
M10 Chuck clamp Opens and closes the chuck.
These M codes are used when the machine is
M11 Chuck unclamp equipped with the bar feeder or loader, or for
both-center work.
M13 Rotary tool spindle start (normal) Starts the rotary tool spindle in the normal
direction.
Normal direction:
rear of the rotary tool spindle.
(Valid for MC type and Y-axis specification)
M14 Rotary tool spindle start (reverse) Starts the rotary tool spindle in the reverse
direction.
Reverse direction:
from the rear of the rotary tool spindle.
M17 Turret head rotation (normal) Starts turret head rotation.
Whether the M17 and M18 codes are valid or
M18 Turret head rotation (reverse) invalid is set using a parameter.
M19 Spindle orientation Sets the spindle in the predetermined angular
position.
(The spindle orientation device is optional.*12)
M23 Chamfering ON Makes chamfering in thread cutting valid or invalid.
(These functions are valid only in the thread
M24 Chamfering OFF cutting mode called by G92 and G76.)
M25*1 Tailstock spindle OUT These functions are valid for the machine
M26*1 Tailstock spindle IN equipped with the tailstock.
M FUNCTIONS C–3

M27 Tool skip ON This function is valid for the machine equipped
with the tool life management A function.
M28 In-position check valid
M29 In-position check invalid
M30 Program end and rewind Ends program execution, resets the NC and
rewinds the program.
M31*17 Interlock bypass ON
M32*17 Interlock bypass OFF
M37*16 Ceiling shutter open
(The ceiling shutter is optional.)
optional )
M38*16 Ceiling shutter close
M39*7 Rotary tool joint check This function is valid for MC type.
M40*7 Spindle drive gear in neutral
M41*7 Spindle drive gear in the 1st gear
range
These functions are valid only for the machine
M42*7 Spindle drive gear in the 2nd gear equipped with the transmission.
range
M43*10 Spindle drive gear in the 3rd gear
range
M45 C-axis joint These functions are valid for MC type
yp and Y-axis
M46 C-axis release specification.
M48 Override cancel OFF Override cancel invalid
M49 Override cancel ON Override cancel valid
M50 Sensor air blow ON for automatic
in-machine tool presetter
M51 Spindle air blow ON
M53 Contact sensor air blow ON
(The corresponding air blow device is optional.)
optional )
M55 Sensor air blow OFF for automatic
M58 Contact sensor air blow OFF
M59 Spindle air blow OFF
M60*1 Indexing chuck 45_ index These functions are valid for the machine
equipped with indexing chuck
chuck.
M61*1 Indexing chuck 90_ index
(The corresponding signal is output to an external
M62*1 Indexing chuck 180_ index device.)
M64*6 Robot service call This function is valid for the machine equipped
with the robot.
M68 Spindle brake clamp Clamps and unclamps the spindle brake.
These functions are valid for MC type and Y axis
Y-axis
M69 Spindle brake unclamp
specification.
M70*6 Bar feeder operation Feeds the bar stock into the machine.
The function is valid for the machine equipped with
the bar feeder.
device.)
C–4 M FUNCTIONS

M71*11 Automatic in-machine tool presetter Moves the tool presetter arm up/down.
arm DOWN These functions are valid for the machine
M72*11 Automatic in-machine tool presetter equipped with the automatic in-machine tool
arm UP presetter.
M73*6 Parts catcher OUT Moves the parts catcher out/in.
These functions are valid for the machine
M74*6 Parts catcher IN equipped with the parts catcher.
M75 X-axis mirror image OFF
M76 X-axis mirror image ON
M78*1 Tailstock body clamp Clamps/unclamps the tailstock body.
M79*1 Tailstock body unclamp
equipped with the programmable tailstock.
M83 Chucking pressure 1 Selects chucking pressure level.
M84 Chucking pressure 2 equipped with the chuck high/low pressure system.
M85 Automatic door open Opens/closes
p the automatic door; valid onlyy for
M86 Automatic door close machine equipped with an automatic door.
M87*11 Sensor switching ON Switches the sensors to be used.
M88*11 Sensor switching OFF equipped with the sensors.
M89 Work counter/total counter (The counter function is optional.)
M90 Spindle/rotary tool spindle Makes the simultaneous operation mode using the
simultaneous operation mode ON main spindle and the rotary tool spindle valid or
invalid.
M91 Spindle/rotary tool spindle
These functions are valid for MC type and Y-axis
simultaneous operation mode OFF
specification.
M92 Load monitoring (teaching,
monitoring) valid
Load monitoring specification
monitoring) invalid
M98 Sub-program call
M99 Sub-program end Returns the program flow from the current
Repetition of program sub-program to the main program.
M300 Tool life count This function is valid for the machine equipped
with the tool life management B function.
M306 Synchronized tapping mode ON
(in milling mode)*20
Polygon mode ON
(in turning mode)*6 These functions are valid for MC type.*3
These functions are valid for MC type and Y axis
Y-axis
M307 Synchronized tapping mode OFF specification.*6
(in milling mode)*20
Polygon mode OFF
(in turning mode)*6
M319 Rotary tool spindle orientation*3 This function is valid for Y-axis specification.*3
Rotary tool spindle zero return*4 This function is valid for MC type and Y-axis
specification.*4
M FUNCTIONS C–5

M320*3 Y-axis lock
These functions are valid for Y-axis specification
specification.
M321*3 Y-axis unlock
M329*3 Synchronized tapping mode ON*5 This function is valid for MC type. (spindle)
This function is valid for Y-axis specification.
(spindle or rotary tool spindle)
M329*19 Synchronized tapping mode ON This function is valid for MC type.
M329*9 Spindle synchronized tapping mode
ON
M340*16 Steady rest 1 open
M341*16 Steady rest 1 close
M345*8 Steady rest 3 close These functions are valid for the machine
M346*8 Steady rest 4 open equipped with the steady rest.
M382*6 Shower coolant ON These functions are valid for the machine
M383*6 Shower coolant OFF equipped with the shower coolant system.
M384*16 Spindle orientation and ceiling (The spindle orientation and ceiling shutter open
shutter open functions are optional.)
M395*15 Z-axis mirror image OFF
M396*15 Z-axis mirror image ON
M434*13 Tailstock spindle pressure 1 (high
pressure) These functions are valid for the machine
equipped with the high/low tailstock spindle
M435*13 Tailstock spindle pressure 2 (low pressure level selectable system.
pressure)
M438 Switching-over of animation display
modes between basic C-axis
animation mode and cylindrical
coordinate system animation mode
*3 These functions are valid for MC type and Y-axis
C-axis graphic mode*4 specification.
p (MSD-518II)
( )
M439 Switching-over of animation display
modes between basic C-axis
animation mode and Y-axis
animation mode*3
M440*11 External output
C–6 M FUNCTIONS

M456*16 Tailstock spindle air blow ON
(The tailstock spindle air blow device is optional.)
optional )
M457*16 Tailstock spindle air blow OFF
M458*4 Tool tip air blow ON
(The tool tip air blow device is optional)
M459*4 Tool tip air blow OFF
M476*6 Spindle high-speed motor winding
selection command
M477*6 Spindle motor winding fix cancel
command
M478*6 Through-spindle coolant ON
Through-spindle coolant specification
M479*6 Through-spindle coolant OFF
M482*6 Change bar stock These functions are valid for the machine
M483*6 Bar stock feed OFF equipped with the bar feeder.
M FUNCTIONS C–7
1.2 SL-S Series

*1: Standard for the machine equipped with the loader.

M03 Spindle 1 start (normal) Starts spindle 1 in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
rear of spindle 1.
M04 Spindle 1 start (reverse) Starts spindle 1 in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
from the rear of spindle 1.
M05 Spindle 1/spindle 2/rotary tool Stops spindle 1 or spindle 2 rotation.
spindle stop Stops the rotary tool spindle rotation.
M10 Chuck clamp <spindle 1> Opens and closes the chuck.
M11 Chuck unclamp <spindle 1> equipped with the bar feeder or loader, or for
both-center work.
M13 Rotary tool spindle start (normal) Starts the rotary tool spindle in the normal
direction.
Normal direction:
rear of the rotary tool spindle.
M14 Rotary tool spindle start (reverse) Starts the rotary tool spindle in the reverse
direction.
Reverse direction:
from the rear of the rotary tool spindle.
M19 Spindle orientation <spindle 1> Sets spindle 1 in the predetermined angular
position.
C–8 M FUNCTIONS

M34 Phase synchronous operation ON
M35 Speed synchronous operation ON
M36 Synchronization OFF
M37 Ceiling shutter open
optional )
M38 Ceiling shutter close
M45 C-axis joint <spindle 1>
M46 C-axis release specification.
<spindle 1, spindle 2>
M47 Workpiece ejector OUT (This function is optional for the machine equipped
with the loader.)
<spindle 1>
M51 Spindle air blow ON <spindle 1>
<spindle 1> (The corresponding air blow device is optional.)
<spindle 1>
<spindle 1>
M59 Spindle air blow OFF <spindle 1> (The corresponding air blow device is optional.)
M60 Indexing chuck 45_ index These functions are valid for the machine
equipped with indexing chuck
chuck.
M61 Indexing chuck 90_ index
M62 Indexing chuck 180_ index device.)
M64 Robot service call The function is valid for the machine equipped with
the robot.
M68 Spindle brake clamp <spindle 1> Clamps and unclamps the spindle brake.
M69 Spindle brake unclamp These functions are valid for MC type and Y-axis
<spindle 1, spindle 2> specification.
M FUNCTIONS C–9

M70 Bar feeder operation Feeds the bar stock into the machine.
the bar feeder.
device.)
M71 Automatic in-machine tool presetter Moves the tool presetter arm up/down.
M72 Automatic in-machine tool presetter equipped with the automatic in-machine tool
arm UP presetter.
M73 Parts catcher OUT (
(These functions are optional
p for the machine
M74 Parts catcher IN equipped with the loader.)
M80 Cut-off detection
M81 Workpiece pushing check ON
M82 Workpiece pushing check OFF
M83 Chucking pressure 1 <spindle 1> Selects chucking pressure level.
M84 Chucking pressure 2 <spindle 1> equipped with the chuck high/low pressure system.
M87 Sensor switching ON <spindle 1> Switches the sensors to be used.
M88 Sensor switching OFF <spindle 1> equipped with the sensors.
M90 Spindle 1/rotary tool spindle Makes the simultaneous operation mode using the
invalid.
M91 Spindle 1/rotary tool spindle
specification.
monitoring) valid
monitoring) invalid
M203 Spindle 2 start (normal) Starts spindle 2 in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
rear of spindle 2.
M204 Spindle 2 start (reverse) Starts spindle 2 in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
from the rear of spindle 2.
C–10 M FUNCTIONS

M210 Chuck clamp <spindle 2> Opens and closes the chuck.
M211 Chuck unclamp <spindle 2> equipped with the bar feeder or loader, or for
both-center work.
M219 Spindle orientation <spindle 2> Sets spindle 2 in the predetermined angular
position.
M245 C-axis joint <spindle 2> The function is valid for MC type and Y-axis
specification.
<spindle 2>
M251 Spindle air blow ON <spindle 2>
M252 In-spindle air blow ON <spindle 2>
<spindle 2>
optional )
<spindle 2>
M257 In-spindle air blow OFF <spindle 2>
<spindle 2>
M259 Spindle air blow OFF <spindle 2>
M268 Spindle brake clamp <spindle 2> Clamps and unclamps the spindle brake.
This function is valid for MC type and Y-axis
specification.
M283 Chucking pressure 1 <spindle 2> Selects chucking pressure level.
M284 Chucking pressure 2 <spindle 2> equipped with the chuck high/low pressure system.
M287 Sensor switching ON <spindle 2> Switches the sensors to be used.
M288 Sensor switching OFF <spindle 2> equipped with the sensors.
M290 Spindle 2/rotary tool spindle Makes the simultaneous operation mode using the
invalid.
M291 Spindle 2/rotary tool spindle
specification.
M303 Spindle 1 selection signal ON
M304 Spindle 2 selection signal ON
M FUNCTIONS C–11

M306 Synchronized tapping mode ON
(in milling mode)
Polygon mode ON
(in turning mode) These functions are valid for MC type and Y
Y-axis
axis
M307 Synchronized tapping mode OFF specification.
(in milling mode)
Polygon mode OFF
(in turning mode)
M319 Rotary tool spindle zero return
M329 Spindle synchronized tapping mode
ON <spindle 1>
M340 Steady rest 1 open These functions are valid for the machine
M341 Steady rest 1 close equipped with the steady rest.
M382 Shower coolant ON These functions are valid for the machine
M383 Shower coolant OFF equipped with the shower coolant system.
M384 Spindle 1 orientation and ceiling
shutter open ((Spindle
p p
1/spindle g shutter
2 orientation and ceiling
M387 Spindle 2 orientation and ceiling open functions are optional.)
shutter open
M395 Z-axis mirror image OFF
M396 Z-axis mirror image ON
M432 Parts catcher cycle The function is valid for S type.
M438 C-axis graphic mode This function is valid for MC type and Y-axis
specification. (MSD-518II)
M440 External output
M458 Tool tip air blow ON
(The tool tip air blow device is optional.)
optional )
M459 Tool tip air blow OFF
M476 Spindle high-speed motor winding
selection command
M477 Spindle motor winding fix cancel
command
M478 Through-spindle coolant ON
<spindle 1>
Through-spindle coolant specification
M479 Through-spindle coolant OFF
<spindle 1>
C–12 M FUNCTIONS

M482 Change bar stock These functions are valid for the machine
M483 Bar stock feed OFF equipped with the bar feeder.
1.3 LL-7, 8
Normal direction:
Reverse direction:
M05 Spindle stop Stops the spindle rotation.
M11 Chuck unclamp equipped with the both-center work.
M19 Spindle orientation Sets the spindle in the predetermined angular
position.
(The spindle orientation device is optional.)
M25 Tailstock spindle OUT
M26 Tailstock spindle IN
optional )
M FUNCTIONS C–13

M40 Spindle drive gear in neutral
M41 Spindle drive gear in the 1st gear
range
M42 Spindle drive gear in the 2nd gear
These functions are valid only for the machine
range
equipped with the transmission.
transmission
M43 Spindle drive gear in the 3rd gear
range
M44 Spindle drive gear in the 4th gear
range
optional )
M71 Automatic in-machine tool presetter Moves the tool presetter arm up/down.
M72 Automatic in-machine tool presetter equipped with the automatic in-machine tool
arm UP presetter.
M84 Chucking pressure 2 equipped with the chuck high/low pressure system.
M87 Sensor switching ON Switches the sensors to be used.
M88 Sensor switching OFF equipped with the sensors.
monitoring) valid
monitoring) invalid
M384 Spindle orientation and ceiling (The spindle orientation and ceiling shutter open
C–14 M FUNCTIONS

M FUNCTIONS C–15
1.4 CL Series
Normal direction:
Reverse direction:
M05 Spindle stop Stops spindle rotation.
M11 Chuck unclamp equipped with the bar feeder or loader, or for
both-center work (tailstock specification).
M19 Spindle orientation 1 Sets the spindle in the predetermined angular
position.
M20 Spindle orientation 2 Sets the spindle in the predetermined angular
position.
(These function is valid only in the thread cutting
M24 Chamfering OFF mode called by G92 and G76.)
M25 Tailstock spindle OUT These functions are valid for the machine
M26 Tailstock spindle IN equipped with the tailstock.
with the tool life management function.
optional )
C–16 M FUNCTIONS

M52 In-spindle air blow ON
optional )
M57 In-spindle air blow OFF
M60 Indexing chuck 45_ index These functions are valid for the machine equipped
with indexing chuck
chuck.
M61 Indexing chuck 90_ index
M62 Indexing chuck 180_ index device.)
M64 Robot service call This function is valid for the machine equipped with
the robot.
M70 Bar feeder operation Feeds the bar stock into the machine.
the bar feeder.
M71 Automatic in-machine tool presetter
Moves the tool presetter arm up/down.
arm DOWN
These functions are valid for the machine equipped
M72 Automatic in-machine tool presetter
with the automatic in-machine tool presetter.
arm UP
M73 Parts catcher OUT Moves the parts catcher out/in.
M74 Parts catcher IN with the parts catcher.
M78 Tailstock body/steady rest clamp Clamps/unclamps the tailstock body/steady rest.
M79 Tailstock body/steady rest unclamp with the programmable tailstock or programmable
steady rest.
M84 Chucking pressure 2 with the chuck high/low pressure system.
M87 Sensor switching ON Switches the sensors to be used.
M88 Sensor switching OFF with the sensors.
M89 Work counter/total counter
monitoring) valid g
These functions are valid for the load monitoring
M93 Load monitoring (teaching, specification.
monitoring) invalid
M FUNCTIONS C–17

Repetition of program sub-program to the immediately previous program.
M200 Chip conveyor start
(forward direction) These functions are valid for the machine equipped
conveyor
with the chip conveyor.
M201 Chip conveyor stop
M222 Work counter increment
M329 Spindle synchronized tapping mode
(The synchronized tapping function is optional.)
ON
M340 Steady rest 1 open These functions are valid for the machine equipped
q pp
M341 Steady rest 1 close with the steady rest.
M382 Shower coolant ON
M383 Shower coolant OFF
M384 Spindle orientation and ceiling (The spindle orientation and ceiling shutter open
M434 Tailstock spindle pressure 1 These functions are valid for the machine equipped
q pp
M435 Tailstock spindle pressure 2 with the tailstock.
M456 Tailstock spindle air blow ON These functions are valid for the machine equipped
tailstock
with the tailstock.
M457 Tailstock spindle air blow OFF (The tailstock spindle air blow device is optional.)
M476 Spindle high speed command
(wound rotor selection)
M477 Spindle low speed command
(wound rotor selection)
M478 In-spindle coolant ON
(The coolant device is optional.)
optional )
M479 In-spindle coolant OFF
M482 Change bar stock These functions are valid for the machine equipped
q pp
M483 Bar stock feed OFF with the bar feeder.
C–18 M FUNCTIONS
2. M00, M01 Program Stop and Optional Stop
When the M00 command is executed during

program execution, the machine stops
unconditionally.
The spindle or rotary tool spindle, axis movement,
and coolant discharge stop.
Enter the M00 command in a program at a block
where the operation must be suspended.
M00
or M01 Differing from the M00 command, the M01
command is valid only when the optional stop
switch on the operation panel is pressed. In the
condition that this switch is pressed, the M01
command has the same effect as the M00
command. That is, when the M01 command is
executed while the optional stop function is valid,
spindle or rotary tool spindle rotation, axis
movement, and coolant discharge stop.
Enter the M01 command in a program at a block where the operation should be
suspended occasionally as required. For example, use the M01 command when
executing the program to machine the first workpiece or for executing test cutting.
<Using the M00 or M01 command>
– To check the dimensions of the machined workpiece

– To check the tool nose
– To remove chips during machining
– To remove or mount a workpiece
COMMAND
M00; . . . . . . Calls the program stop function.
M01; . . . . . . Calls the optional stop function.
1 The S code and F code remain in the memory after the execution of the
M00 or M01 command. However, to ensure correct operation, it is
recommended that these codes be written in the block that follows the
block which contains the M00 or M01 command.
2 After the operation is suspended temporarily by the M00 or M01 command,
do not rotate the turret head or move an axis manually. If either or both of
such manual operations had to be carried out, return the turret head and
the axes having been operated to the previous state before manual
operation. After that the automatic operation may be restarted. If the
automatic operation is restarted without restoring the previous state,
interference will occur between the cutting tools or the tool holders and the
chuck, workpiece, fixture, or the tailstock (if featured), causing damage to
the machine or the workpiece will be machined by a wrong cutting tool,
causing cutting tool to be broken.
M FUNCTIONS C–19
1 Specify the M00 or M01 command in a block without other commands.

2 The STATUS indicator [ M00/M01 ] is lit when the M00 or M01 command is
executed.
The program is continuously executed when the ST

(ST) switch on the
operation panel is pressed.
3 When the M00 or M01 command is executed, the spindle or spindle 1 start M
commands (M03, M04), the rotary tool spindle start M commands (M13, M14),
the spindle 2 start M commands (M203, M204), and the coolant discharge M
command (M08) are canceled. Therefore, when specifying the M00 or M01
command in a program, determine the positions where these M commands are
entered taking this into consideration.
When restarting the program after suspending program execution by the M00
or M01 command, specify the spindle or spindle 1 start M commands (M03,
M04), the rotary tool spindle start M commands (M13, M14), or the spindle 2
start M commands (M203, M204) at the restart block. If coolant discharge is
required, specify the M08 command as well.
How the M01 command is executed is explained below in relation with the status of
the optional stop switch on the operation panel.
– Optional stop switch makes valid:
The M01 command is executed and the program stops after the execution of
the block where the M01 command is contained.
– Optional stop switch makes invalid:
The M01 command is ignored and the program is executed continuously.
C–20 M FUNCTIONS
Programming using M00 or M01
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the clamp spindle speed for automatic
direction; surface speed is 120 m/min.
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0;
M01; or M00; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <M01> Optional stop
– If the indicator in the optional stop
switch on the operation panel
OSP
is lit:
The machine stops temporarily.
– If the indicator in the optional stop
switch OSP
on the operation panel
is not lit:
The M01 command is ignored and
the program is executed
continuously.
<M00> Program stop
– Program execution is suspended
and the machine stops temporarily.
After removing chips and/or
checking the machined dimensions,
press the (ST) switch, and the
ST
program execution restarts from the

next block.
N2;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202;
G96 S120 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
M FUNCTIONS C–21
3. M02, M30 Program End, Program End and Rewind
When the M02 or M30 command is executed,

1) All machine operations stop.
– The spindle or rotary tool spindle stops.
– Axis movement stops.
– Coolant discharge stops.
2) The NC is reset.
– In the reset state, the G codes that are
M02
or M30 valid when power is turned on are valid.
However, G54 to G59, G20, or G21 mode
remains unchanged.
– The F code is canceled and not saved to
memory.
– The S code is not canceled and saved to
memory.
The S code and F codes remain valid.
3) In the case of the M30 command, the cursor
+ returns to the start of the program.
This is called the program rewind function.
O 0000
The M30 command includes the program
G Power ON G codes rewind function in addition to the functions
M Cancel
supported by the M02 command. Since this
feature is convenient when machining the
same kind of workpieces continuously, the
+ M30 command is usually used at the end of
a program. By using the M30 command, the
O0001 ; same program is executed repeatedly by
G50 S@@@ M30 only simply pressing the ST
(ST) switch.
G00 T@@@
For the machine equipped with the door
interlock function, an alarm message
(EX1024) is displayed on the screen unless
the door is opened/closed if the ST
(ST)
switch is pressed after the completion of the
program.
COMMAND
M02; . . . . . . Specifies the end of program.
The program execution ends and the NC is reset.
M30; . . . . . . Specifies the end of program and program rewind.
The program execution ends, the NC is reset, and the program
is rewound.
1 Specify the M02 or M30 command in a block without other commands.
2 The indicator above the (ST) switch goes off when the M02 or M30
ST
command is executed. At the same time, the STATUS indicator [ M02/M30 ] is

lit.
C–22 M FUNCTIONS
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;

M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
If the indicator in the optional stop switch onOSP
the operation panel is not lit:

The M01 command is ignored and the next block
is executed continuously.
N2;
G50 S1500;
G96 S120 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;

M05;
M30; or M02; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <M02> Ends program execution and automatic
operation stops.
Although the NC is reset, the cursor
stays at this position.
<M30> Ends program execution and automatic
operation stops.
The NC is reset and the cursor returns to
the start of the program (O0001).
M FUNCTIONS C–23
4. M03, M203, M04, M204, M05 Spindle Start and Stop
The M03 and M04 commands are used to start the

spindle or spindle 1.
The M203 and M204 commands are used to start

spindle 2.
The M05 command is used to stop the spindle,

spindle 1 or spindle 2.
The M203 and M204 commands are used
only for the SL-S series.
With the MC type machine or the Y-axis
specification machine, the M05 command is
used to stop the rotary tool spindle.
COMMAND
M03; . . . . . . Specifies spindle or spindle 1 start in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear
of the spindle or spindle 1
M203; . . . . Specifies spindle 2 start in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear
of spindle 2
M04; . . . . . . Specifies spindle or spindle 1 start in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from
the rear of spindle or spindle 1
M204; . . . . Specifies spindle 2 start in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from
the rear of spindle 2
M05; . . . . . . Specifies spindle, spindle 1 and spindle 2 stop.
Stops the rotation of the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2.
1 Do not stop the spindle by specifying the M05 command while the cutting
tool is in contact with the workpiece. If the spindle is stopped while the
cutting tool is in contact with the workpiece, the cutting tool will be chipped
or the machine damaged.
2 Start the spindle by executing either the M03 or M04 command or the
M203 or M204 command before the cutting tool comes into contact with
the workpiece. If the cutting tool is brought into contact with the workpiece
while it stays stationary, the cutting tool will be chipped.
C–24 M FUNCTIONS
1 Before changing the spindle rotating direction from normal to reverse or from
reverse to normal, stop the spindle once by specifying the M05 command.
After that specify the M code which calls the spindle to rotate in the opposite
direction.
If the spindle rotating direction is changed without specifying the M05
command, an alarm message (EX0401) is displayed on the screen and the
spindle stops.
2 The spindle cannot start if the chuck is unclamped.
Before specifying the M03, M203, M04, or M204 command, make sure that the
STATUS indicator [ CHCL ] is lit or the STATUS indicator [ CHCL ] and the
status indicator [ HEADSTOCK 2 CHUCK CLAMP ] are lit.
3 Before specifying the M03, M203, M04, or M204 command, it is necessary to
specify the required spindle speed using an S code.
For details of S code, refer to page D–13 (2.).
For large-sized models such as SL-400 and 600, it is recommended to cut a

workpiece by rotating the spindle in the reverse direction taking into consideration
the rigidity of the machine.
Programming using M03, M04, and M05
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
direction at 1500 min–1.
Cutting speed: 120 m/min
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;

M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
If the indicator in the optional stop switch
OSP
on
The M01 command is ignored and the program is
executed continuously.
If the M01 command is executed, the spindle or
spindle 1 stops rotating. However, if the M01
command is ignored, the spindle or spindle 1
keeps rotating.
M FUNCTIONS C–25
N2;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202;
direction at 1500 min–1.
Since there are cases that the spindle or spindle 1
is stopped by the execution of the M00 or M01
command, the M03 (M04) command must be
specified in the “G96 S_” block at the beginning of
each part program.
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle or spindle 1 rotation

If the following part program includes the
machining which requires the spindle
rotation to the reverse direction, the spindle
rotation must be stopped by specifying the
M05 command.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N3;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0303;
G97 S640 M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the reverse
(For cutting such as left-hand thread)
X70.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z5.0 F1.0 M24;
G92 X59.1 Z–24.0 F2.0;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;

M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle or spindle 1 rotation
M30;
The M03 (M04) command is usually specified in the “G96 S_” block at the
beginning of a part program. The M05 command is specified to stop the spindle
before changing the spindle rotating direction or at the end of the program.
C–26 M FUNCTIONS
5. M13, M14, M05 Start and Stop of Rotary Tool Spindle

Rotation
The M13 and M14 commands are used to start the rotary tool spindle.
The M05 command is used to stop the rotary tool spindle rotation.
The M13 and M14 commands can be used only with the MC type machine or the
Y-axis specification machine.
The M05 command is also used to stop the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2.
COMMAND
M13; . . . . . . Specifies rotary tool spindle start in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the
rotary tool spindle
M14; . . . . . . Specifies rotary tool spindle start in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear
of the rotary tool spindle
M05; . . . . . . Specifies rotary tool spindle stop.
Stops the rotary tool spindle rotation.
1 Do not stop the rotary tool spindle by specifying the M05 command while
the cutting tool is in contact with the workpiece. This could cause damage
to the cutting tool.
2 Start the rotary tool spindle by executing either the M13 or M14 command
before the cutting tool comes into contact with the workpiece. If the cutting
tool is brought into contact with the workpiece while it is not rotating, it
could be damaged.
3 Before using a rotary tool, the tool must be registered correctly. If tool
registration is incorrect, the rotary tool spindle rotates in the direction
opposite to the direction it should rotate. If machining is executed while the
spindle is rotating in the incorrect direction, the rotary tool and the machine
could be damaged.
For rotary tool registration procedure, refer to the OPERATION

MANUAL separately provided.
M FUNCTIONS C–27
1 Before changing the rotary tool spindle rotating direction from normal to
reverse or from reverse to normal, stop the rotary tool spindle once by
specifying the M05 command. After that specify the M code which calls the
rotary tool spindle to rotate in the opposite direction.
If the rotary tool spindle rotating direction is changed without specifying the
M05 command, an alarm message (EX0401) is displayed on the screen and
the rotary tool spindle stops.
2 The rotary tool spindle cannot start if the chuck is unclamped.
Before specifying the M13 or M14 command, make sure that the STATUS
indicator [ CHCL ] is lit or the STATUS indicator [ CHCL ] and the status
indicator [ HEADSTOCK 2 CHUCK CLAMP ] are lit.
3 Before specifying the M13 or M14 command, it is necessary to connect the
C-axis by specifying the M45 or M245 command or to clamp the spindle by
specifying the M68 or M268 command.
4 Before specifying the M13 or M14 command, it is necessary to specify the
required spindle speed using an S code.
For the S code, refer to page D–13 (2.).
O0001;
N1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S600 M13; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the rotary tool spindle in the normal
G98;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the rotary tool spindle rotation
M46;
M30;
C–28 M FUNCTIONS
6. M08, M09 Coolant Discharge ON/OFF
The M08 command is used to start coolant

discharge.
The M09 command is used to stop coolant

discharge.
COMMAND
M08; . . . . . . Specifies coolant discharge ON.
M09; . . . . . . Specifies coolant discharge OFF.
1 Do not try to change the coolant nozzle setting angle or discharge volume
of coolant during automatic operation. If attempted, you may be entangled
with or caught between the movable parts of the machine.
2 Do not discharge coolant while the spindle is not rotating.
Also when coolant is discharged while the spindle is rotating, measures
must be taken so that coolant will not enter the spindle bearings. If coolant
enters the spindle bearings, the spindle will be damaged.
If coolant is used for automatic operation, it is necessary to make sure that the
coolant tank has sufficient volume of coolant.
For the functions of the coolant switches on the operation panel, refer to the
Coolant discharge control using the coolant switches on the operation panel in
combination with the M08 command is explained below:
Coolant switch ON
(ON)
When this switch is pressed, the indicator in the switch is lit and coolant is
supplied through the nozzles.
When the coolant ON M08 code is read during automatic operation (MDI,
memory, or tape mode), the indicator in the switch is lit and coolant is
automatically supplied.
Coolant switch OFF

(OFF)
When this switch is pressed while coolant is being supplied, the coolant supply
stops and the indicator in the ON
(ON) switch goes off.
Pressing this switch for 1 second or more while coolant is not being supplied
causes the indicator in the ON
(ON) switch to blink.
In this state, the coolant is not supplied even if an M08 command is executed.
This feature is used when checking a program.
When the ON
(ON) switch is pressed again, the indicator in the ON
(ON)
switch stops blinking and stays lit.
M FUNCTIONS C–29
Programming using M08 and M09
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting coolant discharge
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0;
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
If the indicator in the optional stop switch
OSP
on
The M01 command is ignored and the
program is executed continuously.
If the M01 command is executed, coolant
discharge stops. However, if the M01 command is
ignored, coolant is kept discharged.
N2;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202;
G96 S120 M03;
Since coolant discharge might have been stopped
by the execution of the M00 or M01 command, the
M08 command must be specified at the beginning
of a part program.
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping coolant discharge

M05;
M30;
The M08 command is usually specified in the first approach operation in each part
program. The M09 command is usually specified when the cutting tool retracts
from the workpiece at the end of a program.
C–30 M FUNCTIONS
7. M23, M24 Chamfering ON/OFF
(1) Chamfering ON (M23) The M23 and M24 commands indicate whether or
not chamfering is carried out in the thread cutting
cycle called by the G92 and G76 commands.
U/2 If the thread to be cut does not have a groove at
the end, as illustrated on the left, the chamfering
ON command (M23) is required.
Specify the chamfering OFF command (M24)

when the thread has a groove at the end, as
(2) Chamfering OFF (M24)
illustrated to the left, and chamfering is not
necessary.
Distance U/2 must be greater than

chamfering distance.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
COMMAND
M23; . . . . . . Specifies chamfering ON.
Calls the chamfering ON mode.
M24; . . . . . . Specifies chamfering OFF.
Cancels the chamfering ON mode.
Pay sufficient care to possible interference between the cutting tool and the
workpiece when carrying out chamfering.
Chamfering distance (r) as in the

illustration can be set for parameter
No. 5130.
45°
Chamfering angle is 45° .
r
M FUNCTIONS C–31
To cut a M30 P2.0 thread, having effective thread length of 50 mm.

(Material: AISI 1045 (carbon steel), Cutting feedrate: 120 m/min)
(1) 50
(2) 50
P=2 P=2
∅ 30
∅ 30
Chamfering ON (M23) Chamfering OFF (M24)
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G97 S1200 M03;
X60.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z10.0 F1.0 M23(M24); . . . . . . . . . <M23> For the workpiece which has the shape
as illustrated in (1), chamfering is
executed if the G92 command is
specified after the M23 command.
<M24> For the workpiece which has the shape
as illustrated in (2), chamfering is not
executed if the G92 command is
specified after the M24 command.
G92 X29.4 Z–55.0 F2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the G92 thread cutting cycle
In the case of (1):
The Z coordinate of the thread end point
(Z–55.0) is “effective thread length +
chamfering distance”.
In the case of (2):
The Z coordinate of the thread end point
(Z–55.0) is “effective thread length +
incomplete thread length L2”.
For the “incomplete thread length L2”
refer to page B–35.
X28.9;
X28.5;
X28.1; . . . . The G92 thread cutting cycle is executed at each
X27.8; thread cutting diameter.
X27.56; The final thread cutting diameter is X27.26.
X27.36;
X27.26;
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
C–32 M FUNCTIONS
For details of the depth of cut and the number of passes, refer to page B–38.
However, the values given in the table are only for reference.
The depth of cut and the number of passes should be determined according to
actual machining status. Use the thread gage to check the machined thread
accuracy.
M FUNCTIONS C–33
8. M10, M210, M11, M211 Chuck Clamp/Unclamp
The chuck or the spindle 1 chuck clamps a

workpiece when the M10 command is executed.
The spindle 2 chuck clamps a workpiece when the

M210 command is executed.
The M11 command is used to unclamp the chuck

Unclamp Clamp or the spindle 1 chuck.
For unclamping the spindle 2 chuck, the M211

command is used.
These M codes are used to continuously machine

workpieces in the machine equipped with a bar
feeder or a loader. They are also used for carrying
out both-center work or transferring a workpiece
between the spindles.
The M210 and M211 commands are used

only for the SL-S series machines.
COMMAND
M10; . . . . . . Specifies chuck or spindle 1 chuck clamp.
The chuck or spindle 1 chuck clamps a workpiece in it.
M210; . . . . Specifies spindle 2 chuck clamp.
The spindle 2 chuck clamps a workpiece in it.
M11; . . . . . . Specifies chuck or spindle 1 chuck unclamp.
The chuck or spindle 1 chuck unclamps a workpiece.
M211; . . . . Specifies spindle 2 chuck unclamp.
The spindle 2 chuck unclamps a workpiece.
1 Do not execute the M11 or M211 command when a workpiece is clamped

by the chuck with the single block switch set ON. If the M11 or M211
command is executed under such status, the machine stops operating due
to the chuck interlock function causing the workpiece to fall which could
damage the machine.
2 Specify the M10, M210, M11, or M211 command in a block without other
commands, and specify the G04 command in the next block to allow the
chuck to complete the clamp or unclamp operation correctly. Since the
time required for the chuck to carry out the clamp or unclamp operation
varies depending on the chuck type and chucking pressure, the dwell time
should be a little longer than the actual clamp/unclamp time.
C–34 M FUNCTIONS
1 At the start of an operation, the workpiece must be clamped manually. This is

because the automatic operation cannot be started with the chuck in the
unclamp state due to the chuck interlock function.
2 The chucking direction (O.D. chucking, I.D. chucking) can be changed using
the “CHUCK DIRECTION” or “CHUCK1 DIRECTION” and “CHUCK2
DIRECTION” on the OPERATION PANEL screen.
For the procedure used for changing the chucking direction, refer to
the OPERATION MANUAL separately provided.
3 Due to the chuck interlock function, the M11 command must not be specified
while the spindle or spindle 1 is rotating. Similarly, the M211 command must
not be specified while spindle 2 is rotating.
4 Due to the chuck interlock function, the M11 and M211 commands must not be
specified while the rotary tool spindle is rotating.
Spindle side Tailstock side
For both-center work, the M11 command may be used to ensure safe operation.
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
Machining program
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle rotation

M01;
M11; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The chuck unclamps.
The STATUS indicator [ CHCL ] goes off.
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ends program execution and automatic operation
stops.
The NC is reset and the cursor returns to the start
of the program (O0001).
To start the next cycle after changing the workpiece, it is necessary to step on the
footswitch to turn on the STATUS indicator [ CHCL ]. Otherwise, the chuck
interlock function disables the cycle start.
M FUNCTIONS C–35
In machining programs for both-center-work, specify the M11

command to unclamp the chuck before the M30 command to reset
and rewind the program. If the M11 command is not executed and
the ST
(ST) switch is pressed by mistake, automatic operation will
start and the operator may be injured.
However, if the M11 command is executed when the center at the
spindle side is held by the chuck during programming, the center
will fall or shift, which in turn will cause the workpiece to fall,
damaging the machine. If the center at the spindle side is held by
the chuck, do not execute the M11 command. (Applies only to
As explained above, although the M11 command does not work to clamp/unclamp a
workpiece actually, it calls for the chuck interlock function to ensure safe operation.
C–36 M FUNCTIONS

O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
N5;
1000 min–1
mode
The spindle 2 rotates in the reverse direction at
100 min–1 with the chuck unclamped.
In the synchronous operation mode, it is
possible to rotate the spindle even if the
chuck is unclamped.
G00 B_ ;
G98 G01 B_ F1000;
Therefore, it is not necessary to specify the
M210 command.
G99;
... ... ...
Machining program (Cutting off of workpiece)

G28 B0;
M01;
...
M FUNCTIONS C–37
9. M25, M26 Tailstock Spindle IN/OUT
The M25 command moves the tailstock spindle out

from the tailstock body.
The M26 command moves the tailstock spindle

into the tailstock body.
M25
The M25 and M26 commands are used to move
the tailstock spindle in or out for center work
operation.
1 The M25 and M26 commands can be

used only for the machines equipped
with the tailstock.
2 The M25 and M26 commands are used
M26 in combination with the loader or robot
system or other peripheral equipment.
COMMAND
M25; . . . . . . Specifies tailstock spindle OUT.
M26; . . . . . . Specifies tailstock spindle IN.
Always disable the tailstock spindle interlock function when

carrying out center-work operations using M25. Automatic
operation cannot be started in the state the tailstock spindle
interlock function set on. Before starting center-work operation,
however, make sure that M25 is correctly specified in a program and
a workpiece is correctly supported by the tailstock spindle by
checking the program and carrying out test cutting. If center-work
operation is started carelessly, the workpiece will fly out, causing
1 Specify the M25 command (to extend the tailstock spindle) or M26
command (to retract the tailstock spindle) in a block without other
commands, and specify the G04 command in the next block to suspend
program operation for a period long enough to allow the tailstock spindle to
extend and the center to hold the workpiece correctly, or long enough to
allow the tailstock spindle to retract into the tailstock correctly.
If G04 is not specified in the block following the M25 or M26 block, the next
block will be executed before the workpiece is held by the center properly,
or before the tailstock spindle has retracted properly; the tool, holder, or
turret head will then interfere with the tailstock spindle or tailstock spindle
center, damaging the machine.
longer than the time required to extend or retract the tailstock spindle.
(Applies only to machines equipped with a tailstock.)
C–38 M FUNCTIONS
2 When a workpiece is held by the tailstock, execute the M26 command

(tailstock spindle IN) after securely supporting the workpiece by the crane
or other appropriate means. If the M26 command is carelessly executed
although the workpiece is not supported securely by appropriate means,
the workpiece is held only by the chuck after the retraction of the tailstock
spindle. This could cause the workpiece to fall and damage the machine.
For the details how to use the tailstock interlock function, refer to the
Programming using M25 and M26 (1)
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1000;
G00 T0101;
G97 S1000 M03;
... ... ...
Facing or center drilling program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of the turret head at a rapid traverse
rate to a position where interference does not
occur if the tailstock spindle moves
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping spindle rotation
M01;
N2;
M25; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tailstock spindle OUT to push the
workpiece by its center
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling for dwell; program execution is suspended
until the workpiece is securely pushed by the
tailstock spindle center.
The time required for the tailstock spindle
center to hold the workpiece securely varies
according to the tailstock spindle thrust and
the tailstock body position. Determine the
dwell period taking these into consideration.
For the procedure used for adjusting the

tailstock spindle thrust, refer to the
OPERATION MANUAL separately
provided.
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202;
G96 S100 M03;
M FUNCTIONS C–39
G00 X60.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of the cutting tool at a rapid traverse
rate to a position avoiding interference with the
tailstock body
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;

M26; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The tailstock spindle retracts into the tailstock
body.
...
Always stop the spindle before moving the spindle IN/OUT by specifying the
M05 command.
An example of program used for the machine equipped with programmable tailstock.
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1000;
G00 T0101;
G97 S1000 M03;
... ... ...
Facing or centering program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping coolant discharge

M01;
N2;
G479 V_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tailstock to the position specified by V_
(machine coordinate value)
M25; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The tailstock spindle moves out.
The tailstock spindle center pushes the workpiece
to hold it.
C–40 M FUNCTIONS
G04U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling for dwell; program execution is suspended

until the workpiece is securely held by the tailstock
spindle center.
The time required for the tailstock spindle
center to hold the workpiece securely varies
according to the tailstock spindle thrust and
the tailstock body position. Determine the
dwell period taking these into consideration.
For the procedure used for adjusting the

tailstock spindle thrust, refer to the
OPERATION MANUAL separately
provided.
G50 S1000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S100 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
G28 U0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X-axis to avoid interference

with the tailstock
M05;
M26; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The tailstock spindle moves IN.
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling for dwell to allow tailstock spindle to
correctly extract into the tailstock body
G479 V_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tailstock to the previously located
position, specified by V_ (machine coordinate
value)
...
M FUNCTIONS C–41
10. M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF
The M34 command is used to synchronize both

spindle speeds and spindle phases between
spindles 1 and 2.
The M35 command is used to synchronize only
spindle speeds between spindles 1 and 2.
The M36 command cancels the synchronized
operation mode.
1 The M34, M35, and M36 commands can be used only for the SL-S series
machines.
After returning spindle (B-axis) to the machine zero point on completion of
COMMAND
M34; . . . . . . Calls the phase synchronized operation mode.
M35; . . . . . . Calls the speed synchronized operation mode.
M36; . . . . . . Cancels the phase and/or speed synchronized operation mode.
1 To transfer a workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2, synchronize the spindle
speeds of these spindles by specifying the M35 command. If a workpiece is
transferred without synchronizing the spindle speeds, the workpiece will be
scratched.
2 To transfer a hexagonal bar, it is necessary to synchronize spindles 1 and 2
both in speeds and phases by specifying the M34 command. Unless the
spindles are synchronized both in speeds and phases, transfer of a hexagonal
bar is not possible.
3 The M36 command should be specified only after the completion of cut-off
cycle or when either of spindle 1 or spindle 2 chuck is unclamped.
4 If the M34 command is specified while the spindle 2 chuck is clamped, an
alarm message (EX2419) is displayed on the screen.
5 Do not specify the M05 command in the phase synchronization operation mode
or the speed synchronization operation mode. If the M05 command is
specified in these modes, spindles 1 and 2 stop rotating in synchronization and
the phase synchronization operation mode or the speed synchronization
operation mode is canceled.
C–42 M FUNCTIONS
It is allowed to use the M34 command for transferring a workpiece having round
section shape. However, since spindle speed synchronization control is executed
after the completion of phase synchronization, it takes a long time to synchronize
both the speeds and phases. To shorten idle time, it is recommended to specify the
M35 command if the workpiece has a round section.
Programming using M34, M35, and M36 (1)
To transfer a workpiece, machined in spindle 1, from spindle 1 to spindle 2 by

synchronizing the spindles.
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
N5;
G97 S1000 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting spindle 1 in the normal direction at 1000
min–1
M34; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the phase synchronized operation
mode
After the synchronization of the phases of
the spindles, the speeds of both of the
spindles are synchronized at 1000 min–1.
chuck is unclamped.
(First approach)
(Second approach)
M FUNCTIONS C–43
... ... ... Machining program (Cutting off of workpiece)
M36; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the phase synchronized operation mode

Spindle 2 stops rotating while spindle 1
keeps rotating at the specified speed.
zero point
M01;
C–44 M FUNCTIONS
Programming using M34, M35, and M36 (2)
To transfer a workpiece, machined in spindle 1, from spindle 1 to spindle 2 by

synchronizing the spindle speeds.
O0001;
N1;
... ... ...
N5;
1000 min–1
mode
The speeds of both of the spindles are
synchronized at 1000 min–1.
chuck is unclamped.
(First approach)
(Second approach)

... ... ...
Machining program (Cutting off of workpiece)

Spindle 2 stops rotating while spindle 1
keeps rotating at the specified speed.
M FUNCTIONS C–45

zero point
M01;
...
C–46 M FUNCTIONS
11. M45, M245, M46 C-axis Connection and Cancel
When the M45 command is specified, the spindle or spindle 1 functions as the C-axis.
When the M245 command is specified, the spindle 2 functions as the C-axis.
When the M46 command is specified, the C-axis function of the spindle, spindle 1, or
spindle 2 is canceled.
The M45, M245, and M46 commands can be used only for the MC type or Y-axis
specification machines. The M245 command can be used only for the MC type or
Y-axis specification SL-S series machines.
By specifying the M45 or M245 command in the automatic or MDI mode, it is
possible to index the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2 in the required angular position
to carry out hole machining on the workpiece circumference or end face.
In the M45 or M245 mode, it is also possible to control spindle rotation in
synchronization with the tool movement to cut notches or grooves.
COMMAND
M45; . . . . . . Calls C-axis connection for the spindle or spindle 1
M245; . . . . Calls C-axis connection for spindle 2
M46; . . . . . . Cancels C-axis connection for the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle
2
With the SL-S series machines, the chuck interlock function is valid only for the
spindle for which the M code is specified last if more than one of the M45
(C-axis connection for spindle 1), M245 (C-axis connection for spindle 2), M68
(spindle brake clamp for spindle 1), and M268 (spindle brake clamp for spindle
2) are specified in the same block, and the chuck interlock function is not valid
for the other spindle. Therefore, machining must be carried out using the
spindle corresponding to the M code specified last. If machining is carried out
using the other spindle, the rotary tool spindle does not stop even if the chuck is
unclamped during machining causing falling or flying out of the workpiece,
which could damage the machine.
1 Stop the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2 by specifying the M05 command
before specifying the M45 or M245 command. If the M45 or M245 command is
specified although the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2 is rotating, the machine
stops with alarm message (EX1424) displayed on the screen.
2 Before specifying the M46 command, it is necessary to stop rotary tool spindle
by specifying the M05 command. If the M46 command is specified although
the rotary tool spindle has not been stopped, an alarm message (EX1426) is
3 With the SL-S series machines, it is not necessary to cancel the C-axis
function once by specifying the M45 command when changing the C-axis state
from M45 to M245 state or from M245 to M45 state.
M FUNCTIONS C–47
4 With the SL-S series machines, both of spindles 1 and 2 function as the C-axis
if either the M45 or M245 command is specified. To carry out turning by using
either spindle 1 or spindle 2, cancel the C-axis function for both of spindles 1
and 2 by specifying the M46 command.
5 With the SL-S series machines, it is necessary to return the C-axis to the
machine zero point to carry out machining using spindle 2 after carrying out
machining using spindle 1.
6 After finishing the operation performed in the C–axis connection mode, called
by the M45 or M245 command, always specify the M46 command at the end of
a program.
O0001;
N1;
G98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the feed per minute mode
M45; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the spindle or spindle 1 as the C-axis
G28 H0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the C-axis to the machine zero point
G00 T0101;
... ... ...
Machining program
G28 U0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X-axis to the machine zero point

Stopping the rotary tool spindle
G28 W0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the Z-axis to the machine zero point
M46; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the C-axis connection
M30;
C–48 M FUNCTIONS
12. M47 Workpiece Ejector OUT
The M47 command is used to eject the workpiece,

finished in the spindle 2, from the chuck.
1 The M47 command can be used only for the SL-S series machines.
2 Usually, the M47 command is used in combination with the M73 parts catcher
OUT command and M74 parts catcher IN command. For the machine
equipped with the loader, these M codes (M47, M73, and M74) are optional.
For details of the M73 and M74 commands, refer to page C–57 (16.).
COMMAND
M47; . . . . . . Specifies the workpiece ejector OUT.
1 When specifying the M47 command, it is necessary to stop spindle 2 by

specifying the M05 command. The workpiece ejector does not start if the
spindle is not stopped.
2 The chuck on spindle 2 is automatically unclamped if the M47 command is
specified.
M FUNCTIONS C–49
Programming using M47
O0001;
... ... ... ...
Machining program

G53 B_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving spindle 2 to the position where the
workpiece is dropped into the parts catcher
The parts catcher operates disregarding
of the turret position.
For the coordinate value of the B-axis,
specify the position where the parts
catcher can receive the workpiece
correctly without causing interference
between the moved out parts catcher
and spindle 2, turret head, etc. Note
that parts catcher OUT operation is not
possible if the B-axis is at a position
40 mm or more in the negative side in
M73; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts catcher OUT
M47; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece ejector OUT
M252; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning ON in-spindle air blow (spindle 2)
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell
G28 B0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving spindle 2 to the machine zero point
M74; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts catcher IN
M257; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning OFF in-spindle air blow (spindle 2)
M251; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle air blow ON (spindle 2)
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell
M259; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle air blow OFF (spindle 2)
...
C–50 M FUNCTIONS
13. M48, M49 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF/ON
The override setting for cutting feedrate during

O0001;
automatic operation is canceled when the M49
...
M49; command is executed. In this mode, axis feedrate

G01...F; is fixed to the one programmed by the F code.
Therefore, if the setting for the feedrate override
dial on the operation panel is not 100%, the setting
100%
is ignored and it is assumed to be 100%.
In daily operation, the M48 and M49 commands

are rarely used. In test cut, these M codes may be
used. That is, the M48 command is specified in a
program so that cutting feedrates may be adjusted
to meet actual machining status.
After determining proper feedrates, the M49

command should be specified in a program so that
mass production may be executed by using the
fixed feedrates.
COMMAND
M48; . . . . . . Specifies feedrate override cancel OFF.
M49; . . . . . . Specifies feedrate override cancel ON.
When the M49 command is executed, the setting of the override dial is ignored
and actual movement commands are all executed at the programmed
feedrates. In this mode, actual feedrates cannot be set faster than the
programmed feedrates.
However, if this command is specified in a program, it is impossible to lower the
actual feedrate by using the feedrate override dial even if the programmed
feedrate seems too fast.
1 During thread cutting, feedrate must be kept constant. The override function is
automatically ignored if the G code calling thread cutting operation is executed.
Therefore, it is not necessary to specify the M48 and M49 commands in a
program for thread cutting operation.
2 During tapping, feedrate must be kept constant. The override function is
automatically ignored if the G code calling tapping operation is executed.
Therefore, it is not necessary to specify the M48 and M49 commands in a
program for tapping operation.
3 The M48 and M49 commands are not valid for rapid traverse operation.
Therefore, the rapid traverse rate override switch is operative while the M49
command is valid.
M FUNCTIONS C–51
The following program should be executed while the block delete switch on the
operation panel is set OFF.
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X70.0 Z20.0;

G01 Z2.0 F0.3;
/M49; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the override for cutting feed invalid
Since the slash (/) code is entered, execution of
this block is controlled by the setting of the block
delete switch on the operation panel.
BDT
If the block delete switch BDT

is active (the
indicator in the switch is lit):
Ignores this block and therefore the M49 command
is not executed. The following blocks are
executed with the feedrate override function valid.
If the block delete switch is not active (the
BDT
indicator in the switch is not lit):

Executes the M49 command. According to the
execution of the M49 command, the override for
cutting feed is made invalid and following blocks
are executed with 100% of feedrate.
Z–20.0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The feedrate for Z-axis movement is fixed at
0.2 mm/rev and the cutting tool is moved to Z–20.0
along the Z-axis at this feedrate.
X102.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting along the X-axis to X102.0 at
the fixed feedrate of 0.2 mm/rev
/M48; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making override for cutting feed valid
After the execution of this command, the override
switches on the operation panel are valid.
...
C–52 M FUNCTIONS
14. M68, M268, M69 Spindle Brake Clamp and Unclamp
When the M68 command is specified, the brake of the spindle or spindle 1 is clamped.
When the M268 command is specified, the brake of spindle 2 is clamped.
When the M69 is specified the brake of the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2 is unclamped.
The spindle brake holds the spindle in the stopped state.
The M68, M268, and M69 commands can be used only for the MC type or Y-axis
specification machines. The M268 command can be used only for the MC type or
Y-axis specification SL-S series machines.
1 When carrying out hole machining or heavy-duty cutting at the desired position
in the end face or circumference of the workpiece, specify the M68 or M268
command while the spindle, spindle 1 or spindle 2 is stopped to apply powerful
brake.
2 To carry out ordinary turning operation, specify the M69 command to unclamp
the brake of the spindle, spindle 1, or spindle 2.
COMMAND
M68; . . . . . . Specifies clamping of the spindle or spindle 1 brake
M268; . . . . Specifies clamping of the spindle 2 brake
M69; . . . . . . Specifies unclamping of the spindle brake
With the SL-S series machines, the chuck interlock function is valid only for the
spindle for which the M code is specified last if more than one of the M45
(C-axis connection for spindle 1), M245 (C-axis connection for spindle 2), M68
(spindle brake clamp for spindle 1), and M268 (spindle brake clamp for spindle
2) are specified in the same block, and the chuck interlock function is not valid
for the other spindle. Therefore, machining must be carried out using the
spindle corresponding to the M code specified last. If machining is carried out
using the other spindle, the rotary tool spindle does not stop even if the chuck is
unclamped during machining causing falling or flying out of the workpiece,
which could damage the machine.
1 When specifying the M68 or M268 command in the state the C-axis is not
connected, stop the spindle, spindle 1 or spindle 2 by specifying the M05
command. If the M68 or M268 command is specified although the spindle,
spindle 1, or spindle 2 has not stopped, an alarm message (EX1424) is
2 When specifying the M69 command in the state the C-axis is not connected,
stop the rotary tool spindle by specifying the M05 command. If the M69
command is specified although the rotary tool spindle has not stopped, an
alarm message (EX1426) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
3 With the SL-S series machines, it is not necessary to unclamp the spindle
brake once by specifying the M69 command when changing the spindle brake
clamp state from M68 to M268 state or from M268 to M68 state.
M FUNCTIONS C–53
4 With the SL-S series machines, spindle brake is clamped for both of spindles 1
and 2 if either of the M68 and M268 commands is specified. To carry out
turning by using either spindle 1 or spindle 2, unclamp the spindle brake for
both of spindles 1 and 2 by specifying the M69 command.
5 With the SL-S series machines, it is not possible to specify the M268 command
in the block that contains the hole machining canned cycle command. Note
that for the execution of the synchronized tapping cycle called by the G384
command, designation of “M268.” is used for the command to clamp the
spindle 2 brake.
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
Z5.0
M68; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamping spindle brake for the spindle or spindle 1
... ... ...
Machining program
G28 U0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X-axis to the machine zero point

Stopping the rotary tool spindle
G28 W0 M69; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the Z-axis to the machine zero point
Unclamping the spindle brake
M30;
C–54 M FUNCTIONS
15. M70, M483, M482 Bar Feeder Operation, Bar Feed OFF, Bar
Stock Change
When the machine is equipped with a bar feeder

(single bar stock or multiple bar stocks) of Alps, a
bar stock is supplied from the bar feeder into the
machine when the M70 command is specified.
With the bar feeder (multiple bar stocks) of LNS,

when the M70 command is specified, a bar stock
is supplied from the bar feeder into the machine,
and bar feed is stopped when the M483 command
is specified. The M482 command is used to
supply new bar stock from the stocker to the bar
feeder.
The M70, M483 and M482 commands can be used only for the machine equipped
with the bar feeder.
COMMAND
M70; . . . . . . Specifies bar feeder operation.
M483; . . . . Turns bar feeder operation OFF.
M482; . . . . Supplies new bar stocks to the bar feeder.
When using a bar feeder, check the length, mass, and diameter of the bar stock
to be handled. The bar stock exceeding the capacity of the bar feeder must not
be used.
1 Before feeding a bar stock into the machine by the M70 command, unclamp
the chuck by specifying the M11 command. After the bar feeder has fed the
bar stock into the machine, clamp the chuck by specifying the M10 command.
2 The following four types of bar feeders are provided.
– Type 1 (Alps, single-stock specification)
– Type 2 (Alps, multi-stock specification)
– Type 3 (LNS, single-stock specification)
– Type 4 (LNS, multi-stock specification)
The correspondence between usable M codes and the bar feeder types is
indicated below.
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4

M70 f f f
M483 f
M482 f* f
* With the ASQ-80 and ASQ-51 only, new bar stocks can be supplied from the
stocker to the bar feeder by specifying the M482 command.
M FUNCTIONS C–55
Determine the length the bar stock is fed into the machine by the bar feeder in the
manner indicated below:
1) Mount a workpiece stopper in the turret head.
2) Feed the bar stock into the machine by executing the M70 command.
3) Bar stock feed stops when a preset time has elapsed after the contact of the
bar stock with the bar stopper.
The following is an example program for the machine equipped with the bar feeder.
(Type 1)
O1;
N1;
... ... ...
Machining program

M11; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chuck unclamp
to allow the chuck to unclamp correctly.
Since the time required for the chuck to
carry out unclamp operation varies
depending on the chuck type and chucking
pressure, the dwell time should be specified
meeting actual conditions.
M70; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeding the bar stock from the bar feeder to the
machine
M10; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chuck clamp
to allow the chuck to clamp the workpiece
correctly.
Since the time required for the chuck to
carry out clamp operation varies depending
on the chuck type and chucking pressure,
the dwell time should be specified meeting
actual conditions.
C–56 M FUNCTIONS
/M99 P100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To carry out mass

production, make the Block delete function invalid
O1;
block delete function :
invalid so that the “M99 :
/M99 P100;
P100;” block is executed. N100;
The “M99 P100;” jumps the :
:
program flow to the M99;
sequence labeled “N100;”.
When the block delete Block delete function valid
function is invalid, the cycle O1;
illustrated on the right is :
:
repeated to machine /M99 P100;
workpieces continuously. M30;
To finish automatic
continuous operation,
make the block delete
function valid to skip the
“M99 P100;” block.
In this case, the M30 command in the next block is
executed, ending the program. The cursor returns
to the start of the program and the machine stops.
For the details how to use the block

delete function, refer to the OPERATION
M30;
N100;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
... ... ...
Machining program
M01;
M99;
M FUNCTIONS C–57
16. M73, M74 Parts Catcher IN/OUT
When the M73 command is executed, the parts

catcher swings into the position beneath the chuck
where it receives the finished workpiece.
When the M74 command is executed, the parts

catcher swings back to the clear position where
the finished workpiece is discharged from the parts
catcher.
1 With the SL-S series machines, the M73 and M74 commands are standard.
For the machines equipped with the loader, these M codes are optional.
2 With the SL series machines (excludes the SL-400 series and the SL-600
series), the M73 and M74 commands are optional.
3 With the VL, TL, LL, SL-400, and SL-600 series machines, the M73 and M74
command cannot be used.
4 The parts catcher operation mechanism will be different from that illustrated in
the diagram on the left depending on the machine models and specifications.
COMMAND
M73; . . . . . . Specifies parts catcher OUT.
M74; . . . . . . Specifies parts catcher IN.
1 When the M73 command is specified, make sure that the turret head is
retracted to a position where it will not interfere with the parts catcher when
it swings out to the chuck side position. Interference could damage the
machine.
2 If the mass of workpiece exceeds the capacity of the parts catcher, do not
use the parts catcher to unload the workpiece from the machine. If such
workpieces are handled by the parts catcher, it will damage the machine.
1 Specify the M73 and M74 commands independently without other commands.
2 With the SL-S series machine, it is necessary to move spindle 2 (B-axis) to an
appropriate ejection position in the parts catcher side when ejecting a
workpiece after swinging out the parts catcher to the chuck side. However,
moving spindle 2 (B-axis) to the parts catcher side excessively with the parts
catcher swung out to the chuck side may cause an interference between
spindle 2 (B-axis) and the parts catcher. To avoid such an interference,
parameter is set before shipping the machine to disable M73 if spindle 2
(B-axis) is positioned at –40 mm (in the machine coordinate system) or in the
negative side exceeding this point. This value should be changed by users,
however, according to the dimensions of the chuck, the jaws, and the
workpiece. If it is necessary to change the value, please contact Mori Seiki.
3 With the SL-S series machine, spindle 2 (B-axis) cannot be moved in the
negative direction if the parts catcher has swung out to the chuck side.
C–58 M FUNCTIONS
The following is an example program for SL-S series.

O0001;
... ... ...
Machining program

and the spindle 2, turret head, etc. Note
M73; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts catcher OUT
M47; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece ejector OUT/IN
M252; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning ON in-spindle air blow (spindle 2)
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell
G28 B0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving spindle 2 to the machine zero point
M74; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts catcher IN
M257; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning OFF in-spindle air blow (spindle 2)
M251; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle air blow ON (spindle 2)
G04 U_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell
M259; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle air blow OFF (spindle 2)
...
M30;
M FUNCTIONS C–59
17. M432 Parts Catcher Cycle Function
With the SL-S series machine, it is possible to carry out a machining cycle again in spindle
1 for the workpiece having been machined in spindle 2 after the completion of the cycle
indicated below.
Spindle 2 stop ³ Parts catcher OUT ³ Workpiece ejection ³ Parts catcher IN
The program does not advance to the next block while the cycle indicated above is
executed.
By using the M 432 command, it is possible to execute the next block of the program
simultaneously with the execution of the cycle indicated above.
This allows the workpiece to be machined in spindle 1 immediately after the completion of
machining in spindle 2.
COMMAND
M432; . . . . Specifies the parts catcher cycle.
The parts catcher cycle function must be called before the workpiece having
been machined in spindle 2 is machined again in spindle 1. To use this
function, it must be checked beforehand that the machining cycle executed in
spindle 1 does not cause interference with the parts catcher. If the parts
catcher cycle function is called without ensuring this, the tool, holder, and/or
turret head will interfere with the parts catcher which could cause damage to
the machine.
2 The chuck clamp and unclamp commands (M210, M211) of spindle 2 cannot
be executed during the parts catcher cycle.
3 If the following operations are specified during the parts catcher cycle, they are
executed after the completion of the parts catcher cycle.
– B-axis movement command
– Phase synchronization operation command (M34)
– Speed synchronization operation command (M35)
– Arm DOWN command (M71) for the automatic in-machine tool presetter
– Manual door open command (M30)
– Automatic door open command (M85)
– Spindle 2 normal/reverse rotation command (M203/M204)
– Spindle orientation command <spindle 2> (M219)
– Spindle air blow command <spindle 2> (M251)
4 It is not allowed to specify the M432 command if spindle 2 (B-axis) is in a
position 40 mm or more in the negative direction in the machine coordinate
system.
5 If the spindle 2 (B-axis) positioning command is specified with the M432
command in the same block, the M432 command is executed after the
completion of positioning of the spindle 2 (B-axis).
C–60 M FUNCTIONS
The following is an example program for the machine equipped with the bar feeder.
O0001;
...

and the spindle 2, turret head, etc. Note
M432; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts catcher cycle
Spindle 2 stops rotating
N10;
M11; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle 1 chuck unclamp.
to allow the chuck of spindle 1 to unclamp
correctly.
M70; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeding the bar stock from the bar feeder to the
machine
M10; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle 1 chuck clamp.
to allow the chuck of spindle 1 to clamp correctly.
G28 B0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the spindle 2 to the machine zero point
N11;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
...

M30;
M FUNCTIONS C–61
18. M80 Workpiece Cut-off Detection
The M80 command is used to check if the cut-off cycle, executed after the transfer of the
workpiece clamped in the chuck of spindle 1 to the chuck of spindle 2, has been
completed.
Completion of cutting off is confirmed by detecting the spindle speeds of spindles 1 and 2.
If spindle 2 does not follow spindle 1 when the spindle speed of spindle 1 is changed,
cutting off is judged to have completed.
With the SL-S series machine equipped with the Y-axis, return the Y-axis and then
the X-axis to the respective 3rd zero point when moving spindle 2 (B-axis) for
transferring a workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2. If spindle 2 (B-axis) is moved
although both the Y- and X-axes not returned to the 3rd zero point, the machine
stops with the corresponding alarm message displayed on the screen.
workpiece transfer, return the X- and Y-axes to the respective machine zero point in
this order.
COMMAND
M80; . . . . . . Detects the completion of cut-off cycle.
2 If the completion of the cut-off cycle is not detected after the execution of the
M80 command, both spindle 1 and spindle 2 stop rotating with the alarm
message (EX0035) displayed on the screen.
3 When the M80 command is executed in the synchronized mode operation, the
spindle at which the spindle start command (M03, M04, M203, M204) was
executed rotates at the specified speed. The other spindle stops rotating.
4 Although the execution of the M80 command cancels the synchronized
operation of spindles 1 and 2, the synchronized operation mode is not
canceled. Always specify the M36 command after specifying the M80
command.
C–62 M FUNCTIONS
O0001;
N1;
... ... ... ...
Machining program
N5;
1000 min–1
mode
M211;
G00 B_ ;
... ... ...
Workpiece transfer
G99 G00 X42.0 M08 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the feed per revolution mode
G01 X–0.6 F0.08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to X–0.6 at the feedrate of 0.08 mm/rev
(cut-off cycle)
G28 U0 M09;
M80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detecting cutting off
Spindle 1 rotates at 1000 min–1 and spindle
2 stops rotating
G28 W0;
zero point
M01;
M FUNCTIONS C–63
19. M85, M86 Automatic Door Open/Close
When the M85 command is executed, the

automatic door opens.
When the M86 command is executed, the

automatic door closes.
1 The M85 and M86 commands can be

used only for the machines equipped
with the automatic door.
2 The M85 and M86 commands are
usually used in combination with the
loader, robot system, or other automatic
workpiece loading/unloading equipment.
COMMAND
M85; . . . . . . Specifies the automatic door open.
M86; . . . . . . Specifies the automatic door close.
For the machines equipped with the robot system, if the door is
opened by he execution of the M85 command during automatic
operation (including the MDI operation), the operation is
continuously executed. Therefore, pay sufficient care so that you
will not touch or stand near the rotating or moving parts of the
machine. Otherwise, you could sustain injuries or the machine
could be damaged due to entangling by the rotating parts, crushed
by the moving parts, flying out of the workpiece, and/or splashing
of chips and coolant.
When the automatic door is closed by specifying the M86 command, make sure
that your fingers, etc., do not get caught in the door and that there are no
obstacles that will prevent the door from closing. If your fingers are caught in
the door you could be injured.
1 Before opening the door by the M85 command, always stop the spindle and
the rotary tool spindle, turret head, axis movements, and coolant discharge.
2 Specify the M86 command to close the automatic door at the start of the
program.
Although automatic operation can be executed while the door is open, only the
following M codes are executable until the door is closed:
M00, M01, M02, M30, and automatic door open/close M codes (M85, M86)
Other commands such as S codes, T codes, and axis movement commands
are not executable until the door is closed.
C–64 M FUNCTIONS
O0001;
N1;
M86; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the automatic door
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . After the completion of cutting, the cutting tool
moves away from the workpiece.
Stopping coolant discharge
M85; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the automatic door
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ends program execution.
The automatic door close command (M86) is specified at the start of the program
and the automatic door open command (M85) is specified at the end of a program.
M FUNCTIONS C–65
20. M89 Work Counter, Total Counter
Each time the M89 command written in a program is read, the count data of the work
counter increases “1”.
Set the number of times the cycle should be repeated on the PC WORK COUNTER
screen (option).
Suppose “100” is set for the work counter. If the M89 command has been executed 100
times as the program is executed repeatedly, the NC will be placed in the cycle start
interlocked state or the block delete valid state according to your selection.
1 The M89 command is optional.

2 The work counter is used for tool life management function as well as to control
the number of finished workpieces. In comparison to the work counter, the
total counter is used for simply counting the number.
COMMAND
M89; . . . . . . Specifies counting of work counter and total counter.
How the cycle start interlock state and the block delete valid state differ from each
other is explained below.
D Cycle start interlocked state . . . . . When the M89 command has been executed
by the preset number of times, cycle start of
automatic operation is disabled.
In other words, the program is not executed
even when the ST
(ST) switch is pressed.
D Block delete valid state . . . . . . . . . The block delete function is invalid until the
M89 command is executed by the preset
number of times. After the count-up of the
counter, the block delete function becomes
valid.
For details of the block delete
function, refer to the OPERATION
1 Whether the work counter function is used or not is set on the OPERATION
PANEL screen.
2 Specify the M89 command at the start of the program which is executed
repeatedly so that the execution of the program is correctly counted by the
work counter.
For details of the work counter function, refer to the OPERATION MANUAL
separately provided.
C–66 M FUNCTIONS
Programming using M89 (1)
The cycle start interlocked state is selected for the count-up state.
“100” is set for the work counter.

O0001;
M89; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The work counter increases “1” each time program
O0001 is executed.
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05;

M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the cursor has
O0001;
returned to the start of the :
program after the execution :
M89;
of the program 100 times, M30;
the program cannot be
started even if
ST
the (ST) switch is
pressed.
M FUNCTIONS C–67
Programming using M89 (2)
The program is executed in the block delete function valid state.
“100” is set for the work counter.

O0001;
M89; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The work counter increases “1” each time program
O0001 is executed.
... ... ...
Machining program
/M99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Until the program O0001;

O0001 is executed 100 : 1 to
: 99
times, the block delete M89; 100
function is invalid and /M99;
the “M99;” block is M30;
executed.
The cursor returns to “O0001”, the start of the
program and the program is executed
continuously.
For the function of the M99 command,

refer to page C–71.
In the execution of the program at the 100th time,

the block delete function is made valid and the
“M30;” block is executed by skipping the “M99;”
block.
M30;
C–68 M FUNCTIONS
21. M98, M99 Sub-program Call and Sub-program End
Main program Sub-program By entering the M98 and M99 commands in

O0200 ;
respective two programs, these programs are
O0100 ;
N1 . . . . . . . . . . ; N1 . . . . . ; interrelated with each other as a main program and
N2 M98 P20200 ; N2 . . . . . ;
N3 . . . . . . . . . . ; N3 . . . . . ; a sub-program as illustrated on the left.
.
N4 M98 P200 ; .
N5 . . . . . . . . . . ; .
.
When carrying out machining on the machine
L
N20 M99 ; equipped with the bar feeder or the loader, for
example, the same machining cycle is repeated to
1st call 2nd call machine the workpieces. For such operation, the
portion of the program executed repeatedly may
be stored to the NC memory as a sub-program
and the sub-program program number and the
number of times the sub-program should be called
are specified in a main program.
It is possible to specify sub-program call from one sub-program to the other as
illustrated below. This is called nesting and allowable nesting level is four. If
sub-program call exceeds this limit, alarm number (No. 077) is displayed.
1st call 2nd call 3rd call 4th call

Main Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub-
program program 1 program 2 program 3 program 4
By storing the portion of the program to be executed repeatedly as a sub-program,

required memory capacity can be reduced and programming errors can be reduced
accordingly.
COMMAND
M98 Pjjj jjjj ;

D M98 . . . . . . . . . Calls sub-program.
D Pjjj jjjj
Sub-program number
The number of sub-program calls; if omitted, the

specified sub-program is called one time.
2. F15 format
M98 Pjjjj Ljjjj ;

D M98 . . . . . . . . . Calls sub-program.
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies sub-program number.
D L . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of sub-program calls.
If it is omitted, the specified sub-program is called one
time.
M FUNCTIONS C–69
1 If the program number specified by address P is not found, an alarm message

(No. 078) is displayed on the screen.
2 If a P command is not specified in the M98 block, an alarm message (No. 076)
is displayed on the screen.
3 For standard format, numeric value specified following address P may not
always be in seven digit number. If a sub-program is called only once, address
P should be followed only by a sub-program number.
D P1 . . . . . . . . . . Sub-program number 1
D P1200 . . . . . . . Sub-program number 1200
If a sub-program is repeated two or more times, the sub-program number
should be specified in four digits.
D P2 0200 . . . . . Sub-program number 200 is repeated two times.
D P30 0002 . . . . Sub-program number 2 is repeated 30 times.
The number of program repetition: Max. 999 for standard format and
max. 9999 for F15 format
COMMAND
M99 P_ ;
D M99 . . . . . . . . . Specifies a return from the sub-program to the immediately
previous program.
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the return sequence number (can be omitted).
1 If the program number specified by address P is not found, an alarm message
2 If address P is specified, the return sequence number is searched, which will
take a time. Therefore, this must be taken into consideration when specifying
address P.
1 If a P command is omitted, the program flow returns to the block that follows
the one where jump to the sub-program has been made.
2 If “M99 P_ ;” is specified in the main program:
The program flow jumps to the sequence number specified by P in the main
program.
If a P command is omitted, the program flow jumps to the start of the main
program. The main program is executed endlessly.
C–70 M FUNCTIONS
Main program Sub-program

O0001; O0100;
N001 ; N101 ;
1 N002 M98 P100; N102 ;
N003 ; N103 M99;
N004 ;
2 N005 M98 P20200; O0200;
N006 ; N201 ;
N202 ;
... ... ...
N203 M99;
(Repeats twice)
N011;
3 N012 M98 P300; O0300;
N013 ; N301 ;
N014 ; N302 ;
N015 ; N303 M99 P015;
From the sub-program called from the main program, another sub-program is called.
Main program Sub-program 1 Sub-program 2

O0001; O0100; O0200;
N001; ; ;
; ; ;
M98P100; M98 P200; M99;
; ;
; ;
M30; M99;
M FUNCTIONS C–71
O0001;
N1;
N2;
...
/N7 M99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the block delete function is invalid:

The “N7 M99;” command is executed and the
program flow returns to the start of the program.
The program is repeated endlessly between N1
and N7 blocks.
When the block delete function is valid:
The “N7 M99;” command is ignored and the
program is executed continuously to the following
blocks.
N8;
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ends program.
The M99 command may be used for such as warm up program in which the same
program is executed repeatedly.
C–72 M FUNCTIONS
22. M90, M290, M91, M291 Simultaneous Spindle/Rotary Tool

Spindle Operation Mode ON/OFF
The M90 command is used to rotate the main

spindle/spindle 1 and the rotary tool spindle at the
same time.
The M290 command is used to rotate spindle 2

and the rotary tool spindle at the same time.
The M91 command is used to cancel the

simultaneous operation mode between the
spindle/spindle 1 and the rotary tool spindle.
The M291 command is used to cancel the

simultaneous operation mode between spindle 2
and the rotary tool spindle.
The M90 and M290 commands are used to rotate

the spindle and the rotary tool spindle
simultaneously to machine a hole at the center of
the spindle (workpiece) at a proper cutting speed if
necessary cutting speed cannot be obtained by
rotating only the spindle or the rotary tool spindle.
1 The M90 and M91 commands can be used only for the MC type and the Y-axis
specification machines.
2 The M290 and M291 commands can be used only for the MC type and the
Y-axis specification of the SL-S series.
COMMAND
M90 S_ ;
M91;
M290 S_ ;
M291;
D M90 . . . . . . . . . Turns the simultaneous spindle/rotary tool spindle
operation mode ON.
Turns the simultaneous spindle 1/rotary tool spindle
operation mode ON.
D M290 . . . . . . . . Turns the simultaneous spindle 2/rotary tool spindle
operation mode ON.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the rotary tool spindle speed (min–1).
D M91 . . . . . . . . . Turns the simultaneous spindle/rotary tool spindle
operation mode OFF.
Turns the simultaneous spindle 1/rotary tool spindle
operation mode OFF.
D M291 . . . . . . . . Turns the simultaneous spindle 2/rotary tool spindle
operation mode OFF.
M FUNCTIONS C–73
1 When determining a feedrate of the rotary tool, the sum of the spindle speed
and the rotary tool spindle speed must be used as the revolutionary speed of
the rotary tool.
2 The block where the M90 or M290 command is specified must always contain
the rotary tool spindle speed command. Unless the rotary tool spindle speed is
specified in such a block, the rotary tool spindle rotates at the spindle speed
specified in a previous block.
3 Stop the spindle and the rotary tool spindle by specifying the M05 command
before specifying the M91 or M291 command. If the M91 or M291 command is
specified in the state the spindle and the rotary tool spindle are not stopped,
the machine stops with an alarm message (EX1424) displayed on the screen.
The program for executing hole machining operation (10 mm deep) at the center of the
workpiece (spindle) at the spindle speed of 2000 min–1 and the rotary tool spindle speed of
3000 min–1.
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
M90 S3000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the simultaneous spindle (spindle 1)/
rotary tool spindle operation mode ON
Setting the rotary tool spindle speed at 3000 min–1
G97 S2000 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the normal
Starting the rotary tool spindle in the normal
X0 Z30.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of the tool to the center of the
workpiece (spindle) at a rapid traverse rate
Z3.0;
G98 G01 Z–10.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the feed per minute mode
Machining a hole (10 mm deep) at the feedrate of
500 mm/min
Determine the feedrate of the tool assuming
the spindle speed of 5000 min–1, which is
the sum of 2000 min–1 (spindle speed) and
3000 min–1 (rotary tool spindle).
G00 Z10.0 M09;
G99 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle or spindle 1 and the rotary
tool spindle
Specifying the feed per revolution mode
M91; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the simultaneous spindle (spindle 1)/rotary
tool spindle operation mode OFF
M01;
C–74 M FUNCTIONS
23. M320, M321 Y-axis Lock/Unlock
The Y-axis is locked when the M320 command is executed.
The Y-axis is unlocked when the M321 command is executed.
The M320 and M321 commands are specified to lock and unlock the Y-axis.
The M320 and M321 commands can be used only for the TL series equipped with
Y-axis specification.
COMMAND
M320; . . . . Locks the Y-axis.
M321; . . . . Unlocks the Y-axis.
1 Specify the M320 and M321 commands in a block independently without other
commands.
2 While the spindle or rotary tool spindle is rotating, M320 or M321 command
must not be specified.
Before specifying the M320 or M321 command, specify the M05 command to
stop the spindle or rotary tool spindle.
3 Before specifying the M320 or M321 command, return the X- and Z-axes to the
machine zero point or second zero point. Y-axis lock/unlock operation is not
executed if the X- or Z-axis is not at the zero point or second zero point.
4 The Y-axis lock command (M320) may be specified only while the Y-axis is in
the unlocked state. Or, the Y-axis unlock command (M321) may be specified
only while the Y-axis is in the locked state. If it is necessary to specify these M
commands while the Y-axis is not completely locked or unlocked, lock or
unlock the Y-axis manually before specifying them.
5 If the M320 or M321 command is specified in the machine lock state, Y-axis
lock/unlock operation is not executed.
6 When the M320 command is executed, the Y-axis is first returned to the
second zero point and then locked there.
7 To carry out normal turning operation or milling operation which does not
require Y-axis movement, the Y-axis must be kept locked by executing the
M320 command.
M FUNCTIONS C–75
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program (turning operation)

M01;
N2;
G98; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the feed per minute mode
M45; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the spindle as the C-axis
G28 U0 W0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X- and Z-axes to the machine zero
point
M321; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking the Y-axis
G00 T0303;
... ... ...
Machining program (milling operation using the Y-axis)
G28 U0 W0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X- and Z-axes to the machine zero

point
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the rotary tool spindle rotation
M320; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking the Y-axis
M01;
...
C–76 M FUNCTIONS
24. M40 - M44 Selecting Spindle Speed Range
For the machine equipped with a transmission, the gear range must be changed according
to the required spindle speed by specifying the M40 to M44 commands.
The M40 to M44 commands may be used only for the machine equipped with a
transmission.
The number of spindle speed ranges available on each model is indicated below.
Models M Codes Used to Select a Gear Range
SL-400B, 400C, 400BMC, 400CMC
M40, M41, M42
LL-7B
SL-600, 600MC
M40, M41, M42, M43
VL-55, 55MC
LL-8B M40, M41, M42, M43, M44
COMMAND
M40; . . . . . . Spindle drive gear in neutral
Selects neutral gear range.
M41; . . . . . . Spindle drive gear, 1st gear range Low
Selects 1st gear range.
M42; . . . . . . Spindle drive gear, 2nd gear range
Selects 2nd gear range. Spindle speed increases
M43; . . . . . . Spindle drive gear, 3rd gear range

Selects 3rd gear range.
M44; . . . . . . Spindle drive gear, 4th gear range High
Selects 4th gear range.
Do not change the spindle gear range while a cutting load is

applied. In such a state, if the spindle gear range is changed, the
workpiece could fly out of the chuck, causing serious injuries or
damage to the machine, and the cutting tool could be damaged. In
addition, excessive loads will be applied to the machine motors and
machine elements, shortening their service lives.
In each gear range, the spindle is allowed to rotate up to the speed 80% the
maximum speed. This restriction is applied due to the limit of the maximum
work of the clutch. Therefore, when specifying the gear range change M code,
take this restriction into consideration.
1 When the M02 or M03 command is executed, the present range is canceled.
2 When the spindle is in the neutral state, it is interlocked and spindle start
operation is not allowed.
For the allowable maximum speed in each of the ranges, refer to the “SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT DIAGRAM” given in the DRAWINGS (PARTS LIST I)
supplied separately.
M FUNCTIONS C–77
Programming using M40 to M44
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101 M41; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the low speed range (1st range) by M41
If the upper limit speed available in the
selected range is lower than the spindle
speed limit specified by the G50 command,
the spindle speed is clamped at the upper
limit speed of the selected range.
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
... ... ...
Machining program
M01;
N2;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202 M42; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the high speed range (2nd range) by
M42
G96 S120 M03;
X33.0 Z20.0 M08;
... ... ...
Machining program
The spindle speed range selection M code (M41 to M44) must be specified at the
beginning of each part program. This is to avoid the spindle to start in a wrong
range for the required spindle speed.
C–78 M FUNCTIONS
25. M28, M29 In-position Check Valid and In-position Check Invalid
C
B If the M28 command is specified, axis movement
specified in the same block is decelerated before
stopped at the end point. The G09 command calls
A
the function which checks whether the cutting tool
has been positioned exactly as specified.
If cutting tool movement of A ³ B, B ³ C is

Tool path programmed in the G01 mode specified in the M28 mode, the corner may be
Actual tool path slightly rounded as indicated by broken lines. To
finish the corner sharp, the M28 command is used.
In the G01 mode, when axis movement is

decelerated before stopping at the programmed
end point, it is also accelerated automatically to
start the axis movement command specified in the
next block.
The M28 mode is valid for cutting feed (G01,

G02, G03).
It is used to make the corner of the
workpiece sharp in the G01 cutting feed
mode, for example.
COMMAND
M28; . . . . . . In-position check valid
M29; . . . . . . In-position check invalid
Using the G09 command for movement in 4 ³ 5 ³ 6 ³ 7 ³ 8 in the following

illustration.
25
11
M60 P=2 5
10
9 8
7 2
5
C1.5 1
6
4
C1
3
∅ 54
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
M FUNCTIONS C–79
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a cutting feedrate.
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X50.0 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning from 3 to 4 at a rapid traverse rate.
M28; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-position check valid
G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 4 ³ 5 ³ 6 ³
7 ³ 8 at a feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
Z–5.0; The exact positioning at the each end point 5 ³
X56.8; 6 ³ 7 ³ 8 of movement is checked by the NC.
X59.8 Z–6.5; Before starting the movement commands in the
next block, the feed stops at the each end point of
movement 5 ³ 6 ³ 7 ³ 8 once.
M29; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-position check invalid
Z–23.0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 8 ³ 9 at a
feedrate of 0.2 mm/rev
Without deceleration at point 9 , the cutting tool
starts executing the command in the next block.
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 10 at a rapid traverse rate to move
rotated
M01;
C–80 M FUNCTIONS
26. M39 Rotary Tool Joint Check
The M39 command is used to check whether the rotary tool and the clutch are joined.
If they have not joined, they are joined by specifying the M39 command.
Normally the rotary tool and the clutch are joined after tool is indexed by M13 (Rotary tool
spindle start <normal>), M14 (Rotary tool spindle start <reverse>) and the T command
(which is used to select the specified tool).
Specify the M39 command to join the rotary tool and the clutch when the rotary tool is
rotating without specifying rotating command as well as polygon cutting and synchronized
tapping.
The M39 command can be used only for the MC type of the SL-400, 600 and
VL-55.
COMMAND
M39; . . . . . . Rotary tool joint check.
1 The rotary tool must be registered correctly before specifying M39 command.
If tool registration is incorrect, the rotary tool spindle does not rotate.
2 M39 command cannot be specified during the rotary tool rotating.
For rotary tool registration procedure, refer to the OPERATION MANUAL
separately provided.
M FUNCTIONS C–81
27. Summary
In this section, the program is written for the sample workpiece illustrated below to review
the M functions having been explained.
The sample workpiece is used only for the purpose of explanation and the program
is written only for the finishing shape and assuming that tool nose radius of “0”.
<Drawing>
41
25
3 5
C1
C1.5
C0.5 C1
C1
15° R2
C1.5
69
56
32
44
54
∅
M60 P=2.0
Finishing is unless otherwise specified.
<Dimensions of blank workpiece>

Blank Workpiece Description
Material AISI 1045 (Carbon steel)
O.D. 70
Dimensions
Di i I.D. 30
(mm)
Length 43
C–82 M FUNCTIONS
<Part programs>
Tool paths for finish facing, O.D. Tool paths for O.D. grooving and O.D.
finishing, and I.D. finishing thread cutting
10
44
32
8 2
33 31
7 41
9 5
1 35 38 36
6 37
4 42
34 43
23
22 21
24
3
25
26
27
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
N3(FIN. OF. OUT.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for finish facing and O.D. finishing
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the spindle or spindle 1 speed limit for
automatic operation at 2000 min–1
G00 T0303 (M42)*; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 3 tool
M42 selects high-speed range (2nd range).
If the upper limit speed in the M42 range is
lower than the maximum speed specified in
the G50 block, the spindle speed is clamped
at the upper limit speed in the M42 range.
direction at the cutting speed of 200 m/min
1 X56.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approaching cutting tool to the workpiece at a
rapid traverse rate
Starting coolant discharge
2 G01 Z0 F1.0;
3 X30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting at the feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
4 G00 X50.0 W1.0;
5 G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
6 Z–5.0;
7 X56.8;
8 X59.8 Z–6.5;
9 Z–23.0 F0.2;
10 G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retracting cutting tool from the workpiece at a
rapid traverse rate
M FUNCTIONS C–83
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If optional stop is valid:

If optional stop is invalid:
The machine does not stop and the program
is continuously executed.
N4(FIN. OF. IN.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for I.D. finishing

M42 selects high-speed range (2nd range).
21 X47.069 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approaching cutting tool to the workpiece at a
rapid traverse rate
22 G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
23 Z0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting at the feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
24 G02 X43.205 Z–1.482 R2.0 F0.07; . . . Cutting along an arc on R2 portion at the feedrate
of 0.07 mm/rev in the clockwise direction
25 G01 X32.0 Z–22.392;
26 Z–41.0 F0.1;
27 G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Escape of cutting tool from the workpiece to
execute I.D. cutting in the next process
rapid traverse rate
N5(GROV.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for O.D. grooving

M41 selects low-speed range (1st range).
direction at the cutting speed of 100 m/min.
rapid traverse rate
32 G01 Z–26.0 F1.0;
33 X68.0 Z–25.0 F0.07; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting at the feedrate of 0.07 mm/rev
C–84 M FUNCTIONS
34 X56.0 F0.1;
G04 U0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell for 0.2 seconds
(Program execution is suspended while the spindle
keeps rotating)
35 G00 X60.8;
36 Z–23.6;
37 G01 X58.0 Z–25.0;
38 G00 X60.8;
rapid traverse rate
N6(THREAD.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for O.D. thread cutting

G50 S1500;
M41 selects low-speed range (1st range).
41 G01 Z5.0 F1.0 M24; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of the cutting tool at the start point for
thread cutting at a rapid traverse rate
Chamfering OFF
42 , 43 , 44 , 41 G92 X59.1 Z–24.0 F2.0; . . . . . Execution of thread cutting cycle in the G92 mode
A series of thread cutting operation of
41 ³ 42 ³ 43 ³ 44 ³ 41 is executed repeatedly.
X58.6;
X58.2;
X57.9;
X57.7;
X57.54;
X57.44;
X57.4;
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Retracting cutting tool from the workpiece at a
rapid traverse rate
Stopping coolant discharge
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of program and program rewind
Commands in ( ) identified by “*” are used only for the machine equipped with a
transmission.
APPENDIX C–1
APPENDIX 1 Multiple M Code Function
The multiple M code function allows entry of a maximum of three M codes in a block.
By using the multiple M code function for the robot or the loader specification, cycle time
can be reduced.
The multiple M code function can use the M codes indicated below as multiple M code
function M codes.
<Multiple M code>
D M10 . . . . . . . . . Chuck clamp/Chuck clamp <spindle 1>

D M11 . . . . . . . . . Chuck unclamp/Chuck unclamp <spindle 1>
D M210 . . . . . . . . Chuck clamp <spindle 2>
D M211 . . . . . . . . Chuck unclamp <spindle 2>
D M19 . . . . . . . . . Spindle orientation/Spindle orientation <spindle 1>
D M219 . . . . . . . . Spindle orientation <spindle 2>
D M25 . . . . . . . . . Tailstock spindle OUT
D M26 . . . . . . . . . Tailstock spindle IN
D M85 . . . . . . . . . Automatic door open
D M86 . . . . . . . . . Automatic door close
D M37 . . . . . . . . . Ceiling shutter open
D M38 . . . . . . . . . Ceiling shutter close
The multiple M code function simultaneously executes up to three M codes

specified in the same block. Therefore, operations called out by these M codes
and the combination of them must be carefully examined. If M codes are
specified in improper combinations, it may cause damage to the machine.
1 Although the first M code among the two or three M codes specified in a block
may be other than the M code allowed to be used by the multiple M code
function, the second and the third M code must be the multiple M code function
M codes.
2 A spindle (or rotary tool spindle) rotation M code (M03, M04, M13, M14) must
not be specified with a multiple M code function M code in the same block.
3 The multiple M code function can be used only for MSC-500, MSC-501,
MSG-501, MSD-501, and MSD-501ll.
CHAPTER D
T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the T function, that rotates the turret to index the required tool and
calls the tool offset number, the S function, that specifies the spindle speed or the rotary
tool spindle speed, and the F function, that specifies the feedrate.
CONTENTS
D : T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
1. T Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1
1.1 Tool Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–3
1.2 Tool Geometry Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–4
1.3 Tool Wear Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–6
2. S Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–13
2.1 Specifying the Spindle Speed (G97 S_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–13
2.2 Specifying the Cutting Speed (G96 S_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–15
2.3 Specifying the Spindle Speed Limit
for Automatic Operation (G50 S_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–16
2.4 Relationship of the Cutting Speed, Diameter,
and Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–18
2.5 Workpiece Materials and Cutting Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–19
3. F Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–20
3.1 Feed per Spindle Revolution (G99 F_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–20
3.2 Feed per Minute (G98 F_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–23
3.3 Feedrate for Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–24
3.4 Table of Rapid Traverse Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–25
3.5 Table of Maximum Cutting Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–26
T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS D–1
1. T Function
The T function is used to select the specified tool and to set the coordinate system using
the tool offset.
It also reads the data necessary to execute the automatic tool nose radius offset function.
For the automatic tool nose radius offset function, refer to Chapter E
“AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET”.
A four-digit number entered following address T specifies a tool number and an tool offset
number.
COMMAND
TVVVV;
D TVVVV; . . <SL, VL, TL, LL and CL series>
The first two digits of a T number specify the tool number
and the tool geometry offset number.
<SL-S series>
The first two digits of a T number specify the tool number.
D TVVVV; . . <SL, VL, TL, LL and CL series>
The last two digits of a T number specify the tool wear
offset number.
<SL-S series>
The last two digits of a T number specify the tool geometry
offset number and the tool wear offset number.
The tool number, tool geometry offset number, and the tool wear offset number
are explained in detail on the following pages.
D–2 T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
Using T function
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <SL, VL, TL, LL and CL series>
T0101 . . . . . . . Calls the No. 1 tool.
The offset data entered in field No.
1 of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY
screen is used.
T0101 . . . . . . . The offset data entered in field No.
1 of the OFFSET/WEAR screen is
used.
<SL-S series>
T0101 . . . . . . . Calls the No. 1 tool.
T0101 . . . . . . . The offset data entered in field No.
1 of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY
and OFFSET/WEAR screen are
used.
G96 S200 M03;
X100.0 Z20.0 M08;
...
Machining program
M01;
With the SL-400, SL-600 and CL series machines, a T code must be associated
with an axis movement command in the G00 mode in the same block to move
the axis away from the workpiece. If a T code is specified carelessly, it may
cause interference between the cutting tool, the tool holder, or the turret head
and the workpiece, the chuck, the fixture, or the tailstock (tailstock
specification), resulting in damage to the machine.
1 With the SL-S series machines, different tools will be used between spindles 1
and 2 even if the same tool number is specified. Therefore, it is not possible to
use the same number for the tool number and offset number (geometry, wear).
T01 01 . . . . . . Spindle 1
T01 17 . . . . . . Spindle 2
2 With the SL-S series machines, always set the tool geometry offset data and
the tool wear offset data to the same offset number.
With the SL, VL, TL, LL and CL series machines, it is recommended to use the
same number for the tool number and tool wear offset number when specifying a T
command in a program to avoid operator’s errors.
T01 01, T02 02, etc.
For the procedure used for calculating and inputting the tool wear offset data
and tool geometry offset data, refer to the OPERATION MANUAL separately
provided.
1.1 Tool Numbers

A tool number indicates a particular station number in the turret head.
By reading a tool number specified in a T code, the NC rotates the turret head accordingly
to bring the corresponding station into the cutting position.
A 12-station turret, for example, has 12 station numbers from “1” to “12”.
With the LL-7 and 8, No. 1 to No. 4 tools are mounted in the front-side turret and
No. 5 to No. 8 tools in the rear-side turret. If a 6-station turret is used for the
rear-side turret of the LL-7, tools No. 5 to No. 10 are mounted in the rear-side
turret.
Specifying the tool numbers
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 1 tool.
G96 S120 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
M01;
N2;
G50 S2500;
G00 T0202; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 2 tool.
G96 S200 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
M30;
1.2 Tool Geometry Offset

The data which describes the distance between workpiece zero point (X0, Z0) and the tool
nose of the cutting tool positioned at the machine zero point, is called the tool geometry
offset data.
The workpiece zero point is determined and the coordinate system (X-Z) set when the NC
reads the tool geometry offset data.
The tool geometry offset data in the X-axis should be set in diameters.
Specifying the tool geometry offset
An O.D. cutting tool is mounted in station No. 1 and an I.D. cutting tool in station No. 2, as
shown in the illustration.
The tool positioned at the
machine zero point
+X
450
350
(T01)
(T02)
∅ 304
∅ 240
+Z
Workpiece zero
point (X0, Z0)
Tool Tool No. Tool Geometry Offset No. Tool Geometry Offset Data
X 240 mm
O D cutting tool
O.D. T01 Tool No
No. 1
Z 450 mm
X 304 mm
I D cutting tool
I.D. T02 Tool No
No. 2
Z 350 mm
Input the tool geometry offset data as a negative value.

O0001;
N1; (O.D.)
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With the “T0101” command, the workpiece zero
point is set at the position which is away from the
programmed point (tool nose) of tool No. 1,
positioned at the machine zero point, by the tool
geometry offset data of tool No. 1 in the
OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen.
G96 S120 M03;
...
Machining program
M01;
N2; (I.D.)
G50 S2500;
G00 T0202; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With the “T0202” command, the workpiece zero
point is set at the position which is away from the
programmed point (tool nose) of tool No. 2,
positioned at the machine zero point, by the tool
geometry offset data of tool No. 2 in the
OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen.
G96 S200 M03;
...
Machining program
M30;
It is not necessary to cancel the tool geometry offset data for each cutting tool; the
offset data is automatically canceled when the tool geometry offset command (T
command) is read for the next tool.
When the coordinate system is set using G50, the start and end
points of the part program must be the same point.
At the end of a part program, the tool wear offset data of the cutting
tool used to set the coordinate system must be canceled.
If you do not cancel the tool wear offset data, the X and Y
coordinate values will be shifted by the tool wear offset data each
time the program is executed. This will shift the start (end) point of
the program, which could lead to interference between the cutting
tool, holder or turret head and the workpiece, chuck, fixture, or
tailstock (if featured), causing accidents involving serious injuries
N1;
G50 X240.0 Z450.0;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 1 tool
...
Machining program
G00 X240.0 Z450.0; . . . . . . The end point of a part program must be the
same point as the start point of the next part
program.
T0100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the tool wear offset data
M01;
When the coordinate system is set using G50, do not input the tool geometry
offset data. If you input this data, the workpiece zero point will be shifted by the
amount of the tool geometry offset data, which could lead to interference
between the cutting tool, holder or turret head and the workpiece, chuck, fixture,
or tailstock (if featured), damaging the machine.
1.3 Tool Wear Offset

If the tool position is offset using the tool geometry offset data, it is simply the static
offsetting. In actual cutting, dynamic offsetting is also necessary to compensate for
deflection of cutting tool and elastic deformation in mechanical system generated by the
cutting force. In addition, compensation for initial wear and wear during production of the
cutting tools must also be made. The tool wear offset function is used for dynamic
offsetting to finish the workpiece within the specified tolerance.
The tool wear offset data in the X-axis should be set in diameters.
Specifying the tool wear offset (1)
The illustration below shows the tool paths, before and after offset for tool wear.
+X
Z coordinate value
After tool wear offset
Before tool wear offset

X offset data
(–0.060)
Z offset
data
X coordinate data (0.030)
(in diameter)
Tool Tool No. Tool Wear Offset No. Tool Wear Offset Data
X –0.06 mm
O D cutting
O.D. T01 Tool No
No. 1
Z 0.03 mm
O0001;
N1; (O.D.)
G50 S2500;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With “T0101” command, the tool position is offset
by the offset data of tool No. 1 in the
OFFSET/WEAR screen.
G96 S120 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
M01;
N2; (I.D.)
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With “T0202” command, the tool position is offset
by the offset data of tool No. 2 in the
OFFSET/WEAR screen.
G96 S200 M03;
... ... ...
Machining program
M30;
The same procedure is used for other tools. In a program, only the tool wear offset
number is specified in a T command. The actual offset data to be input must be
found by the operator.
1 It is not necessary to cancel the tool wear offset data for each cutting tool; the
offset data is automatically canceled when the tool wear offset command (T
command) is read for the next tool.
2 The tool position is shifted by the amount set on the OFFSET/WEAR screen
when a T command is executed.
3 With TL-40Y, to shift the Y-axis by the Y-axis offset amount set on the
OFFSET/WEAR screen by executing a T command, it is necessary to execute
M321 to unclamp the Y-axis before executing a T command since the Y-axis
clamp mechanism is used on this model. Accordingly, if a T command is
executed in the state the Y-axis clamped with M320 executed, the Y-axis
cannot shift by the set offset amount. In this case, the machine stops when a
T command is read.

(Adjusting dimensions at two or more places)
By assigning more than one tool wear offset number for a single tool, it is possible to
adjust the tool paths by different amounts to offset the cutting at two or more places.
When cutting a workpiece with multiple steps, as illustrated below, and if the tolerance at
each diameter is strict, it is difficult to finish the workpiece to the required accuracy if the
tool position is offset uniformly at each diameter. In this case, it is necessary to use
different offset data for each diameter. After cutting the first workpiece, measure the
diameters and adjust the offset data as measured for each diameter to finish the
workpiece within the specified tolerance.
This feature cannot be used by the SL-S series machines.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
∅ 60 –0.015
∅ 80 –0.01
∅ 40 –0.02
0
5
∅ 100
∅ 20
10
15
O0001;
N1;
G50 S3000;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G96 S180 M03;

X16.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X39.99 F0.2;
Z–5.0 F0.1;
X59.99 F0.2;
Z–10.0 F0.1;
X80.0 T0111 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Z–15.0 F0.1;
X104.0 F0.2;
G00 X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
Using the tool specified in block 1 , 40 mm and 60 mm diameter portions are machined
using the offset data of tool wear offset number 1.
Using the tool specified in block 2 , 80 mm diameter portion is machined using the offset
data of tool wear offset number 11. This is summarized in the table below.
Tool Wear Offset Data

Offset Direction
01 11
X 0.235 mm 0.250 mm
Z 0.150 mm 0.150 mm
First, set the same tool offset data to the tool wear offset Nos. 01 and 11. After cutting a
workpiece, measure the dimensions and adjust the tool wear offset data so that the
dimensions can be finished within the specified tolerance.
1 For first cutting, set the same tool wear offset data for the tool wear offset Nos.
01 and 11.
2 For the offset data in the Z-axis of the two tool wear offset number, always set
the same offset data.
Specifying the tool wear offset (3) (Adjusting a taper angle)
The tool wear offset data may be used in a special method. Check the cut taper with a
gage. It is possible to adjust the finished taper using the results obtained from checking
the contact between the cut taper and the gage.
Taper 1/4 1
∅ 106.37 +0.01
0
∅ 45
Rapid traverse
120
Cutting feed
<To adjust the taper angle>

D Change the X value of point 1 D Change the Z value of point 2
2 2
1
1
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G96 S180 M03;

X40.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X76.375 F0.2;
X106.375 Z–120.0 T0111 F0.05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X130.0 F0.25;
G00 X250.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
Using the tool specified in block 1 , ordinary offset for dimensions is made.
Using the tool specified in block 2 , taper angle is adjusted. This is summarized in the
table below.

Offset Direction
01 11
X 0.196 mm 0.199 mm
Z 0.270 mm 0.270 mm
1 For the first machining, input the same offset data for both offset numbers (01
and 11).
2 Specify the new offset data (11) without canceling the existing offset data (01).
3 Specify the new offset number (11) at the taper cutting command point.
4 Since either of the X or Z offset data of the two tool wear offset numbers is
taken as the reference of the taper, always specify the same data for both
offset numbers (01, 11).
5 The program is created assuming that tool nose R is R0.
Specifying the tool wear offset (4) (Adjusting the groove width)
In a grooving operation, the cut groove width might fall outside the specified tolerance due
to tool wear. To offset, the groove width can be adjusted by setting different tool wear
offset data for the right side wall and for the left side wall.
5
5
6
3 7
1
4 8
C1 C1
5 2 9
Rapid traverse
6
Cutting feed
∅ 100
20
∅ 95
O0001;
N1;
G50 S500;
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1)
G96 S80 M03;
X110.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z–19.5 F2.0;
X102.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X95.1 F0.1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X102.0 F0.5; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Z–22.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X98.0 Z–20.0 F0.07; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
X95.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
X102.0 W0.1 F0.5; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Z–17.0 F1.0 T0111; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2) 7
X98.0 Z–19.0 F0.07; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
X95.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Z–20.0 T0101 F0.1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3) 5
G00 X110.0 W0.5;

Z20.0;
X150.0 Z100.0;
...
Using the tool specified in blocks 1) and 3), ordinary offset for dimensions is made.
Using the tool specified in block 2), groove width is adjusted. This is summarized in the
table below.

Offset Direction
01 11
X 0.160 mm 0.160 mm
Z 0.325 mm 0.315 mm
1 For the first machining, input the same offset data for both offset numbers (01
and 11).
2 Specify the new offset data (11) without canceling the existing offset data (01).
3 Specify the new offset number (11) in the block where Z-axis movement
(Z–17.0) is specified at the position the cutting tool has released from the
workpiece.
4 For the X offset data, specify the same data for both offset numbers (01, 11).
5 The program is created assuming that tool nose R is R0.
2. S Function
The S function controls the spindle or rotary tool spindle rotation. A four-digit number
specified following address S specifies the spindle speed, rotary tool spindle speed, and
the cutting (surface) speed.
The S code defines the following in combination with a G code specified in the same block:
1 Spindle speed or rotary tool spindle speed (min–1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . G97 S_
2 Cutting (surface) speed (m/min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G96 S_
3 Maximum spindle speed for automatic operation (min–1) . . . . . . . . G50 S_
2.1 Specifying the Spindle Speed (G97 S_ )

The G97 mode is used to turn a workpiece with a uniform diameter or for thread cutting,
drilling, and milling processes conducted by a rotary tool.
COMMAND
G97 S_ M03(M04);
G97 S_ M203(M204);
G97 S_ M13(M14);
D G97 . . . . . . . . . Calls the constant spindle speed command mode.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the spindle speed (min–1).
D M203(M204) . . Specifies spindle 2 rotation in the normal (reverse)
direction.
D M13(M14) . . . . Specifies rotary tool spindle rotation in the normal (reverse)
direction.
When a G97 speed command is used in a program, specification of

the maximum speed with a G50 command will be ignored.
Therefore, when specifying the spindle speed with a G97 command,
specify a speed no higher than the lowest speed among the
allowable speed limits for the chuck, fixture, and cylinder. If you set
a higher speed the workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing
1 When the spindle speed control mode is switched from the G96 mode to the
G97 mode, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the spindle speed
obtained in the block immediately preceding the G97 block is used as the
spindle speed for the G97 mode operation.
Therefore, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the spindle speed
for the G97 mode will depend on the position of the cutting tool in the block
preceding the G97 block, and this could adversely affect machining accuracy
and shorten the life of the tool.
When switching the spindle speed control mode to the G97 mode, always
specify a spindle speed.
2 A spindle speed is limited by the feedrates (mm/rev) for a cutting tool.
N < R N: Spindle speed (min–1)

F F: Feedrate (mm/rev)
R: Maximum cutting feedrate (mm/min)
3 The M13 and M14 commands can be used only for the MC type machines or
Y-axis specification machines.
4 The M203 and M204 commands can be used only for the SL-S series
machines.
Programming using G97 S_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S1000 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle at 1000 min–1 in the normal
direction.
...
2.2 Specifying the Cutting Speed (G96 S_ )

The G96 command is used to maintain a constant cutting speed (m/min). It is hard to
calculate a spindle speed each time the workpiece diameter changes.
The constant cutting (surface) speed control is effectively used in such cases.
COMMAND
G96 S_ M03(M04);
G96 S_ M203(M204);
D G96 . . . . . . . . . Calls the constant surface speed control mode.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting speed (m/min).
D M203(M204) . . Specifies spindle 2 rotation in the normal (reverse)
direction.
The M203 and M204 commands can be used only for the SL-S series machines.
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2500;
G00 T0101;
...
In the G96 (constant surface speed control) mode, the spindle

speed changes as the cutting tool moves in the X-axis direction.
In facing operation, the spindle speed increases and reaches the
maximum allowable spindle speed to maintain the cutting speed
constant, as the cutting tool approaches the center of the spindle.
In this case, the chuck gripping force, cutting force, and centrifugal
force of the workpiece cannot be balanced to hold the workpiece
securely in the chuck. The workpiece may fly out of the machine
and cause a serious accident.
For the relationship between the spindle speed and chuck
gripping force, refer to the instruction manual supplied by
the chuck and cylinder manufacturers.
Specify the spindle speed limit, which is smaller than the lowest
value among the allowable speed of the chuck, fixture, and the
cylinder, using the “G50 S_ ;” in a block before specifying the
spindle speed in the G96 block.
For details of “G50 S_ ;”, refer to 2.3, “Specifying the Spindle Speed
Limit for Automatic Operation (G50 S_ )”.
2.3 Specifying the Spindle Speed Limit for Automatic Operation (G50 S_ )
When facing a workpiece in the G96 constant cutting speed mode, the spindle speed will
increase to “infinite” speed if the cutting tool is moved to X0.
Therefore, the spindle speed limit must be specified to prevent chuck gripping force from
being lowered due to centrifugal force, when cutting a workpiece in the G96 mode.
1 The spindle speed limit set using G50 must be no higher than
the lowest of the individual allowable speed limits for the
chuck, fixture, and cylinder. If you set a higher speed the
workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing serious injuries
2 In the G96 (constant surface speed control) mode, the spindle
speed increases as the cutting tool approaches the center of the
spindle.
allowable maximum speed of the machine. At this speed, the
chuck gripping force, cutting force, and centrifugal force cannot
be balanced to hold the workpiece securely in the chuck. As a
result, the workpiece will fly out of the machine, causing
The spindle speed limit must always be specified in a part
program by using the G50 command in a block preceding the
G96 block, in order to clamp the spindle speed at the specified
speed.
COMMAND
G50 S_ ;
D G50 . . . . . . . . . Calls the mode to specify the spindle speed limit for
automatic operation.
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed limit (min–1).
1 The setting of the spindle speed override switch (if there is one)
is valid even when a spindle speed limit is set using G50.
If the switch is set to 110% or 120%, for example, the
programmed spindle speed will be overridden in accordance
with this setting. If this causes the actual spindle speed to
exceed the allowable speed of the chuck, fixture, or cylinder, the
workpiece will fly out of the chuck during machining, causing
Therefore, the spindle speed override switch must be set at
100% or lower.
2 When a G97 speed command is used in a program,

specification of the maximum speed with a G50 command will
be ignored. Therefore, when specifying the spindle speed with
a G97 command, specify a speed no higher than the lowest
speed among the allowable speed limits for the chuck, fixture,
and cylinder. If you set a higher speed the workpiece will fly
out of the machine, causing serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
direction at a cutting speed of 100 m/min
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X100.0 Z50.0;

M01;
N2;
G00 T0202;
The setting of 2000 min–1 for the allowable
maximum spindle speed that is applied for
automatic operation is disregarded.
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X150.0 Z50.0;

M01;
N3;
G00 T0303;
direction at a cutting speed of 200 m/min
... ... ...
Machining program
G00 X150.0 Z50.0 M05;

M30;
2.4 Relationship of the Cutting Speed, Diameter, and Spindle Speed

When a program is executed in the G96 constant surface
speed mode, the spindle is controlled to maintain the specified
cutting speed (S_ ) when the tool moves along the X-axis.
The formula to calculate spindle speed:

2000
1000V N: Spindle speed (min–1)

N=
π@D V: Cutting speed (m/min)
D: Workpiece diameter (mm)
π: Circumference constant (3.14)
1500
Spindle
Speed Cutting speed
(min–1)
1000
250 m/min
200 m/min
150 m/min
500
100 m/min
50 m/min
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Workpiece Diameter (mm)

2.5 Workpiece Materials and Cutting Speeds

Allowed cutting speeds and spindle speeds will vary depending on the workpiece material
and how rigidly the workpiece is clamped in the chuck, etc. The following table shows
cutting speeds for different workpiece material and types of cutting.
For additional details, refer to the catalog available from the cutting tool
manufacturer.
Cutting Speed (m/min)

Thread Drilling
Roughing Finishing Grooving
cutting (H.S.S.)
Carbon steel (AISI 1045) 120 200 100 120 20-25
Alloy steel (AISI 4140) 100 180 100 100 20
Free cutting
g Carbon steel 180 230 120 140 20-25
steel Alloy steel 160 200 100 120 20
Cast steel 120 150 80 90 20
Stainless steel 60 120 50 60 10-15
Cast iron (AISI 35) 80 140 80 100 20-25
Aluminum 200 300 150 150 60
<Conditions>
1) The workpiece is rigidly clamped in the chuck.

2) No vibration is generated when a workpiece is rotated at a high speed.
3) The insert is carbide-coating cermet.
4) Cutting speeds will vary within a range of "20% from the listed values, depending on
the cutting conditions.
Use the values in the table only for reference purpose.
For actual cutting, determine the proper cutting speed after thoroughly reviewing
the cutting conditions.
3. F Function
The F function specifies the feedrate of a cutting

tool.
The F code is specified with a G code that calls a

linear or circular cuts mode (G01, G02, G03, etc.).
The feedrate is specified in two different modes

depending on the G code which is specified in the
same block.
1 Feedrate per revolution (mm/rev)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G99 F_
2 Feedrate per minute (mm/min)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G98 F_
When the G code mode is switched between the G98 mode and the G99 mode, it
is necessary to specify an F code.
3.1 Feed per Spindle Revolution (G99 F_ )

In the G99 mode, an F code specifies the feedrate per spindle revolution.
Generally, O.D. cutting, thread cutting, and I.D. cutting are programmed using the
G99 command.
COMMAND
G99 G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
G99 G02 (G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
G99 G02 (G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ ;
D G99 . . . . . . . . . Calls the feed per spindle revolution mode.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate in ordinary control (precision feed
control) (mm/rev or in./rev).
1 When power is turned on, the NC is in the G99 mode. Therefore, it is not
necessary to specify the G99 command in a program unless the mode has
been changed to the G98 mode.
2 Once specified, the feedrate remains valid until another feedrate is specified.
Feedrate is limited by the relationship between the spindle speed and the rapid
traverse rate of the X-axis as indicated below.
Metric System (mm/rev) Inch System (in./rev)

R R
F < F <
N 25.4 N
F: Feedrate (mm/rev, in./rev)

R: Maximum cutting feedrate (mm/min)
The above numerical values are only for reference. Depending on the selected
cutting conditions, the cutting load may become excessive making thread cutting
hard. If a servo alarm occurs, change the cutting conditions.
Programming using G99 F_
To carry out I.D. cutting by changing feedrates
R2 2 1
3
4 15°
5
6
Rapid traverse
∅ 32
∅ 44
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X47.069 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 to move the cutting tool close to
the workpiece
Z0 F0.2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 2 at a feedrate of 0.2 mm/rev
G02 X43.205 Z–1.482 R2.0 F0.07; . . . Cutting an arc of 0.2 mm radius in the clockwise
direction at a feedrate of 0.07 mm/rev
G01 X32.0 Z–22.392; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along path 3 ³ 4 at a feedrate of
0.07 mm/rev
0.1 mm/rev
G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 6 at a rapid traverse rate to move
rotated
M01;
3.2 Feed per Minute (G98 F_ )

In the G98 mode, an F code specifies the feedrate per minute.
This mode is used to write a program for pull-out finger operation or rotary tool
spindle, etc.
COMMAND
G98 G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
G98 G02 (G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
G98 G02 (G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ ;
D G98 . . . . . . . . . Calls the feed per minute mode.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate (mm/min or in/min).
In the G98 mode, the turret moves at the feedrate specified by the F code even
when the spindle is not rotating. Make sure that the cutting tool will not strike
the workpiece, etc., since this could damage the machine.
G98;
G01 Z_ F100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The turret moves at a rate of
100 mm/min even when the spindle is
not rotating.
1 The G98 command cannot be used for thread cutting operation.
2 Once specified, the feedrate remains valid until another feedrate is specified.
The programmable feedrate range is given in the table below.
Metric System (mm/min) Inch System (in/min)
rapid traverse rate

1 to rapid traverse rate 0.01 to
25.4
For rapid traverse rates, refer to page D–25 (3.4).

3.3 Feedrate for Finishing

Feedrates for finishing are determined based on the nose radius of the cutting tool to be
used and the surface roughness specified on the drawing.
<Ideal surface roughness for finishing>
Hmax
Rn
Insert
Hmax = f2
8@Rn
Hmax: Maximum value of ideal finish surface roughness
f: Feedrate (mm/rev)
Rn: Tool nose radius (mm)
Surface Nr
Hmax
Roughness Indication
(mm) 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0
Symbol
25-S Max. 0.025 0.2828 0.3162 0.4000 0.4472
18-S Max. 0.018 0.2400 0.2683 0.3394 0.3794
12-S Max. 0.012 0.1959 0.2190 0.2771 0.3098
6-S Max. 0.006 0.1385 0.1549 0.1959 0.2190
3-S Max. 0.003 0.0979 0.1095 0.1385 0.1549
1.5-S Max. 0.0015 0.0692 0.0774 0.0979 0.1095
0.8-S Max. 0.0008 0.0506 0.0565 0.0715 0.0800
0.4-S Max. 0.0004 0.0357 0.0400 0.0505 0.0565
(mm/rev)
The values indicated above are theoretical values obtained in calculation. During
actual cutting, the specified surface roughness may not be achieved, depending on
various factors. Factors that can effect finishing accuracy include how far the tool
projects, how the workpiece is clamped or vibration.
3.4 Table of Rapid Traverse Rates

The rapid traverse rates of the individual axes are indicated below.
Rapid Traverse Rate

Machine Model X-axis Z-axis Y-axis B-axis C-axis
mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min min–1
SL-150
18000 24000 –––– –––– 200*1
SL-150MC
SL-150Y 18000 24000 6000 –––– 200*1
SL-150S
18000 24000 –––– 24000 200*1
SL-150SMC
SL-150SY 18000 24000 6000 24000 200*1
SL-200
18000 24000 –––– –––– 150
SL-200MC
SL-200S
18000 24000 –––– 24000 150
SL-200SMC
SL-250
18000 24000 –––– –––– 100
SL-250MC
SL-250S
18000 24000 –––– 24000 100
SL-250SMC
SL-303/700
15000 24000 –––– –––– 100*2
SL-303MC/700
SL-303/1500
15000 20000 –––– –––– 50
SL-303MC/1500
SL-400
20000 24000 –––– –––– 56
SL-400MC
SL-600
20000 20000 –––– –––– 25
SL-600MC
SL-65
5000 8000 –––– –––– ––––
SL-65MC
SL-75
5000 8000 –––– –––– ––––
SL-75MC
LL-7
5000 8000 –––– –––– ––––
LL-8
VL-25 24000 20000 –––– –––– ––––
VL-55
24000 20000 –––– –––– 25
VL-55MC
TL-40
6000 12000 –––– –––– 20
TL-40MC
CL1500, CL2000 24000 24000 –––– –––– ––––
*1: With the high output specification, C-axis rapid traverse rate is 100 min–1.
*2 : With the type B, C-axis rapid traverse rate is 50 min–1.
3.5 Table of Maximum Cutting Feedrate

The maximum cutting feedrate of the individual axes are indicated below for each model.
Maximum cutting feedrate

Machine Model X-axis Z-axis
mm/min mm/min
SL-65 4000 6200
SL-65M 4000 6200
SL-75 4000 6200
SL-75MC 4000 6200
ZL-25/1000 X1: 7000 Z1: 5500
ZL-25MC X2: 6500 Z2: 5500
CL1500 10000 8500
CL2000
CL1500T 10000 6000
CL2000T
CHAPTER E
AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE
RADIUS OFFSET
This chapter describes how the automatic tool nose radius offset function works.
Because the cutting edge of the tool is rounded, the actual cutting point differs from the
point specified in a program. Therefore, if a program is written based on the points known
from a part drawing, the workpiece is not finished to the dimensions specified on the
drawing. To finish the workpiece precisely to the dimensions specified on the drawing, the
points to be specified in the program must be calculated taking the difference between the
programmed point and actual cutting point. The automatic tool nose radius offset function
generates the tool paths to finish the workpiece correctly to the dimensions specified on
the drawing from the program in which the points specified on the drawing are directly
used.
Since there are a number of tool patterns which will be used for actual machining
and they will differ among users, it is not possible to explain all of the tool patterns
in this manual. The explanation given in this chapter is concentrated on the basic
tool path patterns along with the cautions to be taken into consideration for
programming so that the readers will be able to acquire basic knowledge of the
automatic tool nose radius offset function.
For more details, please refer to the instruction manuals supplied by the NC
unit manufacturer.
CONTENTS
E : AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–1
2. Conditions for Use of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius

Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–4
2.1 Imaginary Tool Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–5
2.2 Setting Tool Nose Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
2.3 Specifying the Offset Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
3. Technical Terms Used in the Explanation

of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–9
3.1 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–10
3.2 Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–11
3.3 Cancel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–12
4. General Cautions on the Automatic Tool Nose Radius

Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–14
4.1 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–14
4.2 Overcut in the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode . . . . . . E–17
5. Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–20

5.1 Basic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–20
5.2 Recommended Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–30
5.3 Programming for a Sample Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–33
AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET E–1
1. General
The tool nose does not have a sharp edge but is rounded (tool nose radius) as illustrated
below. Therefore, the point of the tool nose used for programming is offset from the actual
cutting point. The tool nose radius offset function is used to eliminate dimensional errors
caused by this difference.
Actual cutting point
Programmed point
If a program is created without taking the nose radius into consideration, it will cause
excessive or insufficient cutting.
The automatic tool nose radius offset function is used to eliminate excessive or insufficient
cutting.
Workpiece zero point Programmed point Actual cutting point
1) Facing carried out perpendicular to the spindle center line The tool nose radius does not pose
(cutting in the X-axis direction) any problems since the
programmed d point
i t and
d the
th actual
t l
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
cutting point lie on the same straight
line.
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
2) O.D. or I.D. cutting carried out in parallel with the spindle The tool nose radius does not pose
center line (cutting in the Z-axis direction) any problems since the
programmed d point
i t and
d the
th actual
t l
cutting point lie on the same straight
line.
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
E–2 AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
3) Taper cutting If taper cutting, including

chamfering is programmed without
chamfering,
taking into consideration the radius
of the tool nose, dimensional errors
will occur due to overcut or undercut
as illustrated on the left.
Undercut
portion
Overcut
portion
4) Arc cutting If arc cutting is programmed without

taking into consideration the radius
of the tool nose, dimensional errors
will occur due to overcut or undercut
as illustrated on the left.
Undercut
portion
Reasons why excessive (overcut) or insufficient (undercut) cutting occurs:

The program used for machining along paths “ 1 ³ 2 ” and “ 3 ³ 4 ³ 5 ³ 6 ” is
used for the example.
2 C2
1
C2
3
C1
5 4
6 10
∅ 50
∅ 30
2 2
<If the tool nose radius is disregarded
(path 1 ³ 2 )>
...
1 Undercut 1
C2 portion X46.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
∅ 50
∅ 50
X50.0 Z–2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
...
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
If the above program is executed, an undercut
portion is left as in Fig. 2 because the
programmed point and actual cutting point
differ from each other.
10 <If the tool nose radius is disregarded

C2 Undercut
portion 3
(path 3 ³ 4 ³ 5 ³ 6 )>
C1 3
Undercut
...
5 4 portion 5 4
X34.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6 6
X30.0 Z–2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
∅ 30
Z–10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 X28.0 Z–11.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
If the above program is executed, an undercut portion is left as in Fig. 4 because the
actual cutting point differs from the programmed point.
Excessive cutting occurs due to the similar reasons.
To eliminate such dimensional errors in machining, the tool paths should be offset using
the G41 and G42 commands.
COMMAND
G01(G00) G41 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G42 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G40 X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
D G01(G00) . . . . Calls the interpolation mode in which the tool nose radius
offset function is specified.
G00 . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . Cutting feed
D G41 . . . . . . . . . Calls the tool nose radius offset (left) function.
The tool position is offset to the left in reference to the tool
advancing direction.
D G42 . . . . . . . . . Calls the tool nose radius offset (right) function.
The tool position is offset to the right in reference to the
tool advancing direction.
G42
D G40 . . . . . . . . . Cancels the tool Tool advancing direction
nose radius offset
function. ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate Workpiece
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
values of the end point.
D I, K . . . . . . . . . . The direction of the
workpiece defined in
the following block. Tool advancing direction
The I and K commands are
specified in incremental G41
values (I: in radius).
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate.
The programmer must thoroughly understand the nature of the G41 and G42
functions as well as the tool paths to be generated. If the G41 and G42
commands are used improperly, the cutting tool might be fed into or hit against
the workpiece to be machined to cause breakage of the cutting tool or defective
machining.
2. Conditions for Use of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset

Function
The operations required to use the automatic tool nose radius offset function (G40, G41,
G42) are indicated below:
1) Setting the imaginary tip position

2 6 1 Set the code number (0 to 9), which represents the
tip position of the cutting tool to be used, to T
0, 9 column displayed on the OFFSET/WEAR screen.
7 5 For an O.D. cutting tool, for example, input “3”.
3 8 4
T=3
2) Setting the nose radius of the cutting tools to be used

Set the nose radius of the cutting tool to be used
OFFSET / GEOMETRY O0001 N00000
to the R column in either the
NO. X Z R T
G 01 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 2 OFFSET/GEOMETRY or OFFSET/WEAR screen.
G 02 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 3
G 03 0. 000 0. 000 0. 400 2
G 04 0. 000 0. 000 0. 400 3 If the nose radius is set to the R column in
G 05 0. 000 0. 000 0. 200 2
G 06 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 3 both of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY and
G 07 0. 000 0. 000 0. 200 3
G 08 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 2 OFFSET/WEAR screens, offset is made by
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
U 0.000 W 0.000 both of the input data, causing excessive or
〉– S 0 T0000 insufficient cutting.
HND ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ 20 : 38 : 40
WEAR GEOM (OPRT)
For the tool having nose radius of 0.8 mm, for
example, input “0.8”.
R = 0.8
0.8
3) Determining the offset direction

Decide the direction (right or left) in which the tool should be offset in reference to the
direction the tool will advance.
G41 Offset to the left G42 Offset to the right

2.1 Imaginary Tool Tip

To identify the point which is used for programming, the term “imaginary tool tip” is used.
It is necessary to set the code number (0 to 9) which represents the imaginary tool tip
position to the T column displayed on the OFFSET/WEAR screen.
The position of the imaginary tool tip, in reference to the center of the tool nose, is
determined according to the tool shape and the tool mounting method in the turret
head. The imaginary tool tip position data must be set in advance as with tool
offset data.
+X
OFFSET / WEAR O0001 N00000 2 6 1
NO. X Z R T
W 01 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 02 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 03 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 04 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
0
W 05 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0 7 5
W 06 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
R 9
W 07 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 08 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
U 0.000 W 0.000
〉– S 0 T0100
HND ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ 20 : 38 : 40 3 8 4
WEAR GEOM (OPRT)
+Z
0 - 9: Imaginary tool tip position
The number of tool offset data pairs will vary according to the machine model and
the NC and machine specifications.
Imaginary Tool Tip

T Examples
Position
In normal operation, the center of the tool nose is not

specified as the imaginary tool tip position.
0
3
Imaginary Tool Tip

T Examples
Position
In normal operation, to specify such point is really

rare.
5 .
Workpiece
Same as in the case of “0”.
The number indicated above for the imaginary tool tip position (T number) is for
general applications and, in some cases, specifying a T number different from this
indication might give better results.
The most appropriate T number should be determined and specified on the process
sheet by a programmer when he/she creates the tooling sheet.
The imaginary tool tip position is explained below using an O.D. cutting tool and an I.D.
cutting tool as examples.
<O.D. cutting tool>

Turret The imaginary tool tip position in reference to
the center of tool nose is defined by the T
number “3”.
The imaginary tool tip position code number (T

6
2 1 number) should be set for offset number that
corresponds to the last two digits of a T code.
7 5
3 8 4
Imaginary tool
tip position
When setting the selected T number for

OFFSET / WEAR O0001 N00000
“T0202” tool, set “3” to the T column for offset
NO. X Z R T
W 01 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0 number “W02” on the OFFSET/WEAR screen.
W 02 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 3
W 03 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 04 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 05 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 06 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 07 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 08 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
U 0.000 W 0.000
〉– S 0 T0100
HND ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ 20 : 38 : 40
WEAR GEOM (OPRT)
<I.D. cutting tool>

The imaginary tool tip position in reference to
Turret the center of tool nose is defined by the T
number “2”.
2 6 1
The imaginary tool tip position code number (T
number) should be set for offset number that
7 5 corresponds to the last two digits of a T code.
Imaginary
tool tip
position
3 8 4
When setting the selected T number for

“T0303” tool, set “2” to the T column for offset
NO. X Z R T
W 01 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0 number “W03” on the OFFSET/WEAR screen.
W 02 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 03 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 2
W 04 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 05 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 06 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 07 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 08 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
U 0.000 W 0.000
〉– S 0 T0100
HND ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ 20 : 38 : 40
WEAR GEOM (OPRT)
2.2 Setting Tool Nose Radius

When the automatic tool nose radius offset function, called by the G41 or G42 is used, it is
necessary to set the tool nose radius to the R column in either the OFFSET/GEOMETRY
or OFFSET/WEAR screen.
The offset number for which the nose radius is set should correspond to the offset number
which is specified in a T code.
For a T code, refer to page D–1 (1.).
If the nose radius is set to the R column in both of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY and
OFFSET/WEAR screens, offset is made by both of the input data, causing
excessive or insufficient cutting.
OFFSET / GEOMETRY O0001 N00001
NO. X Z R T
G 01 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 0
G 02 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 0
G 03 0. 000 0. 000 0. 400 0
G 04 0. 000 0. 000 0. 400 0
G 05 0. 000 0. 000 0. 200 0
G 06 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 0
G 07 0. 000 0. 000 0. 200 0 Tool nose radius offset data
G 08 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 0

U 145.962 W 101.823
〉– S 0 T0000
JOG ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ 20 : 38 : 40
WEAR GEOM (OPRT)
In the example above, the tool nose radius is set on the OFFSET/GEOMETRY
screen.
2.3 Specifying the Offset Direction

The tool paths are offset either to the left (G41) or to the right (G42) in reference to the
direction the cutting tool will advance.
When the direction the tool paths should be offset is determined, enter the corresponding
G code to the program.
The location where the G code should be entered in a program and related cautions are
explained in the following sections.
3. Technical Terms Used in the Explanation of the Automatic Tool Nose

Radius Offset Function
The technical terms special to the automatic tool nose radius offset function are given
below.
Term Description
Start-up The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified
In the start-up block, positioning is made so that the center of tool nose
lies at right angles to the axis movement specified in the next block.
Offset The mode in which the automatic tool nose radius offset function is valid
mode after the start-up
Cancel The state in which the automatic tool nose radius offset function is
mode canceled by executing G40
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that precedes the
G40 block. The center of the tool is positioned right angles to the tool path
programmed in the preceding block.
...
G42 G00 X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . Start-up

Cancel mode
G01 X_ Z_ F_ ; . . . . . . .
:
Offset mode X_ Z_ ; : . . . . Offset mode
Start-up :
X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . .:
+Z
G40 G00 X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . Cancel mode
...
3.1 Start-up
The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified is called the start-up block.
In the start-up block, positioning is made so that the center of tool nose lies at right angles
to the axis motion specified in the next block.
...
G42 G00 X100.0 Z20.0; . . . . . 1
G42 (start-up)
G01 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
...
This diatance must be larger
than the tool nose radius
G42
2 1
Start point of the next block (X100.0, Z20.0)

Z0
2 ...
3 G00 X94.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . 1

G42 G42 G01 Z2.0 F_ ; . . . . . . . . . 2
X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 1 (X94.0, Z20.0)
G42
(start-up)
Z0 Start point of the next block (X94.0, Z2.0)

3
...
G00 X50.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . 1

G41 G01 Z2.0 F_ ; . . . . . . . . . 2
than the tool nose radius X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
...
G41 (Start-up)
2 1 (X50.0, Z20.0)
Start point of the next block (X50.0, Z2.0)
3
When specifying the start-up, the following two conditions must be satisfied.
1 The start-up block must include an axis movement command; the called
distance must be larger than the offset amount (tool nose radius).
2 The start-up must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion) mode.
Do not specify the start-up in the G02 or G03 mode. If the start-up is specified
in such a mode, an alarm is generated, the corresponding alarm message
(No. 034) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops operating.
3.2 Offset Mode

The mode in which the automatic tool nose radius offset function is valid, after the start-up,
is called the offset mode.
1) Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is not changed
The tool moves along the workpiece shape with its nose in contact with the shape.
5
4
(X100.0, Z–45.0) (X100.0, Z–30.0)

3
(X80.0, Z–20.0)
2
(X70.0, Z – 20.0) 1
(X70.0, Z20.0)
...
G42 G00 X70.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (Start-up)

G01 Z–20.0 F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G03 X100.0 Z–30.0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . 4 Offset mode

G01 Z–45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2) Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is changed

If the direction of tool offset changes in a program, i.e., if the G code calling the tool
nose radius offset function changes between G41 and G42, the tool nose will come
into contact with the workpiece shape that is defined in the two consecutive blocks
where the G code changes from G41 to G42, or vice versa.
...
G41 X90.0 Z0;
X80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 G42 X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1
...
Changing the G code mode between
(X80.0, Z0)
G41 and G42 must not be specified in
the block following the start-up block.
3.3 Cancel Mode

The G40 command, specified in the offset mode, cancels the tool nose radius offset
function.
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that precedes the G40 block. The
center of the tool nose lies at right angles to the tool path programmed in reference to
block.
1
2
(Cancel mode) (X150.0, Z100.0)

Start-up
1 (X100.0 Z–50.0)
...
(G42) X100.0 Z–50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G40 G00 X150.0 Z100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (Cancel mode)

...
2
2
1
(X150.0, Z100.0)
(X90.0 Z–5.0)
...
(G42) X90.0 Z–5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G40 G00 X150.0 Z100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 2

...
Pay careful attention on the following points in the cancel mode program.
1 In the automatic tool nose radius offset mode (G41, G42), do not specify the
same G code that has been specified to call the present offset mode again. If
the same G code is specified, positioning is made so that the tool nose lies at
the right angle to the tool path at the end point of the preceding block, in the
same manner as in the cancel block. Therefore, undercuts or overcuts occur
in the block in which the same G code (G41, G42) as the one presently valid is
specified.
G42 is specified in the G42 mode G42 U100.0 W–200.0
G42
(G42)
(G42)
(G42)
2 The cancel block must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion) mode.
To specify the cancel block in the G02 or G03 circular interpolation mode is not
allowed. If the cancel block is specified in the circular interpolation mode, an
alarm message (No. 034) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
Conditions in which the offset mode is canceled:
– Execution of the G40 command
– The initial state established when the power is turned on.
– Reset state; the RESET
(RESET) key is pressed.
– Program end; the program ends when the M02 or M30 command is executed.
4. General Cautions on the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset

Function
4.1 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting

If the workpiece wall lies in a direction independent of the direction of tool motion specified
by the commands in the G40 block:
Specify the workpiece wall’s direction (workpiece shape) with vectors (I, K). Use
incremental values for I and K commands; the I command should be specified in radius.
Wall
I, K G40
(200, –30)
(G42) Actual tool motion commands
+I 5 G40 G00 X200.0 Z–30.0 I5.0 K–4.0;
+K The workpiece is cut until the tool nose comes into contact with the wall.
1 The workpiece is cut until the tool nose comes into contact with the wall. The I
and K commands, used to define the vectors that represent the workpiece wall
direction, should be specified in the G40 block that appears first after entry into
the offset mode.
• Valid • Invalid
G42 X_ Z_ ; G42 X_ Z_ ;
X_ Z_ ;
... ... ...
Offset mode
... ... ... ... ... ...
Offset mode G40 X_ Z_ ;

... ... ...
Cancel mode
G40 G00 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ; G40 G00 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ;
Ignored
2 If “I_ K_ ” is not specified in the G40 block, the offset mode cancel point is set
at the end point of the preceding block; at this end point, the tool nose center
lies at right angles to the tool path generated by the commands in reference to
block. This causes an overcut on the wall.
G40 G00 X_ Z_ ;
G40
(G42)
Overcuts occur
Calculating the wall direction (blank workpiece shape)
(G40)
(G42)
60°
+X
∅ 100
80
∅ 70
+Z
B 1 Value “I” is calculated as indicated below,

30° based on the illustration on the left.
100 – 70
I = 15
I= = 15
2
60° Because it is measured in the positive
C A direction on the X-axis, the designation should
be “I15.0”.
∅ 100
K 80
∅ 70
Next, value “K” is calculated as:

K = AC = 15 tan30_ = 8.660
Because it is measured in the negative
direction on the Z-axis, the designation should
be “K–8.66”.
2 Since I and K commands are used to define
30°
the direction of the wall, the ratio between the
I=C A sides of a triangle may be used instead of
calculating actual lengths.
60°
The ratio of three sides of the triangle given on
K=B
the left is known as:
A:B:C = 2:1: 3 (= 1.73)
Therefore, the designation should be “I1.73,
K–1.0”.
I and K commands may be specified in either method as described above.

...
G01 Z–80.0;
G40 G00 X200.0 Z50.0 I15.0 K–8.66;
(I1.73 K–1.0)
Interchangeable
C2 2 1
3
4
∅ 100
45°
∅ 40
30 Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
X46.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G41 G01 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approach to 2 (start-up)
X40.0 Z–2.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Offset mode
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G40 G00 U–1.0 Z20.0 I–1.0 K–1.0; . . Escape (cancel mode)
X150.0 Z100.0 M09; I–1.0 . . . . . Specifies X component of the vector
M01; (–1 mm in the X-axis direction; in
radius)
K–1.0 . . . . Specifies Z component of the vector
(–1 mm in the Z-axis direction)
The I and K commands indicate the wall direction.
K–1.0
45° 1
I–1.0
45°
1
√ 2
4.2 Overcut in the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode

1) Cutting an inside an arc whose radius is smaller than the tool nose radius
If cutting an inside arc whose radius is smaller than the tool nose radius is called in a
program, overcuts will occur.
The alarm indicator is displayed on the screen just after the start of the block that
precedes that block containing the arc command and the machine stops.
Just after the completion of corner interpolation motion if motion for corner
interpolation was generated.
If a single block function is called during the execution of the preceding block, the
axes are fed to the end point of that block, causing overcuts.
Tool nose center path
Programmed
tool path Alarm-stop in a single
block stop operation
Machine stops due to the alarm
Corner motion
Arc with radius smaller

than the tool nose
Overcuts occur if the axes

move as programmed
2) Cutting a groove whose width is narrower than the width of tool nose
Since overcuts occur if the tool nose radius center path is generated in the direction
opposite to the path specified in the program as the result of automatic tool nose
radius offset, an alarm occurs just after the start of the block that precedes the one
causing overcuts. The corresponding alarm number is displayed and the machine
stops.
Alarm/stop point in a single

block stop operation Tool nose center path
Machine stops
due to
the alarm Programmed tool path
Overcuts occur if the

axes move as programmed
3) Cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than the tool nose radius
If cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than the tool nose is called in a
program, the tool nose center path generated by the tool nose radius offset might
cause axis motion in the direction opposite to the programmed tool path direction.
In such a case, the first vector is ignored and the tool moves along the straight line to
the tip point of the second vector.
Although the operation is continued without causing an alarm, undercut portion is left
in the workpiece.
Tool motion along a straight line
Tool nose center path
Programmed tool path

Arc
Undercut amount
4) No axis motion commands being specified in two or more consecutive blocks:

If no axis motion commands are specified in two or more consecutive blocks while in
the offset mode, overcuts could occur as indicated below since buffering of two blocks
is not possible.
...
(G42 mode)
X30.0 Z–20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 2
Z–25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(X60.0, Z–25.0) (X60.0, Z–20.0)
...
Tool paths are offset correctly due to
1
the 2-block buffering function.
(X30.0, Z–20.0)
...
Overcut (G42 mode)
X30.0 Z–20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 2
M_ ; No axis movement
(X60.0, Z–25.0) (X60.0, Z–20.0)
S_ ; commands in these blocks
Z–25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
...
(X30.0, Z–20.0)
Overcuts occur as illustrated above. This is because the center of the tool nose is
positioned, when the preceding block 2 is executed, at the right angle to the tool path
called by the commands in reference to this block.
5. Example Programs
Examples of programs that use the automatic tool nose radius offset (G40, G41, G42) are
indicated below.
Refer to these examples when creating a program.
5.1 Basic Programs
O.D. cutting with an O.D. cutting tool
Cancel mode 7
Rapid traverse
6
5 Cutting feed
Start-up
Offset
4 mode 2 1
3
∅ 100
∅ 40
R5
35
C2 Cancel mode
6 7
5
Offset mode Start-up
4
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000; 3 2 1
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
G42 X40.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 (X40.0, Z20.0) at a rapid traverse
rate
Since the block contains G42, this is the start-up
block.
The tool is offset to the right in reference to the
G01 Z2.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 2 at feedrate of 1.0 mm/rev
Z–30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 3 at feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
G02 X50.0 Z–35.0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 4 along a circle of 5 mm radius in the
clockwise direction
G01 X96.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 5 along a straight line
X102.0 Z–38.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 6 to allow the cutting tool to be
completely off the workpiece
G40 G00 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 7 at a rapid traverse rate to retract
cutting tool from the workpiece
Since the block contains G40, this block cancels
the offset mode.
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
Facing and O.D. cutting with in O.D. cutting tool
8
Cancel mode
7 Rapid traverse
Start-up Cutting feed

6
Offset mode
2
1
5
∅ 100
∅ 40
4
3
G40
8
G42
7 (G42) 6
(G42)
2 (G42) 1
30
50
G41
5
∅ 100
O0001;
N1; G42
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; 3 4
G96 S180 M03;
(1) G42 X45.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 (X45.0, Z20.0) at a rapid traverse
rate
block.
The tool is offset to the right in reference to the
(2) G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 2 at feedrate of 1.0 mm/rev
(3) G41 X0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 3 at feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
Since the block contains G41, the cutting tool
moves up to the position where the tool position is
offset to the left.
G40 G00 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 4 at a rapid traverse rate
the offset mode.
G42 X38.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 5 at a rapid traverse rate
Since the block contains G42, the cutting tool
moves up to the position where the tool position is
offset to the right.
G01 X100.0 Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 6 at a feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
Z–50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 7 along a straight line
G40 G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 8 at a rapid traverse rate to retract
the offset mode.
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
Blocks (1), (2), and (3) may be specified as indicated below.

(1) X45.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 (X45.0, Z20.0) at a rapid traverse rate
(2) G41 G01 Z0 F1.0; . . Cutting to 2 at feedrate of 1.0 mm/rev
Since the block contains G41, this is the start-up block.

The tool is offset to the left in reference to the direction
the cutting tool will advance.
(3) X0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to 3 at feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
G40
8
7 (G42) 6
(G42)
2
G41 1
(G41)
5
∅ 100
G42
3 4
The tool paths for these blocks are shown in the illustration above.
In this program, although block (2) specifies only Z-axis movement, the X-axis also
moves since this is the start-up block.
Here, the X-axis moves in the negative direction by the tool nose radius.
Therefore, specify the X coordinate value in block (1) so that interference can be
avoided.
Chamfering and I.D. cutting with an I.D. cutting tool
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
C2 2 1
3
4 5
∅ 100
∅ 40
60
G41
1
2
4 (G41) 3 (G41)
O0001;
N1; G40
5
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
X48.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 (X48.0, Z20.0) at a rapid traverse
rate
G41 G01 Z2.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 2 , including offset motion to the left in
reference to the direction the cutting tool will
advance
block.
The tool moves in the X-axis direction also
since the tool is offset to the left at 2 .
X40.0 Z–2.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Offset mode
Z–62.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G40 G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 5 at a rapid traverse rate to retract
the offset mode.
At the start point of the cancel mode, the center of
the nose circle is positioned right angle to the
programmed path in reference to the block at the
end point 4 of the preceding block.
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
Arc ³ O.D. ³ Arc cutting with an O.D. cutting tool
7 8
6
5
R3
3
Rapid traverse
4
R5 Cutting feed
2 1
∅ 90
∅ 50
40
80
8
7
G40
(G42)
6
5 (G42)
(G42)
O0001; 4 3
(G42)
N1; 1
2
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G42
G96 S180 M03;

(1) X40.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 (X40.0, Z20.0) at a rapid traverse
rate
G42 G01 Z0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 2 , including offset motion to the right in
advance
block.
The tool moves in the X-axis direction also
since the tool is offset to the right at 2 .
G03 X50.0 Z–5.0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G01 Z–40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Offset mode
X84.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
G03 X90.0 Z–43.0 R3.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

G40 G00 X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 7 at a rapid traverse rate to retract

the offset mode.
At the start point of the cancel mode, the center of
the nose circle is positioned right angle to the
programmed path in reference to the block ( 3 ³
6 ) at the end point 6 of the preceding block.
(2) X150.0 Z100.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 8 at a rapid traverse rate

M01;
If the profile begins with an arc, as in this example, the block preceding the block that
defines the arc should be used as the start-up block.
Similarly, if the profile ends with an arc, the block where the arc is defined should be used
as the cancel mode block.
If start-up or cancel of the tool nose radius offset mode is specified in a wrong
block, it will cause undercutting.
Examples of this undercut are shown below.
If the G42 command is specified in block (1), an undercut portion will be left.
3 Start-up
2
1
Undercut portion
If the G40 command is specified in block (2), an undercut portion will be left.
Cancel mode
8
7
Undercut
portion
6
General start-up patterns are summarized below. Cautions to be taken into consideration
when creating a program are specified for the related tool paths.
Chuck work (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O0001;
Generally, at the start of a program, the
programmed point and the imaginary tool N1;
tip position are at the same position.
Start point G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
Imaginary tool tip G00
position G42
At the end of this start-up G42 X50.0 Z3.0 M08; . . . . . . . 1
block, the center of the tool
nose is positioned at a point G01 Z–30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . 2
which is at a right angle to the
...
G01 (G42) path to be generated by the
2
1 commands in the next block.
Programmed point
3 (at start-up)
∅ 50
Taking into account tool motion in the start-up

block, allow a distance that is equal to, or larger
than the tool nose radius so that the cutting tool
will not be hit against the workpiece.
Chuck work (2) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O0001;
G00 N1;
G42
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
First approach at
a rapid traverse rate G96 S150 M03;
2 1
3 G01
G42 X50.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . 1
∅ 50
Second approach at G01 Z3.0 F1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

a faster cutting feedrate
Z–30.0 F0.15;
Allow a distance that is equal to, or
larger than the tool nose radius so
...
that the cutting tool will not be hit

against the workpiece.
Center work (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O0001;
N1;
1
G50 S2000;
G00 First approach at
a rapid traverse rate G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
Z3.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Second approach at a X50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 faster cutting feedrate;
this block is used as the G42 G01 X30.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . 3
start-up
G42
G01 Z–30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G01
4
...
3
3

∅ 30

Facing (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O0001;
N1;
G41
G00 G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
1
G96 S150 M03;
3
G41 X56.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 larger than the tool nose radius so G01 X20.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . 2
...

∅ 50
O0001;
G41 G00
G01 N1;
G50 S2000;
Allow a distance that is equal
to, or larger than the tool nose G00 T0101;
radius so that the cutting tool 2 1
will not be hit against the 3 G96 S150 M03;
workpiece.
X56.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01
G41 G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . 2
∅ 50
X30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3
In this example, positioning in the start-up block requires corner interpolation

motion.
The program should use the G41 command, instead of the G42 command used in
“Chuck work (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm).”
Allow a distance that is equal to, O0001;
or larger than two times the nose
radius so that the cutting tool will G41 N1;
G00 At the end of this
not be hit against the workpiece. start-up block, the G50 S2000;
2 G01 1 center of the tool nose is
positioned at a point G00 T0101;
which is at a right angle
to the path generated by G96 S150 M03;
3 the commands in the
next block. Then, G41 X56.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . 1
corner interpolation
motion is inserted so G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G01 that the tool nose comes
Corner interpolation into contact with the tool
motion path generated by the
X30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
∅ 50
commands in the next
...
block.
3
Chamfering (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
G01 2 O0001;
3
G01
G42 N1;
G00
C1 G50 S2000;
∅ 50
1
G00 T0101;
CAUTION: G96 S150 M03;

Tool nose comes to a point lower than
the programmed point. G42 X46.0 Z1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 X50.0 Z–1.0 F0.15; . . . . . 2
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
...
O0001;
N1;
G01 2
3 G50 S2000;
G01
G00 T0101;
C1
G96 S150 M03;
∅ 50
1
X60.0 Z1.0;
CAUTION: G42 G01 X46.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . 1
Tool nose comes to a point lower than
the programmed point. X50.0 Z–1.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . 2
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
...
G42 O0001;
G01 3 G00
4 G01 N1;
C1 G50 S2000;
2 G01 1 G00 T0101;
∅ 50
G96 S150 M03;

Allow a distance that is equal to, or G42 X46.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . 1
that the cutting tool will not be hit G01 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X50.0 Z–1.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . 3
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
...
O0001;
G42
G00 N1;
1
G01 3 G50 S2000;
4
G01
G01 G00 T0101;
C1 G96 S150 M03;
∅ 50
G42 X60.0 Z2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 G01 X44.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X50.0 Z–1.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . 3

larger than two times the nose
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
radius so that the cutting tool will
...
not be hit against the workpiece.

5.2 Recommended Example Programs
Approach ³ O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)

Chuck work
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G41
G41 start-up in the first
G00 T0101;
G00
approach in rapid traverse
G96 S150 M03;
G41 X70.0 Z1.0 M08; . . . . . . . 1
1
G01 X50.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
(G00 may be used) G42 Z–30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . 3

G01
(G41)
...
G42 Second approach at a faster
(G01) cutting feedrate; G41 offset
3
2 mode block. Always specify
this block.
∅ 50
The programmed point and the

imaginary tool tip position are
at the same position.
Tool nose radius may be

Specify the G42 command in this block. ignored. Allow a minimum
distance so that the cutting
tool will not be hit against
the workpiece.
Approach ³ Facing (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O0001;
N1;
Second approach
G50 S2000;
G42 offset mode
G00 T0101;
G42
G00 First approach at a G96 S150 M03;
rapid traverse rate;
G42 start-up block G42 X52.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . 1
(G42)
G01 G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Tool nose radius G41 X0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

may be ignored.
2 Allow a minimum G40 W1.0;
1 distance so that the
...
cutting tool will not

be hit against the
workpiece.
The programmed point and the imaginary

tool tip position are at the same position.
∅ 50
3 Specify the G41 command in this block.

Approach ³ Chamfering ³ O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)

Chuck work
O0001;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G96 S150 M03;
G41 X60.0 Z1.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 X46.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G41 G42 X50.0 Z–1.0 F0.15; . . . . . . 3

G00
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
...
First approach at a rapid
traverse rate; G41 start-up
1 block
(G42, G01)
4
3 G42 G41 Second approach at a faster
(G01) (G01) cutting feedrate; G41 offset
mode block.
C1
2
CAUTION:
∅ 50
1 1 In shaft work, pay careful

attention to possible
interference between the
Specify the G42 command Allow 1 mm clearance; this value cutting tool and the center
in this block. makes calculations simple. if the workpiece is small.
Facing ³ Chamfering ³ O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
7
O0001;
N1;
G42
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
G00 G42 X152.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . 1
2 (G42) 1
G01
6 (G42) 5 G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G41 X100.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . 3

C1 G42 G00 X146.0 Z1.0; . . . . . . . . 4
4 G01 X150.0 Z–1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 5

G41
Z–30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
∅ 150
G40 G00 X200.0 Z30.0 M09; . . 7

G42
M05;
M30;
3
Corner interpolation motion examples in automatic tool nose radius offset mode
The start point in the start-up motion varies depending on the imaginary tool tip
position.
Programmed tool paths Actual tool paths (nose R center)
In the Same Offset Mode Cancel Mode

Corner Start-up
Offset Mode Changed (G42 ³ G40)
Angle (G40 ³ G42)
(G42) (G42 ³ G41)
1° - 90°
90°
90° - 180°
180°
180° - 270°
270°
270° - 360°
360° - (0°)
0° - 1°
5.3 Programming for a Sample Workpiece

The part programs for the facing, O.D. finishing, and I.D. finishing are written for the
sample workpiece illustrated below.
Compare the part program with the one created in 27., “Summary” of Chapter C.
<Drawing>
41
25
3 5
C1
C1.5
C0.5 C1
C1
15° R2
C1.5
69
56
32
44
54
∅
M60 P=2.0
Finishing is ∇∇ unless otherwise specified.

O.D. 70
Dimensions
Di i I.D. 30
(mm)
Length 43
<Preparation for using the automatic tool nose radius offset function>
1) Set the imaginary tool tip position code to the

T column in the OFFSET/WEAR screen.
NO. X Z R T
W 01 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 3 2) Set the nose radius of the tool in the R
W 02 0. 000 0. 000 0. 800 2
W 03 0. 000 0. 000 0. 400 3 column, corresponding to the offset number
W 04 0. 000 0. 000 0. 400 2
W 05 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0 specified by the T code in either the
W 06 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0
W 07 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0 OFFSET/GEOMETRY or OFFSET/WEAR
W 08 0. 000
0. 000 0. 000 0
screen.
U 0.000 W 0.000
If the nose radius is set to the R column in
〉– S 0 T0000
HND ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ 20 : 38 : 40 both of the OFFSET/GEOMETRY and
WEAR GEOM (OPRT)
OFFSET/WEAR screens, offset is made by
both of the input data, causing excessive or
insufficient cutting.
<Part programs for facing, O.D. finishing and I.D. finishing>
10
8 2
7 5
9 1
6
4
23
22 21
24
3
25
26
27
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
N3(FIN. OF. OUT.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part programs for finish facing and O.D. finishing
(tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
1 G42 X56.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 1 , including offset motion to the right in
advance (start-up motion)
2 G01 Z0 F1.0;
3 G41 X30.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to the position where the offset is made to
the left
4 G42 G00 X50.0 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to the position where the offset is made to
the right
5 G01 X54.0 Z–1.0;
6 Z–5.0;
7 X56.8;
8 X59.8 Z–6.5;
9 Z–23.0 F0.2;
10 G40 G00 U1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 10 at a rapid traverse rate to retract
cutting tool from the workpiece (cancel mode)
rapid traverse rate
N4(FIN. OF. IN.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for I.D. finishing
(tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
21 G41 X47.869 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to 21 , including offset motion to the left in
advance (start-up motion)
22 G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
23 Z0 F0.2;
23 X47.069; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No motion; since the X coordinate after automatic
tool nose radius offset becomes the same value as
in 21 , the tool does not move.
24 G02 X43.205 Z–1.482 R2.0 F0.07;
25 G01 X32.0 Z–22.392;
26 Z–41.0 F0.1;
27 G40 G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Escape of cutting tool from the workpiece to
execute I.D. cutting in the next process (cancel
mode)
rapid traverse rate
transmission.
CHAPTER F
MANUAL TOOL NOSE
RADIUS OFFSET
This chapter describes how the manual tool nose radius offset function works.
Because the tool edge does not come to a sharp point, but is slightly rounded, the point of
the tool nose actually engaged with cutting differs slightly from the point assumed for
writing a program. By calculating the offset data manually and shifting the tool nose, the
programmed point (imaginary tool nose) can be made to coincide with the cutting point.
CONTENTS
F : MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1
2. Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2

2.1 Offset Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2
2.2 Calculating Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–3
2.3 Offset Direction ( ) and Calculation of Coordinate Values . . . F–5
2.4 Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–9
2.5 Offset Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–12
3. Offset in Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–17

3.1 Convex Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–17
3.2 Concave Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–17
3.3 Calculating the Coordinate Values to be Specified
in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–18
3.4 Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–19
4. Programming for a Sample Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–21

MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET F–1
1. General
The tool nose does not have a sharp edge but is slightly rounded (tool nose radius) as
illustrated below. Therefore, the point of the tool nose used for programming differs from
the actual cutting point. The tool nose radius offset is used to eliminate dimensional errors
caused by this difference.
Actual cutting point
Programmed point
If a program is written without taking into consideration the tool nose radius, overcuts or
undercuts occur.
For overcuts (excessive cutting) and undercuts (insufficient cutting), refer to

page E–1.
Since it is possible to calculate the overcut and undercut amount, a workpiece can be
finished to the dimensions specified on the part drawing by creating the program where the
offset amount is included.
The method to offset the programmed tool paths in the manner as indicated above is
called the manual tool nose radius offset.
1 The function to automatically calculate the offset amount is the automatic tool
nose radius offset explained in Chapter E.
2 Almost all the cutting tools have rounded tool tip whose radius varies among
the type of the cutting tools and inserts. In addition, the necessary offset
amount varies according to the tool path patterns.
To finish the workpiece to the dimensions specified on the part drawing, the
offset amount must be calculated correctly from the tool nose radius and tool
path patterns. Therefore, the programmers are required to understand the
principle on the manual tool nose radius offset.
3 Since there are a number of tool patterns which will be used for actual
machining and they will differ among users, it is not possible to explain all of
the tool patterns in this manual. The explanation given in this chapter is
concentrated on the basic tool path patterns along with the cautions to be
taken into consideration for programming so that the readers will be able to
acquire basic knowledge of the automatic tool nose radius offset function.
F–2 MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
2. Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering
2.1 Offset Method

In O.D. cutting, the program is first created assuming the imaginary tool tip as the point to
move on the programmed path. It is shown as 1 and 2 in the illustration below. If the
program is created in this manner, undercut portion is left. Therefore, 1 ’ and 2 ’ which
are offset points from 1 and 2 taking nose radius into consideration must be obtained to
finish the tapered portion correctly.
X50.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2
X80.0 Z–15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1
15
∅ 80
∅ 50
Z0
Undercut portion
Calculate the offset data (Xc, Zc) and add this
2’
offset to the original program ( 1 , 2 ) to eliminate
undercutting.
Zc X(50.0 – 2 Xc) Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ’
X80.0 Z(–15.0 – Zc); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ’
Xc
1’
15
∅ 80
∅ 50
Z0
In I.D. cutting, the program is first created assuming the imaginary tool tip as the point to
move on the programmed path. It is shown as 1 and 2 in the illustration below. If the
program is created in this manner, undercut portion is left. Therefore, 1 ’ and 2 ’ which
are offset points from 1 and 2 taking nose radius into consideration must be obtained to
finish the tapered portion correctly.
Z0 X54.0 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3
X50.0 Z – 3.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1
2
∅ 50
∅ 54
Undercut portion Calculate the offset data (Xc, Zc) and add this
Z0 offset to the original program ( 1 , 2 ) to eliminate
3
undercutting.
1’ X(54.0 + 2 Xc) Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ’
Xc
X50.0 Z(–3.0 – Zc); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ’
Zc
The procedure used to calculate Xc and Zc is
explained below.
2’
∅ 50
∅ 54
2.2 Calculating Offset Data

1) For undercutting
The additional movement along an axis required to eliminate undercut portions is
called the offset data or additional cutting amount. The following shows the diagrams
and formulas used to calculate the offset data Xc and Zc required to eliminate
undercutting.
<O.D. taper cutting>
<Calculating Xc and Zc>
D Xc
Xc = Zc tanθ = (Rn – a) tanθ
θ
= Rn {1 – tan(θ/2)} tanθ
. . . . . . . . . Formula 1
Zc D Zc
Zc = Rn – a = Rn – Rn tan(θ/2)
= Rn {1 – tan(θ/2)}
. . . . . . . . . Formula 2
θ/2 Rn
+X Xc
θ
θ/2
The offset data calculated using the
Zc a formulas 1 and 2 is summarized in the
+Z Rn
table in 2.5, “Offset Data Table” in this
chapter.
<I.D. taper cutting>
+X Rn <Calculating Xc and Zc>

Zc a
+Z
D Xc
Xc θ
θ/2 θ/2
Xc = Zc tanθ
Rn
= Rn {1 – tan(θ/2)} tanθ
. . . . . . . . . Formula 1
D Zc
Zc
Zc = Rn – a = Rn – Rn tan(θ/2)
= Rn {1 – tan(θ/2)}
. . . . . . . . . Formula 2
θ
The offset data calculated using the
formulas 1 and 2 is summarized in the
table in 2.5, “Offset Data Table” in this
chapter.
Rn: Tool nose radius
Xc: Offset data, X-axis
Zc: Offset data, Z-axis
θ: Taper angle, measured from the Z-axis

2) For overcutting
The additional movement along an axis required to eliminate overcut portions is called
the offset data or additional cutting amount. The following shows the diagrams and
formulas used to calculate the offset data Xc and Z’c required to eliminate overcutting.
<O.D. taper cutting>
+X <Calculating Xc and Z’c>

D Xc
+Z
Xc = Zc tanθ
θ/2 θ/2
θ = Rn {1 – tan(θ /2)} tanθ
. . . . . . . . . Formula 1
D Z’c
Rn a Z’c = Rn + a = Rn {1 + tan(θ /2)}
Z’c Zc . . . . . . . . . Formula 2
or
Z’c = 2 Rn – Zc . . . . . . . . . . Formula 2 ’
Xc
To use the offset data table, use the formula
2 ’ to calculate the offset data.
The offset data Xc, calculated using formula 1 , and the temporary offset data
Zc, used for calculating the offset data Z’c by formula 2 ’ are summarized in the
table in 2.5, “Offset Data Table” in this chapter.
<I.D. taper cutting>
<Calculating Xc and Z’c>

Xc D Xc
Xc = Zc tanθ
Z’c Zc = Rn {1 – tan(θ/2)} tanθ
Rn a . . . . . . . . . Formula 1
D Z’c
Z’c = Rn + a
θ/2 Xc = Rn {1 + tan(θ/2)}
θ/2
θ . . . . . . . . . Formula 2
+X or
Z’c = 2 Rn – Zc . . . . . . . . . . Formula 2 ’
+Z
To use the offset data table, use the formula
2 ’ to calculate the offset data.
The offset data Xc, calculated using formula 1 , and the temporary offset data
Zc, used for calculating the offset data Z’c by formula 2 ’ are summarized in the
table in 2.5, “Offset Data Table” in this chapter.
Xc: Offset data, X-axis
Z’c: Offset data, Z-axis (Additional cutting amount)
Zc: Offset data for angle θ (data in offset data table)
θ: Taper angle, measured from the Z-axis
2.3 Offset Direction ( ) and Calculation of Coordinate Values

1) Offset direction
The programmed shape is obtained if the imaginary tool nose moves along the path
indicated by the dotted lines.
In the following diagrams, “A” represents O.D. cutting while “B” represents I.D.
cutting.
1-A 2-A 3-A

θ
Zc
θ
θ
Zc Xc
Xc
Xc
Zc
Zc
1-B Xc 2-B 3-B
Xc
Zc Zc
θ
θ Xc
θ
4-A 5-A 6-A

θ θ
Z’c Z’c
Xc
Zc θ Z’c
Xc
Zc θ Z’c
4-B 5-B 6-B
Xc
Z’c Z’c
Xc θ
θ
2) Calculating coordinate values

To obtain the coordinate values of the individual axes when the tool nose radius is Rn
= 0.8.
1-A 1-B Xc
c
40_
Zc
b a
Zc
d
d
a
b
Xc 30_
c
Point X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 0 a 50.0 0
b 60.0 –5.96 b 43.08 –6.0
θ = 40_ Rn = 0.8 θ = 30_ Rn = 0.8
Xc and Zc are found in the offset data table: Xc and Zc are found in the offset data table:
Point c: Xc = 0.4269 0.427 Point c: Xc = 0.3381 0.338
X = 50.0 – (2 0.427) = 49.146 X = 50.0 + (2 0.338) = 50.676
Point c (X49.146, Z0) Point c (X50.676, Z0)
Point d: Zc = 0.5088 0.509 Point d: Zc = 0.5856 0.586
Z = –5.96 – 0.509 = –6.469 Z = –6.0 – 0.586 = –6.586
Point d (X60.0, Z–6.469) Point d (X43.08, Z–6.586)
2-A 2-B Zc
c
25_ b a
d
Zc Zc
a
c d
b
Zc 38_
Point X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 –10.0 a 50.0 –10.0
b 68.65 –30.0 b 34.38 –20.0
θ = 25_ Rn = 0.8 θ = 38_ Rn = 0.8

Zc is found in the offset data table: Zc is found in the offset data table:
Zc = 0.6226 0.623 Zc = 0.5245 0.525
Point c: Z = –10.0 – 0.623 = –10.623 Point c: Z = –10.0 – 0.525 = –10.525
Point c (X50.0, Z–10.623) Point c (X50.0, Z–10.525)
Point d: Z = –30.0 – 0.623 = –30.623 Point d: Z = –20.0 – 0.525 = –20.525
3-A 3-B c
Xc
a
b
d 20_ a 40_
d
Xc Xc
c
b
Xc
Point X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 0 a 50.0 0
b 60.92 –15.0 b 33.22 –10.0
θ = 20_ Rn = 0.8 θ = 40_ Rn = 0.8
Xc is found in the offset data table: Xc is found in the offset data table:
Xc = 0.2398 0.240 Xc = 0.4269 0.427
Point c: X = 50.0 – (2 0.240) = 49.52 Point c: X = 50.0 + (2 0.427) = 50.854
Point c (X49.52, Z0) Point c (X50.854, Z0)
Point d: X = 60.92 – (2 0.240) = 60.44 Point d: X = 33.22 + (2 0.427) = 34.074
4-A 4-B Zc 55_

c
a
b
Xc
d
a d
c Xc
Zc 33_ b
Point X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 –10.0 a 50.0 –10.0
b 62.98 –20.0 b 35.72 –15.0
θ = 33_ Rn = 0.8 θ = 55_ Rn = 0.8

Xc and Zc are found in the offset data table: Xc and Zc are found in the offset data table:
Point c: Zc = 0.5630 0.563 Point c: Zc = 0.3835 0.384
Z = –10.0 – 0.563 = –10.563 Z = –10.0 – 0.384 = –10.384
Point d: Xc = 0.3656 0.366 Point d: Xc = 0.5477 0.548
X = 62.98 – (2 0.366) = 62.248 X = 35.72 + (2 0.548) = 36.816
5-A 5-B
40_ 2Rn
Xc
c
a
b Z’c
Z’c d
a
b
c
Xc 30_
d
Point X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 –10.0 a 50.0 –10.0
b 24.82 –25.0 b 61.54 –20.0
θ = 40_ Rn = 0.8 θ = 30_ Rn = 0.8
Zc and Xc are found in the offset data table: Zc and Xc are found in the offset data table:
Zc = 0.5088 0.509 Zc = 0.5856 0.586
Point c: Z’c = 2 Rn – Zc Point c: Z’c = 2 Rn – Zc
= 2 0.8 – 0.509 = 2 0.8 – 0.586
= 1.091 = 1.014
Z = –10.0 – 1.091 = –11.091 Z = –10.0 – 1.014 = –11.014
Point d: Xc = 0.4269 0.427 Point d: Xc = 0.3381 0.338
X = 24.82 – (2 0.427) = 23.966 X = 61.54 + (2 0.338) = 62.216
Z = –25.0 – (2 Rn) = –25.0 – 1.6 Z = –20.0 – (2 Rn) = –20.0 – 1.6
= –26.6 = –21.6
Z’c
6-A 6-B
b
d
35_ Z’c
a
c
Z’c
b c a
d 45_
Z’c
Point X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 –10.0 a 50.0 –10.0
b 40.0 –17.14 b 60.0 –15.0
θ = 35_ Rn = 0.8 θ = 45_ Rn = 0.8
Zc is found in the offset data table: Zc is found in the offset data table:
Zc = 0.5478 0.548 Zc = 0.4686 0.469
Point c: Z’c = 2 Rn – Zc Point c: Z’c = 2 Rn – Zc
= 2 0.8 – 0.548 = 2 0.8 – 0.469
= 1.052 = 1.131
Z = –10.0 – 1.052 = –11.052 Z = –10.0 – 1.131 = –11.131
Point d: Z = –17.14 – 1.052 = –18.192 Point d: Z = –15.0 – 1.131 = –16.131
2.4 Example Programs

T01
O.D. and I.D. cutting
1 10
11 19
9
8 3 2
6
30° T02
7 5
C2
13 12
15 14 4
∅ 60
∅ 40
∅ 25
∅ 15
16
17
18
30°
15
15 Rapid traverse
20 Cutting feed
<Tool nose is disregarded> <Tool nose radius = 0.4 mm>

O0001; O0001;
N1; N1;
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ................... G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X46.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . 2 ................... X46.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ................... G01 Z0 F1.0;
X20.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ................... X20.0 F0.15;
G00 X34.0 Z1.0; . . . . . . . . . 5 ................... G00 X33.532 Z1.0;
G01 X40.0 Z–2.0; . . . . . . . . 6 ................... G01 X40.0 Z–2.234;
Z–15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ................... Z–15.0;
X42.679; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ................... X42.094;
X60.0 Z–20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ................... X60.0 Z–20.169;
G00 X200.0 Z100.0; . . . . . . 10 ................... G00 X200.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
N2; N2;
G50 S2500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ................... G50 S2500;
G00 T0202; G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03; G96 S200 M03;
X31.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ................... X31.468 Z20.0;
G01 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . 13 ................... G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
X25.0 Z–2.0 F0.15; . . . . . . . 14 ................... X25.0 Z–2.234 F0.15;
Z–12.113; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ................... Z–12.282;
X15.0 Z–15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ................... X15.586 Z–15.0;
X0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ................... X0.8;
G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . 18 ................... G00 U–1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z100.0; . . . . . . . . . . 19 ................... X200.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
Underlined “____” coordinate values include offset data.
Zc = 0.234 5 X33.532
θ = 45_ Rn = 0.4
6
Xc is found in the offset data table:
C2
Xc = 0.2343 0.234
2
X = 40.0 – 2 (2.0 + 1.0 + 0.234)
∅ 40
2 1 = 33.532
1 5
Xc = 0.234 Value X should be given in diameters.
6 Z–2.234
Z0 X
θ = 45_ Rn = 0.4
Zc is found in the offset data table:
Zc = 0.2343 0.234
Z = 0 – 2.0 – 0.234
= –2.234
8 X42.094
9
θ = 60_ Rn = 0.4
∅ 60
30°
8.66 Xc = 0.29282 0.2928
Zc = 0.169 8.66 = 5 tan60_
60° 8
5
X = 60.0 – 2 (8.66 + 0.2928)
= 42.094
Xc = 0.2928
Value X should be given in diameters.
Z–15.0 9 Z–20.169
θ = 60_ Rn = 0.4
Zc = 0.1690 0.169
Z = –15.0 – 5.0 – 0.169
= –20.169
13 X31.468
Z0
Xc = 0.234 θ = 45_ Rn = 0.4
1 Xc = 0.2343 0.234
1 13
2 X = 25.0 + 2 (2.0 + 1.0 + 0.234)
Zc = 0.234
2
= 31.468
The X coordinates of points 12 and 13 are the
C2 same.
14 Value X should be given in diameters.
∅ 25
14 Z–2.234
θ = 45_ Rn = 0.4
Zc = 0.2343 0.234
Z = 0 – 2.0 – 0.234
= –2.234
15 Z–12.282
Zc = 0.169
2.887 θ = 60_ Rn = 0.4

60° 15
Zc = 0.1690 0.169
∅ 25
5 2.887 = 5 tan30_
30° Z = –15.0 + 2.887 – 0.169
Xc = 0.293
= –12.282
16 16 X15.586
θ = 60_ Rn = 0.4
∅ 15

Z–15.0 Xc = 0.2928 0.293
X = 15.0 + (2 0.293)
= 15.586
In the case of X0: In the case of X0.8: 17 X0.8
Workpiece Workpiece (X0.8, Z–15.0) If “X0” is specified in this block, the tool tip
moves beyond the spindle center line. In this
(X0, Z–15.0)
position, the cutting edge direction does not
Offset data 0.4
Spindle correspond to the rotating direction of the
center
spindle (workpiece).
Cutting tool Cutting tool Therefore, in this block, the X coordinate must
be away from the spindle center line by the
Fig. A Fig. B nose radius.
Rn = 0.4
X =2 0.4
= 0.8
2.5 Offset Data Table

Find the required offset data.
Use the left column Nose R (X, Z) if the taper angle is 1_ to 45_.
Use the right column Nose R (Z, X) if the taper angle is 45_ to 89_.
θ Nose R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 Nose R θ

X .006921 .008651 .013842 .017303 .020763 Z
1_
1 89_
89
Z .396509 .495636 .793019 .991273 1.189528 X
X .010337 .012922 .020675 .025843 .031012 Z
1_30’
1 30 88_30’
88 30
Z .394764 .493455 .789527 .986909 1.184291 X
X .013724 .017156 .027449 .034311 .041173 Z
2_
2 88_
88
Z .393018 .491272 .786036 .982545 1.179054 X
X .017083 .021354 .034167 .042708 .051250 Z
2_30’
2 30 87_30’
87 30
Z .391272 .489090 .782544 .978180 1.173816 X
X .020414 .025518 .040828 .051035 .061243 Z
3_
3 87_
87
Z .389526 .486907 .779051 .973814 1.168577 X
X .023718 .029647 .047435 .059294 .071153 Z
3_30’
3 30 86_30’
86 30
Z .387779 .484724 .775558 .969447 1.163337 X
X .026994 .033742 .053988 .067485 .080982 Z
4_
4 86_
86
Z .386032 .482540 .772063 .965079 1.158095 X
X .030244 .037805 .060488 .075610 .090731 Z
4_30’
4 30 85_30’
85 30
Z .384284 .480355 .768568 .960710 1.152852 X
X .033468 .041834 .066935 .083669 .100403 Z
5_
5 85_
85
Z .382536 .478170 .765071 .956339 1.147607 X
X .036666 .045832 .073331 .091664 .109997 Z
5_30’
5 30 84_30’
84 30
Z .380787 .475983 .761573 .951967 1.142360 X
X .039838 .049798 .079677 .099596 .119515 Z
6_
6 84_
84
Z .379037 .473796 .758074 .947592 1.137111 X
X .042986 .053733 .085973 .107466 .128959 Z
6_30’
6 30 83_30’
83 30
Z .377286 .471608 .754573 .943216 1.131859 X
X .046110 .057637 .092220 .115275 .138330 Z
7_
7 83_
83
Z .375535 .469419 .751070 .938837 1.126605 X
X .049209 .061512 .098419 .123024 .147628 Z
7_30’
7 30 82_30’
82 30
Z .373783 .467228 .747565 .934457 1.121348 X
X .052285 .065357 .104571 .130713 .156856 Z
8_
8 82_
82
Z .372029 .465037 .744059 .930073 1.116088 X
X .055338 .069172 .110676 .138345 .166014 Z
8_30’
8 30 81_30’
81 30
Z .370275 .472844 .740550 .925687 1.110825 X
X .058368 .072960 .116735 .145919 .175103 Z
9_
9 81_
81
Z .368519 .460649 .737039 .921298 1.105558 X
X .061375 .076719 .122750 .153438 .184125 Z
9_30’
9 30 80_30’
80 30
Z .366763 .458453 .733525 .916906 1.100288 X
θ Nose R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 Nose R θ

X .064360 .080450 .128720 .160900 .193080 Z
10_
10 80_
80
Z .365005 .456256 .730009 .912511 1.095014 X
X .067324 .084154 .134647 .168309 .201971 Z
10_30’
10 30 79_30’
79 30
Z .363245 .454056 .726490 .908113 1.089735 X
X .070265 .087832 .140531 .175664 .210796 Z
11_
11 79_
79
Z .361484 .451855 .722969 .903711 1.084453 X
X .073186 .091483 .146373 .182966 .219559 Z
11_30’
11 30 78_30’
78 30
Z .359722 .449653 .719444 .899305 1.079166 X
X .076086 .095108 .152173 .190216 .228259 Z
12_
12 78_
78
Z .357958 .447448 .715917 .894896 1.073875 X
X .078966 .098708 .157932 .197415 .236898 Z
12_30’
12 30 77_30’
77 30
Z .356193 .445241 .712386 .890482 1.068579 X
X .081826 .102282 .163651 .204564 .245477 Z
13_
13 77_
77
Z .354426 .443032 .708852 .886064 1.063277 X
X .084665 .105832 .169331 .211664 .253996 Z
13_30’
13 30 76_30’
76 30
Z .352657 .440821 .705314 .881642 1.057971 X
X .087486 .109357 .174972 .218714 .262457 Z
14_
14 76_
76
Z .350886 .438608 .701772 .877215 1.052659 X
X .090287 .112859 .180574 .225717 .270861 Z
14_30’
14 30 75_30’
75 30
Z .349114 .436392 .698227 .872784 1.047341 X
X .093069 .116337 .186138 .232673 .279208 Z
15_
15 75_
75
Z .347339 .434174 .694678 .868348 1.042017 X
X .095833 .119791 .191666 .239582 .287499 Z
15_30’
15 30 74_30’
74 30
Z .345562 .431953 .691125 .863906 1.036687 X
X .098578 .123223 .197157 .246446 .295735 Z
16_
16 74_
74
Z .343784 .429730 .687567 .859459 1.031351 X
X .101306 .126632 .202612 .253265 .303917 Z
16_30’
16 30 73_30’
73 30
Z .342003 .427503 .684006 .855007 1.026008 X
X .104016 .130019 .208031 .260039 .312047 Z
17_
17 73_
73
Z .340220 .425274 .680439 .850549 1.020659 X
X .106708 .133385 .213416 .266770 .320124 Z
17_30’
17 30 72_30’
72 30
Z .338434 .423043 .676868 .846085 1.015302 X
X .109383 .136729 .218766 .273457 .328149 Z
18_
18 72_
72
Z .336646 .420808 .673292 .841616 1.009939 X
X .112041 .140052 .224082 .280103 .336124 Z
18_30’
18 30 71_30’
71 30
Z .334856 .418570 .669712 .837140 1.004568 X
X .114683 .143353 .229366 .286707 .344048 Z
19_
19 71_
71
Z .333063 .416329 .666126 .832657 .999189 X
X .117308 .146635 .234616 .293270 .351924 Z
19_30’
19 30 70_30’
70 30
Z .331267 .414084 .662535 .828169 .993802 X
θ Nose R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 Nose R θ

X .119917 .149896 .239834 .299792 .359751 Z
20_
20 70_
70
Z .329469 .411837 .658938 .823673 .988408 X
X .122510 .153138 .245020 .306275 .367530 Z
20_30’
20 30 69_30’
69 30
Z .327668 .409585 .655336 .819171 .983005 X
X .125088 .156360 .250175 .312719 .375263 Z
21_
21 69_
69
Z .325864 .407330 .651729 .814661 .977593 X
X .127650 .159562 .225299 .319124 .382949 Z
21_30’
21 30 68_30’
68 30
Z .324058 .405072 .648115 .810144 .972173 X
X .130197 .162746 .260393 .325491 .390590 Z
22_
22 68_
68
Z .322248 .402810 .644496 .805620 .966744 X
X .132729 .165911 .265457 .331821 .398186 Z
22_30’
22 30 67_30’
67 30
Z .320435 .400544 .640870 .801088 .961305 X
X .135246 .169057 .270492 .338114 .405737 Z
23_
23 67_
67
Z .318619 .398274 .637238 .796548 .955857 X
X .137749 .172186 .275497 .344371 .413246 Z
23_30’
23 30 66_30’
66 30
Z .316800 .396000 .633600 .792000 .950400 X
X .140237 .175296 .280474 .350592 .420711 Z
24_
24 66_
66
Z .314977 .393722 .629955 .787443 .944932 X
X .142711 .178389 .285423 .356778 .428134 Z
24_30’
24 30 65_30’
65 30
Z .313151 .391439 .626303 .782879 .939454 X
X .145172 .181465 .290344 .362930 .435516 Z
25_
25 65_
65
Z .311322 .389153 .622644 .778305 .933966 X
X .147619 .184523 .295238 .369047 .442856 Z
25_30’
25 30 64_30’
64 30
Z .309489 .386862 .618978 .773723 .928468 X
X .150052 .187565 .300105 .375131 .450157 Z
26_
26 64_
64
Z .307653 .384566 .615305 .769132 .922958 X
X .152472 .190591 .304945 .381181 .457417 Z
26_30’
26 30 63_30’
63 30
Z .305813 .382266 .611625 .764531 .917438 X
X .154880 .193600 .309759 .387199 .464639 Z
27_
27 63_
63
Z .303968 .379961 .607937 .759921 .911905 X
X .157274 .196593 .314548 .393185 .471822 Z
27_30’
27 30 62_30’
62 30
Z .302121 .377651 .604241 .755302 .906362 X
X .159656 .199570 .319312 .399139 .478967 Z
28_
28 62_
62
Z .300269 .375336 .600538 .750672 .900806 X
X .162025 .202531 .324050 .405063 .486075 Z
28_30’
28 30 61_30’
61 30
Z .298413 .373016 .596826 .746032 .895239 X
X .164382 .205477 .328764 .410955 .493146 Z
29_
29 61_
61
Z .296553 .370691 .593106 .741382 .889659 X
X .166727 .208409 .333454 .416817 .500181 Z
29_30’
29 30 60_30’
60 30
Z .294689 .368361 .589378 .736722 .884066 X
θ Nose R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 Nose R θ

X .169060 .211325 .338120 .422650 .507180 Z
30_
30 60_
60
Z .292820 .366025 .585641 .732051 .878461 X
X .171381 .214226 .342762 .428453 .514143 Z
30_30’
30 30 59_30’
59 30
Z .290947 .363684 .581895 .727369 .872842 X
X .173691 .217114 .347382 .434227 .521073 Z
31_
31 59_
59
Z .289070 .361338 .578140 .722675 .867211 X
X .175989 .219987 .351978 .439973 .527968 Z
31_30’
31 30 58_30’
58 30
Z .287188 .358985 .574377 .717971 .861565 X
X .178276 .222845 .356553 .445691 .534829 Z
32_
32 58_
58
Z .285302 .356627 .570604 .713255 .855906 X
X .180552 .225691 .361105 .451381 .541657 Z
32_30’
32 30 57_30’
57 30
Z .283411 .354263 .566821 .708527 .850232 X
X .182818 .228522 .365635 .457044 .548453 Z
33_
33 57_
57
Z .281515 .351893 .563029 .703787 .844544 X
X .185072 .231340 .370144 .462681 .555217 Z
33_30’
33 30 56_30’
56 30
Z .279614 .349517 .559227 .699034 .838841 X
X .187316 .234145 .374632 .468291 .561949 Z
34_
34 56_
56
Z .277708 .347135 .555415 .694269 .833123 X
X .189550 .236937 .379100 .473875 .568649 Z
34_30’
34 30 55_30’
55 30
Z .275797 .344746 .551593 .689492 .827390 X
X .191733 .239716 .383546 .479433 .575320 Z
35_
35 55_
55
Z .273880 .342351 .547761 .684701 .821641 X
X .193986 .242483 .387973 .484966 .581959 Z
35_30’
35 30 54_30’
54 30
Z .271959 .339949 .543918 .679897 .815877 X
X .196190 .245237 .392380 .490475 .588569 Z
36_
36 54_
54
Z .270032 .337540 .540064 .675080 .810096 X
X .198383 .247979 .396767 .495959 .595150 Z
36_30’
36 30 53_30’
53 30
Z .268100 .335125 .536200 .670249 .804299 X
X .200567 .250709 .401135 .501418 .601702 Z
37_
37 53_
53
Z .266162 .332702 .532324 .665405 .798486 X
X .202742 .253427 .405484 .506855 .608225 Z
37_30’
37 30 52_30’
52 30
Z .264218 .330273 .528437 .660546 .792655 X
X .204907 .256134 .409814 .512267 .614721 Z
38_
38 52_
52
Z .262269 .327836 .524538 .655672 .786807 X
X .207063 .258829 .414126 .517657 .621189 Z
38_30’
38 30 51_30’
51 30
Z .260314 .325392 .520627 .650784 .780941 X
X .209210 .261512 .418420 .523024 .627629 Z
39_
39 51_
51
Z .258353 .322941 .516705 .645881 .775058 X
X .211348 .264185 .422696 .528369 .634043 Z
39_30’
39 30 50_30’
50 30
Z .256385 .320482 .512771 .640963 .769156 X
θ Nose R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 Nose R θ

X .213477 .266846 .426954 .533692 .640431 Z
40_
40 50_
50
Z .254412 .318015 .508824 .636030 .763236 X
X .215597 .269497 .431195 .538994 .646792 Z
40_30’
40 30 49_30’
49 30
Z .252432 .315540 .504864 .631081 .757297 X
X .217709 .272137 .435419 .544274 .653128 Z
41_
41 49_
49
Z .250446 .313058 .500892 .626115 .751338 X
X .219813 .274766 .439626 .549533 .659439 Z
41_30’
41 30 48_30’
48 30
Z .248454 .310567 .496907 .621134 .745361 X
X .221909 .277386 .443817 .554771 .665726 Z
42_
42 48_
48
Z .246454 .308068 .492909 .616136 .739363 X
X .223996 .279995 .447992 .559989 .671987 Z
42_30’
42 30 47_30’
47 30
Z .244449 .305561 .488897 .611121 .733346 X
X .226075 .282594 .452150 .565188 .678225 Z
43_
43 47_
47
Z .242436 .303045 .484872 .606090 .727307 X
X .228146 .285183 .456293 .570366 .684439 Z
43_30’
43 30 46_30’
46 30
Z .240416 .300520 .480832 .601040 .721249 X
X .230210 .287763 .460420 .575525 .690630 Z
44_
44 46_
46
Z .238390 .297987 .476779 .595974 .715169 X
X .232266 .290333 .464532 .580665 .696798 Z
44_30’
44 30 45_30’
45 30
Z .236356 .295445 .472711 .590889 .709067 X
X .234315 .292893 .468629 .585786 .702944 Z
45_
45 45_
45
Z .234315 .292893 .468629 .585786 .702944 X
3. Offset in Circular Interpolation
When cutting an arc, it is possible to cut the arc as specified on a drawing by offsetting the
tool position.
3.1 Convex Arc

By specifying the arc, shown by the dotted lines, it
is possible to cut an arc as specified on the
drawing.
Arc specified on a drawing
Arc to be programmed Programmed arc radius (R)
= Radius (r) of the arc specified on the drawing
+ Tool nose radius (Rn)
Workpiece
R = r + Rn
O Rn
Rn
O’
Rn
3.2 Concave Arc

Rn By specifying the arc, shown by the dotted lines, it
is possible to cut an arc as specified on the
O Rn
drawing.
r O’
Programmed arc radius (R)
R = r – Rn
= Radius (r) of the arc specified on the drawing
– Tool nose radius (Rn)
Arc specified
on a drawing Rn
Arc to be programmed
r: Arc radius (specified on drawing) O: Arc center (specified on drawing)

Rn: Tool nose radius O’: Arc center (for programmed arc)
3.3 Calculating the Coordinate Values to be Specified in a Program

The coordinate values to be specified in a program to offset for the tool nose radius are
explained below.
1) Calculating the required coordinate values directly
Arc center (on drawing)
Arc center (on program)
Programmed point
When calculating the required coordinate values, assume the shape shown by the
dotted lines. The center of the arc specified on a drawing and the center of the arc to
be programmed will differ from each other.
2) Calculating the required coordinate values after calculating the tool nose center
Arc center (on drawing)

Calculated value
Tool nose center
Programmed point
In this method, the coordinate values of the tool nose center is calculated first. After
that, the programmed points are calculated by adding or subtracting the tool nose
radius to, or from, the calculated center of the arc.
In the following examples, the tool nose center is calculated using method 2).
3.4 Example Program
O.D. cutting including arcs
11
1
10
9 8
6 5
7
4
R1.5
3
25 2
∅ 60
∅ 40
∅ 20
R2
R1 R5
20
40
<Tool nose is disregarded> <Tool nose radius = 0.8 mm>

O0001; O0001;
N1; N1;
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03; G96 S150 M03;
X18.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X18.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G01 Z0 F1.0;
X36.0 F0.25; . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X34.4 F0.25;
G03 X40.0 Z–2.0 R2.0; . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G03 X40.0 Z–2.8 R2.8;
G01 Z–15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G01 Z–15.8;
G02 X50.0 Z–20.0 R5.0; . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G02 X48.4 Z–20.0 R4.2;
G01 X58.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G01 X56.4;
G03 X60.0 Z–21.0 R1.0; . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G03 X60.0 Z–21.8 R1.8;
G01 Z–25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G01 Z–25.0;
G00 X100.0 Z50.0; . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G00 X100.0 Z50.0;
...
...
Underlined “____” coordinate values include offset data.

Points 4 and 5 Points 6 and 7

20
5 G03
5’ 7’
7
R2 R5
R R
Rn = 0.8
∅ 40
4’
G02
4 6 6’
Z0
∅ 40
A convex arc is cut. A concave arc is cut.
The X and Z coordinate values are calculated As shown on the drawing,
for points 4 and 5 . For a quarter circle, X As in the explanation for points 4 and 5 , the
and Z coordinate values can be calculated coordinate values of points 6 and 7 are
easily. calculated similarly.
As shown on the drawing, X coordinate value of point 6 :
Z coordinate value of point 4 : X = 40.0 (40 mm dia.)
Z = 0 (end face to be finished), Z coordinate value of point 7 :
X coordinate value of point 5 : Z = –20.0
X = 40.0 (40 mm dia.). Next,
Next, Z coordinate value of point 6 :
X coordinate value of point 4 : ,
,
Z = –|Z coordinate value of point 7 |
X = Diameter of point 5
– (Arc radius – Tool nose radius Rn)
– 2 (Arc radius = –|20| + (5.0 – 0.8)
+ Tool nose radius Rn) = –15.8
= 40.0 – 2(2.0 + 0.8) = (40.0 – 5.6)
The pair of a vertical bar (| |) is the
= 34.4
mathematical symbols indicating an
Z coordinate value of point 5 : absolute value.
Z = – (Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn) X coordinate value of point 7 :
= – (2.0 + 0.8) ,
X = Diameter of point 6
= – 2.8
+ 2(Arc radius – Tool nose radius Rn)
Radius (R) to be used in a program is: = 40.0 + 2(5.0 – 0.8)
R = Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn = 48.4
= 2.0 + 0.8 Radius (R) to be used in a program is:
= 2.8
R = Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn
= 5.0 – 0.8
= 4.2
4. Programming for a Sample Workpiece
The part programs for the facing, O.D. finishing, and I.D. finishing are written for the
sample workpiece illustrated below.
Compare the program with the one created in 27., “Summary” of Chapter C and
5.3, “Programming for a Sample Workpiece” of Chapter E.
<Drawing>
41
25
3 5
C1
C1.5
C0.5 C1
C1
15° R2
C1.5
69
56
32
44
54
∅
M60 P=2.0
Finishing is unless otherwise specified.

O.D. 70
Dimensions
Di i I.D. 30
(mm)
Length 43
<Part programs for facing, O.D. finishing and I.D. finishing>

10
8 2
7 5
9 1
6
4
23
22 21
24
3
25
26
27
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
N3(FIN. OF. OUT.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for finish facing and O.D. finishing
(tool nose radius: 0.4)
rapid traverse rate
2 G01 Z0 F1.0;
3 X30.0 F0.15;
4 G00 X49.54 W1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning; tool nose radius is taken into
consideration.
5 G01 X54.0 Z–1.23; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to the specified position; tool nose radius is
taken into consideration.
6 Z–5.0;
7 X56.34; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to the specified position; tool nose radius is
8 X59.8 Z–6.73; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to the specified position; tool nose radius is
9 Z–23.0 F0.2;
10 G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
rapid traverse rate
N4(FIN. OF. IN.); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for I.D. finishing (tool nose radius :
0.4)
operation at 2000 min-1
21 X47.869 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of only X-axis; tool nose radius is taken
into consideration.
22 G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
23 Z0 F0.2;
24 G02 X43.233 Z–1.779 R2.4 F0.07;
Circular cutting in the clockwise direction in
2.4 mm radius; tool nose radius is taken into
consideration.
25 G01 X32.0 Z–22.74; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to the specified position; tool nose radius is
26 Z–41.0 F0.1;
27 G00 U–1.0 Z20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Escape of cutting tool from the workpiece to
execute I.D. cutting in the next process (cancel
mode)
rapid traverse rate
1 Underlined “____” coordinate values include offset data.
2 Commands in ( ) identified by “*” are used only for the machine equipped
with a transmission.
<O.D. finishing>
The programmed points 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 and 8 in the part program are explained
below. Rn0.4
Zc
∅ 54
C1
Rn0.4
Xc
A
1.0
1) Point A is taken at a point 1 mm away from the Z position where facing is carried out.
Calculate the X coordinate value of point A .
X = D dia. – 2 (C + Xc + a) D dia. : Outside diameter
= 54.0 – 2 (1.0 + 0.23 + 1.0) C : Chamfer size
= 49.54 Xc : Offset data in the X-axis
direction
a : Distance away from
workpiece
Therefore, the coordinate values of point A are: X49.54, W1.0(Z1.0)
2) Calculate the Z coordinate value of point B .

Z = – (C + Zc) C : Chamfer size
= – (1.0 + 0.23) = –1.23 Zc : Offset data in the Z-axis
X = 54.0 direction
Therefore, the coordinate values of point B are: X54.0 Z–1.23
Rn0.4
Zc
∅ 59.8
Rn0.4
1.5
Xc
D
Z–5.0
3) Point C is not influenced by the tool nose radius. Specify the coordinate values found
on the part drawing.
Therefore, the Z coordinate value of point C is: Z–5.0
4) Calculate the X coordinate value of point D .

X = D dia. – 2 (C + Xc) D dia. : Outside diameter
= 59.8 – 2 (1.5 + 0.23) C : Chamfer size
= 56.34 Xc : Offset data in the X-axis
direction
Therefore, the coordinate value of point D is: X56.34
5) Calculate the Z coordinate value of point E .

Z = – (5.0 + C + Zc) C : Chamfer size
= – (5.0 +1.5 + 0.23) = –6.73 Zc : Offset data in the Z-axis
X = 59.8 direction
Therefore, the coordinate values of point E are: X59.8, Z–6.73

<I.D. finishing>
The programmed points 23 , 24 and 25 in the part program are explained below.
Calculating the coordinate values for arc and taper:

Center of arc
X F
Z–2.0 R2
Rn0.4
G
J
∅ 44
15°
1) Calculate the X coordinate value of the center of arc R2.

R2 R2
O O
B 37.5° B
75°
H
H
105°
52.5°
A 52.5°
A
C C 75°
∅ 44
∅ 44
15° 15°
D D
1 Draw the line from the center O to point A.

Length H of side AB of a right angled triangle ∆ABO should be calculated. For this
calculation either ∠BOA or ∠BAO must first be calculated.
2 ∆ABO and ∆ACO are congruent.

Therefore,
∠AOB = 37.5_
∠OAB = 52.5_
3 Now, calculate length H.

H
tan37.5_ =
2
H=2 tan37.5 _ = 1.5346
The X coordinate value of the center of arc R2 can be calculated from “H”.
4 The X coordinate value of the center of arc R2 is calculated in the following manner:
X = 44.0 + 2 H (value “H” must be doubled because X coordinate values
are all expressed in diameter)
= 44.0 + 2 1.5346 = 47.069
Therefore, the coordinate values of the center of arc R2 are: X47.069, Z–2.0
5 Next, calculate the X coordinate value of point F .

X = 47.069 + 2 Rn
= 47.069 + 2 0.4 = 47.869 Rn: Tool nose radius
Z=0
Therefore, the coordinate values of point F are: X47.869, Z0
2) Calculate the coordinate values of the center F of tool nose.

Coordinate values of the center
X47.069 K
Z–2.0 O G
B
75°
I
2.4
1 Draw the line from F, the center of the tool nose, perpendicular to side BO. Take the
point of intersection as G.
2 In the right angled triangle ∆FGO, calculate length I and length K of side FG and side
GO, respectively.
Hypotenuse OF = Radius R (specified on the drawing) + Tool nose radius
= 2.0 + 0.4 = 2.4
I
sin75_= I = 2.4 sin75_= 2.318
2.4
K
cos75_= K = 2.4 cos75_= 0.621
2.4
3 Calculate the coordinate values of the center F of the tool nose.

X = 47.069 – 2 I
= 47.069 – 2 2.318 = 42.433
Z = – (2.0 – K)
= – (2.0 – 0.621) = –1.379
Therefore, the coordinate values of the center F of the tool nose are: X42.433,
Z–1.379
4 Calculate the coordinate values of point G .

X = 42.433 + 2 Rn
= 42.433 + 2 0.4 = 43.233 Rn: Tool nose radius
Z = – (1.379 + Rn)
= – (1.379 + 0.4) = –1.779
Therefore, the coordinate values of point G are: X43.233, Z–1.779

3) Calculate the coordinate values of point H .
A
Zc
6.0
H M 15°
∅ 44
D
∅ 32
L
1 The X coordinate value of point H is the inner diameter to be finished.

X = 32.0
2 Calculate length L.
6.0 (44.0 – 32.0)
tan15_ = 6.0 =
L 2
6.0
L= = 22.3923
tan15°
3 Find the offset data (Zc) for nose radius 0.4 mm at angle of 15_.
Zc = 0.3473 (to be found in the offset data table)
4 Calculate the Z coordinate value of point H .

Z = – (L + Zc)
= – (22.3923 + 0.3473) = –22.74
Therefore, the coordinate values of point H are: X32.0, Z–22.74

CHAPTER G
CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
This chapter describes the cutter radius offset function.
This function is mainly used for pocket cutting or contouring with an end mill.
Since there are a number of tool patterns which will be used for actual machining
and they will differ among users, it is not possible to explain all of the tool patterns
in this manual. The explanation given in this chapter is concentrated on the basic
programming so that the readers will be able to acquire basic knowledge of the
cutter radius offset function.
For more details, please refer to the instruction manuals supplied by the NC
unit manufacturer.
CONTENTS
G : CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–1
2. Requirement for Using the Cutter Radius Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3
3. Technical Terms Used in the Explanation

of the Cutter Radius Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–4
3.1 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5
3.2 Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–6
3.3 Cancel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–8
4. General Cautions on the Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–9

4.1 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–9
4.2 Positive (+) and Negative (–) Designation
for Cutter Radius Offset Amount and Tool Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–11
4.3 Overcut in the Cutter Radius Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–11
5. Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–15

CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET G–1
1. General
The cutter radius offset function can be used only for models with the Y-axis
specification. This function cannot be used for other machine models.
Generally, when cutting a pocket or carrying out contouring operation using an end mill,
the cutter radius offset function is used to finish the workpiece in the shape specified in the
drawing.
How the shape in Fig. 1 is finished using the cutter radius offset function is briefly
explained below.
3 4 Specify the required shape to be finished in the
program:
1 ³ 2 ³ 3 ³ 4
Workpiece
1
Fig. 1
3 4 Since the center of a cutting tool moves along the
defined paths, the cutting tool moves along the
paths shown in Fig. 2 if the program is created
without using the cutter radius offset function.
2
The workpiece is finished to the shape indicated by
Workpiece broken line in Fig. 2, which is smaller than the
required shape indicated in Fig. 1 by the radius of
the cutting tool.
1
Fig. 2
Tool
To shift the tool paths from the programmed paths,
input the radius of the cutting tool as the cutter
3 4
radius offset data for the R column at the tool
geometry offset data setting screen.
2 If the cutter radius offset function is used, the tool

Workpiece paths are shifted outside from the programmed
paths by the input offset amount as shown in Fig. 3
to finish the required shape.
1 In this manner, by shifting the tool paths from the

Fig. 3
programmed paths by using the cutter radius offset
function, it is not necessary to obtain the
coordinate values using complicated calculation to
generate the tool paths to finish the workpiece to
the required shape.
G–2 CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
COMMAND
1. Cutter radius offset in the XY plane
G17 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Y_ F_ ;

G40 G01(G00) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
2. Cutter radius offset in the YZ plane
G19 G01(G00) G41(G42) Y_ Z_ F_ ;

G40 G01(G00) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
D G17, G19 . . . . . . Selects the plane where cutter radius offset is executed.
D G01(G00) . . . . . . Selects the interpolation mode in which the cutter radius
offset function is executed.
G00 . . . . . . . . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . . . . . . . . Cutting feed
D G41 . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset mode <G41>
(offset to the left). Workpiece
The tool paths are
generated by shifting the Tool advancing direction

left in reference to the tool
D G42 . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius
offset mode (offset to the
right).
Workpiece
The tool paths are generated by shifting the <G42>
programmed paths to the right in reference to the tool
advancing direction by the specified offset amount.
D G40 . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels the cutter radius offset mode.
D X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
D I, J, K . . . . . . . . . . The direction of the workpiece shape defined in the
following block. The I, J, and K commands are
specified in incremental values.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate.
The programmer must thoroughly understand the nature of the G41 and G42
functions as well as the tool paths to be generated. If the G41 and G42
commands are used improperly, the cutting tool might be fed into or hit against
the workpiece to be machined to cause breakage of the cutting tool or defective
machining.
2. Requirement for Using the Cutter Radius Offset Function
To use the cutter radius offset function (G40, G41, or G42), how the cutter radius offset
data is input must be understood correctly.
<Input of cutter radius offset amount>
End mill and other

R tools
R
Cutter radius offset amount (Cutter radius value)
To use the cutter radius offset function (G41, G42), it is necessary to set the tool radius for
the R column at the tool geometry offset data setting screen.
Set the cutter radius corresponding to the offset number to be specified in T code.
3. Technical Terms Used in the Explanation of the Cutter Radius Offset

Function
The technical terms special to the cutter radius offset function and items to be observed
when using the cutter radius offset function are explained below.
Term Description
Start-up The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified
In the start-up operation, the center of the cutting tool is offset at the
stopped position in right angle to the movement in the next block by
its radius.
Offset mode The mode in which the tool nose radius offset function is valid after
the start-up
Cancel mode The state in which the tool nose radius offset function is canceled by
executing G40
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that precedes
the G40 block. The center of the cutting tool is positioned right
angles to the tool path programmed in the preceding block.
Offset mode
Offset Workpiece Offset

mode mode
Start-up Offset mode

Cancel mode
...
G17 G41(G42) G00 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . Start-up

In the case of the operation as shown in the
illustration above, offset should be made to
the left and, therefore, the G41 command
should be used.
G01 X_ Y_ F_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset mode
X_ Y_ ;
G40 G00 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel mode
...
3.1 Start-up
The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified is called the start-up block.
In the start-up operation, the center of the cutting tool is offset at the stopped position in
right angle to the movement in the next block by its radius.
+Y
Start-up
(This distance must be larger
than the cutter radius.)
3 2 Start point of the next block

(X80.0, Y50.0)
50
+X
This distance must be larger

45 80 than the cutter radius.
...
G00 X100.0 Y100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G17 G42 X80.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G01 X–45.0 F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
...
When specifying the start-up, the following conditions must be satisfied.

– The start-up block must include an axis movement command; the called
distance must be larger than the offset amount (radius of a tool).
– The start-up must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion) mode.
Do not specify the start-up in the G02 or G03 mode. If the start-up is specified
in such a mode, an alarm is generated, the corresponding alarm message
(No. 034) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops operating.
3.2 Offset Mode

The mode in which the cutter radius offset function is valid, after the start-up, is called the
offset mode.
1) Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is not changed
The tool moves along the workpiece shape with its periphery in contact with the
shape.
5 (X25.0, Y55.0) 4
(X50.0, Y55.0)
R10.0
(X70.0, Y45.0)
2 (X70.0, Y20.0) 1 (X100.0, Y20.0)

...
G17 G42 G00 X100.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (Start-up)

G01 X70.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G03 X50.0 Y55.0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Offset mode

G01 X25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
...
1 At the start-up and in the offset mode, two blocks of commands are buffered.
In the offset mode, blocks not containing an axis movement command, a block
only with an M command or G04 dwell block, for example, must not be
specified continuously. A block containing 0 axis movement is not allowed,
either. If such blocks are specified, it will cause excessive or insufficient cutting
since two blocks of commands cannot be buffered. It will also cause overload
to the tool and the tool might be damaged.
2 If an attempt is made to cut the inside of an arc whose radius is smaller than
the radius of the tool or to cut a groove whose width is smaller than the radius
of the tool, an alarm message is displayed to avoid excessive cutting. If this
occurs while the program is executed in the single block mode, excessive
cutting occurs to produce a defective workpiece since the program is executed
to the end of the block causing the alarm before it stops.
3 Do not change the plane with G17 or G19 in the offset mode.
If changed, an alarm occurs, and an alarm message (No. 037) is displayed on
the screen and the machine stops operating.
2) Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is changed
If the direction of offset changes in a program, as illustrated below, i.e., if the G code
calling the cutter offset function changes between G41 and G42, the periphery will
come into contact with the workpiece shape that is defined in the two consecutive
blocks where the G code changes from G41 to G42, or vice versa.
2
1
(X70.0, Y40.0)
...
G17 G41 X70.0 Y60.0;

Y40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G42 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
...
Changing the G code mode between G41 and G42 cannot be specified in the
start-up and the next block.
3.3 Cancel Mode

The G40 command, specified in the offset mode, cancels the cutter radius offset function.
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that precedes the G40 block. The
center of the cutting tool lies at right angles to the tool path programmed in the preceding
block.
(X60.0, Y50.0) 1 (X100.0, Y50.0)
Cancel mode
(X40.0, Y20.0)
2
...
G17 (G41) X100.0 Y50.0;

X60.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G40 G00 X40.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (Cancel mode)

...
In the cancel mode, the following items must be carefully attended to:
– The cutter radius offset function is canceled by pressing the (RESET) key RESET
on the operation panel in addition to the execution of the G40 command.

– The cancel command must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion)
mode.
Do not specify the cancel command in the G02 or G03 mode. If the cancel
command is specified in such a mode, an alarm occurs, the corresponding
alarm message (No. 034) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops
operating.
4. General Cautions on the Offset Function
4.1 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting

If the workpiece wall lies in a direction independent of the direction of tool motion specified
by the commands in the G40 block:
Specify the workpiece wall’s direction (workpiece shape) with vectors (I, J). Use
incremental values for I and J commands. Note that value I must be specified in a radial
value.
The following gives an explanation assuming that the cutter radius offset function is
used in the XY plane (G17). When executing the cutter radius offset function in the
YZ plane (G19), specify the direction of wall (workpiece shape) using vector (J, K).
Wall
I, J G40
(100, 30)
(G42) Actual tool motion commands
+J 5 G40 G00 X100.0 Y30.0 I–4.0 J5.0;
+I The workpiece is cut until the cutter periphery

comes into contact with the wall.
1 The workpiece is cut until the cutter periphery comes into contact with the wall.
The I and J commands, used to define the vectors that represent the
workpiece wall direction, should be specified in the G40 block that appears first
after entry into the offset mode.
D Valid D Invalid
G42 X_ Y_ ; G42 X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
... ... ...
Offset mode
... ... ... ... ... ...
Offset mode G40 X_ Y_ ;

... ... ...
Cancel mode
G40 G00 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ; G40 G00 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ;

Ignored
2 If “I_ J_” is not specified in the G40 block, the offset mode cancel point is set at
the end point of the preceding block; at this end point, the center of the tool lies
at right angles to the tool path generated by the commands in the preceding
block. This causes an overcut on the wall.
G40
G40 G00 X_ Y_ ;
(G42)
Overcuts occur
Calculating the direction of wall (workpiece shape)
(G40)
(G42)
60_
+Y
40
50
35
+X
B 1 Value “J” is indicated below, based on the

30_ illustration on the left.
J = 15 J = 15
60_
Because it is measured in the positive
C A direction of Y, the designation should be
“J15.0”.
I 40
50
35
Next, value “I” is calculated as:
I = AC = 15 tan30_ = 8.660
Because it is measured in the negative

direction on the X-axis, the designation should
be “I–8.66”.
30_ 2 Since I and J commands are used to define
the direction of the wall, the ratio between the
J=C A sides of a triangle may be used instead of
calculating actual lengths.
60_
The ratio of three sides of the triangle given
I=B
on the left is known as
A:B:C = 2:1: 3 (= 1.73)
Therefore, the designation should be “I–1.0

J1.73”.
I and J commands may be specified in either method as described above.

...
G01 X–40.0;
G40 G00 X–10.0 Y100.0 I–8.66 J15.0;
°
(I–1.0 J1.73)
Interchangeable
4.2 Positive (+) and Negative (–) Designation for Cutter Radius Offset
Amount and Tool Paths
Generally, a program is created assuming that the cutter radius offset amount is set in a
positive value.
If an offset amount is set in a negative value, tool paths are generated as if G41 and G42
are entirely exchanged with each other. The paths having been generated outside the
programmed profile will be generated inside the profile and those having been generated
inside the programmed profile will be generated outside the profile.
If a negative value is set for the offset amount while the tool paths as shown in Fig. 1 are
specified in a program, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 2.
Conversely, if a negative value is set for the offset amount when the tool paths shown in
Fig. 2 are specified in a program, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
4.3 Overcut in the Cutter Radius Offset Mode

1) Cutting the inside of arc whose radius is smaller than the cutter radius
If the specified arc radius is smaller than the cutter radius, offsetting inside the arc
causes overcut.
The alarm message is displayed on the screen just after the start of the block which
precedes the block containing the arc command, and the machine stops.
If a single block function is called during the execution of the preceding block, the
Tool center path
Machine stops due to the alarm
Programmed
tool path Alarm-stop in a single
block stop operation
Overcuts occur if the axes

are moved as programmed
2) Cutting a groove whose width is narrower than the cutter radius

If the tool path is generated in the direction opposite to the programmed path due to
offsetting, it causes overcut.
The alarm message is displayed on the screen just after the start of the block which
precedes such a block, and the machine stops.
If the single block function is called during the execution of the preceding block, the
Alarm/stop point in a single

block stop operation Tool center path
Machine stops
due to
the alarm Programmed tool path
Overcuts occur if the

axes move as programmed
3) Cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than the cutter radius
The tool path to be generated in ordinary offset processing might be reversed at the
stepped portion.
In such a case, the first vector is ignored and the tool path is generated for a second
vector that will move along a straight line.
Although the operation is continued without causing an alarm, undercut portion is left
in the workpiece.
Tool motion along a straight line
Tool center path
Programmed tool path

Arc
Undercut portion
4) No X- and Y-axis movement is specified in more than two blocks

When the XY plane is selected, for example, the cutter radius offset function is valid
only for the X- and Y-axes.
The cutter radius offset function is valid only for the Y- and Z-axes in the YZ plane.
If there are two or more blocks, which contains neither X- nor Y-axis movement
commands, given in succession, overcut may occur since buffering is not possible.
...
(G42 mode)
X30.0 Y35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Y55.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 2
Offset is made correctly because two
(X10.0, Y55.0) (X30.0, Y55.0)
blocks of commands can be buffered
1
(X30.0 Y35.0)
...
(G42 mode)
Overcut X30.0 Y35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Y55.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
M_ ; No X- or Y-axis movement
3 2 commands in two or more
Z–_ ; blocks
(X10.0, Y55.0) (X30.0, Y55.0)
X10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
(X30.0, Y35.0)
Overcuts occur as illustrated above. This is because the center of the tool is positioned,
when the preceding block 2 is executed, at the right angle to the tool path called by the
commands in this block.
Pay attention when a sub-program is called from a main program.
Main program
...
G17 G41 G01 X_ Y_ ;

M98 P1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
...
Sub-program (O0001)
O0001; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X_Y_ ;
X_Y_ ;
...
M99;
By the call of a sub-program from a main program, two blocks 1 and 2 are
executed in succession; these blocks do not contain X- or Y-axis movement
commands.
Therefore, the program should be created in the following manner.
Main program
...
X_ Y_ ;
M98 P1;
...
Sub-program (O0001)
O0001;
G17 G41 G01 X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
...
G40 X_ Y_ ;
M99;
5. Example Program
An example of program where the cutter radius offset function (G40, G41, G42) is used is
shown below.
Use this program for your reference when creating a program.
Programming using G40, G41, and G42
To carry out accurate circle cutting (I.D.)
The example program is created for cutting the I.D. of the circle shown below using a
10 mm diameter end mill.
When cutting the I.D. of a circle, approach is generally made along an arc ( 3 ³ 4 , in this
example) to the cutting start point D. After the completion of circle cutting, escape from
the cut circle is made along an arc ( 4 ³ 5 ), in this example.
This approach and escape are necessary to avoid an overcut.
3
4
2 r = 10
6 5
1 45°
X10.0, Y10.0
R15
<Machining sequence>
1 ³ 2 ³ 3 ³ 4 ³ (circle cutting) ³ 4 ³ 5 ³ 6
<Reason of setting of r = 10>
Arcs used for approach ( 3 ³ 4 ) and escape ( 4 ³ 5 ) must satisfy the following
conditions.
Cutter radius < r (approach/escape circle radius) < R (radius of circle to be machined)
5 < r < 15
From the requirement indicated above, r is determined to be “20”.
(r = 10)
<Calculating the coordinate values of points , , , , and >

4
15 sin45° 15
= 10.607
15 – 10 = 5 sin45° 5
= 3.536
45° 45°
1 1
(X10.0, Y10.0) cos45° 5 (X10.0, Y10.0) cos45° 15
= 3.536 = 10.607
Point 2 , 6 X = 10.0 + (3.536 2) = 17.072

Y = 10.0 + 3.536 = 13.536
Point 3 X = 17.072 (X coordinate value of point 2 )

Y = 13.536 + r
= 13.536 + 10 = 23.536
Point 4 X = 10.0 + (10.607 2) = 31.214

Y = 10.0 + 10.607 = 20.607
Point 5 X = 17.072 + (r 2)
= 17.072 + (10 2) = 37.072
Y = 13.536 (Y coordinate value of point 2 )
3
4
2 r = 10
6 5
1 45°
X10.0, Y10.0
R15
O0001;
N1;
G98;
M45;
(G28 U0 W0;)
G28 H0;
(M321;)
G00 T0101;
G97 S500 M13;
G00 X10.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 Z–_ F100;

1) G17 X17.072 Y13.536; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2) G42 Y23.536; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3) G02 X31.214 Y20.607 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4) I–21.214 J–10.607; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Full circle)

5) X37.072 Y13.536 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6) G40 G01 X17.072; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G00 X10.0 Y10.0;

Z20.0;
(G28 U0 W0;)
M05;
(M320;)
M01;
...
Commands in ( ) should be specified only for the Y-axis specification TL series

machines.
3
1) Moving at point 2 at feedrate of 100 mm/min
2) 3 Start-up
D G42 . . . . . . Offset to the right in reference
to the tool advancing direction
3
3) 3 ³ 4
Approach along an arc to cut a circle

4
4) Full circle
Execute cutting of a circle
5) 4 ³ 5
Escape from a circle along an arc

4
6) 6 Cancel mode
In the block just preceding the cancel mode
block, positioning at the end point 5 is made
at a position located right angle to the tool
6 5
path in that block. After that, positioning is
made at (X17.072, Y13.536).
CHAPTER H
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
This chapter describes the multiple repetitive cycles.
Using a multiple repetitive cycle, roughing processes that require several blocks of
commands can be defined by a single block of commands preceded by a G code calling a
multiple repetitive cycle, and blocks that define the finished shape. The tool paths for
rough cutting cycles are automatically determined.
When specifying a multiple repetitive cycle, standard format and F15 format are
used. If the command format differs between standard format and F15 format, the
difference is explained in the related G code items. Pay sufficient care to the
difference when creating a program.
For details, refer to the instruction manuals provided by the NC manufacturer.
CONTENTS
H : MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–1
2. G71 O.D./I.D. Rough Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–4
3. G72 Rough Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–9
4. G73 Closed-loop Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–14
5. Cautions on Using the G71, G72, and G73 Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–18
6. G70 Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–21
7. G74 Face Cut-off, Grooving Cycle and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . H–23
8. G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-off Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–27
9. G76 Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–31

9.1 Infeed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–34
9.2 Cautions on the G76 Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . H–34
9.3 The Relationship between Depth of Cut for the First Path
and the Number of Thread Cutting Paths to be Generated
(Fixed Metal Removal Rate and Straight Feed along
the Thread Face) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–36
9.3.1 Calculating the Number of Thread Cutting Paths
when the Depth of Cut for the First Path is Given . . . H–36
9.3.2 Calculating the Depth of Cut
for the First Path when the Number
of Thread Cutting Paths is Given . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–36
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES H–1
1. General
The multiple repetitive cycles are provided to simplify programming for O.D. and I.D. rough
cutting and finishing processes, etc.
One of the capabilities the multiple repetitive cycle function supports is the automatic
generation of the rough cutting paths when the finish shape is defined.
The table below lists the multiple repetitive cycles:
G71 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle

(Cutting along the Z-axis, infeed along the X-axis)
In O.D./I.D. cutting operation, when the finish shape is defined in
the program, the workpiece is machined to the shape which
includes a finishing allowance on the defined shape.
The tool paths used for rough cutting are automatically
determined.
G72 Rough facing cycle
(Cutting along the X-axis, infeed along the Z-axis)
In facing operation, when the finish shape is defined in the
program, the workpiece is machined to the shape which includes
a finishing allowance on the defined shape.
The tool paths used for rough cutting are automatically
determined.
G73 Closed-loop cutting cycle
The workpiece is machined to the defined shape by executing
the fixed pattern repeatedly.
G70 Finishing cycle

After completing a rough cutting cycle for O.D., I.D., or end face,
called by the G71, G72, or G73 command, the shape is finished
by the G70 cycle.
G74 Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle, deep hole drilling cycle
Infeed is made along the Z-axis intermittently.
If a command for the depth of cut along the X-axis is omitted, the
deep hole drilling cycle is called.
Intermittent feed
G75 O.D./I.D. grooving cycle, O.D. cut-off cycle

Infeed is made along the X-axis intermittently.
If a command for the depth of cut along the Z-axis direction is
omitted, the O.D. cut-off cycle is called.
Intermittent feed
G76 Multiple thread cutting cycle

The thread cutting pattern is repeated by gradually infeeding the
cutting tool.
H–2 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
To explain how the multiple repetitive cycle function simplifies programming, the rough
cutting cycle for the shape illustrated below is programmed with and without using the G71
cycle.
In the programming, tool nose radius is assumed to be “0”.
Depth of cut per pass: 4 mm (in diameter)

Finishing allowance (X): 0.3 mm (in diameter)
Finishing allowance (Z): 0.1 mm
60 Cutting allowance
∅ 100
65
∅ 90
∅ 80
<Programming without using <Programming using the multiple repetitive

the multiple repetitive cycle> cycle (G71)>
O0001; O0001;
...
...
G00 X96.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . 1 G00 X100.0 Z20.0 M08; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G01 Z2.0 F2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 2 G01 Z2.0 F2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Z–64.9 F0.3; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 G71 U2.0 R0.5;

1)
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 4 G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 D2.0 F0.3;
X92.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2) N100 G00 X80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G01 Z–64.9; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 G01 Z–60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 7 X90.0 Z–65.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
X88.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3) N200 X102.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G01 Z–63.9; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; . . . . . . . . . . .

...
10
X84.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1) Executes the O.D. rough cutting cycle (G71).

G01 Z–61.9; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 G71 . . . . Calls the O.D. rough cutting cycle.
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 13 U2.0 . . . . Specifies the depth of cut (in radius).
X60.3; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 R0.5 . . . . Specifies the relief amount (in radius).
G01 Z–60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 P100 . . . Specifies the sequence number of the
first block of the blocks that define the
X70.0 Z–64.9; . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
finish shape of the workpiece.
X102.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Q200 . . . Specifies the sequence number of the
G00 U1.0 Z10.0 M09; . . . . . 18 last block of the blocks that define the
X200.0 Z100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 19 finish shape of the workpiece.
U0.3 . . . . Specifies the finishing allowance in
...
the X-axis direction (in diameter).

W0.1 . . . Specifies the finishing allowance in
the Z-axis direction.
F0.3 . . . . Specifies the feedrate.
2) to 3)
The blocks from sequence number N100 to N200
define the finish shape.
19
0.1 18 0.1 7
1
1 2
4 6
2
17
3 7 5
6 10 8
9 13 11
5
14
16 12
15
∅ 100
4 3
∅ 100
0.3 0.3
∅ 90
∅ 80
∅ 90
∅ 80
60 60
(in diameter) (in diameter)
65 65
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
By specifying the data for finishing such as finishing
allowance and depth of cut in the G71 block, the cycles as
indicated above are executed by the commands written in
the seven lines of the program ( 1 to 7 ).
From the comparison of the two programs shown above, it is known that the
programming is simplified by using the multiple repetitive cycle function.
Since programming is simplified, programming error can be reduced accordingly.
2. G71 O.D./I.D. Rough Cutting Cycle
45° C The O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle is used for

A
B U(1) workpieces which have monotonously varying
R
shapes both in the X- and Z-axis directions.
When the finish shape (A ³ A’ ³ B) is defined in a

X program, rough cutting paths are automatically
U(2)/2 generated leaving allowance of U/2 and W for
A’
Z W finishing on the workpiece circumference and end
Rapid traverse face, respectively. The depth of cut for rough
Cutting feed cutting cycle is D.
Finishing allowance
(R: Relief amount, to be set for
Generally, a finishing cycle called by the G70
parameter No. 5133) command is used to finish the workpiece after
completing the G71 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle.
COMMAND
G71 U(1) R_ ;
G71 P_ Q_ U(2) W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
2. F15 format
G71 P_ Q_ U(2) W_ I_ K_ D_ F_ S_ T_ ;
D G71 . . . . . . . . . Calls the O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle.
D U(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies depth of cut (X-axis direction)
(unsigned, in radius).
Since this command is modal, it remains valid until it
is replaced with the value specified next. This value
can also be set for parameter No. 5132; the value
set for the parameter is changed according to the
value specified in the program.
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the relief amount (in radius).
D U(2) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the finishing
allowance in the X-axis direction (in diameter).
D W . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the finishing
allowance in the Z-axis direction.
D I . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of rough finishing

allowance in the X-axis direction (in radius).
The command is disregarded even if specified.
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of rough finishing

D D . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the depth of cut (X-axis direction)

(unsigned, in radius).
Input of a decimal point is not allowed.
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate to be adopted for the G71 cycle.

D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed control to be adopted for the G71
cycle.
(m/min).
(min–1).
D T . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a tool number and the tool offset number in a four
digit number.
1 If no F, S, or T command is specified, the command which has been specified
preceding the G71 block is valid.
2 In the first block of the blocks defining the finish shape, as specified by the P
command in the “G71 P_ Q_ ...;” block, take the following items into
consideration.
– Always specify either the G00 or G01 command. If neither G00 nor G01
command is specified, an alarm message (No. 065) is displayed on the
screen.
G00 . . . Infeed in the G71 cycle is made at a rapid traverse rate.
G01 . . . Infeed in the G71 cycle is made at a cutting feedrate.
3 The workpiece shape must be monotonously increasing or decreasing pattern

in the Z-axis directions as shown in the illustration below.
B Without the R1 command, the pattern to be

generated must monotonously increases or
decreases both in the X- and Z-axis
directions as illustrated on the left.
In this case, the first block of the blocks
used to define the finish shape must contain
X-axis direction
only either X(U) or Z(W) axis.
A’
Z-axis direction
G71 U2.0 R0.5;
G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
N100 G00 X(U)_;
...
Pocket Even if the finish shape is not a
monotonously increasing or decreasing
pattern, machining is possible if the number
of pockets included in the shape is 10 or
less.
both X(U) and Z(W) axes. Even if either of
them does not move in the first block, it is
necessary to specify U0 or W0. This
function is optional for the SL-25E.
G71 U2.0 R0.5;
G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
N100 G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
...
4 For O.D. rough cutting cycle, it is necessary to move the tool along the X-axis
to a point which is larger than the workpiece material diameter before
specifying the G71 command.
For I.D. rough cutting cycle, it is necessary to move the tool along the X-axis to
a point which is smaller than the workpiece material inside hole diameter
before specifying the G71 command.
To finish the shape illustrated below by using the G71 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle and the
G70 finishing cycle (Nose radius of finishing tool: 0.4 mm)
9 25
1
M60 P=2 5
8
C0.5 6
7
5 3
C1.5
4
2
C1
∅ 32
∅ 69
∅ 54
O0001;
N1 (ROUGH. OF OUT); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for face and O.D. rough cutting
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X25.0 F0.25;
G00 X70.0 Z1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the O.D. rough
cutting cycle (G71)
G71 U2.0 R0.5;
. . . Execution of the O.D. rough cutting cycle (G71)
G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
U2.0 . . . . Depth of cut: 2 mm (in radius)
R0.5 . . . . Relief amount: 0.5 mm
P100 . . . . The sequence number of the first
block of the blocks defining the finish
shape N100
Q200 . . . The sequence number of the last
block of the blocks defining the finish
shape N200
U0.3 . . . . Finishing allowance in the X-axis
direction: 0.3 mm (in diameter)
W0.1 . . . . Finishing allowance in the Z-axis
direction: 0.1 mm
F0.3 . . . . Feedrate: 0.3 mm/rev
N100 G00 X49.54; . . . . . . . . The blocks from N100 to N200 define the finish
G01 X54.0 Z–1.23 F0.15; shape including 2 to 9 .
Z–5.0; 1 The command values in these blocks
X56.34; are determined taking into
X59.8 Z–6.73; consideration the tool nose radius
Z–25.0; (0.4 mm) of the finishing tool.
X67.54; 2 The feedrate command “F0.15”
N200 X70.0 Z–26.23; specified in these blocks is ignored for
rough cutting cycle. Feedrate during
rough cutting cycle is F0.3
(0.3 mm/rev).
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
N2 (FIN. OF OUT); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for face and O.D. finishing

G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X70.0 Z1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the finishing
cycle (G70)
G70 P100 Q200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Execution of the finishing cycle (G70)
Finish cutting is executed for the shape defined by
the blocks from N100 to N200.
Cutting conditions for finishing:
Cutting speed . . . S200 (200 m/min)
Feedrate . . . . . . . . F0.15 (0.15 mm/rev)
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
Tool paths for rough cutting cycle
U/2
1 (X70.0, Z1.0)
Start from the point
shifted by U/2, W
3. G72 Rough Facing Cycle
W(2) W(1)
The rough facing cycle is used for workpieces
A’
C which have monotonously varying shapes both in
A
the X- and Z-axis directions.
R When the finish shape (A ³ A’ ³ B) is defined in a

45° program, rough cutting paths are automatically
X U/2
generated leaving allowance of U/2 and W(2) for
B finishing on the workpiece circumference and end
Z
face, respectively. The depth of cut for rough
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
cutting cycle is W(1).
Finishing allowance Generally, a finishing cycle called by the G70
(R: Relief amount, to be set for command is used to finish the workpiece after
parameter No. 5133)
completing the face rough cutting cycle.
COMMAND
G72 W(1) R_ ;
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W(2) F_ S_ T_ ;
2. F15 format
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W(2) I_ K_ D_ F_ S_ T_ ;
D G72 . . . . . . . . . Calls the rough facing cycle.
D W(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies depth of cut (Z-axis direction) (unsigned).
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the relief amount.
D U . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the finishing
D W(2) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the finishing
D I . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of rough finishing

allowance in the X-axis direction (in radius).
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of rough finishing

D D . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the depth of cut (Z-axis direction) (unsigned).

Input of a decimal point is not allowed.

cycle.
(m/min).
(min–1).
digit number.
consideration.
screen.
G01 . . . Infeed in the G72 cycle is made at a cutting feedrate.
3 The workpiece shape must be monotonously increasing or decreasing pattern

in the X-axis directions as shown in the illustration below.
A’ The patter shown on the left monotonously
changes both in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
X-axis direction only either X(U) or Z(W) axis.
Z-axis direction B G72 W2.0 R0.5;

G72 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
N100 G00 Z(W)_;
...
Even if the finish shape is not a
monotonously increasing or decreasing
pattern, machining is possible if the number
Pocket
of pockets included in the shape is 10 or
less.
both X(U) and Z(W) axes. Even if either of
them does not move in the first block, it is
necessary to specify U0 or W0. This
function is optional for the SL-25E.
G72 W2.0 R0.5;
G72 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
N100 G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
...
To finish the shape illustrated below by using the G72 rough facing cycle and the G70
finishing cycle (Nose radius of finishing tool: 0.4 mm)
2 25
1
M60 P=2 5
3
C0.5 5
4
6 8
C1.5 9
7
C1
10 11
∅ 32
∅ 69
∅ 54
O0001;
N1 (ROUGH. OF OUT); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for face and O.D. rough cutting
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 X72.0 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the face rough
cutting cycle (G72)
G72 W2.0 R0.5;
. . . Execution of the face rough cutting cycle (G72)
G72 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
W2.0 . . . . Depth of cut: 2 mm (in radius)
R0.5 . . . . Relief amount: 0.5 mm
P100 . . . . The sequence number N100 of the
first block of the blocks defining the
finish shape
Q200 . . . The sequence number N200 of the
last block of the blocks defining the
finish shape
direction: 0.1 mm
N100 G00 Z–27.23; . . . . . . . . The blocks from N100 to N200 define the finish
X59.8; 1 The command values in these blocks
Z–6.73; are determined taking into
X54.0; (0.4 mm) of the finishing tool.
Z–1.23; 2 The feedrate command “F0.15”
X51.54 Z0; specified in these blocks is ignored for
X25.0; rough cutting cycle. Feedrate during
N200 Z1.0;
(0.3 mm/rev).
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;

G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 X72.0 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the finishing
cycle (G70)
Feedrate . . . . . . . . F0.15 (0.15 mm/rev)
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
U/2
1 (X72.0, Z1.0)
Start from the point
shifted by U/2, W
4. G73 Closed-loop Cutting Cycle
In the G73 closed-loop cutting cycle, the defined

B A
pattern is repeated while it is being shifted to finish
the workpiece.
By specifying the finish shape, A ³ A’ ³ B, in the

U (1)
illustration on the left, the workpiece is machined
X
U (2)/2
by executing the specified pattern repeatedly until
A’
W (2) W (1) the finishing allowance of U(2)/2 and W(2) is left
Z
on the finish shape.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed This cycle is used to efficiently machine
Finishing allowance workpieces that have uniform stock to be removed,
such as forged or cast workpieces.
Generally, a finishing cycle called by the G70

command which is explained later is used to finish
the workpiece after completing the rough cutting
using the G73 closed-loop cutting cycle.
COMMAND
G73 U(1) W(1) R_ ;

G73 P_ Q_ U(2) W(2) F_ S_ T_ ;
2. F15 format
G73 P_ Q_ U(2) W(2) I_ K_ D_ F_ S_ T_ ;

D G73 . . . . . . . . . Calls the closed-loop cutting cycle.
D U(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of entire stock for
rough cutting in the X-axis direction (in radius).
D W(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of entire stock for
rough cutting in the Z-axis direction.
D R, D . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of divisions in which rough machining

is executed.
D U(2) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the finishing
D W(2) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the finishing
D I . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of entire stock for
rough cutting in the X-axis direction (in radius).
D K . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of entire stock for
rough cutting in the Z-axis direction.
cycle.
(m/min).
(min–1).
digit number.
consideration.
screen.
G01 . . . Infeed in the G73 cycle is made at a programmed feedrate.
To finish the shape illustrated below by using the G73 closed-loop rough cutting cycle and
the G70 finishing cycle (Nose radius of finishing tool: 0.4 mm)
9 25
1
M60 P=2 5
8
C0.5 6
7
5 3
C1.5
4
2
C1
∅ 32
∅ 69
∅ 54
O0001;
N1 (ROUGH OF OUT); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part program for face and O.D. rough cutting
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X25.0 F0.25;
G00 X75.0 Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the closed-loop
rough cutting cycle (G73)
G73 U5.0 W5.0 R3;
. . . Execution of the closed-loop rough cutting cycle
G73 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3; (G73)
U5.0 . . . . Total stock for rough cutting in the
X-axis direction: 5.0 mm (in radius)
W5.0 . . . . Total stock for rough cutting in the
Z-axis direction: 5.0 mm
R3 . . . . . . The number of times the rough
cutting cycle is repeated: 3 times
P100 . . . . The sequence number N100 of the
first block of the blocks defining the
finish shape
Q200 . . . The sequence number N200 of the
last block of the blocks defining the
finish shape

direction: 0.1 mm
N100 G00 X49.54 Z1.0; . . . . . . . . The blocks from N100 to N200 define the finish
Z–5.0; 1 The command values in these blocks
X56.34; are determined taking into
Z–25.0 (0.4 mm) of the finishing tool.
X67.54; 2 The feedrate command “F0.15”
N200 X70.0 Z–26.23; specified in these blocks is ignored for
rough cutting cycle. Feedrate during
(0.3 mm/rev).
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;

G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X75.0 Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at 1 , the start point of the finishing
cycle (G70)
Feedrate . . . . . . . . F0.15 (0.15 mm/rev)
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
1 (X75.0, Z10.0)
5. Cautions on Using the G71, G72, and G73 Cycles
The cautionary items to be observed when using the G71, G72, and G73 commands are
described below.
If the multiple repetitive cycle is interrupted to execute manual

operation, the status before the interruption of the cycle must be
re-established before restarting the interrupted cycle. If the cycle is
restarted without re-establishing the previous status, the turret will
move in an unexpected direction, causing interference between the
cutting tools, tool holders, or turret head, and the workpiece, chuck,
fixture, or tailstock (tailstock specification), which could cause
accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the machine. In
addition, if cutting is carried out with the wrong tool, the cutting
tool will be damaged.
1 The blocks which define the finish shape must directly follow the G71, G72, or
G73 block. If there is a block between the G71, G72, or G73 block and those
defining the finish shape, the inserted block is not executed.
2 During the execution of a rough cutting cycle called up by the G71, G72, or
G73 command, F, S, T, G96, and G97 commands are ignored if they are
specified in blocks between the blocks which are assigned the sequence
numbers specified by the P and Q command. The F, S, T, G96, and G97
commands must be specified in the G71, G72, or G73 block, or a preceding
block.
...
(G96 mode)
N5 G71 U2.0 R0.5; . . . . Execution of the G71 rough
N6 G71 P7 Q17 U0.3 W0.1 F0.25 S100; cutting cycle
Feedrate: 0.25 mm/rev
N7 G00 X_ S180;
. . . . . “S180” and “F0.2” are
N8 G01 X_ Z_ F0.2;
ignored for the execution of
...
the G71 rough cutting cycle.

N17_ ;
...
N_ G70 P7 Q17; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Execution of the G70

finishing cycle
...

During the execution of the
G70 finishing cycle, feedrate
and spindle (cutting) speed
specified in a block between
N7 and N17 are valid.
3 The following G and M codes must not specified in the blocks specified by the
P and Q commands.
– G codes in group 00 (one-shot G codes) with an exception of G04 (dwell)
– G codes in group 01 with an exception of G00, G01, G02, and G03
– G codes in group 06
– M98 and M99
4 It is not allowed to specify the G71, G72, and G73 commands in the MDI
mode. An alarm message (No. 067) is displayed on the screen if the G71,
G72, or G73 command is specified in the MDI mode.
5 It is not allowed to specify the M98 and M99 commands in the block that
contains the G71, G72, or G73 command, and the blocks that are assigned the
sequence numbers specified by the P and Q commands.
6 The last axis movement specified in the blocks that are assigned the sequence
numbers specified by the P and Q commands must not be chamfering or
corner rounding.
If such commands are specified, an alarm message (No. 069) is displayed on
the screen.
7 For the G71, G72, or G73 cycle, the automatic tool nose radius offset function
is invalid.
8 The relationship between the finish shape program and the sign (+/–) for
address U and W is indicated below.
U>0 U>0
A W<0 W>0 A
+X
Program
defining finish
Finishing
+Z shape for G71,
allowance
G72, and G73
cycles
A A
U<0 U<0
W<0 W>0
<Tool paths generated due to wrong sign>
Correct: U, W > 0
Wrong: U, W < 0
B A If a wrong sign is used for addresses

U and W commands, overcut will
occur as in the illustration on the left.
A’
6. G70 Finishing Cycle
A After the completion of rough cutting cycle, called

B
by the G71, G72 or G73 command, the workpiece
is finished by calling the G70 finishing cycle.
After the cutting tool is returned to point A,

X
specified in a program, finishing cycle is executed
A’
along the finish shape A’ ³ B defined in the blocks
Z
Rapid traverse which follow the G71, G72, or G73 block.
Cutting feed
For the finishing cycle called by the G70
command, the finish shape program
specified in the G71, G72, or G73 block is
used.
COMMAND
G70 P_ Q_ ;
D G70 . . . . . . . . . Calls the finishing cycle.

1 During the execution of the finishing cycle called up by G70, the F, S, and T
commands specified in the G71, G72, or G73 block are ignored, but the F, S,
and T commands specified in the blocks between those assigned the
sequence numbers specified by the P and Q commands are used.
... (G96 mode)

N5 G71 U2.0 R0.5; . . . . . Execution of the G71 rough
N6 G71 P7 Q17 U0.3 W0.1 F0.25 S100; cutting cycle
N7 G00 X_ S180;
N8 G01 X_ Z_ F0.2; . . . . . “S180” and “F0.2” are
ignored for the execution of
...
the G71 rough cutting cycle.

N17 _ ;
...
N_ G70 P7 Q17; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Execution of the G70 finishing

cycle
...

During the execution of the
G70 finishing cycle, feedrate
and spindle (cutting) speed
specified in a block between
N7 and N17 are valid.
2 The following G and M codes must not specified in the blocks specified by the
P and Q commands.
– G codes in group 00 (one-shot G codes) with an exception of G04 (dwell)
– G codes in group 01 with an exception of G00, G01, G02, and G03
– G codes in group 06
– M98 and M99
3 The last axis movement specified in the blocks that are assigned the sequence
numbers specified by the P and Q commands must not be chamfering or
corner rounding.
If such commands are specified, an alarm message (No. 069) is displayed on
the screen.
7. G74 Face Cut-off, Grooving Cycle and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
Z In the cycle called up by the G74 command,

intermittent feed with a fixed infeed distance is
R (2) repeated along the Z-axis.
After the infeed by “Q”, the tool returns by “R(1)”

P
then the next infeed is repeated.
X By repeating this infeed and retraction pattern, it is

Intermittent feed
X possible to carry out cutting without applying
Z excessive force to the tool.
Q
If the interval along the X-axis is omitted in
the program, the cycle can be used for the
R (1) deep hole drilling cycle.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
(R (1): Return amount, set for parameter No. 5139)
Details of intermittent infeed
COMMAND
<Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle>
G74 R(1);
G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R(2) F_ ;
<Deep hole drilling cycle>
G74 R(1);
G74 Z(W)_ Q_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
<Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle>
G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ D_ ;

<Deep hole drilling cycle>
G74 Z(W)_ K_ F_ ;
D G74 . . . . . . . . Calls the face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle, or deep
hole drilling cycle, .
D R(1) . . . . . . . . Specifies the relief amount.
D X . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting end point in the X-axis direction.
D Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the bottom of cutting in the Z-axis direction.

D U . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the cutting start
point to the cutting end point in the X-axis direction (in
diameter).
D W . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the cutting start
point to the cutting end point in the Z-axis direction.
D P, I . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance in X-axis movement (unsigned, in
radius).
D Q, K . . . . . . . . Specifies the depth of cut in the Z-axis direction
(unsigned value).
D R(2), D . . . . . . Escape at the bottom (unsigned value)
D F . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate.

1 If no F command is specified in the G74 block, the one valid before the
execution of the G74 block becomes valid for the execution of the cutting
defined by the commands in the G74 block.
2 The cycle starts from and ends at the position, where the cutting tool is
positioned right before the execution of the G74 block.
3 For the G74 cycle, the automatic tool nose radius offset function is invalid.
Programming using G74 (Face cut-off cycle)
To create a program using the G74 face cut-off cycle
40
R(2) 1
3 (P)
1
3
1
∅ 110
∅ 70
(X70.0, Z–40.0)
Intermittent feed
Rapid traverse
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X100.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z3.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the start point (X100.0, Z3.0) for the
face cut-off cycle (G74)
G74 X70.0 Z–40.0 P3000 Q10000 R1.0 F0.25;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Execution of the face cut-off cycle (G74)
X70.0 . . . . Cutting end point in the X-axis
direction
Z–40.0 . . . Bottom of cutting in the Z-axis
direction
P3000 . . . Interval in the X-axis direction
movement (in radius): 3 mm
Q10000 . . Infeed amount per intermittent
infeed operation in the Z-axis
direction: 10 mm
R1.0 . . . . . Escape at the bottom of cutting:
1 mm
At the completion of the cycle, the cutting tool
returns to the start point of the cycle (X100.0,
Z3.0), at a rapid traverse rate.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
Programming using G74 (Deep hole drilling)
To create a program using the G74 deep hole drilling cycle
10 10 (Q)
80 R (1)
Intermittent feed
Rapid traverse
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S300 M03;
X0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z5.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the start point (X0, Z5.0) for the
deep hole drilling cycle (G74)
G74 Z–80.0 Q10000 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . Execution of the deep hole drilling cycle (G74)
Z–80.0 . . . Bottom of cutting in the Z-axis
direction
Q10000 . . Infeed amount per intermittent
infeed operation in the Z-axis
direction: 10 mm
After the completion of the cycle, the cutting tool
returns to the start point of the cycle (X0, Z5.0), at
a rapid traverse rate.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
8. G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-off Cycle
Q
Z In the cycle called up by the G75 command,
intermittent feed with a fixed infeed distance is
repeated along the X-axis.
After the infeed by “P”, the tool returns by “R(1)”

then the next infeed is repeated.
By repeating this infeed and retraction pattern, it is

possible to carry out cutting without applying
R (2)
Intermittent feed excessive force to the tool.
X X
If the interval along the Z-axis is omitted in
the program, the cycle can be used for the
Z P cut-off cycle.
R (1)
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
(R (1): Relief amount, set for parameter No. 5139)
Details of intermittent infeed
COMMAND
<O.D./I.D. grooving cycle>
G75 R(1);
G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R(2) F_ ;
<O.D. cut-off cycle>
G75 R(1);
G75 X(U)_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
<O.D./I.D. grooving cycle>
G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ D_ ;

<O.D. cut-off cycle>
G75 X(U)_ I_ F_ ;
D G75 . . . . . . . . Calls the O.D./I.D. grooving cycle or O.D. cut-off cycle.
D R(1) . . . . . . . . Specifies the relief amount.
D X . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the bottom of cutting in the X-axis direction.

D Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting end point in the Z-axis direction.
D U . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the cutting start
point to the cutting end point in the X-axis direction (in
diameter).
D W . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the cutting start
point to the cutting end point in the Z-axis direction.
D P, I . . . . . . . . . Specifies the depth of cut in the X-axis direction (unsigned
value, in radius).
D Q, K . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance in Z-axis movement (unsigned).
D R(2), D . . . . . . Escape at the bottom
D F . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate.

1 If no F command is specified in the G75 block, the one valid before the
execution of the G75 block becomes valid for the execution of the cutting
defined by the commands in the G75 block.
2 The cycle starts from and ends at the position, where the cutting tool is
positioned right before the execution of the G75 block.
3 For the G75 cycle, the automatic tool nose radius offset function is invalid.
4 Do not specify a relief amount R(2) command
for O.D. or I.D. grooving operation. If the R(2)
command is specified for such operations, the tool
shifts by the amount specified by the R(2)
command at the bottom to cause the interference
between the tool and the workpiece, which will
result in damage to the tool.
Specify the R(2) command for a workpiece having the shape as illustrated on
the right.
Programming using G75 (O.D./I.D. grooving cycle)
To create a program using the G75 O.D. grooving cycle
6
5
0 R (2)
40
80 4.5 4.5
(Q) (Q)
∅ 100
∅ 110
Intermittent feed
Rapid traverse
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X120.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z–45.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the start point (X120.0, Z–45.0) for
the O.D. grooving cycle (G75)
G75 X100.0 Z–80.0 P2000 Q4500 F0.15;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Execution of the O.D. grooving cycle (G75)
X100.0 . . Bottom of cutting in the X-axis
direction
Z–80.0 . . Cutting end point in the Z-axis
direction
P2000 . . Infeed amount per intermittent infeed
operation in the X-axis direction:
2 mm
Q4500 . . Interval in the Z-axis direction
movement: 4.5 mm
F0.15 . . . Feedrate: 0.15 mm/rev
Z–45.0), at a rapid traverse rate.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
Programming using G75 (Cut-off cycle)
To create a program using the G75 O.D. cut-off cycle (hollow workpiece)
18
4
R (1) 3(P)
4 12
∅ 60
∅ 25
R (1) 3(P)
3(P)
100
Intermittent feed
Rapid traverse
O0001;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X65.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z–16.0 F1.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the start point (X65.0, Z–16.0) for
the cut-off cycle (G75)
G75 X20.0 P3000 F0.15; . . . . . . . . . . . Execution of the cut-off cycle (G75)
X20. . . . . Bottom of cutting in the X-axis
direction
P3000 . . Infeed amount per intermittent infeed
operation in the X-axis direction:
3 mm
F0.15 . . . Feedrate: 0.15 mm/rev
Z–16.0), at a rapid traverse rate.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
9. G76 Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle
5 1 The G76 command calls the thread cutting cycle,

shown in the illustration on the left.
The required thread height is obtained by

executing the thread cutting pattern repeatedly in
the range from 2 to 3 along the angle of the
2 thread.
4
3
Rapid traverse
Thread cutting
COMMAND
G76 P(1) Q(1) R(1) ;

G76 X(U) Z(W) R(2) P(2) Q(2) F ;
2. F15 format
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_ F_ A_ P_ ;

D G76 . . . . . . . . . Calls the thread cutting cycle.
D P(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies how the thread should be machined with a 6-digit
number.
Pjj ff
jj: The number of finish cuts to be repeated.
Range: 1 - 99
This command is modal and remains valid
until it is changed by another value specified
next. The value can also be specified with
parameter No.5142; the setting for this
parameter can be changed by a
programmed command.
: Thread chamfering size

Thread chamfering size can be specified in
the range from 0.0L to 9.9L in increments of
0.1L (L: thread lead). In a program,
specification is made in a 2-digit number of
00 to 99.
The command is modal and remains valid
parameter No. 5130; the setting for this
programmed command.
ff: Thread angle

Thread angle can be selected from the
following six options:
80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°, and 0°
In a program, the selected angle is directly
specified in a 2-digit number.
The command is modal and remains valid
parameter No. 5143; the setting for this
programmed command.
P021260
This P command specifies the following:

Finish cut is repeated two times,
Thread chamfering size is 1.2L, and
Thread angle is 60°.
D Q(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the minimum depth of cut.
If depth of cut per path ( d n– d n–1 )

becomes smaller than dmin, depth of cut is
clamped at dmin.
The command is modal and remains valid until it is
changed by another value specified next. The value
can also be specified with parameter No. 5140; the
setting for this parameter can be changed by a
programmed command.
D R(1) . . . . . . . . . Specifies the finishing allowance.
D X, Z . . . . . . . . . Specify the X and Z coordinates of the thread cutting end
point.
D U, W . . . . . . . . . Specify the distance and direction from the thread cutting
start point to the end point along the X-axis and the Z-axis,
respectively (in diameter for U).
D R(2), I . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance of taper in the X-axis direction
(signed value, in radius).
If this command is omitted, straight thread is cut.
D P(2), K . . . . . . . Specifies thread height (in radius, unsigned value).

D Q(2), D . . . . . . . Specifies the depth of cut for the first thread cutting path
(in radius, unsigned value).
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the lead of thread
D A . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle of thread
The angle can be selected in the range 0_ to 120_
in increments of 1_. If this command is omitted, 0_
is assumed. The angle can also be set for
parameter No. 5143. If a value outside the
allowable range is specified, an alarm message
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the infeed mode
P1 . . . Straight feed along the thread face at fixed metal
removal rate
P2 . . . Zigzag infeed at fixed metal removal rate
1 The data set for addresses P(2), Q(2), and R(2) are distinguished by the
position of addresses X(U) and Z (W).
(X, Z) F
Q (2)
R (2) P (2)
Thread cutting direction

2 To carry out thread cutting in the pattern of “zigzag infeed at fixed metal
removal rate”, use the F15 format for programming.
3 When the NC unit is an MSC-500, thread cutting in the pattern of “zigzag
infeed at fixed metal removal rate” cannot be carried out.
9.1 Infeed Mode

Tool tip The G76 command calls the infeed mode for “fixed
metal removal rate and straight feed along the
thread face” operation.
The depth of cut in the nth thread cutting path is:

D
A Dn = nD
1st path
If the depth of cut per pass reaches or becomes
2nd path K
3rd path
√ n D
smaller than the amount of δ set for parameter No.
nth path
5140 or the amount specified as Q(1), the depth of
cut is fixed to the amount of δ set for parameter
R
No. 5140 of the amount specified as Q(1).
9.2 Cautions on the G76 Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle

The cautions indicated for the G32 and G92 thread cutting cycles also apply to the thread
cutting cycle called by the G76 command.
For details of cautions on the thread cutting cycle, refer to page B–36.

Chamfering mode for thread cutting is valid when the power is turned on.
M23 . . . . . . . . . Chamfering ON (initial status when the power is turned on.)
M24 . . . . . . . . . Chamfering OFF
To execute thread cutting using the G76 automatic thread cutting cycle
M60 P=2
C0.5
2 2
C1.5
3 C1 1.3
60°
Details of thread
5
25
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
∅ 69
∅ 54
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S640 M03;
X70.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z5.0 F1.0 M24; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the start point (X70.0, Z5.0) for
the automatic thread cutting cycle (G76)
M24: Makes chamfering invalid in the
next thread cutting.
G76 P010060; Execution of the automatic thread cutting
....
G76 X57.4 Z–24.0 P1300 Q350 F2.0; cycle (G76)
P010060 . . Finish cycle execution: Once
Thread chamfering amount: 0
Thread angle: 60°
X57.4 . . . . . The diameter of the last thread
cutting path
Z–24.0 . . . . The Z coordinate of the thread
cutting end point (includes
incomplete thread length of
2 mm).
P1300 . . . . Thread height: 1.3 mm
Q350 . . . . . Depth of cut for the first thread
cutting path: 0.35 mm
F2.0 . . . . . . Thread pitch: 2 mm
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M05;
M30;
The thread height and the depth of cut for the first path are specified only for
reference.
9.3 The Relationship between Depth of Cut for the First Path and the
Number of Thread Cutting Paths to be Generated
(Fixed Metal Removal Rate and Straight Feed along the Thread Face)
9.3.1 Calculating the Number of Thread Cutting Paths when the Depth of Cut for the First
Path is Given
2 D : Depth of cut for the first path (in radius)
K–a
n= +1 K : Thread height (in radius)
D
a : Depth of cut for the last path
n : Number of thread cutting paths
Assume that:
D = 0.35
K = 1.3
a = 0.05,
then, number of thread cutting paths (n) are calculated as follows:
2
1.3 – 0.05
n= +1
0.35
= 12.76 + 1
14 (“12.76” is rounded up to “13”.)
Therefore, the thread cutting pattern is repeated 14 times to generate the

required thread.
9.3.2 Calculating the Depth of Cut for the First Path when the Number of Thread Cutting
Paths is Given
n : Number of thread cutting paths
K–a
D= K : Thread height (in radius)
n–1
a : Depth of cut for the last path
D : Depth of cut for the first path (in radius)
Assume that:
K = 1.3
a = 0.05
n = 14,
then depth of cut for the first path (D) is calculated as follows:
1.3 – 0.05
D=
14 – 1
= 0.346 @@@
0.35
Therefore, the depth of cut for the first path is 0.35 mm.
CHAPTER I
HOLE MACHINING CANNED
CYCLE
This chapter describes hole machining canned cycles.

Since different patterns of tool movement are available to cover various hole machining
requirements, choose the most proper cycle for intended operation.
A hole machining cycle specifies operation sequence to be specified in several blocks by

the commands in a single block containing a G code.
When specifying a hole machining canned cycle, two types of format (standard
format and F15 format) are used.
This manual gives explanation based on the standard format. However, for the G
codes which allow the use of the F15 format, related command format is also
explained. Note that the F15 format is different from standard format.
For details, refer to the instruction manuals supplied by the NC unit
manufacturer.
CONTENTS
I : HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–1
1.1 Number of Repetitions “K” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–6
1.2 Operation Methods in Hole Machining Canned Cycles
(G Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–9
1.2.1 Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–9
1.2.2 Side Hole Machining Canned Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–11
2. G80 Hole Machining Canned Cycle Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–16
3. G83 Face Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–18

3.1 G83 Face High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–18
3.2 G83 Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–22
3.3 G83 Face Spot Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–26
3.4 G83 Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–28
4. G84 Face Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–32
5. M329 G84 Synchronized Face Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–36
6. G85 Face Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–41
7. G87 Side Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–44

7.1 G87 Side High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–44
7.2 G87 Side Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–48
7.3 G87 Side Spot Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–52
7.4 G87 Side Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–55
8. G88 Side Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–58
9. M329 G88 Synchronized Side Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–62
10. G89 Side Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–66
11. G384, G380 Synchronized Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–69

12. Cautions on Programming Using G84 and G88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–75
12.1 Dwell Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–75
12.2 Precautions on Using the Tapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–75
12.3 To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–76
HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE I–1
1. General
Hole machining operation is programmed using several blocks of commands.
A hole machining canned cycle allows hole machining operation which requires several
blocks of commands to be programmed using one block of commands including an
appropriate G code.
1 Hole machining canned cycles can be used only with the MC type or Y-axis
specification, these cycles cannot be used.
2 With the SL-S series machine, it is not possible to execute a hole machining
canned cycle in the state the M268 command is executed. Note that the
synchronized tapping cycle called by G384 can be executed in this state.
3 Synchronized tapping cycle can be used only for the MC type and Y-axis
specification machines. (Synchronized tapping cycle is not available with the
SL-65, SL-65MC, SL-75 and SL-75MC.)
4 With the SL and SL-S series (excludes the SL-25E, the SL-400, the SL-600
series, the SL-65 series and the SL-75 series), the synchronized face tapping
cycle (M329 G84) can be optionally used for models other than MC type and
Y-axis specification. Note that this cycle can be used only at the center of the
spindle.
5 With the CL series, the synchronized face tapping cycle (M329 G84) can be
optionally used. Note that this cycle can be used only at the center of the
spindle.
I–2 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
Basic Pattern of Hole Machining Canned Cycle

Basic command format and movement of the hole machining canned cycle are explained
below:
<Movement>
– Face hole machining canned cycle A hole machining canned cycle consists of
(G83 - G85) movements 1 to 6 shown in the diagram.
Z0
–Z +Z In the cycle called by G83 to G85, the Z-axis is

used as the hole machining axis while the X-axis is
Point R Movement 1 used as the hole machining axis in the cycle called
by G87 to G89. With the exception of the
Movement 4
difference in the hole machining axis, movements
Movement 5 Movement 6 Initial point 1, 2 and 6 are common to all types of hole
X0
machining canned cycles.
Movements 3 to 5 vary according to respective

Rapid traverse
canned cycles.
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse or For a hole machining canned cycle, “initial
cutting feed
point” and “point R” indicate the following
positions:
– Side hole machining canned cycle
(G87 - G89) – Initial point . . . The position where a
Rapid traverse
hole machining canned
Cutting feed
cycle starts
Rapid traverse or
Movement 1 Initial point cutting feed – Point R . . . . . . The position where hole
machining (axis feed at
cutting feedrate) cycle
Point R Z0 starts
+X
Movement 4
X0
–X
Movement 1: Positioning at the hole machining start position
Movement 2: Moving to point R at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 3: Hole machining (Hole machining is carried out.)
Movement 4: Movement at hole bottom
Specify dwell if necessary.

Movement 5: Returning to point R level
Whether the Z-axis return movement is executed at a rapid

traverse rate or cutting feedrate is determined by the G code
specified for calling the hole machining canned cycle.
Movement 6: Positioning at initial point at rapid traverse rate
COMMAND
1. Face hole machining canned cycle
G83 - G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_

R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G83 - G85 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_
R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G80;
D G83 - G85 . . . . Calls a face hole machining canned cycle.
bottom.
P1500 ³ 1.5 sec

(Omissible)
clamp of spindle 1)
COMMAND
2. Side hole machining canned cycle
G87 - G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_

R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G87 - G89 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_
R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68);
G80;
D G87 - G89 . . . . Calls a side hole machining canned cycle.

bottom.
P1500 ³ 1.5 sec
(Omissible)
clamp of spindle 1)
1 In the F15 format, use address L to specify the number of repetitions.

2 When the M68 command (spindle or spindle 1 brake clamp (C-axis clamp or
C-axis clamp of spindle 1)) is specified, M68 is output before the start of
operation 2 and M69 (spindle or spindle 1 brake unclamp (C-axis unclamp or
C-axis unclamp of spindle 1)) is output at the completion of operation 5.
Dwell is executed for the time set for parameter No. 5111 after that.
1.1 Number of Repetitions “K”

When machining the holes of the same dimensions, arranged in equal intervals, it is
possible to repeat the same hole machining canned cycle by specifying the number of
repetitions following address K. Therefore, the use of a K command can simplify
programming.
K1
When K1 is specified, hole machining cycle is executed once at the specified position.
“K1” is omissible. If no K command is specified, it is equivalent to the designation

of “K1”.
...
G83 X150.0 C30.0 Z–18.0 R–27.0 F100 (K1);

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After positioning at (X150.0, C30.0), hole
machining cycle is executed.
C90.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After positioning at the specified position, hole
C150.0; machining cycle is executed.
...
K2 to K9999
When Kn (n = 2 to 9999) is specified, the specified hole machining cycle is repeated by the
specified number of times.
This is used for machining holes arranged in the same intervals.
If Kn (n = 2 to 9999) is specified, specify the position of the first hole in an

incremental mode command.
If an absolute mode command is used to specify the position of the first hole, hole
machining cycle is repeated by the specified number of times at the first hole
position.
90°
150° C A 30°
C0
D
210° F 330°
E P.C.D 150
270_
...
G98 G00 X150.0 C30.0 Z30.0; . . . . . . . Moving to X150.0, C30.0 (A in the illustration
above) at a rapid traverse rate
G83 H60.0 Z–18.0 R–27.0 F100 K6;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The specified hole machining cycle is executed at
B, C, D, E, F, and A.
...
D G83 . . . . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned

cycle
Point R
Point B D H60.0 . . . . . . . . . Specifies angular intervals
between the holes (B ³ C
³ D ³ E ³ F ³ A) in an
Point A, C
incremental value.
D Z–18.0 . . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the
point Z (hole bottom)
D R–27.0 . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and
Point D, F direction from initial point to
point R.
Point E D F100 . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate of 100 mm/min
D K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of
times (6 times) the hole
Z–18.0 R–27.0
machining cycle should be
repeated.
Hole bottom Point R Initial point
position (Z3.0) (Z30.0) The hole machining cycle is
(Z–18.0)
executed once at each of
Rapid traverse the six positions B, C, D, E,
Cutting feed F, and A.
1.2 Operation Methods in Hole Machining Canned Cycles (G Codes)

The patterns and operation methods called by the hole machining canned cycle G codes
are briefly explained below using diagrams. Typical applications and cautions are also
described.
1.2.1 Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle
The face hole machining canned cycle indicates the canned cycle in which hole machining
is executed by the Z-axis with positioning executed by the combination of X- and C-axes or
X- and Y-axes.
Rapid traverse Cutting feed
G83 High-speed deep hole

G83 Deep hole drilling G83 Spot drilling
drilling
<XC plane> <XC plane> <XC plane>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
<XY plane> <XY plane> <XY plane>
G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Point R Point R Point R
Initial point Initial point

Initial point
Dwell d Dwell d
Parameter No. 5101.2 = 0 Parameter No. 5101.2 = 1

(setting made before shipping the
machine)
Deep hole drilling Deep hole drilling Centering

Q: Depth of cut per pass Q: Depth of cut per pass Drilling shallow holes
d: Retraction stroke d: Clearance amount
G83 Spot drilling (dwell) G84 Tapping G85 Boring

G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
<XY plane> <XY plane> <XY plane>
G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G84 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G85 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
Spindle reverse
rotation after Spindle normal
dwell rotation
Point R Point R
Initial point Point R Initial point Initial point
Dwell Spindle normal

rotation after
dwell
Centering Tapping Reaming and boring

Drilling shallow holes (Tapper is used.) (Return movement from the
hole bottom to the point R is
executed at the feedrate two
times the specified feedrate.)
G329 G84
G85 Boring (dwell) G384 Synchronized tapping
Synchronized tapping
G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G384 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ M329 S_ ;
<XY plane> R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T2.(T3.); G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
G85 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ; <XY plane> <XY plane>

G384 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ M329 S_ ;
R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T2.(T3.) ; G84 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle normal Spindle normal

rotation Spindle rotation Spindle
Spindle rotation stop Spindle rotation stop
rotation stop rotation stop
Point R
Initial point Point R Initial point Point R Initial point
Dwell
Spindle reverse Spindle Spindle reverse Spindle

rotation after rotation stop rotation after rotation stop
dwell after dwell dwell after dwell
Reaming and boring Tapping Tapping

(Return movement from the (No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
<Only for SL, SL-S series <Only for TL, SL and SL-S
(excludes the SL-400, SL-600, series (excludes the SL-65 and
SL-65, and SL-75 series)> SL-75 series)>
1.2.2 Side Hole Machining Canned Cycle
The side hole machining canned cycle indicates the canned cycle in which hole machining
is executed by the X-axis with positioning executed by the combination of Z- and C-axes or
Z- and Y-axes.
Rapid traverse Cutting feed
G87 High-speed deep hole

G87 Deep hole drilling G87 Spot drilling
drilling
<ZC plane> <ZC plane> <ZC plane>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
<ZY plane> <ZY plane> <ZY plane>
G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
Initial point Initial point Initial point
Point R Point R Point R
Q Q
d d
Q Q
Q Q
Dwell Dwell
Parameter No. 5101.2 = 0 Parameter No. 5101.2 = 1

(setting made before shipping the
machine)
Deep hole drilling Deep hole drilling Centering

Q: Depth of cut per pass Q: Depth of cut per pass Drilling shallow holes
d: Retraction stroke d: Clearance amount
G87 Spot drilling (dwell) G88 Tapping G89 Boring

G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G88 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
<ZY plane> <ZY plane> <ZY plane>
G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G88 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G89 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;

Spindle normal
rotation after
dwell
Spindle normal
Point R rotation Point R
Point R
Spindle reverse
rotation
after dwell
Dwell
Centering Tapping Reaming and boring

Drilling shallow holes (Tapper is used.) (Return movement from the
G89 Boring (dwell) G384 Synchronized tapping G329 G88

Synchronized tapping
G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ; G384 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ M329 S_ ;
<ZY plane> R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T1.(T4.); G88 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
G89 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ; <ZY plane> <ZY plane>

G384 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ M329 S_ ;
R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T1.(T4.) ; G88 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle Spindle Spindle Spindle

rotation stop rotation stop rotation stop rotation stop
after dwell after dwell
Spindle normal Spindle normal
Point R rotation rotation
Point R Point R
Spindle reverse Spindle reverse

Spindle rotation after Spindle rotation after
rotation stop dwell rotation stop dwell
Dwell
Reaming and boring Tapping Tapping

(Return movement from the (No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
<Only for SL, SL-S series <Only for TL, SL-400, and
(excludes the SL-400, SL-600, SL-600 series>
SL-65, and SL-75 series)>
1 For the tapping cycle called by G84 or G88, a tapper is used. In this case,
the return movement from the bottom of the machined hole to the point R
level is made with the tapper extended. Therefore, the point R level must
be specified larger value than tapper extending length. If the smaller value
is specified, the cutting tool and workpiece may collide or interfere with
each other, and this could damage the machine when moving to next
machining position.
2 When the emergency stop button or the (RESET) key has been
RESET
pressed to stop the machine during a tapping operation, carefully move the
axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If
you move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may
collide or interfere with each other, and this could cause damage to the
machine.
1 If a hole machining canned cycle is interrupted by the emergency stop
operation or by pressing the (RESET) key, although the hole machining
RESET
mode, hole machining data, and hole position data are retained, the number of
repetitions is cleared.
2 To specify a hole machining canned cycle, select the feed per minute mode by
specifying the G98 command, and specify the spindle speed of the rotary tool
spindle in the G97 mode.
3 The number of times the called hole machining canned cycle should be
repeated is required only when the cycle should be executed repeatedly.
Although feedrate value is retained when the hole machining canned cycle is
canceled, the repeat number data is not retained.
4 To call a hole machining canned cycle, the spindle should have been rotated by
the M13 or M14 command excluding the synchronized tapping cycle.
<Good example>
S_ M13; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary tool spindle normal rotation
...
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; . . . Good
...
<Bad example>
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary tool spindle stop
...
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; . . . Not good

...
5 In the hole machining canned cycle mode, if any data of X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, H,

R, or additional axis is specified in a block, the called hole machining cycle is
executed.
In the block that does not contain any of X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, H, R, or additional
axis, the hole machining cycle is not executed.
However, even if an X command is specified, the hole machining cycle is not
executed if it is specified following the G04 command which calls the dwell
function.
6 After the completion of hole machining operation executed using a hole

machining canned cycle, cancel the hole machining canned cycle by specifying
G80 or a G code in 01 group (G00, G01, G02, G03, etc.).
7 If the hole bottom position is specified using an incremental command, the
following value must be specified.
With an R command . . . . . . . . . Distance and direction from the point R to the
hole bottom
Without an R command . . . . . . . Distance and direction from the initial point to
the hole bottom
8 The hole machining canned cycle mode is canceled by the G80 command or a
G code of group 01 (G00, G01, G02, G03, etc.).
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
G00 Z_ C_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Only Z- and C-axes are moved, the canned
cycle is not executed.
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Z_ C_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The called canned cycle is executed.
9 In the tapping cycle (G84 or G88) which controls the mode of spindle rotation,
if the cycle is executed continuously while the distance between the hole
positions or the distance from the initial point level to the point R level is short,
there may be cases that the rotary tool spindle fails to reach the required
speed before it begins tapping operation.
If such a problem is anticipated, enter the dwell command (G04) between
tapping operations without specifying the repeat number, as shown in the
following program.
...
G84 X_ C_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
G04 P_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes dwell and suspends tapping
operation
C_ ;
G04 P_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes dwell and suspends tapping
operation
C_ ;
...
10 When miscellaneous function is specified with a G code which calls a hole

machining canned cycle in the same block, the M code is output at the first
positioning. After the completion of positioning, the next hole machining cycle
is started after checking the M code completion signal (FIN).
If the number of repetitions is specified, the M code is output only in the first
cycle and is not output after that.
11 During the tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed override are
fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle
speed is changed during tapping cycle.
12 If G80 is specified, the hole machining data and the hole position data are
canceled in addition to the G code (G83, G84, G85, G87, G88, and G89)
calling for a hole machining canned cycle.
13 The dry run function is invalid during the execution of a synchronized tapping
cycle (G384).
14 When a synchronized tapping cycle is executed by specifying the G384
command, the G384 command must be specified in all blocks that call for a
synchronized tapping cycle. The synchronized tapping cycle is not executed
unless the G384 command is specified. In the second and subsequent
synchronized tapping cycle call blocks, specify only the positions where the
cycle is executed. These blocks must not include addresses R, F, S, D, E, M,
and T.
15 After the execution of a synchronized tapping cycle by specifying the G384
command, cancel the synchronized tapping cycle by specifying the G380
command. If a hole machining canned cycle other than the synchronized
tapping cycle is specified without canceling the synchronized tapping cycle by
specifying the G380 command, an alarm message (3041) is displayed on the
screen. It is not allowed to index the turret by a T command during the
execution of a synchronized tapping cycle.
16 When specifying the synchronized tapping cycle (G384), it is not allowed to
specify the number of repetition times.
2. G80 Hole Machining Canned Cycle Cancel
The G80 command is used to cancel a hole machining canned cycle (G83, G84, G85,
G87, G88, and G89) and to allow ordinary operation to be executed.
Since a hole machining canned cycle is modal, once it is specified, the canned cycle mode
remains valid until it is canceled with the G80 command. Therefore, after completing the
process to be executed in the hole machining canned cycle mode, specify the G80
command in the next block before executing an axis movement command.
COMMAND
G80; . . . . . . Cancels a hole machining canned cycle.
1 The hole machining canned cycle mode is also canceled if a G code of group
01 (G00, G01, G02, G03, etc.) is executed.
2 When the G80 command is specified, the hole machining data and the hole
position data are cleared in addition to the G code (G83, G84, G85, G87, G88,
and G89) calling for a hole machining canned cycle.
To carry out the face spot drilling cycle (G83) at points 1 to 6 .

90°
Rapid traverse
2 Cutting feed
150° 3 1 30°
C0
5
Z3.0 Z30.0
4
(Point R) (Initial point)
210° 6 330° Movement by G83 at 1 - 6
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G98; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the feed per minute mode
G00 T0101;
G97 S1000 M13; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the rotary tool spindle in the normal
X150.0 Z30.0 C30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 (X150.0, C30.0) and initial
point (Z30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
G83 Z–5.0 R–27.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (G83) at
point 1
D Z–5.0 . . . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the
D R–27.0 . . . . . . . . Distance and direction from
the initial point to the point R
D F100 . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate of 100 mm/min
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (G83) at
C270.0; points 2 to 6
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face spot drilling cycle mode (G83)
If “G00 X_ Y_ ;” is specified, the hole
...
machining canned cycle mode is canceled.

This is because the G00 command, a G
code belonging to 01 group, is specified.
3. G83 Face Drilling Cycle
The G83 face drilling cycle provides the following four hole machining canned cycles.
– Face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle
– Face deep hole drilling cycle
– Face spot drilling cycle
– Face spot drilling cycle (dwell)
3.1 G83 Face High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

In the G83 face high-speed deep hole drilling
cycle, drilling is executed in intermittent axis feed
Q Q Q with a fixed depth of cut.
As shown in the illustration in the left, after the

Point R
infeed of a drill by “Q”, it is returned by “d”, then
Initial point the next infeed is repeated.
Dwell
d
possible to drill a deep hole without applying
excessive force to the drill.
Rapid traverse Set “0” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the
Drilling
(Cutting feed)
face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle
(setting made before shipping the machine).
When carrying out drilling on mild or tough
workpieces, long chips are apt to entangle
on the drill. In such operation, this mode of
drilling cycle is used to break chips.
COMMAND
<XC plane>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<XC plane>
G17 G83.1 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G17 G83.1 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

D G17 . . . . . . . . . Selects the machining plane (XC, XY plane).

The Z-axis is used as the hole machining axis.
D G83, G83.1 . . . Calls the face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle.
Specifies the hole machining positions.
Specifies the distance and direction from the end point of
the previous block to the hole position.
Specifies the hole bottom position.
Specifies the distance and direction from the point R to the
hole bottom.
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . <Standard format>
Specifies the distance and direction from the initial point to
the point R (incremental command).
<F15 format>
Specifies the point R position (absolute command).
D Q . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the depth of cut per one infeed motion (unsigned
value).
To be specified in units of 0.001 mm without using a
decimal point.
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate (mm/min).

1 The return amount “d” is set for parameter No. 5114.
The default setting is “100” (= 0.1 mm).
2 Specify address Q in the block in which hole machining operation is specified.

3 If a negative value is specified for address Q, it is invalid. Always specify a
positive value for address Q.
Programming using G83 (Face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle)
To carry out the face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at points 1 to 6 . (XC
plane)
Set “0” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle
90°
5 5 5 5 Rapid traverse
2 Cutting feed
150° 3 1 30°
d
C0
17
Z3.0 Z30.0
4
210° 6 330°
Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 sec
Movement by G83 at 1 - 6
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G83 Z–17.0 R–27.0 Q5000 P100 F100;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face high-speed deep hole drilling
cycle (G83) at point 1
D Q5000 . . . . . . . . . Depth of cut per one infeed
motion: 5 mm
D P100 . . . . . . . . . . Dwell period at hole bottom

for 0.1 sec
Rotary tool spindle 1 turn
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
spindle speed (min–1)
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
thus, the rotary tool
spindle rotates more than
one turn.
C90.0 Q5000;
C150.0 Q5000;
C210.0 Q5000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face high-speed deep hole drilling
C270.0 Q5000; cycle (G83) at points 2 to 6
C330.0 Q5000;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face high-speed deep hole drilling
cycle mode (G83)
G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the rotary tool spindle
G99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the feed per revolution mode
M01;
...
3.2 G83 Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

In the G83 face deep hole drilling cycle, drilling is
executed in intermittent axis feed with a fixed
Q Q Q
depth of cut.
As shown in the illustration in the left, after the
Point R
infeed of a drill by “Q”, the drill is returned to the
point R at a rapid traverse rate. In the next infeed,
Initial point the drill is moved to the point which is above the
Dwell d depth drilled in the previous operation by clearance
amount “d” at a rapid traverse rate, then it is fed by
“Q”.
Rapid traverse
Drilling By repeating this infeed and retraction pattern, it is
(Cutting feed) possible to drill a deep hole without applying
Set “1” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the

face deep hole drilling cycle.
When carrying out drilling a deep hole where
coolant cannot be supplied satisfactorily or
drilling a workpiece which generates
entangling chips, this drilling pattern can be
effectively used.
COMMAND
<XC plane>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<XC plane>
G17 G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G17 G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;


D G83 . . . . . . . . . Calls the face deep hole drilling cycle.

hole bottom.
<F15 format>
value).
decimal point.
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

1 The clearance amount “d” is set for parameter No. 5114.

Programming using G83 (Face deep hole drilling cycle)
To carry out the face deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at points 1 to 6 . (XC plane)
Set “1” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the face deep hole drilling cycle (setting
made before shipping the machine).
90°
5 5 5 5 Rapid traverse
2 Cutting feed
150° 3 1 30°
d
C0
17
Z3.0 Z30.0
4
210° 6 330° Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 sec
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G83 Z–17.0 R–27.0 Q5000 P100 F100;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at
point 1
motion: 5 mm
for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0 Q5000;
C150.0 Q5000;
C210.0 Q5000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at
C270.0 Q5000; points 2 to 6
C330.0 Q5000;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face deep hole drilling cycle mode
(G83)
M01;
...
3.3 G83 Face Spot Drilling Cycle

The face spot drilling cycle is a simple cycle in
which drilling is carried out in the –Z direction and
then the cutting tool is returned at a rapid traverse
rate.
Point R
The G83 face spot drilling cycle is used for
Initial point machining a center hole by a centering drill
or drilling of comparatively shallow hole.
Rapid traverse
Drilling
(Cutting feed)
COMMAND
<XC plane>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<XC plane>
G17 G81 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G17 G81 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;

D G83, G81 . . . . Calls the face spot drilling cycle.

hole bottom.
<F15 format>
Programming using G83 (Face spot drilling cycle)
To carry out the face spot drilling cycle (G83) at points 1 to 6 . (XC plane)
90°
Rapid traverse
2 Cutting feed
150° 3 1 30°
C0
5
Z3.0 Z30.0
4
210° 6 330° Movement by G83 at 1 - 6
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G83 Z–5.0 R–27.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (G83) at
point 1
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (G83) at
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face spot drilling cycle mode (G83)
M01;
...
3.4 G83 Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)

The face spot drilling cycle (dwell) carries out
drilling in the –Z direction and returns the tool at a
Point R
In the G83 face spot drilling cycle (dwell), accuracy
of hole depth in the blind hole machining is
Initial point improved and surface roughness at the hole
bottom is improved as well since dwell is carried
Dwell
out at the hole bottom.
The term “dwell” means suspension of axis

Rapid traverse
movement for the specified period.
Drilling
(Cutting feed)
COMMAND
<XC plane>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G83 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<XC plane>
G17 G82 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G17 G82 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;


D G83, G82 . . . . Calls the face spot drilling cycle (dwell).

hole bottom.
<F15 format>
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

Programming using G83 (Face spot drilling cycle (dwell))
To carry out the face spot drilling cycle (dwell) (G83) at points 1 to 6 . (XC plane)
90°
Rapid traverse
2 Cutting feed
150° 3 1 30°
C0
5
Z3.0 Z30.0
4 (Point R) (Initial point)

5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G83 Z–5.0 R–27.0 P100 F100; . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (dwell) (G83)
at point 1
for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (dwell) (G83)
C270.0; at points 2 to 6
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face spot drilling cycle (dwell) mode
(G83)
M01;
...
4. G84 Face Tapping Cycle
The G84 face tapping cycle is used for machining

Spindle reverse Spindle normal
rotation after dwell rotation thread using a tap.
When a cutting tool rotating in the normal direction

reaches the specified bottom position, the cutting
tool rotating direction is reversed automatically to
Point R Initial point return to the specified level.
To use this face tapping cycle, a tapper is

Spindle normal
rotation after dwell used.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
COMMAND
<XC plane>
G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G84 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<XC plane>
G17 G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G17 G84 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

D G84 . . . . . . . . . Calls the face tapping cycle.

hole bottom.
<F15 format>
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

(spindle speed pitch)
1 For the face tapping cycle called by G84, a tapper is used. In this case,
machining position.
2 When the emergency stop button or (RESET) key has been pressed
RESET
to stop the machine during a tapping operation, carefully move the axes
after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you
move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide
or interfere with each other, and this could cause damage to the machine.
1 During the face tapping cycle called by G84, feedrate override and spindle
speed override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if
feedrate or spindle speed is changed during face tapping cycle.
2 If the SP
(SP) switch on the operation panel is pressed during face tapping
cycle, face tapping cycle does not stop until the Z-axis returns to the initial
point level is completed.
Programming using G84 (Face tapping cycle)
To carry out the face tapping cycle (G84) (pitch: 2 mm, depth: 20 mm) at points 1 to 6 .
(XC plane)
90°
Z30.0
(Initial point)
2
Normal rotation
150° 3 1 30° Reverse rotation
Z15.0
20 (Point R)
C0
4 Movement by G84 at 1 - 6
210° 6 330° Rapid traverse

Cutting feed
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G84 Z–_ R–15.0 P500 F600; . . . . . . . . Executing the face tapping cycle (G84) at point 1
Tapping is executed up to 20 mm depth.
Feedrate F = Spindle speed (min–1)
Pitch (mm)
= 300 2 = 600 (mm/min)
For the Z-axis point, specify
“Z – (20 – tapper elongation in normal
rotation + tap engaging length)”.
For dwell period P, refer to page I–77.
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face tapping cycle (G84) at
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face tapping cycle mode (G84)

M01;
...
5. M329 G84 Synchronized Face Tapping Cycle
Spindle normal When executing the tapping operation, X- or Z-axis

rotation Spindle
Spindle rotation stop feed amount per rotary tool spindle rotation must
rotation stop
be equal to the pitch of the thread to be cut.
With the synchronized face tapping cycle, accurate

tapping operation is possible for cutting thread
Point R Initial point since the rotation of the rotary tool spindle rotation
and the Z-axis feed are constantly synchronized.
Spindle reverse Spindle
rotation after rotation stop
dwell after dwell
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
1 This cycle can be used for the MC type and Y-axis specification TL series
machines, the SL and SL-S series machines (excludes the SL-25E, SL-65, and
SL-75 series). Note that the cycle is optional for the MC type TL series
machines and the SL and SL-S series (excludes the SL-25E, SL-400, SL-600,
SL-65, and SL-75 series).
2 With the MC type of TL series machines or the SL, SL-S series (excludes the
SL-25E, SL-400, SL-600, SL-65, and SL-75 series) machines, the cycle can be
used only at the center of the spindle since spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are
synchronized. It is not allowed to use a rotary tool holder for this operation.
3 With the CL series machine, this cycle is optional and can be used only at the
center of the spindle.
COMMAND
<XC plane>
M329 S_ ;
G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
<XY plane>
M329 S_ ;
G84 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
<XC plane>
M329 S_ ;
G17 G84.2 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
<XY plane>
M329 S_ ;
G17 G84.2 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
D M329 . . . . . . . . Synchronized tapping command

D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed (min–1)
D G84 . . . . . . . . . Calls the face tapping cycle.

D G84.2 . . . . . . . . Calls the synchronized tapping cycle
hole bottom.
<F15 format>
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . <Feed per minute mode (G98)>

Specifies the feedrate (mm/min).
<Feed per revolution mode (G99)>
Specifies the feedrate (mm/rev).
(pitch)
RESET
stop the machine during a synchronized face tapping operation, carefully move
the axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If
you move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide
1 During the synchronized face tapping cycle called by G84, feedrate override
and spindle speed override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread
cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed is changed during synchronized face
tapping cycle.
2 If the SP
(SP) switch on the operation panel is pressed during synchronized
face tapping cycle, synchronized face tapping cycle does not stop until the
Z-axis returns to the initial point level is completed.
3 To execute the synchronized face tapping cycle on the Y-axis specification TL
series machine and the MC type SL-400 and SL-600 series machines, the
rotary tool spindle must be stopped.
4 To execute the synchronized face tapping cycle on the MC type TL series
machines or the SL and SL-S series machines (excludes the SL-25E, the
SL-400 and the SL-600 series), the commands must be specified in the state
the spindle is stopped.
5 In the synchronized face tapping cycle executed on the Y-axis specification TL
series machine and the MC type SL-400, SL-600 and VL-55 series machines,
it is not necessary to use a tapper since the Z-axis feed is synchronized with
the rotation of the rotary tool spindle.
6 In the synchronized face tapping cycle executed on the MC type TL series
machine or the SL and SL-S series machines (excludes the SL-25E, the
SL-400 and the SL-600 series), it is not necessary to use a tapper since the
Z-axis feed is synchronized with the rotation of the spindle.
7 With the SL-400, SL-600, and VL-55 series machines, specify the M39
command in a block without other commands or specify a T command to
engage the rotary tool clutch before specifying “M329 S_”. If synchronized
face tapping cycle is executed without specifying the M39 command or a T
command, the rotary tool spindle does not rotate since the clutch is not
engaged.
8 With the MC type VL-55 machine, there is a spindle speed limit (1000 min–1)
that can be used in the synchronized tapping cycle.
Programming using M329 G84 (Synchronized face tapping cycle)
To carry out the synchronized face tapping cycle (M329 G84) (pitch: 2 mm, depth: 20
mm) at points 1 to 6 . (XC plane) (Y-axis specification TL series machine or MC type
SL-400 and SL-600 series machines)
90°
Z30.0
(Initial point)
2
Normal rotation
Z15.0
20 (Point R)
C0
4 Movement by M329 G84 at 1 - 6

Cutting feed
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G98 (G99); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the feed per minute mode
The command in ( ) is for the feed per
revolution mode.
G00 T0101;
G97; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the constant spindle speed control
The rotary tool spindle is stopped.
M329 S300; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the synchronized tapping cycle

G84 Z–_ R–15.0 F600 (F2.0); . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized face tapping cycle
(M329 G84) at point 1
1 Feedrate F = Spindle speed (min–1)
Pitch (mm)
= 300 2 = 600 (mm/min)
For the Z-axis point, specify
“Z – (20 + tap engaging length)”
2 In the movement from the initial point to

the point R, the rotary tool spindle is
stopped.

revolution mode.
Feedrate F = Pitch (mm)
C90.0;
C150.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized face tapping cycle
C210.0; (M329 G84) at points 2 to 6
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the synchronized face tapping cycle
mode (M329 G84)
This command is necessary only for the
feed per minute mode.
M01;
...
6. G85 Face Boring Cycle
The face boring cycle carries out drilling in the –Z

direction and returns the tool at a cutting feedrate.
Return movement from the hole bottom to

the point R is executed at the feedrate two
Point R
times the specified cutting feedrate.
Initial point The G85 face boring cycle is usually used
Dwell for reaming and boring operation.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
COMMAND
<XC plane>
G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G85 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<XC plane>
G17 G89 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<XY plane>
G17 G89 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

D G85, G89 . . . . Calls the face boring cycle.

hole bottom.
<F15 format>
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

With the F15 format, when omitting address P, specify the G85 command instead
of the G89 command.
Programming using G85 (Face boring cycle)
To carry out the face boring cycle (G85) at points 1 to 6 . (XC plane)
90°
Rapid traverse
2 Cutting feed
150° 3 1 30°
C0
15
Z3.0 Z30.0
4
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G85 Z–15.0 R–27.0 P100 F100; . . . . . Executing the face boring cycle (G85) at point 1

for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face boring cycle (G85) at
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the face boring cycle (G85)
M01;
...
7. G87 Side Drilling Cycle
The G87 side drilling cycle provides the following four hole machining canned cycles.
– Side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle
– Side deep hole drilling cycle
– Side spot drilling cycle
– Side spot drilling cycle (dwell)
7.1 G87 Side High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

In the G87 side high-speed deep hole drilling
Initial point
cycle, drilling is executed in intermittent axis feed
with a fixed depth of cut.
Point R As shown in the illustration in the left, after the
Q
infeed of a drill by “Q”, it is returned by “d”, then
d the next infeed is repeated.
Q
Q
Dwell Set “0” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the
Rapid traverse side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle
Drilling (setting made before shipping the machine).
(Cutting feed)
When carrying out drilling on mild or tough
workpieces, long chips are apt to entangle
on the drill. In such operation, this mode of
drilling cycle is used to break chips.
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
G19 G83.1 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G19 G83.1 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

D G19 . . . . . . . . . Selects the machining plane (ZC, ZY plane).

The X-axis is used as the hole machining axis.
D G87, G83.1 . . . Calls the side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle.
hole bottom (in diameter).
the point R (in radius) (incremental command).
<F15 format>
Specifies the point R position (in diameter) (absolute
command).
value, in radius).
decimal point.
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

1 The return amount “d” is set for parameter No. 5114.

Programming using G87 (Side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle)
To carry out the side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G87) at points 1 to 6 . (ZC
plane)
Set “0” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
210° 4 330°
270_
X160.0 (Initial point)
X106.0 (Point R)
5 X100.0
5
d
17
5
5
X66.0
Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 sec Rapid traverse
Movement by G87 at 1 - 6 Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
X160.0 Z–30.0 C30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 (Z–30.0, C30.0) and initial
point (X160.0) at a rapid traverse rate
G87 X66.0 R–27.0 Q5000 P100 F100;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side high-speed deep hole drilling
cycle (G87) at point 1
D X66.0 . . . . . . . . . X coordinate value of the
point X (hole bottom)
(in radius)
motion: 5 mm
for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0 Q5000;
C150.0 Q5000;
C210.0 Q5000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side high-speed deep hole drilling
C270.0 Q5000; cycle (G87) at points 2 to 6
C330.0 Q5000;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the side high-speed deep hole drilling
cycle mode (G87)
M01;
...
7.2 G87 Side Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

In the G87 side deep hole drilling cycle, drilling is
Initial point
executed in intermittent axis feed with a fixed
depth of cut.
Point R As shown in the illustration in the left, after the
infeed of a drill by “Q”, the drill is returned to the
Q
point R at a rapid traverse rate. In the next infeed,
d
Q the drill is moved to the point which is above the
depth drilled in the previous operation by clearance
Q amount “d” at a rapid traverse rate, then it is fed by
Q”.
Dwell
Rapid traverse
Drilling
(Cutting feed) excessive force to the drill.
Set “1” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the

side deep hole drilling cycle.
When carrying out drilling a deep hole where
coolant cannot be supplied satisfactorily or
drilling a workpiece which generates
entangling chips, this drilling pattern can be
effectively used.
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
G19 G83 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G19 G83 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;


D G87, G83 . . . . Calls the side deep hole drilling cycle.

<F15 format>
command).
value, in radius).
decimal point.
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

1 The clearance amount “d” is set for parameter No. 5114.

Programming using G87 (Side deep hole drilling cycle)
To carry out the side deep hole drilling cycle (G87) at points 1 to 6 . (ZC plane)
Set “1” for parameter No. 5101.2 to use the side deep hole drilling cycle (setting
made before shipping the machine).
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
210° 4 330°
270_
X106.0 (Point R)
X100.0
5
5
d
17
5
5
X66.0
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G87 X66.0 R–27.0 Q5000 P100 F100;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side deep hole drilling cycle (G87) at
point 1
(in radius)
motion: 5 mm
for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0 Q5000;
C150.0 Q5000;
C210.0 Q5000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side deep hole drilling cycle (G87) at
C270.0 Q5000; points 2 to 6
C330.0 Q5000;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the side deep hole drilling cycle mode
(G87)
M01;
...
7.3 G87 Side Spot Drilling Cycle

The side spot drilling cycle is a simple cycle in
Initial point
which drilling is carried out in the –X direction and
then the cutting tool is returned at a rapid traverse
rate.
Point R
The G87 side spot drilling cycle is used for
machining a center hole by a centering drill
or drilling of comparatively shallow hole.
Rapid traverse
Drilling
(Cutting feed)
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
G19 G81 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G19 G81 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;

D G87, G81 . . . . Calls the side spot drilling cycle.

<F15 format>
command).
Programming using G87 (Side spot drilling cycle)
To carry out the side spot drilling cycle (G87) at points 1 to 6 . (ZC plane)
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
210° 4 330°
270_
X106.0 (Point R)
X100.0
X90.0
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G87 X90.0 R–27.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side spot drilling cycle (G87) at
point 1
(in radius)
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side spot drilling cycle (G87) at
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the side spot drilling cycle mode (G87)
M01;
...
7.4 G87 Side Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)

The side spot drilling cycle (dwell) carries out
Initial point
drilling in the –X direction and returns the tool at a
Point R In the G87 side spot drilling cycle (dwell), accuracy

of hole depth in the blind hole machining is
improved and surface roughness at the hole
bottom is improved as well since dwell is carried
out at the hole bottom.
The term “dwell” means suspension of axis

Dwell
movement for the specified period.
Rapid traverse
Drilling
(Cutting feed)
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G87 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
G19 G82 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G19 G82 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

D G87, G82 . . . . Calls the side spot drilling cycle (dwell).

<F15 format>
command).
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec
Programming using G87 (Side spot drilling cycle (dwell))
To carry out the side spot drilling cycle (dwell) (G87) at points 1 to 6 . (ZC plane)
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
210° 4 330°
270_
X106.0 (Point R)
X100.0
X90.0

O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G87 X90.0 R–27.0 P100 F100; . . . . . . Executing the side spot drilling cycle (dwell) (G87)
at point 1
(in radius)
for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side spot drilling cycle (dwell) (G87)
C270.0; at points 2 to 6
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the side spot drilling cycle (dwell) mode
(G87)
M01;
...
8. G88 Side Tapping Cycle
Initial point The G88 side tapping cycle is used for machining
Spindle normal thread using a tap.
rotation after dwell
Spindle normal
rotation When a cutting tool rotating in the normal direction
Point R
reaches the specified bottom position, the cutting
tool rotating direction is reversed automatically to
return to the specified level.
To use this side tapping cycle, a tapper is

used.
Spindle reverse
rotation after dwell
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
G88 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G88 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
G19 G84 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G19 G84 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

D G88, G84 . . . . Calls the side tapping cycle.

<F15 format>
command).
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

1 For the side tapping cycle called by G88, a tapper is used. In this case,
machining position.
2 When the emergency stop button or (RESET) key has been pressed
RESET
to stop the machine during a tapping operation, carefully move the axes
after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you
move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide
1 During the side tapping cycle called by G88, feedrate override and spindle
feedrate or spindle speed is changed during side tapping cycle.
2 If the SP
(SP) switch on the operation panel is pressed during side tapping
cycle, side tapping cycle does not stop until the X-axis returns to the initial
point level is completed.
Programming using G88 (Side tapping cycle)
To carry out the side tapping cycle (G88) (pitch: 2 mm, depth: 20 mm) at points 1 to 6 .
(ZC plane)
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
6
210° 4 330°
270_

X130.0 (Point R)
X100.0
Normal Reverse
20
rotation rotation
X60.0

O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G88 X_ R–15.0 P500 F600; . . . . . . . . . Executing the side tapping cycle (G88) at point 1
Tapping is executed up to 20 mm depth.
Feedrate F = Spindle speed (min–1)
Pitch (mm)
= 300 2 = 600 (mm/min)
For the X-axis point, specify
“X (100 – 2
(20 – tapper elongation in normal rotation +
tap engaging length))”.
For dwell period P, refer to page I–77.
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side tapping cycle (G88) at
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the side tapping cycle mode (G88)
M01;
...
9. M329 G88 Synchronized Side Tapping Cycle
Initial point When executing the tapping operation, X- or Z-axis

feed amount per rotary tool spindle rotation must
Spindle
rotation stop
Spindle rotation be equal to the pitch of the thread to be cut.
stop after dwell
Spindle
normal rotation
With the synchronized side tapping cycle, accurate
Point R
since the rotation of the rotary tool spindle rotation
and the X-axis feed are constantly synchronized.
This cycle can be used only for the Y-axis

Spindle reverse specification TL series machine and the MC
Spindle
rotation stop
rotation after dwell type SL-400 and SL-600 series machines.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
M329 S_ ;
G88 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
<ZY plane>
M329 S_ ;
G88 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
M329 S_ ;
G19 G84.2 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
<ZY plane>
M329 S_ ;
G19 G84.2 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
D M329 . . . . . . . . Synchronized tapping command
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed (min–1)
D G88 . . . . . . . . . Calls the side tapping cycle.

D G84.2 . . . . . . . . Calls the synchronized tapping cycle
<F15 format>
command).
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . <Feed per minute mode (G98)>

Specifies the feedrate (mm/min).
<Feed per revolution mode (G99)>
Specifies the feedrate (mm/rev).
(pitch)
RESET
stop the machine during a synchronized side tapping operation, carefully move
the axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If
you move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide
1 During the synchronized side tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle
feedrate or spindle speed is changed during synchronized side tapping cycle.
2 If the SP
(SP) switch on the operation panel is pressed during synchronized
side tapping cycle, synchronized side tapping cycle does not stop until the
X-axis returns to the initial point level is completed.
3 Call the synchronized side tapping cycle in the state the rotary tool spindle is
stopped.
4 Since the rotary tool spindle rotation and X-axis feed are synchronized in the
synchronized side tapping mode, it is not necessary to use a tapper.
5 With the SL-400, SL-600, and VL-55 series machines, specify the M39
command in a block without other commands or specify a T command to
engage the rotary tool clutch before specifying “M329 S_”. If synchronized
face tapping cycle is executed without specifying the M39 command or a T
command, the rotary tool spindle does not rotate since the clutch is not
engaged.
6 With the MC type VL-55 machine, there is a spindle speed limit (1000 min–1)
that can be used in the synchronized tapping cycle.
Programming using M329 G88 (Synchronized side tapping cycle)
To carry out the synchronized side tapping cycle (M329 G88) (pitch: 2 mm, depth:
20 mm) at points 1 to 6 . (ZC plane)
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
6
210° 4 330°
270_

X130.0 (Point R)
X100.0
Normal Reverse
20
rotation rotation
X60.0

Movement by M329 G88 at 1 - 6 Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G98 (G99); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the feed per minute mode
revolution mode.
G00 T0101;
M329 S300; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the synchronized tapping cycle

G88 X_ R–15.0 F600 (F2.0); . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized side tapping cycle
(M329 G88) at point 1
1 Feedrate F = Spindle speed (min–1)

Pitch (mm)
= 300 2 = 600 (mm/min)
For the X-axis point, specify
“X (100 – 2 (20 + tap engaging
length))”
2 In the movement from the initial point to

the point R, the rotary tool spindle is
stopped.

revolution mode.
Feedrate F = Pitch (mm)
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized side tapping cycle
C270.0; (M329 G88) at points 2 to 6
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the synchronized side tapping cycle
mode (M329 G88)
This command is necessary only for the
feed per minute mode.
M01;
...
10. G89 Side Boring Cycle
Initial point
The side boring cycle carries out drilling in the –X
direction and returns the tool at a cutting feedrate.
Return movement from the hole bottom to

Point R the point R is executed at the feedrate twice
the specified cutting feedrate.
The G89 side boring cycle is usually used
for reaming and boring operation.
Dwell
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
COMMAND
<ZC plane>
G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G89 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

2. F15 format
<ZC plane>
G19 G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

<ZY plane>
G19 G89 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;

D G89 . . . . . . . . . Calls the side boring cycle.

<F15 format>
command).
bottom.
P1000 ³ 1 sec

With the F15 format, when omitting address P, specify the G85 command instead
of the G89 command.
Programming using G89 (Side boring cycle)
To carry out the side boring cycle (G89) at points 1 to 6 . (ZC plane)
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
∅100
+Z C0
210° 4 330°
270_
X106.0 (Point R)
X100.0
15
X70.0

O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G89 X70.0 R–27.0 P100 F100; . . . . . . Executing the side boring cycle (G89) at point 1

(in radius)
for 0.1 sec
time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
one turn.
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the side boring cycle (G89) at
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the side boring cycle (G89)
M01;
...
11. G384, G380 Synchronized Tapping Cycle
Initial point When executing the tapping operation, X- or Z-axis

feed amount per rotary tool spindle rotation must
Spindle
rotation stop
Spindle rotation be equal to the pitch of the thread to be cut.
stop after dwell
Spindle
normal rotation
When the G384 command is specified, accurate
Point R
since the rotation of the rotary tool spindle and the
Z-axis feed are constantly synchronized.
The synchronized tapping cycle is canceled when

Spindle reverse the G380 command is specified.
Spindle rotation after dwell
rotation stop The G384 and G380 commands can be
Rapid traverse used only for the MC type or Y-axis
Cutting feed
specification SL and SL-S series (excludes
SL-400, SL-600, SL-65, and SL-75 series)
machines.
COMMAND
1. Synchronized face tapping cycle
<XC plane>
G384 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_

R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T2.(T3.);
<XY plane>
G384 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_

R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T2.(T3.);
G380;
2. Synchronized side tapping cycle
<ZC plane>
G384 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_

R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T1.(T4.);
<ZY plane>
G384 Z(W)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_

R_ F_ S_ D_ E_ M_ T1.(T4.);
G380;
D G384 . . . . . . . . Specifies the synchronized tapping cycle.

D G380 . . . . . . . . Cancels the synchronized tapping cycle.
D X, Z, C, Y . . . . Absolute command
<Synchronized face tapping cycle>
X, C . . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole machining positions.
X, Y . . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole machining positions.
Z . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole bottom position.
<Synchronized side tapping cycle>
Z, C . . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole machining positions.
X, Y . . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole machining positions.
X . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole bottom position.
D U, W, H, V . . . . Incremental command
<Synchronized face tapping cycle>
U, H . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from
the end point of the previous block to the
hole position.
U, V . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from
hole position.
W . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from
the point R to the hole bottom.
<Synchronized side tapping cycle>
W, H . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from
hole position.
W, V . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from
hole position.
U . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from
the point R to the hole bottom.
D R . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the point R position (absolute command).
D F . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the pitch (mm).
D S . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the spindle speed for infeed (min–1).
D D . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the spindle speed for tool retraction (min–1).
D E . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the in-position check.
E0. . . . . . . . . . . In-position check valid
E1. . . . . . . . . . . In-position check invalid
D M . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the spindle brake clamp.
M68. . . . . . . . . Spindle or spindle 1 brake clamp
M268. . . . . . . . Spindle 2 brake clamp
D T . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the direction of tapping.

<SL series>
T1. . . . . . . . . . . X-axis direction
(side tapping <right thread>)
T2. . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis direction
(face tapping <right thread>)
T3. . . . . . . . . . . Z-axis direction (face tapping <left thread>)
T4. . . . . . . . . . . X-axis direction (side tapping <left thread>)
<SL-S series>*1
T2. . . . . . . . . . . <Spindle 1>
Z-axis direction
<Spindle 2>
Z-axis direction (face tapping <left thread>)
T3. . . . . . . . . . . <Spindle 1>
Z-axis direction (face tapping <left thread>)
<Spindle 2>
Z-axis direction
T4. . . . . . . . . . . X-axis direction (side tapping <left thread>)
<SL-S series>*2
(side tapping <left thread>)
T2. . . . . . . . . . . <Spindle 1>
Z-axis direction
(face tapping <left thread>)
<Spindle 2>
Z-axis direction
T3. . . . . . . . . . . <Spindle 1>
Z-axis direction
<Spindle 2>
Z-axis direction
(face tapping <left thread>)
*1: If direction of rotation is registered as “X” or “Z” on
the ROTARY TOOL screen.
*2: If direction of rotation is registered as “X ” or
“Z ” on the ROTARY TOOL screen.
When the emergency stop button or RESET

(RESET) key has been pressed to
stop the machine during a synchronized tapping operation, carefully move the
axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you
move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or
interfere with each other, and this could damage the machine.
1 During synchronized tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed
override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if
feedrate or spindle speed is changed during synchronized tapping cycle.
2 The dry run function is invalid during the execution of a synchronized tapping
cycle.
3 To specify a synchronized tapping cycle, it is necessary to stop the rotary tool
spindle.
4 Since the rotary tool spindle rotation and X- or Z-axis feed are synchronized in
the synchronized tapping mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
5 The G384 command must be specified in all blocks that call for a synchronized
tapping cycle. The synchronized tapping cycle is not executed unless the
G384 command is specified. In the second and subsequent synchronized
tapping cycle call blocks, specify only the positions where the cycle is
executed. These blocks must not include addresses R, F, S, D, E, M, and T.
6 When specifying the synchronized tapping cycle, it is not allowed to specify the
number of repetition times.
7 After the execution of a synchronized tapping cycle by specifying the G384
command, cancel the synchronized tapping cycle by specifying the G380
command. If a hole machining canned cycle other than the synchronized
tapping cycle is specified without canceling the synchronized tapping cycle by
specifying the G380 command, an alarm message (3041) is displayed on the
screen. It is not allowed to index the turret by a T command during the
8 If the hole bottom position is specified using an incremental command, the
following value must be specified.
With an R command . . . . . . . . . Distance and direction from the point R to the
hole bottom
Without an R command . . . . . . . Distance and direction from the initial point to
the hole bottom
9 If address D is not specified, the spindle speed specified by address S which is
applied for infeed operation is also applied to the tool retraction movement.
10 If address E is not specified, in-position check becomes valid during the
11 If the M68. or M268. command is not specified, spindle brake clamp operation
is not executed.
12 Use the data with a decimal point for all addresses specified in the G384 block.
13 Alarms related to the synchronized tapping cycle are indicated below.
Alarm No. Message Description

3041 CYCLE NOT FINISH After specifying G384, other type of
synchronized tapping cycle is specified
without specifying G380.
3042 ILLEGAL COMMAND There is an error in arguments.
Check the arguments specified in the
G384 block.
3043 TOO MANY ADDRESS In the designation of synchronized
tapping cycle positions, both absolute
and incremental address characters
are specified for the same axis.
Programming using G384 and G380
To carry out the synchronized tapping cycle (G384) (pitch: 2 mm, depth: 20 mm) at points
1 to 6 . (XC plane)

90°
Z30.0
(Initial point)
2
Normal rotation
Z15.0
20 (Point R)
C0
4 Movement by G384 at 1 - 6

Cutting feed
5 P.C.D 150
270_
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G384 Z–25.0 R15.0 F2.0 S300. D600. (E0.) M68. T2.;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
at point 1
Z = – (depth of tap + tap
engaging length)
= – (20 + 5)
= – 25 mm
D R15.0 . . . . . . . . . Position of R point
D F2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch: 2 mm
D S300. . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed for infeed:
300 min–1
D D600. . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed for tool
retraction: 600min–1
D (E0.) . . . . . . . . . . In-position check valid
D M68. . . . . . . . . . . Spindle or spindle 1 brake
clamp
D T2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction of tapping
In the movement from the initial point to the
point R, the rotary tool spindle is stopped.
G384 C90.0;
G384 C150.0;
G384 C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
G384 C270.0; at points 2 to 6
G384 C330.0;
G380; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
M01;
...
12. Cautions on Programming Using G84 and G88
12.1 Dwell Command

The following explains in what situation the dwell command should be used in the G84
face tapping cycle and the G88 side tapping cycle.
Dwell To Be Specified Not Required

Blind hole Through hole
Tap hole shape
Tapper Built-in depth sizing device No special restriction

Tapper is pulled into the hole Tapper is extended from the feed
from the feed stop point of Z- or stop point of Z- or X-axis.
X-axis by the amount of tapper Tapper has allowance to extend
extension. When the tapper is 20 to 30 mm. But, actual
Tapper extension extended by the set amount, the extension amount cannot be
amount depth sizing device built in the judged.
tapper functions and rotation is
not transmitted to the tap, then
tapping of specified depth is
carried out.
12.2 Precautions on Using the Tapper

When carrying out tapping in a through hole, extension of tapper tip at the hole bottom can
be ignored. However, in the case of a blind hole, if the tapper should extend beyond the
depth of the prepared hole, it will cause the tap to be damaged.
To avoid such a problem, use the tapper with built-in depth sizing device for tapping a blind
hole.
The following distances of F1, F2, and F3 are specified in the catalog of the tapper with
built-in depth sizing device.
F3 F2 F1
Necessary if the tap fails to be engaged with the workpiece

F1 Contraction
positively at the start of tapping.
Extension amount at the hole bottom. This is an extension
F2 Extension amount
amount of a tapper in normal spindle rotation.
Extension amount This is the extension amount when the tapper leaves the
F3 when the tap is workpiece while the spindle is rotating in the reverse
pulled out. direction.
12.3 To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole

When machining a threaded hole with the tapper equipped with depth sizing device, obtain
the point R and the point of the hole bottom to be specified in a program as indicated
below:
The explanation given below shows the theoretical value. The depth of tapped hole
will vary depending on workpiece material and prepared hole diameter in actual
operation.
– Position of point R
Standard format F15 format

G84 R > F2 + F3 – “initial point” R > F2 + F3
G88 R > F2 + F3 R > “Machining diameter”
– (“initial point” – “machining diameter”) / 2 + 2 (F2 + F3)
– Hole bottom position
Standard format, F15 format

G84 Z = – (“Depth of tap specified in the drawing” – F2 + “tap engaging length”)
G88 X = “Machining diameter” – 2 (“depth of tap specified in the drawing” – F2
+ “tap engaging length”)
F2: Extension amount at normal rotation
F3: Extension amount at reverse rotation

To carry out tapping of M8 P = 1.25, and 20 mm deep threaded hole in the face tapping
cycle (G84).
Prepared hole: 6.8 mm dia., depth 30 mm

Tapper to be used: F2 (extension amount at normal rotation) = 5 mm,
F3 (extension amount at reverse rotation) = 7 mm

...
G97 S300 M13; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the rotary tool spindle in the

normal direction at 300 min–1
Z30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at initial point (Z30.0) at a rapid
traverse rate
G84 X_ C_ Z–20.0 R–15.0 P800 F375; . . . . . . Executing the face tapping cycle (G84)
D Z–20.0 . . . . . . . Z = – (“Depth of tap” – F2 + “tap engaging length”)
= – (20 – 5 + 5) = –20 (mm)
D R15.0 . . . . . . . R > F2 + F3 – “initial point”
F2 + F3 – “initial point”
= 5 + 7 – 30 = –18 (mm)
Because the value to be set for the point R must be larger than
–18 mm, R–15.0 is specified.
D F375 . . . . . . . . F = Spindle speed (min–1) pitch (mm)
= 300 1.25
= 375 (mm/min)
60 (sec) F2
D P800 . . . . . . . . Dwell =
F (mm/min)
60 5
=
375
= 0.8 (sec)
Executing the dwell to allow the tapper to extend F2 (extension amount in normal
rotation) set by the depth sizing device.
...
CHAPTER J
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
B FUNCTION (OPTION)
This chapter describes the tool life management B function. The tool life management B
function automatically selects an available tool in a registered tool group if the tool called in
the same group has been used to the preset life.
Standard for MSC-500 and MSC-501.

CONTENTS
J : TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION)
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–1
2. Setting the Tool Life Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–2

2.1 Setting the Tool Life Data by Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–2
2.1.1 Tool Life Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–2
2.1.2 Tool Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–5
2.2 Setting the Tool Life Data in Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–8
2.3 Registering the Data Using External I/O Device ]
(F-25D, F-30, F-200D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–9
3. Specification in Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12

3.1 T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
3.2 Group Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
3.3 Life Count M Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
4. Counting the Tool Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–13
5. Skip Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–14
6. State Flag Clear Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–14
7. New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–15
7.1 New Tool Selection Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–15
7.2 Tool Life Expired Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–15
8. Reading the Tool Life Management Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–16
9. Reading the PMC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–18
10. Alarm Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–20
11. Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–21

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION) J–1
1. General
If a tool, registered as a group tool, has been used to the preset life (life-expiration status),
the function selects a spare tool in the same group.
Standard for MSC-500 and MSC-501.
The tool usable life (tool life data) and the registration number of tools are shown below.
<The tool usable life (tool life data)>
Number of machined Length of tool use time

Item
workpieces (tool use count) (tool used time)
Unit Times Minutes
Setting range 1 - 99999 times 1 - 99999 minutes
<The registration number of tools>
NC unit MSC-501, MSC-518, MSG-501 MSC-500

MSD-501, MSD-518,
MSD-501II, MSD-518II
Number of tools in a group 10 tools 10 tools
Number of groups 64 groups (Max.) 12 groups (Max.)
1 Although the number of registration groups can be changed in the range of the
maximum number of groups, it is necessary to clear the tool life data after
changing the number of registration groups.
2 Tape storage length is not influenced even when the number of registration
groups is changed.
J–2 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION)
2. Setting the Tool Life Data
This section describes the method of setting the tool life data.
2.1 Setting the Tool Life Data by Manual Operation

The tool life data can be set manually using the TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT screen,
TOOL DETAIL screen, etc. given below.
2.1.1 Tool Life Management Screen
[TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT] PAGE : 01/08
GROUP TYPE SET CURRENT SEL-T REST
01 TIMES 00300 00047 T0101 03

02 TIMES 00150 00053 T0606 01
03 MINUTE 00120 00060 T0707 10
04 MINUTE 00300 00060 T0404 05
05 TIMES 00120 00015 T1111 03
06 MINUTE 00100 00025 T0808 ::
07 MINUTE 00150 00050 T0303 04

08 TIMES 00200 00100 T1212 04
NUM=>1-
EDIT :::: ::: ::: 00 : 00 : 00
EXIT G. SRCH DETAIL TYPE SKIP
For the procedure used for displaying the TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT screen,
refer to the OPERATION MANUAL separately provided.
<Contents of display>
On the tool life management screen, the information related with the tool life management
function is displayed for the registered tool groups. In one page of the tool life
management function screen, the following information is displayed for eight groups:
GROUP/TYPE/SET/CURRENT/SEL-T/REST.
The display items are briefly explained below.
Item Contents
GROUP Display of tool group number
MSC-500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
MSC-501, 518, MSG-501, . . . . . . . . 1 - 64
MSD-501, 518, 501II, 518II . . . . . . . 1 - 64
TYPE Display of the selected tool life counting condition for the individual
groups (UNDEC., TIMES, MINUTE)
SET Display of the initial setting of tool life data
CURRENT Display of the present counted tool life data
SEL-T Display of the tool number of the tool presently used (“IN USE”
status) in each group, or the tool number of the tool to be called
by the next T command
REST Display of the number of available tools in each group, excepting
the tool assigned as “IN USE”.
If “::” is displayed in this column, it indicates that all tools in that
group have been used to the life.
<Key operation>
1 Cursor control keys
The cursor control keys are used to move the cursor. The
cursor can be moved to the data field of SET and CURRENT items for all displayed
tool groups.
2 Page selection keys
The PAGE selection keys and are used to change the display page (range
of display tool groups).
The present page and the total number of pages are displayed at the upper right area
of the screen.
3 Soft-keys
The function of the soft-keys are explained below.
Soft-keys Functions
[ EXIT ] When the [ EXIT ] soft-key is pressed, the screen returns to the
PCMDI MENU screen.
[ G. SRCH ] When the [ G. SRCH ] soft-key is pressed after inputting the
group number to be searched, the cursor moves to the specified
group.
[ DETAIL ] When the [ DETAIL ] soft-key is pressed, the TOOL DETAIL
screen of the present cursor located group is displayed.
For details of the TOOL DETAIL screen, refer to page
J–5 (2.1.2).
[ TYPE ] To change the tool life counting conditions of the selected group,
press the [ TYPE ] soft-key. It is not allowed to change the tool
life counting condition while the machine is operating by pressing
the automatic operation switch (cycle start).
For details of the tool life counting condition change

procedure, refer to <Changing tool life counting
conditions> below.
[ SKIP ] To skip the “IN USE” tool, press the [ SKIP ] soft-key. The “IN
USE” tool in the cursor located group is skipped.
For the group in which no “IN USE” tool exists,processing
is not executed.
[ I/O ] When the [ I/O ] soft-key is pressed, the LIFE MANAGEMENT
DATA I/O screen is displayed.
When the NC unit is an MSC-500, as the input/output
function of tool life management data is not provided, the
[ I/O ] soft-key is not displayed.
For details of the LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA I/O
screen, refer to page J–9 (2.3).
<Inputting and outputting the data>
It is possible to input and output the set tool life data and the present counted tool life data.
1) Move the cursor to the data field of SET or CURRENT item using the cursor control
keys.
2) Input the data by data entry keys.
1 Data input range is from 0 to 99999.
2 It is not allowed to input the set tool life data or the present counted life data
while the machine is operating by the pressing the automatic operation switch
(cycle start).
3 Data cannot be input for SEL-T and REST.
3) Press the INPUT

(INPUT) key.
<Changing the tool life counting condition>
1) Move the cursor to the data field of TYPE item of the group for which the tool life
counting condition is required to be changed.
2) Press the [ TYPE ] soft-key.
The soft-key display is changed and the message “IF CHANGING THE [ TYPE ],
DATA IS CLEARED.” is displayed.
3) Press the soft-key ([ UNDEC. ], [ TIMES ], [ MINUTE ]) corresponding to the required

tool life counting condition.
The other data (SET, CURRENT, tool numbers of registered tools) of that group is
initialized.
4) Press the [ CANCEL ] soft-key.

The screen is returned to the previous screen.
If the life condition is changed, the screen returns to the previous screen
automatically.
2.1.2 Tool Detail Screen
[TOOL DETAIL]
ENTRY NO. TOOL NO. STATE
01 _T0101 IN USE
GROUP 02 T0202 LIFE
03 T0303 USABLE
[ TYPE ] 04 T0404 USABLE
TIMES 05 T0505 SKIP
06 T0606 LIFE
[ SET ] 07 T0707 LIFE
00300 08 T0808 SKIP
[ CURRENT ] 09 T0909 USABLE
00047 10 T1010 LIFE
NUM=>1-
EDIT :::: ::: ::: 00 : 00 : 00
RETURN
EXIT G. SRCH DETAIL STATE
TYPE G.SKIP
RSET
For the procedure used for displaying the TOOL DETAIL screen, refer to the
<Contents of display>
On the TOOL DETAIL screen, tool numbers of the tools registered to each group are
displayed along with the present status of these tools. “TYPE”, “SET” and “CURRENT”
are also displayed.
<Key operation>
1 Cursor control keys
The cursor control keys and are used to move the cursor. The cursor can
be moved only vertically and the cursor cannot be moved horizontally.
2 Page selection keys
The display page (tool group) is changed by pressing the PAGE selection keys
and .
3 Soft-keys
The functions of soft-keys are explained below.
Soft-keys Functions
[ RETURN ] When the [ RETURN ] soft-key is pressed, the screen returns to
the TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT screen.
[ G. SRCH ] When the [ G. SRCH ] soft-key is pressed after inputting the
group number to be searched, the cursor moves to the specified
group.
[ STATE ] To change the state of a registered tool, press the [ STATE ]
soft-key.
The state can be changed while the machine is operating by
pressing the automatic operation switch (cycle start).
For details of state changing procedure, refer to

<Changing the tool state> below.
[ G. RSET ] When the [ G. RSET ] soft-key is pressed, the state of the tools
registered to the displayed tool group is all cleared to “USABLE”
state.
The tool state cannot be cleared while the machine is
operating by pressing the automatic operation switch
(cycle start).
<Inputting the data>
It is possible to input the tool number (TOOL NO.).
1) Move the cursor to the tool number which should be changed using the cursor control
keys.
2) Input the data by data entry keys.
1 Data input range is “0 - 9999”.
2 It is not allowed to input a tool number while the machine is operating by
pressing the automatic operation switch (cycle start).
3 When a tool number other than “0” is input, the tool state is changed to
“USABLE”.
4 If “0” is input, it is changed to “– – – –”.
3) Press the INPUT

(INPUT) key.
<Changing the tool state>
1) Move the cursor to the tool state which should be changed using the cursor control
keys.
2) Press the [ STATE ] soft-key. The-soft key display changes.
3) Press the soft-key of the required tool state ([ USABLE ], [ LIFE ]).
The state of the cursor specified tool state is changed to the selected state.
4) Press the [ CANCEL ] soft-key.

The screen returns to the previously displayed screen.
When the state is changed, the screen automatically returns to the previous screen.
1 When changing the state, it is allowed to change the state only to “USABLE” or
“LIFE”. For the tool for which the state is “IN USE”, it is not allowed to change
the state.
2 For the tool group in which all tools have been used to the set life, it is not
allowed to change the state. To restore the operation after changing the tools,
press the [ G. RSET ] soft-key to initialize the tool data.
2.2 Setting the Tool Life Data in Program

For each tool group, it is possible to register the tools and the tool life data in a program
by using the format indicated below.
COMMAND
G334 F_.;
A_. B_. C_.;
T_.;
G335;
D G334 . . . . . . . . Registration mode ON (modal G code)
D G335 . . . . . . . . Registration mode OFF (modal cancel)
D F. . . . . . . . . . . . Selects initialization mode at tool registration.
F0. . . . At registration, initialization is made for none of
groups.
F1. . . . At registration, initialization is made for all groups.
D A. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a tool group number.
Range: 1 - number of used groups
D B. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies tool life counting condition.
B1. . . . Time
B2. . . . Minutes
D C. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies initial data.

Range: 1 - 99999
D T. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies registration tool number.
Setting the tool life data
O0001;
G334 F1.; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning on the tool life data registration mode
A1. B1. C100.; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group number “1”, tool life counting by “times”,
and set tool life is “100”.
T101.;
T202.;
T303.;
A2. B2. C300.; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group number “2”, tool life counting by “minutes”,
and set tool life is “300”.
T404.;
T505.;
G335; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning off the tool life data registration mode
M30;
<Operation>
1) Store the program into memory.

2) Press the automatic operation switch (cycle start) in the memory (MEM) mode. The
data in the program is stored in the tool life management area of the memory.
1 In the setting data, the same tool number may appear repeatedly whether in
the same group or in different groups. Combination of upper two digits and
lower two digits of a tool number may be selected as required.
2 Up to 10 tools can be registered. The registered tools are selected in the order
they are specified in the program.
2.3 Registering the Data Using External I/O Device (F-25D, F-30, F-200D)
It is possible to input or output the tool life management data using the RS-232-C interface
at the LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA I/O screen.
When the NC unit is an MSC-500, the input/output function of tool life management
data is not provided.
<Precautions relating to data input/output>
1 This function inputs/outputs the macro variables where the tool life management
information is set.
2 The input/output data is “TYPE”, “SET”, and “TOOL NO.” of the registered tool
groups.
3 When the data is input, the “CURRENT” and “STATE” data are initialized.
4 When the data is input, the present registered data is initialized.
5 The operation is carried out only in the EDIT mode.
<LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA I/O screen>
[LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA I/O]
::: GET I/O DEVICE READY AND :::
::: PRESS [INPUT] OR [OUTPUT] :::
::: SOFT-KEY. :::
NUM=>1-
EDIT :::: ::: ::: 00 : 00 : 00
RETURN
EXIT G. SRCH DETAIL INPUT
TYPE OUTPUT
SKIP
<Operation procedure>
1) Select the EDIT mode using the mode selection switch.

2) Connect the external I/O device through the RS-232-C interface and set it ready.
If input process is attempted while an external I/O device is not ready, the NC
enters the waiting state. If this occurs, the alarm state must be exited by either
turning off the NC power or disconnecting the communication cable.
3) Press the [ INPUT ] or [ OUTPUT ] soft-key.
The message “INPUTTING” or “OUTPUTTING” is displayed in the center of the
screen.
The process is completed when the message “INPUTTING” or “OUTPUTTING” is

disappeared.
While the data is being input or output, it is not allowed to change the screen or
interrupt the input/output process.
4) Press the [ RETURN ] soft-key.
The screen returns to the TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT screen.
<Communication conditions>
Channel 1 (punch panel)

Baudrate 4800
Stop bit 2 bits
Parity None
Output code ISO
<Alarm>
If an error occurs during data communication, the message “COMMUNICATION ERROR”

and error number are displayed. Check the cause of communication error, referring to the
following table.
No. Contents
00001 The line is not opened.
00002 The line is abnormal. (DSR signal is OFF.)
00003 The line is abnormal. (overrun)
00004 The line is abnormal. (receive buffer overflow)
00005 The line is abnormal. (framing error, parity error)
00006 No line option is supported.
00007 The line is busy.
00009 Data format is wrong.
00115 Undefined variable number is specified.
00255 No receive data.
<Data output format>
Macro variables are output in the following format.
%
N11000P 1.000 ² [Group 1, type]
P 300.000 ² [Group 1, set data]
P 101.000 ² [Group 1, registered tool number 1]
...

N11040P 2.000 ² [Group 2, type]
P 200.000 ² [Group 2, set data]
...
(to the final group)

%
The first variable number of No. 1 group is “#11000”, and for the following groups,
the first variable number is incremented by “40” for each group. Pay attention to
change the registered tool using the external I/O device.
Example: No. 2 group #11040
No. 3 group #11080
3. Specification in Machining Program
This section describes the method of specifying the tool life management B function in the
machine program.
3.1 T Command
When the T command is specified as a tool selection T code, the tool life management
function is not executed. In this case, specify the T command as the ordinary command of
tool number and tool offset number.
COMMAND
T_ ;
3.2 Group Command

In response to the tool group number, the function calls a registered tool in the specified
group and manages its life.
In a tool group, tools are called in the order they were registered.
COMMAND
G336 T_.;
D T. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a group number
Range: 1 - Number of used groups
(only registered groups)
3.3 Life Count M Code

When the M300 command is specified, tool life is counted.
COMMAND
M300;
The M300 command must be specified in a block without other commands.
For details, refer to page J–13 (4.).

4. Counting the Tool Life
<When tool life is set in “time”>
1 The counter of the tool group is incremented by “1” for the tool groups called in a
program from the cycle start to the execution of M300. If the same tool group is
specified repeatedly until the execution of M300, counter data is incremented “1”
independent of the number of called times.
2 If the NC enters the reset state before the execution of M300, the counter of the tool
groups used from the cycle start to the reset state of the process program is
incremented “1”. The counter is incremented when the tool group is called; the
function ignores whether or not the called tool is used for cutting.
3 The maximum setting value for “SET” is “99999 times”.
<When tool life is set in “minute”>
1 For the counter of the tool groups which are called in a program from the cycle start to
the execution of M300, the time used in the cutting mode is added. If the same tool
group is specified repeatedly until the execution of M300, total cutting time is added to
the counter of the called tool group.
2 Although setting and display are given in units of “minutes”, actual counting is made in
units of “seconds”.
3 Even if a tool is called, the time spent for single block stop, feed hold, rapid traverse,
dwell and waiting for operation completion is ignored.
4 If the operation is suspended due to axis interlock during the execution of cutting
blocks, such time is added.
5 If the NC enters the reset state before the execution of M300, the cutting time of the
individual tool groups used from the cycle start to the reset state of the process
program is added to the individual counters.
6 The maximum setting value for “SET” is “99999 minutes”.

5. Skip Command
The skip command skips the tool, assigned the “IN USE” state, in the specified tool group.
If there is no “IN USE” state tool in the specified tool group, the skip processing is not
executed.
The “IN USE” tool refers to the tool which was called at least once and it has not
been used to the life.
COMMAND
G337 T_.;
D T. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a tool group number.
6. State Flag Clear Command
The state flag clear command clears the STATE flag of the specified tool group. This
command does not clear the TYPE and SET data and the registered tool numbers.
COMMAND
G338 T_.;
7. New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag
This section describes the new tool selection flag and tool life expired flag.
7.1 New Tool Selection Flag

1 If a new tool is selected in the specified tool group, the new tool selection flag is set
(“1” is set) at the same time the tool group command is executed.
2 This flag can be used to execute the automatic measuring of the offset data of the
newly called tool, for example.
3 The new tool selection flag remains valid until the next group command (G336) or tool
use data count M code (M300) is specified, or until the NC is reset.
4 The new tool selection flag is output to the common variable of custom macro
(option). The variable number where the flag is output is set for PC parameter
“D602”.
If the new tool selection flag is not used or when the optional custom macro is not
supported, setting for D602 should be “D602 = 0”.
7.2 Tool Life Expired Flag

1 If all tools in the specified tool group have been used to the life, the tool life expired
flag is set (“1” is set).
The tool life expired flag cannot be reset to “0” unless the tool life expired state of
all the tools in that group is cleared either by program or by an operation at the
screen.
2 The tool life expired flag is output to the common variable of custom macro (option).
The variable number where the flag is output is set for PC parameter “D604”.
If the tool life expiration flag is not used or when the optional custom macro is not
supported, setting for D604 should be “D604 = 0”.
3 The tool life expired flag is output to PMC, too. The PMC executes the following
processing when it receives the tool life expired flag.
– Displays the message, indicating that tool life has been expired.
– Prohibits execution of automatic operation (set for PC parameter “D134 (bit 6)”).
– Prohibits turret indexing (set for PC parameter “D134 (bit 5)”).

8. Reading the Tool Life Management Information
By the command indicated above, the information of the tool life management is output to
the common variable of custom macro (option). The variable number where the
information of the tool life management is output is set for PC parameter “D606”.
1 If the information of the tool life management read function is not used or
when the optional custom macro is not supported, setting for D606 should be
“D606 = 0”.
2 This function is used only for reading the information. It is not possible to write
the information.
COMMAND
G339 T_. Q_.;

D Q. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies an information number
Range: 1 - 30 (refer to the following for the item numbers)
<Data output format>
For the output format of the item numbers (argument Q), refer to the table given below.
Item 1 0: Undecided
1: Managed by “times”
2: Managed by “minutes”
Item 2 0 - 99999
Item 3 - 12 0 - 9999
Item 13 - 22 0: Usable tool
1: Used tool
2: Life expired tool
3: Skipped tool
Item 23 0 - 99999
Item 24 - 25 0 - 10
Item 26 1 or 0
Item 27 0 - 99999
Item 28 - 29 1 or 0
<Read Information Item Number Table>
Item No. Contents Item No. Contents

01 Tool life count condition 16 State of registered tool number 4
02 Set tool life 17 State of registered tool number 5
03 Registered tool number 1 18 State of registered tool number 6
08 Registered tool number 6 23 Present counted tool life
09 Registered tool number 7 24 Selected tool number
(Registered tool number of the
presently selected tool)
10 Registered tool number 8 25 Remaining number of registered
tools
(The total number of usable tools in
the specified tool group)
11 Registered tool number 9 26 Execution flag
(“1” if the specified tool is called in
the presently executed program)
12 Registered tool number 10 27 Accumulated cutting time (minutes)
(Total length of cutting time the tool
in the specified group has been
used)
13 State of registered tool number 1 28 Life expired flag
(“1” if tool life of all tools in the
specified group has been expired.)
14 State of registered tool number 2 29 Life annunciation flag
(“1” if a new tool is selected when
the tool group is specified next)
15 State of registered tool number 3 30 Spare
9. Reading the PMC Address
By the command indicated below, information of the specified PMC address is output to
the common variable of custom macro (option). The variable number where the
information of the specified PMC address is output is set for PC parameter “D608”.
1 If the PMC address read function is not used or when the optional custom
macro is not supported, setting for D608 should be “D608 = 0”.
2 This function is used only for reading the information. It is not possible to write
the information.
COMMAND
G340 F_. A_. Q_.;

D F. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of bytes.
F0. . . . Specifies bit.
F1. . . . Specifies 1 byte.
F2. . . . Specifies 2 bytes.
D A. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the address.
A0. . . . Specifies “R”.
A1. . . . Specifies “D”.
A2. . . . Specifies “C”.
A3. . . . Specifies “K”.
A4. . . . Specifies “X”.
A5. . . . Specifies “Y”.
A6. . . . Specifies “F”.
A7. . . . Specifies “G”.
D Q. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the address number
When a bit is specified, specification must be made up to
one place right to a decimal point.
When a byte is specified, specification of a number right to
a decimal point is not allowed.
1 The output format to the macro variable is indicated below.
Bit specification 0 or 1
1-byte specification . . . . . . . . . . Integer (0 - 255)
2-byte specification . . . . . . . . . . Integer (0 - 65535)
2 For the designation of an address, the following restrictions apply.

R . . . . . . . . . . . Bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes
D . . . . . . . . . . . Bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes
C . . . . . . . . . . . Bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes
K . . . . . . . . . . . Bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes
X . . . . . . . . . . . Bit only
Y . . . . . . . . . . . Bit only
F . . . . . . . . . . . Bit only
G . . . . . . . . . . . Bit only
1) Bit specification, R120.3

G340 F0. A0. Q120.3;
2) 2-byte specification, D80

G340 F2. A1. Q80.;
10. Alarm Table
If there is an error with the tool life management related commands, message is displayed.
Refer to the following table to find the cause of the error.
Macro
Message Details of alarm
Alarm No.
3015 TOOL ENTRY The tool life data registration format has an error.
FORMAT ERROR Check the registration program.
3016 TOOL ENTRY DATA When registering the tool life data, the data
ERROR contents have an error. Check the specified
data.
3017 TOOL ENTRY T DATA When registering the tool life data, the number of
OVER registration tools is greater than 10. Check the
registration program.
3018 GROUP CALL The tool group call command format has an
FORMAT ERROR error. Check the machining program.
3019 CALL GROUP DATA When calling a tool group, the data contents
ERROR have an error. Check the specified data.
3020 CALL GROUP NOT When calling a tool group, the specified tool
REGISTERED group has not been registered. Register the tool
group.
3021 TOOL LIFE OVER When calling a tool group, tool life of all tools in
the called group has been expired. Change the
tools.
3022 TOOL SKIP FORMAT The skip command format has an error. Check
ERROR the machining program.
3023 SKIP TOOL DATA In the skip command, the data contents have an
ERROR error. Check the specified data.
3024 T-LIFE RESET The reset command format has an error. Check
FORMAT ERROR the machining program.
3025 T-LIFE RESET T-DATA In the reset command, the data contents have an
ERROR error. Check the specified data.
3026 DATA IN TOOL The tool life management data has an error.
GROUP ERROR Register the data again.
3027 DATA READ FORMAT The tool life management data read command
ERROR format has an error. Check the machining
program.
3028 READ DATA ERROR In the tool life management data read command,
the data contents have an error. Check the
specified data.
3029 FORMAT ERROR The PMC address read command format has an
error. Check the machining program.
3030 DATA ERROR In the PMC address read command, the data
contents have an error. Check the specified
data.
11. Parameters
The PMC parameters related with the tool life management function are indicated below.
D600 . . . . . . . . . . . Setting of the total number of tool groups

If the setting for D600 is changed, the tool life data must be
registered again. If the function is used without registering the
tool life data again, it might cause troubles.
D602 . . . . . . . . . . . Macro variable number for outputting the new tool selection flag
Pay attention to the common variable range. (#100 - #131 only)
If the optional custom macro is not supported, set “0” for D602.
D604 . . . . . . . . . . . Macro variable number for outputting the tool life expired flag
D606 . . . . . . . . . . . Macro variable number for outputting the tool life information
D608 . . . . . . . . . . . Macro variable number for outputting the PMC address
D253 (bit 1) . . . . . . 1: For the tool group where all tools have been used to the tool life,
the last tool is called in the next T command.
0: For the tool group where all tools have been used to the tool life,
an alarm occurs when the next T command is specified.
CHAPTER K
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
This chapter describes the programming procedure using several example programs.
CONTENTS
K : EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
1. Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–1
2. Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–2

2.1 Chuck-Work Programming (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–3
2.2 Chuck-Work Programming (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–18
2.2.1 1st process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–18
2.2.2 2nd process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–23
2.3 Various Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–28
2.3.1 Grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–28
2.3.2 I.D. Deep Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–29
2.4 Milling 1 (Drilling on End Face) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–30
2.5 Milling 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–34
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS K–1
1. Programming Steps
The steps to complete a program are summarized below.
When writing a program from the part drawing, refer to the flow chart shown below.
1) Determine which side to be machined and which side to be chucked.

(Determination of the 1st and 2nd processes)
2) Translate the part drawing into the drawing for NC operation/programming.

(This step may be omitted if the workpiece is simple.)
3) Study the cutting allowance. (Draw the blank workpiece if necessary.)
4) Determine the tools to be used. (Creating the tooling sheet)
5) Determine the finishing conditions (cutting speeds, feedrates), and create

the part program for finishing.
6) Determine the finishing allowance and the rough cutting conditions (depth of
cuts, cutting speeds, and feedrates), and create the part program for rough
cutting.
7) Create the part program for other processes such as grooving and thread
cutting.
8) Arrange the part programs of individual processes to complete the program.

K–2 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
2. Example Programs
A variety of machining methods and programming methods are used when machining
workpieces. This section describes programs which will be used frequently in actual
production.
Study these example programs and then create programs which better suit your actual
production requirements. Note that the programming methods and values shown in the
example programs may not apply to your specific needs.
1 Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine

users. Mori Seiki cannot predict the workpiece clamping
method, spindle speed, feedrate, depth of cut, and width of cut,
etc., that will be required in each case and it is therefore the
user’s responsibility to determine the appropriate settings.
If you have difficulty determining these conditions, consult the
fixture and tool manufacturers. Machining under inappropriate
machining conditions can cause the workpiece or cutting tool
to fly out during machining, causing accidents involving
serious injuries or damage to the machine. It will also adversely
affect machining accuracy.
2 The programs given in this section are not applicable to all
types of machines. Programs must be written while taking the
performance of the machine into consideration and be executed
with due consideration given to safety. If the machine’s
capacity is not taken into account when writing the program,
the workpiece or cutting tool may fly out during machining,
causing accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
2.1 Chuck-Work Programming (1)

10 20 20 The workpiece should be machined with the 60
mm diameter section chucked.
C1
Before starting spindle
rotation, check that the
∅ 44 C1 workpiece is securely clamped.
Or, if performing center-work,
∅ 60
∅ 50
∅ 30
check that the tailstock spindle
center securely supports the
workpiece. (Applies only to
machines equipped with a
tailstock.)
If the workpiece is not securely
clamped or supported, it will fly
out of the chuck when the
spindle is rotated, causing
serious injuries or damage to
the machine.

Z–51.0 On the drawing, enter the dimensions to be used
Z–50.0 for programming.
Z–40.0 Z–1.0
Z–20.0 Z0
Z1.0
X60.0
X58.0
X50.0
X44.0
X26.0
X30.0
X28.0
X0
3) Study the cutting allowance.

1.5 Draw the blank workpiece. The stock on the end
face should be 1.5 mm.
∅ 60
4) Determine the tools to be used.

Rough cutting – O.D. and facing
(Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)
Turret head station No.: 1
Finishing – O.D. and facing


5) Determine the finishing conditions (cutting speeds, feedrates), and create the part
program for finishing. (Tool nose radius: 0)
Z–51.0
Z–50.0
Z–40.0 Z–1.0
Z–20.0 Z0
X60.0 Z1.0
X58.0
X50.0
X44.0
X26.0
X30.0
X28.0
X0
N2;
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the spindle speed limit for automatic
G00 T0202 (M42)*; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 2 tool
G96 S180 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the normal
X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X0 F0.15;
G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; . . . Program for finishing
Z–20.0; – Feedrate for facing: 0.15 mm/rev
X44.0; – Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.2 mm/rev
X50.0 Z–40.0;
Z–50.0;
X58.0;
X62.0 Z–52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to a position where the turret head can be
rotated; the spindle stops.
M30;
transmission.
Z0
Facing
X34.0 Z20.0 G01 X0 F0.15
X0
Z0 Z0
N2; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0202 (M42); G00 T0202 (M42);
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X34.0 Z20.0; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X0 F0.15; X0 F0.15;
G00 X26.0 Z1.0; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2;
Z–20.0; Z–20.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
X50.0 Z–40.0; X50.0 Z–40.0;
Z–50.0; Z–50.0;
X58.0; X58.0;
X62.0 Z–52.0; X62.0 Z–52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30; M30;
Chamfering
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2

Z–1.0
G00 X26.0 Z1.0 X30.0
X0
Z0
N2; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0202 (M42); G00 T0202 (M42);
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X34.0 Z20.0; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X0 F0.15; X0 F0.15;
G00 X26.0 Z1.0; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2;
Z–20.0; Z–20.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
X50.0 Z–40.0; X50.0 Z–40.0;
Z–50.0; Z–50.0;
X58.0; X58.0;
X62.0 Z–52.0; X62.0 Z–52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30; M30;
Facing
30 mm dia. O.D. cutting
G01 Z–20.0
X44.0
Z–20.0 X44.0
N2; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0202 (M42); G00 T0202 (M42);
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X34.0 Z20.0; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X0 F0.15; X0 F0.15;
G00 X26.0 Z1.0; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2;
Z–20.0; Z–20.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
X50.0 Z–40.0; X50.0 Z–40.0;
Z–50.0; Z–50.0;
X58.0; X58.0;
X62.0 Z–52.0; X62.0 Z–52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30; M30;
Taper cutting 50 mm dia. O.D. cutting
X50.0 Z–40.0 Z–50.0
Z–40.0 Z–50.0
X50.0
Z0
N2; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0202 (M42); G00 T0202 (M42);
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X34.0 Z20.0; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X0 F0.15; X0 F0.15;
G00 X26.0 Z1.0; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2;
Z–20.0; Z–20.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
X50.0 Z–40.0; X50.0 Z–40.0;
Z–50.0; Z–50.0;
X58.0; X58.0;
X62.0 Z–52.0; X62.0 Z–52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30; M30;
Chamfering
Facing G00 U1.0 Z20.0
G01 X62.0 Z–52.0

X58.0
Z–52.0
X60.0
X58.0
Z0
N2; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0202 (M42); G00 T0202 (M42);
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X34.0 Z20.0; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X0 F0.15; X0 F0.15;
G00 X26.0 Z1.0; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2;
Z–20.0; Z–20.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
X50.0 Z–40.0; X50.0 Z–40.0;
Z–50.0; Z–50.0;
X58.0; X58.0;
X62.0 Z–52.0; X62.0 Z–52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30; M30;
6) Determine the finishing allowance and the rough cutting conditions (depth of cuts,
cutting speeds, and feedrates), and create the part program for rough cutting.
N1;
G50 S2000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the spindle speed limit for automatic operation
at 2000 min–1
G00 T0101 (M41)*; . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 1 tool
G96 S120 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the normal
X68.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1;
. . . . . . . Program for rough cutting
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; – Feedrate for facing: 0.2 mm/rev up to X10.0
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25; 0.1 mm/rev up to X0
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; In the constant cutting speed mode, the
X44.0; spindle speed increases as the cutting tool
moves closer to the center. However, since
G01 Z–19.9;
the spindle speed is clamped at the value
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; specified with “G50 S_ ;”, the cutting speed
X36.0; will be lowered near the center of the spindle.
Due to this, higher load is applied to the tool
G01 Z–19.9;
tip causing the insert to be broken.
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
Therefore, the feedrate must be lowered near
X26.3; the spindle center to reduce load applied to
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0; the tool tip.
Z–19.9; – Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.25 mm/rev
X44.3; – Finishing allowance (X): 0.3 mm (in diameter)
X50.3 Z–39.9; – Finishing allowance (Z): 0.1 mm
Z–49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to a position where the turret head can be
rotated
M01;
transmission.
G01 Z0.1
G00 U2.0 Z1.0
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25

X68.0 Z20.0
G01 X10.0 F0.2
X0 F0.1
4 mm
Z–50.0
X60.0 G00 X52.0
Z1.0
N1; N1;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101 (M41); G00 T0101 (M41);
G96 S120 M03; G96 S120 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X68.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1; X0 F0.1;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G00 X52.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25; G01 Z–49.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X36.0; X36.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X26.3; X26.3;
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0; G01 X30.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9; Z–19.9;
X44.3; X44.3;
X50.3 Z–39.9; X50.3 Z–39.9;
Z–49.9; Z–49.9;
X58.3; X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9; X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; X100.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0

G00 U2.0 Z1.0
G01
Z–19.9 G01
X44.0 Z–19.9
X36.0
4 mm 4 mm
X44.0
Z–20.0 Z–20.0
N1; N1;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101 (M41); G00 T0101 (M41);
G96 S120 M03; G96 S120 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X68.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1; X0 F0.1;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G00 X52.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25; G01 Z–49.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X36.0; X36.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X26.3; X26.3;
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0; G01 X30.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9; Z–19.9;
X44.3; X44.3;
X50.3 Z–39.9; X50.3 Z–39.9;
Z–49.9; Z–49.9;
X58.3; X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9; X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; X100.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
Z–49.9
Z–19.9 X50.3
Z–39.9
28.5 mm
Z–40.0 X44.3
Z–50.0
Z–20.0
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0 X50.0 X44.0
X30.0
Z1.0
X28.0
N1; N1;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101 (M41); G00 T0101 (M41);
G96 S120 M03; G96 S120 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X68.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1; X0 F0.1;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G00 X52.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25; G01 Z–49.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X44.0; X44.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X36.0; X36.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X26.3; X26.3;
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0; G01 X30.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9; Z–19.9;
X44.3; X44.3;
X50.3 Z–39.9; X50.3 Z–39.9;
Z–49.9; Z–49.9;
X58.3; X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9; X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; X100.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0
X62.3 Z–51.9
Z–50.0
X60.0
Z–51.0
X58.0
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101 (M41);
G96 S120 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X44.0;
G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X36.0;
G01 Z–19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X26.3;
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9;
X44.3;
X50.3 Z–39.9;
Z–49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
7) Create the part program for other processes such as grooving and thread cutting.
In this example operation, there are no other processes.
O0001;
N1; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101 (M41)*; G00 T0202 (M42)*;
G96 S120 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X0 F0.15;
X0 F0.1; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G01 X30.0 Z–1.0 F0.2; . . . Part program
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25; Z–20.0; for finishing
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X44.0;
X44.0; X50.0 Z–40.0;
G01 Z–19.9; Z–50.0;
. . . Part program
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; for rough X58.0;
X36.0; cutting X62.0 Z–52.0;
G01 Z–19.9; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
X26.3; M30;
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9;
X44.3;
X50.3 Z–39.9;
Z–49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
transmission.
In actual cutting, tool nose radius must be taken into consideration

(tool nose radius: 0.8 mm).
The program using the manual tool nose radius offset function is shown below.
O0001;
N1; N2;
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101 (M41); G00 T0202 (M42);
G96 S120 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X–1.6 F0.15;
X–1.6 F0.1; G00 X25.06 Z1.0;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G01 X30.0 Z–1.47 F0.2; . . . Part program
G01 Z–49.9 F0.25; Z–20.0; for finishing
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X43.779;
X44.0; X50.0 Z–40.740;
G01 Z–19.9; Z–50.0;
. . . Part program
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; for rough X57.06;
X36.0; cutting X62.0 Z–52.47;
G01 Z–19.9; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
X26.3; M30;
G01 X30.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9;
X44.3;
X50.3 Z–39.9;
Z–49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z–51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
2.2 Chuck-Work Programming (2)

<Blank workpiece drawing> <Part drawing>
20
C1 C1
C1
C1 C1
∅ 75
∅ 25
∅ 70
∅ 30
∅ 50
43 40

O.D. 75
Dimensions
Di i I.D. 25
(mm)
Length 43
2.2.1 1st process

The right side in the part drawing should be
chucked to machine the left side.
Soft Before starting spindle

jaw
workpiece is securely clamped.
tailstock.)
the machine.

Z–20.0 Z–1.0 On the drawing, enter the dimensions to be used
for programming.
X70.0
X68.0
X50.0
X32.0
Z–1.0
X30.0
X0
Z0

43 Draw the blank workpiece. The stock on the end
face should be 1.5 mm and stock on O.D. and I.D.
should be 2.5 mm.
∅ 75
2.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
∅ 25

Rough cutting and finishing – I.D.



program for finishing. (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)
Z–20.0 Z–1.0
X70.0
X68.0
X50.0
X32.0
Z–1.0
X30.0
X0
Z0
N3;
at 2500 min–1
X74.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X28.0 F0.2; . . . Program for finishing using the manual tool nose
radius offset function
G00 X65.06 Z1.0;
– Feedrate for facing: 0.2 mm/rev
G01 X70.0 Z–1.47;
– Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.25 mm/rev
Z–21.0 F0.25;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . Moving to a position where the turret head can be
M30;
transmission.
N1;
at 2000 min–1
X84.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X20.0 F0.25; . . . Program for rough cutting
G00 X66.3 Z1.0; – Feedrate for facing: 0.25 mm/rev

– Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.3 mm/rev
G01 X70.3 Z–1.0;
Z–22.0 F0.3;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
rotated
M01;
N2;
G97 S1000 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the normal
direction at 1000 min–1 (cutting speed: 94 m/min)
X29.7 Z20.0;
G01 Z2.0 F1.0;
. . . I.D. rough cutting program and finish chamfering
Z–42.0 F0.2; program using the manual tool nose radius
G00 U–1.0 Z1.0; offset function
X34.94; – Feedrate: 0.2 mm/rev
G01 X29.0 Z–1.97;

G00 Z20.0;
rotated
M01;
transmission.
7) Create the part program of other processes such as grooving and thread cutting.
For the example workpiece, there are no other processes.
O0001;
N1; N3;
G50 S2000; G50 S2500;
G00 T0101 (M41)*; G00 T0303 (M42)*;
G96 S120 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; X74.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X20.0 F0.25; X28.0 F0.2;
G00 X66.3 Z1.0; G00 X65.06 Z1.0;
G01 X70.3 Z–1.0; G01 X70.0 Z–1.47;
Z–22.0 F0.3; Z–21.0 F0.25;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M01; M30;
N2;
G00 T0202 (M42)*;
G97 S1000 M03;
X29.7 Z20.0;
G01 Z2.0 F1.0;
Z–42.0 F0.2;
G00 U–1.0 Z1.0;
X34.94;
G01 X29.0 Z–1.97;
G00 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
transmission.
2.2.2 2nd process

The left side in the part drawing should be chucked
to machine the right side.
Since the left side in the part drawing was
machined in the 1st process, the right side is
Soft machined in the 2nd process.
jaw
Before starting spindle

workpiece is securely clamped.
tailstock.)
the machine.

X70.0 Z–21.0 On the drawing, enter the dimensions to be used
Z–40.0
Z–20.0 for programming.
X68.0 Z–20.0
X50.0 Z–1.0
X70.0
X48.0 Z0
X50.0 Z–20.0
X50.0
X32.0 Z0
X30.0
X30.0 Z–1.0
X0 Z0
12.5
Draw the blank workpiece. The stock on the end
face should be 1.5 mm, stock on O.D. 12.5 mm,
and that on I.D. 0.15 mm.
The stock of 0.15 mm on I.D. is the finishing

allowance.
1.5
0.15

Finishing – I.D.


program for finishing. (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)
X70.0 Z–21.0
Z–40.0
Z–20.0
X68.0 Z–20.0
X50.0 Z–1.0
X70.0
X48.0 Z0
X50.0 Z–20.0
X50.0
X32.0 Z0
X30.0
X30.0 Z–1.0
X0 Z0
N2;
G97 S1500 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in the normal
direction at
1500 min–1 (cutting speed: 165 m/min)
X34.94 Z20.0;
G01 Z1.0 F1.0; . . . Program for finishing using the manual tool nose
X30.0 Z–1.47 F0.15; radius offset function
Z–41.0; – Feedrate for I.D. cutting: 0.15 mm/rev
G00 U–1.0 Z20.0;
rotated
M01;
N3;
at 2500 min–1
direction at cutting speed of 180 m/min
X54.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X28.0 F0.2;
. . . Program for finishing using the manual tool nose
G00 X45.06 Z1.0;
radius offset function
G01 X50.0 Z–1.47;
Z–20.0 F0.25; – Feedrate for facing: 0.2 mm/rev
X67.06; – Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.25 mm/rev
X72.0 Z–22.47 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . Moving to a position where the turret head can be
M30;
transmission.
N1;
at 2000 min–1
X84.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X20.0 F0.25;
G00 X66.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z–19.9 F0.3;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X57.0; . . . Program for rough cutting
G01 Z–19.9; – Feedrate for facing: 0.25 mm/rev
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; – Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.3 mm/rev
X46.3;
G01 X50.3 Z–1.0;
Z–19.9;
X68.3;
X72.3 Z–21.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
rotated
M01;
transmission.
7) Create the part program of other processes such as grooving and thread cutting.
For the example workpiece, there are no other processes.
O0002;
N1; N2;
G50 S2000; G00 T0202 (M42)*;
G00 T0101 (M41)*; G97 S1500 M03;
G96 S120 M03; X34.94 Z20.0;
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; X30.0 Z–1.47 F0.15;
X20.0 F0.25; Z–41.0;
G00 X66.0 Z1.0; G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z–19.9 F0.3; X100.0 Z100.0;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; M01;
X57.0;
G01 Z–19.9; N3;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G50 S2500;
X46.3; G00 T0303 (M42)*;
G01 X50.3 Z–1.0; G96 S180 M03;
Z–19.9; X54.0 Z20.0;
X68.3; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X72.3 Z–21.9; X28.0 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; G00 X45.06 Z1.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; G01 X50.0 Z–1.47;
M01; Z–20.0 F0.25;
X67.06;
X72.0 Z–22.47 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30;
transmission.
2.3 Various Part Programs
2.3.1 Grooving
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101 (M41)*;
G97 S600 M03;
11 12
4 1 X54.0 Z20.0 M08;
2 1
8 5 2 G01 Z–20.0 F1.0;
6 9
7 10 3 X40.0 F0.1;
C1 3 4 C1 4 G04 U0.2; . . . . . . . . . . Dwell: 0.2 sec
4 5 G00 X52.0;
20 6 W–2.0;
7 G01 X48.0 Z–20.0;
8 G00 X52.0;
∅40
∅50
9 W2.0;
10 G01 X48.0 Z–20.0;
11 G00 X60.0;
12 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30;
1 To finish the bottom of the groove in flat, it is necessary to suspend axis

movement for a period to allow the spindle to rotate approximately one turn.
In this example,
t= 60 sec = 0.1 sec

600 min–1
By setting 0.1 second for a dwell period, the spindle can rotate one turn.
2 The program is created assuming that tool nose R is 0.
3 Commands in ( ) identified by “*” are used only for the machine equipped
with a transmission.
2.3.2 I.D. Deep Hole Drilling
O0001;
N1;
G50 S500;
G00 T0101 (M41)*;
G96 S80 M03;
X55.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z1.0 F3.0;
Z–50.0 F0.3;
G00 U–2.0 Z1.0;
X65.0; The tool is moved to the position
G01 Z–50.0; where the tool nose can be easily
G00 U–2.0 Z1.0; checked, or where the chips can be
X74.8; discharged without being
G01 Z–50.0; interrupted.
G00 U–2.0 Z200.0;
X150.0; Rough cutting is temporarily
M00; stopped to check the tool nose and
G00 X55.0 Z10.0 M03; to discharge the chips.
Z–42.0 M08;
G01 Z–90.0 F0.3;
G00 U–2.0 Z–42.0;
X65.0; Again specify the commands for
G01 Z–90.0; spindle or spindle 1 rotation and for
coolant discharge.
...
G00 U–2.0 Z20.0 M09;

X200.0 Z50.0;
M00; After the chips have been
discharged, the finishing allowance
...
Finishing is checked.
transmission.
2.4 Milling 1 (Drilling on End Face)

The following program can be used only by the MC type machines or Y-axis
specification machines.
However, it cannot be used by the MC type TL series machines.
<Part drawing>
90°
150° C A 30°
P.C.D. 150
∅ 121
∅ 200
C0
D
210° F 330°
E P.C.D 150
40 6 equal parts, M8 P=1.25, depth 15 270_

prepared hole ∅6.8 drill, depth 25
<Cutting conditions>
Spindle Speed Feedrate Tool Offset

Process T Code Tool Name
(min–1) (mm/min) Number
N1 T0101 Center drill 2000 150 1
N2 T0202 6.8 mm dia. drill 1300 200 2
N3 T0303 M8 P1.25 Tap 400 500 3
Length of M8 P = 1.25 tap engaging length is 5 mm.
O0001; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number

N1 (CENTER DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with center drilling
G00 T0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the No. 1 tool
X150.0 Z30.0 C30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the hole machining start position at a
rapid traverse rate
G83 H60.0 Z–5.0 R–27.0 F150 K6; . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (G83)
D H60.0 . . . . . . . . . Incremental value:
Present position ³B
³C³D³E³F³A
D K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of repetitions:
6 times
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling hole machining canned cycle
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N2 (6.8 DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 6.8 mm dia. drill

rapid traverse rate
G83 H60.0 Z–18.0 R–27.0 F200 K6;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the face spot drilling cycle (G83)
D H60.0 . . . . . . . . . Incremental value:
Present position ³B
³C³D³E³F³A
D K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of repetitions:
6 times
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling hole machining canned cycle
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N3 (M8 P = 1.25 TAP); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapping with M8 P1.25 tap

G97; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the constant spindle speed command
rapid traverse rate
G384 Z–20.0 R5.0 F1.25 S400. D600. (E0.) M68. T2.;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
at point A
engaging length)
= – (15 + 5)
= – 20 mm
D R5.0 . . . . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the
point R
D F1.25 . . . . . . . . . Pitch 1.25 mm
D S400. . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed for infeed:
400 min–1
D D600. . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed for tool
retraction: 600min–1
∗ D (E0.) . . . . . . . . . . In-position check valid
D M68. . . . . . . . . . . Spindle or spindle 1 brake
clamp
D T2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapping direction
G384 C90.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
at point B
G384 C150.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
at point C
at point D
at point E
at point F
G380; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancelling the synchronized tapping cycle (G384)
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program end
For the Y-axis specification TL series machine and the MC type SL-400, SL-600
and VL-55 series machines, modify the commands in the blocks indicated by “∗” as
shown below.
M329 S400; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling a synchronized tapping cycle

G84 Z–20.0 R–25.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized face tapping cycle at
point A
engaging length)
= – (15 + 5)
= – 20 mm
the initial point (Z30.0) to
point R (Z5.0)
Feedrate
= Spindle speed (min–1) Pitch (mm)
= 400 1.25 = 500 mm/min
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the synchronized face tapping cycle
C270.0; (M329 G84) at points B to F
C330.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the synchronized face tapping cycle
(M329 G84)
2.5 Milling 2
The following program can be used only by the Y-axis specification machines.
<Part drawing>
∅8-4
through hole
∅40
8
13.229 13.229
C3
C1
20 20
∅50
30
60
100

Material AISI 1045
(Carbon steel)
Dimensions O.D. 50
(
(mm) ) Length 101
<Chucking diagram>
The chucking depth is 30 mm.
30
O0001; M69;
G28 V0; C180.0;
N1; . . . . . . . . Face and O.D. rough cutting M68;
G99 M46; M98 P1000;
G50 S2000; G99 G00 X50.0 Z20.0 M69;
G00 T0101; G28 V0;
G96 S120 M03; G28 U0 W0;
X55.0 Z10.0 M08; M05;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; (M320;)
X10.0 F0.2; M01;
X–1.6 F0.1;
G00 X45.0 W1.0; N4; . . . . . . . . Center drilling
G01 Z–59.9 F0.25; G98 M45;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G28 U0 W0 H0;
X40.3; (M321;)
Z–3.468; G00 T0404;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; C0;
X31.364; M68;
G01 X40.3 Z–3.468; G97 S1500 M13;
Z–59.9; X50.0 Z20.0 M08;
X47.832; G01 X40.0 Z–20.0 F750;
U4.0 W–2.0; G87 X24.0 Y8.0 R–7.0 F75;
G00 Z10.0; W–20.0;
G53 X0 Z0 M05; Y–8.0;
M01; W20.0;
G99 G00 X50.0 Z20.0 M69;
N2; . . . . . . . . Face and O.D. finishing G28 V0;
G99 M46; G28 U0 W0;
G50 S2000; M05;
G00 T0202; (M320;)
G96 S200 M03; M01;
X50.0 Z10.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0; N5; . . . . . . . . 8 dia. drilling
X–0.8 F0.12; G98 M45;
G00 X31.532 W1.0; G28 U0 W0 H0;
G01 X40.0 Z–3.234 F0.15; (M321;)
Z–60.0; G00 T0505;
X47.532; C0;
U4.0 W–2.0; M68;
G00 Z10.0; G97 S1200 M13;
G53 X0 Z0 M05; X50.0 Z20.0 M08;
M01; G01 X40.0 Z–20.0 F600;
G87 X–38.0 Y8.0 R–7.0 Q4000 F144;
N3; . . . . . . . . 13 dia. end milling (shoulder cutting) W–20.0 Q4000;
G98 M45; Y–8.0 Q4000;
G28 U0 W0 H0; W20.0 Q4000;
(M321;) G99 G00 X50.0 Z20.0 M09;
G00 T0303; G28 V0;
C0; G28 U0 W0;
M68; M05;
G97 S500 M13; (M320;)
X50.0 Z20.0 M08 G00 T0100 M69;
Y11.0; M46;
M98 P1000; M30;
Commands in ( ) should be specified only for the Y-axis specification TL series machines.
O1000; . . . . . Sub-program (13 dia. end milling)

G01 X34.0 Z10.0 F500;
Z–53.5 F75;
Y0;
Z10.0;
Y–11.0;
Z–53.5;
Y20.0;
G00 X35.0 Z10.0;
Y9.0;
G01 X30.0 F500;
Z–53.5 F75;
Y–3.0;
Z10.0;
Y–15.0;
Z–53.5;
Y20.0;
G00 X50.0 Z20.0;
Y11.0;
M99;
APPENDIX
This appendix describes the interlock functions that ensure safe operation.
(Tailstock specification)
APPENDIX–1
APPENDIX 1 Center-Work Programming with Safety
Primary requirement:
The tailstock spindle interlock switch must be valid. In this state, cycle start is
disabled if the tailstock spindle is “IN”.
<For short workpieces>
Definition of short workpieces: Workpieces that can be securely supported by only the
chuck if the tailstock spindle is retracted to its “IN” position.
EXAMPLE
O___;
(Safety)
________________;
________________; By inserting the M26 (tailstock spindle IN)
Machining program ; command in the program, after completion of
________________;
M05; Spindle stop the program, starting the automatic operation
M26; Tailstock spindle “IN”
M30;
is prevented even if the ST
(ST) switch is
(Manual operation) pressed by mistake.
Opening the front door
Supporting the workpiece This is due to the tailstock spindle interlock
Unclamping the chuck (by footswitch)
Removing the workpiece function.
1) Automatic operation
Chuck
– Spindle stop (M05)
Tailstock
Workpiece
spindle
Tailstock spindle
“IN” (M26)
Chuck
– Tailstock spindle IN (M26)
Tailstock
Workpiece
spindle
3 Unclamping the chuck
2 Supporting the workpiece

Chuck
2) Manual operation Workpiece

Tailstock
spindle
1 Opening the font door

4 Removing the workpiece
3 Unclamping the chuck
(by footswitch)

APPENDIX–2
<For long workpiece>
Definition of long workpieces: Workpieces that cannot be securely supported by only the
chuck. Secure support of such workpieces requires the use of the center (tailstock
spindle) or other proper means.
EXAMPLE
O___;
(Safety)
________________;
________________;
In this program, the M11 (chuck unclamp)
Machining program ; command, to be executed after the spindle
________________;
M05; Spindle stop stops, unclamps the chuck. If the (ST)
ST
M11; Chuck unclamp
M30; switch or the NOR
(NOR) or REV
(REV)
(Manual operation)
Opening the front door switch is pressed by mistake, the cycle start or
Supporting the workpiece
Pressing the (TSI) switch to
TSI
the spindle rotation will not be enabled, due to
retract the tailstock spindle into the the chuck interlock function.
tailstock body
Removing the workpiece
(If a hydraulic chuck is not used, the internal
signal is set to the chuck unclamp state so
that the chuck interlock function is made valid.
In such a case, if the footswitch is stepped on
to set the internal signal to the chuck clamp
state, both the cycle start and spindle rotation
start are enabled.)
1) Automatic operation Chuck
– Spindle stop (M05)

Tailstock
Workpiece
spindle
2) Automatic operation
Chuck Unclamping the chuck (M11)
– Chuck unclamp (M11)
Tailstock
Workpiece
spindle
3) Manual operation 2 Supporting the 3 Tailstock spindle

Chuck workpiece “IN”
1 Opening the font door
Tailstock
3 Retracting the tailstock Workpiece
spindle
spindle “IN” by pressing the
TSI
(TSI) switch.
INDEX
Page
A
Absolute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10
Alarm Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–20
Approach ³ Chamfering ³ O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
Chuck work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–31
Approach ³ Facing (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–30
Approach ³ O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) Chuck work . . . . . . . . E–30
Arc ³ O.D. ³ Arc cutting with an O.D. cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–24
Automatic Door Open/Close [M85, M86] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–63
Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle [G76] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–31
Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset [G40, G41, G42] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–28
Axis Control and Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12
B
Bar Feeder Operation, Bar Feed OFF, Bar Stock Change
[M70, M483, M482] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–54
Basic Pattern of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27
Basic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–20
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11
Both-Center-Work Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–29
C
C-axis Connection and Cancel [M45, M245, M46] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–46
Calculating Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–3
Calculating the Coordinate Values to be Specified in a Program . . . . . . . . . . F–18
Calculating the Depth of Cut for the First Path
when the Number of Thread Cutting Paths is Given . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–36
Calculating the direction of wall (workpiece shape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–10
Calculating the Number of Thread Cutting Paths
when the Depth of Cut for the First Path is Given . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–36
Calculating the wall direction (blank workpiece shape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–15
Cancel Mode, Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–12
Cancel Mode, Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
of the Cutter Radius Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–8
Cautions for Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–50
Cautions on Programming Using G84 and G88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–75
Cautions on the G76 Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–34
Cautions on Using the G71, G72, and G73 Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–18
Center work (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–27
–i–
INDEX
Page
C
Center-Work Programming, Basic Pattern of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–28
Center-Work Programming with Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX–1
Chamfering (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–28
Chamfering and I.D. cutting with an I.D. cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–23
Chamfering ON/OFF [M23, M24] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–30
Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–4
Chuck Clamp/Unclamp [M10, M210, M11, M211] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–33
Chuck work (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–26
Chuck work (2) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–26
Chuck-Work Programming, Basic Pattern of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27
Chuck-Work Programming (1), Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–3
Chuck-Work Programming (2), Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–18
CL Series, M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–15
CL Series, Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–16
Closed-loop Cutting Cycle [G73] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–14
Concave Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–17
Conditions for Use of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function . . . . E–4
Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed [G97] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–19
Controlling Spindle Speed to Maintain Surface Speed Constant [G96] . . . . B–17
Convex Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–17
Coolant Discharge ON/OFF [M08, M09] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–28
Counting the Tool Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–13
Cutter Radius Offset [G40, G41, G42] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–30
Cylindrical Interpolation [G07.1 (G107)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–76
D
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10
Dwell Command, Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32 . . . . . . . . . B–50
Dwell Command, Cautions on Programming Using G84 and G88 . . . . . . . . I–75
E
Example Program, CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–15
Example Program, Offset in Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–19
Example Programs, AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . E–20
Example Programs, EXAMPLE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–2
Example Programs, Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . F–9
– ii –
INDEX
Page
E
Expressing Axis Movement in Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–17
F
F Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–20
Face Boring Cycle [G85] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–41
Face Cut-off, Grooving Cycle and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle [G74] . . . . . . . . H–23
Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle [G83] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–22
Face Drilling Cycle [G83] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–18
Face High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle [G83] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–18
Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–9
Face Spot Drilling Cycle [G83] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–26
Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) [G83] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–28
Face Tapping Cycle [G84] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–32
Facing ³ Chamfering ³ O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . E–31
Facing (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–27
Facing and O.D. cutting with in O.D. cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–21
Feed per Minute (G98 F_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–23
Feed per Spindle Revolution (G99 F_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–20
Feedrate for Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–24
Feedrate Override Cancel OFF/ON [M48, M49] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–50
Finishing Cycle [G70] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–21
1st process, Center-Work Programming (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–18
Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3
Flow until the Product is Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3
G
G Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1
G00 Positioning the Cutting Tool at a Rapid Traverse Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–5
G01 Moving the Cutting Tool Along a Straight Path
at a Cutting Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–10
G02, G03 Moving the Cutting Tool Along Arcs at a Cutting Feedrate . . . . . B–12
G04 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–22
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–76
G12.1 (G112), G13.1 (G113)
Notching (Polar Coordinate Interpolation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–82
G22, G23 Setting Barrier to Define the Tool Entry Inhibited Zone . . . . . . . . B–63
G28 Returning the Axes to Machine Zero Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–66
G32 Tapping (On the Center of Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–49
– iii –
INDEX
Page
G
G32, G92 Thread Cutting
(Continuous Thread Cutting and Thread Cutting Cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–33
G38 Workpiece Pushing Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–73
G40, G41, G42 Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–28
G40, G41, G42 Cutter Radius Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–30
G50 Setting the Spindle Speed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–14
G53 Selecting the Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–68
G54 - G59 Setting a Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–70
G65 P9020/G65 P9021
Workpiece Transfer Macro Program (MSD-501II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–4
G65 P9022 Workpiece Ejection Macro Program (MSD-501II) . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–12
G70 Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–21
G70 - G76 Multiple Repetitive Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–56
G71 O.D./I.D. Rough Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–4
G72 Rough Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–9
G73 Closed-loop Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–14
G74 Face Cut-off, Grooving Cycle and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . H–23
G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-off Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–27
G76 Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–31
G80 Hole Machining Canned Cycle Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–16
G80, G83 - G85, G87 - G89 Hole Machining Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . B–58
G83 Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–22
G83 Face Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–18
G83 Face High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–18
G83 Face Spot Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–26
G83 Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–28
G84 Face Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–32
G85 Face Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–41
G87 Side Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–48
G87 Side Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–44
G87 Side High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–44
G87 Side Spot Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–52
G87 Side Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–55
G88 Side Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–58
G89 Side Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–66
G90, G94 O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle and Face Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–53
G96 Controlling Spindle Speed to Maintain Surface Speed Constant . . . . . B–17
G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–19
G98, G99 Setting Feedrate Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–24
– iv –
INDEX
Page
G
G384, G380 Synchronized Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–69
G479 Tailstock Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–85
General, AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–1
General, CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–1
General, HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–1
General, MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1
General, MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–1
General, TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . J–1
General Cautions on the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function . . . . E–14
General Cautions on the Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–9
Grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–28
Group Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
H
Hole Machining Canned Cycle Cancel [G80] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–16
Hole Machining Canned Cycles [G80, G83 - G85, G87 - G89] . . . . . . . . . . . B–58
I
I.D. Deep Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–29
If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting,
General Cautions on the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function . . . . E–14
If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting,
General Cautions on the Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–9
Imaginary Tool Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–5
In-position Check Valid and In-position Check Invalid [M28, M29] . . . . . . . . C–78
Incremental Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–22
Infeed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–34
Inputting a Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–31
Inputting the Program to the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2
J
JIS Specification and Reverse JIS Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–33
L
Life Count M Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
LL Series, Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–15
LL-7, 8, M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–12
M
M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1
M00, M01 Program Stop and Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–18
M02, M30 Program End, Program End and Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–21
–v–
INDEX
Page
M
M03, M203, M04, M204, M05 Spindle Start and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–23
M08, M09 Coolant Discharge ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–28
M10, M210, M11, M211 Chuck Clamp/Unclamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–33
M13, M14, M05 Start and Stop of Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation . . . . . . . . . . C–26
M23, M24 Chamfering ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–30
M25, M26 Tailstock Spindle IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–37
M28, M29 In-positon Check Valid and In-position Check Invalid . . . . . . . . . C–78
M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–41
M39 Rotary Tool Joint Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–80
M40 - M44 Selecting Spindle Speed Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–76
M45, M245, M46 C-axis Connection and Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–46
M47 Workpiece Ejector OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–48
M48, M49 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–50
M68, M268, M69 Spindle Brake Clamp and Unclamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–52
M70, M483, M482 Bar Feeder Operation, Bar Feed OFF,
Bar Stock Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–54
M73, M74 Parts Catcher IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–57
M80 Workpiece Cut-off Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–61
M85, M86 Automatic Door Open/Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–63
M89 Work Counter, Total Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–65
M90, M290, M91, M291 Simultaneous Spindle/
Rotary Tool Spindle Operation Mode ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–72
M98, M99 Sub-program Call and Sub-program End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–68
M320, M321 Y-axis Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–74
M329 G84 Synchronized Face Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–36
M329 G88 Synchronized Side Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–62
M432 Parts Catcher Cycle Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–59
Milling 1 (Drilling on End Face), Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–30
Milling 2, Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–34
Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12
Moving the Cutting Tool Along a Straight Path
at a Cutting Feedrate [G01] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–10
Moving the Cutting Tool Along Arcs at a Cutting Feedrate [G02, G03] . . . . . B–12
Multiple M Code Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. C–1
Multiple Repetitive Cycle [G70 - G76] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–56
– vi –
INDEX
Page
N
New Tool Selection Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–15
New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–15
Notching (Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
[G12.1 (G112), G13.1 (G113)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–82
Number of Repetitions “K” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–6
O
O.D. cutting including arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–19
O.D. cutting with an O.D. cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–20
O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle and Face Cutting Cycle [G90, G94] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–53
O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-off Cycle [G75] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–27
O.D./I.D. Rough Cutting Cycle [G71] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–4
Offset Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–12
Offset Direction ( ) and Calculation of Coordinate Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–5
Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2
Offset in Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–17
Offset Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2
Offset Mode, Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
Offset Mode, Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
Operation Methods in Hole Machining Canned Cycles (G Codes) . . . . . . . . I–9
Overcut in the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–17
Overcut in the Cutter Radius Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–11
P
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–21
Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9
Parts Catcher Cycle Function [M432] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–59
Parts Catcher IN/OUT [M73, M74] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–57
Positioning the Cutting Tool at a Rapid Traverse Rate [G00] . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–5
Positive (+) and Negative (–) Designation
for Cutter Radius Offset Amount and Tool Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–11
Precautions on Using the Tapper,
Precautions on Using the Tapper,
Program End, Program End and Rewind [M02, M30] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–21
Program Number, Cautions for Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
Program Number, Terms for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8
Program Stop and Optional Stop [M00, M01] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–18
– vii –
INDEX
Page
P
Programming for a Sample Workpiece, Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–33
Programming for a Sample Workpiece,
MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–21
Programming positioning using a work coordinate system
(G54 to G59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–70
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–1
Programming using “G65 P9020” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–9
Programming using G00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–8
Programming using G02 or G03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–13
Programming using G07.1 (G107) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–78
Programming using G09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–78
Programming using G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–84
Programming using G22 and G23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–65
Programming using G32 (Scrolled thread cutting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–46
Programming using G32 (Tapping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–52
Programming using G32 or G92 (Straight thread cutting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–41
Programming using G32 or G92 (Tapered thread cutting (R2 1/2)) . . . . . . . . B–44
Programming using G40, G41, and G42,
CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–15
Programming using G40, G41, and G42, G FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–29
Programming using G50 (Setting the spindle speed limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–16
Programming using G50 S_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–17
Programming using G71, Multiple Repetitive Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–57
Programming using G71, O.D./I.D. Rough Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–7
Programming using G72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–12
Programming using G74 (Deep hole drilling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–26
Programming using G74 (Face cut-off cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–25
Programming using G75 (Cut-off cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–30
Programming using G75 (O.D./I.D. grooving cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–29
Programming using G80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–17
– viii –
INDEX
Page
P
Programming using G83 (Face deep hole drilling cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–24
Programming using G83 (Face high-speed deep hole drilling cycle) . . . . . . I–20
Programming using G83 (Face spot drilling cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–27
Programming using G83 (Face spot drilling cycle (dwell)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–30
Programming using G84 (Face tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–34
Programming using G85 (Face boring cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–42
Programming using G87 (Side deep hole drilling cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–50
Programming using G87 (Side high-speed deep hole drilling cycle) . . . . . . . I–46
Programming using G87 (Side spot drilling cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–53
Programming using G87 (Side spot drilling cycle (dwell)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–56
Programming using G88 (Side tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–60
Programming using G89 (Side boring cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–67
Programming using G99 F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–22
Programming using G384 and G380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–73
Programming using G479 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–86
Programming using M00 or M01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–20
Programming using M03, M04, and M05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–24
Programming using M08 and M09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–29
Programming using M10 and M11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–34
Programming using M25 and M26 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–38
Programming using M34, M35, and M36 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–42
Programming using M34, M35, and M36 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–44
Programming using M40 to M44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–77
Programming using M47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–49
– ix –
INDEX
Page
P
Programming using M89 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–66
Programming using M89 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–67
Programming using M210 or M211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–36
Programming using M320 and M321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–75
Programming using M329 G84 (Synchronized face tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . I–39
Programming using M329 G88 (Synchronized side tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . I–64
Programming using M432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–60
R
Reading the PMC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–18
Reading the Tool Life Management Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–16
Recommended Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–30
Registering the Data Using External I/O Device
(F-25D, F-30, F-200D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–9
Relationship of the Cutting Speed, Diameter, and Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . D–18
Requirement for Using the Cutter Radius Offset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3
Returning the Axes to Machine Zero Automatically [G28] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–66
Role of Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–32
Rotary Tool Joint Check [M39] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–80
Rough Facing Cycle [G72] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–9
S
S Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–13
2nd process, Center-Work Programming (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–23
Selecting Spindle Speed Range [M40 - M44] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–76
Selecting the Machine Coordinate System [G53] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–68
Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9
Setting a Work Coordinate System [G54 - G49] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–70
Setting Barrier to Define the Tool Entry Inhibited Zone [G22, G23] . . . . . . . . B–63
Setting Feedrate Units [G98, G99] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–24
Setting the Spindle Speed Limit [G50] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–14
Setting the tool life data, Setting the Tool Life Data in Program . . . . . . . . . . . J–8
–x–
INDEX
Page
S
Setting the Tool Life Data,
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–2
Setting the Tool Life Data by Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–2
Setting the Tool Life Data in Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–8
Setting Tool Nose Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
Side Boring Cycle [G89] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–66
Side Deep Hole Drilling Cycle [G87] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–48
Side Drilling Cycle [G87] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–44
Side High-speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle [G87] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–44
Side Hole Machining Canned Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–11
Side Spot Drilling Cycle [G87] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–52
Side Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) [G87] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–55
Side Tapping Cycle [G88] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–58
Signs and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
Simultaneous Spindle/Rotary Tool Spindle Operation Mode ON/OFF
[M90, M290, M91, M291] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–72
Skip Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–14
SL, TL Series, Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12
SL, VL, TL Series, M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1
SL-S Series, M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–7
SL-S Series, Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–13
Space between the Words in the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30
Specification in Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
Specifying the absolute commands (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20
Specifying the absolute commands (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–21
Specifying the Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–25
Specifying the Cutting Speed (G96 S_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–15
Specifying the Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20
Specifying the incremental commands (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–22
Specifying the incremental commands (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–23
Specifying the Offset Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
Specifying the Spindle Speed (G97 S_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–13
Specifying the Spindle Speed Limit for Automatic Operation
(G50 S_ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–16
Specifying the tool geometry offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–4
Specifying the tool numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–3
Specifying the tool wear offset (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–6
(Adjusting dimensions at two or more places) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–8
– xi –
INDEX
Page
S
Specifying the tool wear offset (3) (Adjusting a taper angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–9
Specifying the tool wear offset (4) (Adjusting the groove width) . . . . . . . . . . . D–11
Spindle Brake Clamp and Unclamp [M68, M268, M69] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–52
Spindle Start and Stop [M03, M203, M04, M204, M05] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–23
Start and Stop of Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation [M13, M14, M05] . . . . . . . . . C–26
Start-up, Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
Start-up, Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
State Flag Clear Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–14
Sub-program Call and Sub-program End [M98, M99] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–68
Summary, M FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–81
Summary, Specifying the Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–24
Summary, Terms for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11
Suspending Program Execution (Dwell) [G04] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–22
Synchronized Face Tapping Cycle [M329 G84] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–36
Synchronized Operation ON/OFF [M34, M35, M36] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–41
Synchronized Side Tapping Cycle [M329 G88] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–62
Synchronized Tapping Cycle [G384, G380] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–69
T
T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–12
T Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1
Table of Maximum Cutting Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–26
Table of Rapid Traverse Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–25
Tailstock Connect [G479] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–85
Tailstock Spindle IN/OUT [M25, M26] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–37
Tapping (On the Center of Spindle) [G32] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–49
Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
Technical Terms Used in the Explanation
Terms for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8
The Relationship between Depth of Cut for the First Path
and the Number of Thread Cutting Paths to be Generated
(Fixed Metal Removal Rate
and Straight Feed along the Thread Face) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–36
Thread Cutting (Continuous Thread Cutting and Thread Cutting Cycle)
[G32, G92] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–33
– xii –
INDEX
Page
T
To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole,
To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole,
Tool Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–5
Tool Geometry Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–4
Tool Life Expired Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–15
Tool Life Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J–2
Tool Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–3
Tool Wear Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–6
U
Use a decimal point carefully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–32
Using T function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–2
V
Various Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K–28
VL Series, Movement aolng the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–14
W
What is “Creating a Program”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2
What is a Program? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
What is Required of Programmers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11
Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–2
Work Counter, Total Counter [M89] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–65
Workpiece Cut-off Detection [M80] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–61
Workpiece Ejection Macro Program (MSD-501II) [G65 P9022] . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–12
Workpiece Ejector OUT [M47] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–48
Workpiece Materials and Cutting Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–19
Workpiece Pushing Check [G38] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–73
Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–1
Workpiece transfer commands (work coordinate system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–3
Workpiece Transfer Macro Program (MSD-501II)
[G65 P9020/G65 P9021] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP. B–4
Y
Y-axis Lock/Unlock [M320, M321] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–74
– xiii –
Comment Form Date:
To improve this manual, we invite you to make comments on any insufficient description or errors in this
manual. We want to know how you think we can make this manual better. Please restrict your comments to
those concerning this manual only. Comments can also be submitted using the company website at
http://www.moriseiki.com.
Name of Manual PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Number of Revisions PM-NLTMSC518-I1EN (2008.1)
Name Company
Department Telephone
Address
Chapter Page Line Comments/Requests
For Mori Seiki's Use - Do not write below this line.
Description Reception No. Received by

http://www.moriseiki.com
MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. MORI SEIKI ESPAÑA S.A.

Nagoya Head Office Head Office & Technical Center
2-35-16 Meieki, Nakamura-ku, Nagoya City, Aichi 450-0002, Japan Calle de la Electrónica, Bloque B, Nave 9 Poligono Industrial "La Ferreria" 08110
Montcada I Reixac (Barcelona), Spain
Phone: (81) -52-587-1811 Fax.: (81) -52-587-1818
Phone: (34)-935-75-36-46 Fax.: (34)-935-75-08-47
Nara Campus No.1 Plant
362 Idono-cho, Yamato-Koriyama City, Nara 639-1183, Japan
Phone: (81) -743-53-1121 MORI SEIKI Istanbul Makina San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Nara Campus No.2 Plant Head Office
106 Kita Koriyama-cho, Yamato-Koriyama City, Nara 639-1160, Japan Abdi Ipekci Caddesi No:129 Kat: 5, 34040 Bayrampasa Istanbul, Turkey
Phone: (81) -743-53-1125 Phone: (90)-212-613-4141 Fax.: (90)-212-612-4603
Iga Campus
201 Midai, Iga City, Mie 519-1414, Japan MORI SEIKI SINGAPORE PTE LTD.
Phone: (81) -595-45-4151
Head Office & Technical Center
Chiba Campus
3 Toh Guan Road East, Singapore 608835
488-19 Suzumi-cho, Funabashi City, Chiba 274-0052, Japan Phone: (65)-6560-5011 Fax.: (65)-6567-6234
Phone: (81) -47-410-8800
Technical Center
MALAYSIA BRANCH
MORI SEIKI U.S.A., INC.
Head Office
MORI SEIKI THAILAND CO., LTD.
5655 Meadowbrook Drive, Rolling Meadows, Illinois 60008
Phone: (1)-847-593-5400 Fax.: (1)-847-593-5433 Head Office
Technical Centers 1/2 Bangnathani Building 1st Floor A1, Soi Bangna-Trad 34, Kwaeng Bangna, Khet
Bangna, Bangkok 10260, Thailand
Chicago, Dallas, Los Angeles, Detroit, Cincinnati, Boston, New Jersey Phone: (66)-2-361-3700-5 Fax.: (66)-2-361-3706
Representative Office
Charlotte
MORI SEIKI TAIWAN CO., LTD.
MORI SEIKI MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V. No. 8, Kong 8th Road, Linkou No. 2 Industrial District, Linkou Hsiang, Taipei Hsien,
Head Office & Technical Center Taiwan, R.O.C.
Montecito 38 Piso 12-38 Col. Napoles 03810 México D.F. Phone: (886)-2-2603-1701 Fax.: (886)-2-2603-1706
Phone: (52)-55-9000-3276 Fax.: (52)- 55-9000-3279
MORI SEIKI HONG KONG LIMITED
MORI SEIKI BRASIL LTDA. Head Office & Technical Center
Head Office & Technical Center Unit 08, 23/F., The Metropolis Office Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hung Hom,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Rua República do Iraque, 1432 2 and, Campo Belo 04611-002 São Paulo - SP, Brasil
Phone: (852)-2757-8910 Fax.: (852)-2757-7839
Phone: (55)-11-5543-1762 Fax.: (55)-11-5543-1948
MORI SEIKI GmbH MORI SEIKI (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

Head Office
Head Office
Room 4301, 4307, Maxdo Center, No.8 Xing Yi Road, HongQiao Development
Antoniusstrasse 14, 73249 Wernau, Germany Zone, Shanghai 200336, China
Phone: (49)-7153-934-0 Fax.: (49)-7153-934-220 Phone: (86)-21-5208-0270 Fax.: (86)-21-5208-0273
Technical Centers Technical Center
Stuttgart, Frankfurt, München, Hamburg, Düsseldorf Shanghai, Beijing, Tianjin, Dalian, Shenzhen, Chongqing, Guangzhou, Suzhou,
Wuhan
MORI SEIKI Moscow LLC
Head Office & Technical Center MORI SEIKI KOREA CO., LTD.
Krasnopresnenskaya Naberezhnaya 18, Naberezhnaya Tower Block "B", Floor 16, Head Office & Technical Center
Moscow, 123317, Russia A-101, 2, SK Twin Tech Tower, 345-9 Kasan-dong, Kumcheon-Ku, Seoul, Korea
Phone: (7)-495-956-9677 Fax.: (7)-495-956-9640 Phone: (82)-2-862-0925 Fax.: (82)-2-862-0928
MORI SEIKI (U.K.) LTD. PT. MORI SEIKI INDONESIA

Head Office Head Office & Technical Center
202 Bedford Avenue, Slough SL1 4RY, England Komplek Gading Bukit Indah Blok M/01, Jl. Bukit Gading Raya, Kalapa Gading,
Phone: (44)-870-240-9500 Fax.: (44)-870-240-9538 Jakarta Utara, 14240 Indonesia
Technical Centers Phone: (62)-21-453-1199 Fax.: (62)-21-4585-7414
London, Birmingham
Mori Seiki India Private Limited;
MORI SEIKI FRANCE S.A.S. Head Office
Head Office & Technical Center 4th Floor DLF Square Jarcanda Marg, M-Block, DLF City, Phase-II, Gurgaon
Parc du Moulin, 1 Rue du Noyer BP 19326 Roissy en France 95705 Roissy CDG 122002, India
Cedex, France Phone: (91)-124-4389400 Fax.: (91)-124-4389409
Phone: (33)-1-39-94-68-00 Fax.: (33)-1-39-94-68-59
Technical Centers MORI SEIKI AUSTRALIA PTY LTD.
Toulouse, MS SYFRAMO S.A.S., Prague Head Office
6/6 Garden Road Clayton VIC 3168, Australia
Phone: (61)-3-8545-0900 Fax.: (61)-3-9561-4999
MORI SEIKI ITALIANA S.R.L.
Technical Centers
Melbourne, Sydney
Via Riccardo Lombardi N. 10, 20153 Milano, Italy
Phone: (39)-02-4894921 Fax.: (39)-02-48914448
The export of this product is subject to an authorization from the government of the exporting country. Printed in Japan
Check with the government agency for authorization.
071205EN

MoriSeikiSLSeriesProgrammingManual2008PMNLTMSC518I1ENL12002H02 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MoriSeikiSLSeriesProgrammingManual2008PMNLTMSC518I1ENL12002H02 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MoriSeikiSLSeriesProgrammingManual2008PMNLTMSC518I1ENL12002H02 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the

The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

Copyright  2008 MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

<Symbols related with warning>

The following symbols are used to indicate the level of danger.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

Indicates the items that must be taken into consideration.

Indicates useful guidance relating to operations.

Indicates the page number or manual to be referred to.

Indicates the procedure used for displaying the required screen.

Indicates the example of operations.

FOR SAFE OPERATION

1 CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE

DANGER 1. Never touch a switch, button, or key with wet hands.

2 SAFETY PRACTICES DURING PROGRAMMING

3 TO ENSURE HIGH ACCURACY

4 CAUTIONS RELATING TO SPINDLE SPEED

5 CAUTIONS RELATING TO THE RAPID TRAVERSE RATE

6 CAUTIONS RELATING TO CENTER-WORK

WARNING In machining programs for both-center-work, specify the M11 command to

7 CAUTIONS RELATING TO COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING

8 CAUTIONS RELATING TO G CODES

9 CAUTIONS RELATING TO M CODES

Machining workpieces in a CNC lathe requires programs.

E: AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET

F: MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET

G: CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET

I: HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE

J: TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B FUNCTION (OPTION)

To machine a workpiece in a CNC lathe, a program must be created. This manual

1 The programmer is requested to read this manual carefully and

For absolute commands and incremental commands, refer to

Generic Name Models NC Unit

This chapter describes the basic considerations for creating a program.

1. What is a Program? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

2. What is Required of Programmers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

3. What is “Creating a Program”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

4. Inputting the Program to the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

5. Flow until the Product is Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3

6. Terms for Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8

7. Axis Control and Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12

9. Specifying the Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–25

10. Basic Pattern of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27

11. Cautions for Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–30

12. JIS Specification and Reverse JIS Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–33

Creating a program is called “programming”.

2. What is Required of Programmers?

Programmers must have a thorough of knowledge about machining operation. They

1 Develop a knowledge of the theory of cutting.

2 Acquire a good knowledge of workpiece holding tools (chuck, fixtures, tailstock).

4 Understand the machining performance of the machine to be used.

6 Become familiar with the functions related to programming.

3. What is “Creating a Program”?

When creating a program:

1) Check the part print to determine the machining required.

4. Inputting the Program to the Machine